320+ Easy Egg Free Recipes - The Best Recipes Made With No Eggs https://foolproofliving.com/category/special-diet/egg-free/ Tried & True Recipes ยท No Refined Sugars Fri, 30 Jan 2026 19:23:37 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.3 https://foolproofliving.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/cropped-cropped-Foolproof-Living-Favicon-image-resized-32x32.png 320+ Easy Egg Free Recipes - The Best Recipes Made With No Eggs https://foolproofliving.com/category/special-diet/egg-free/ 32 32 Stuffed Onions with Ground Beef and Rice https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-onions/ https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-onions/#respond Wed, 10 Dec 2025 15:27:48 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=85205 Ingredients You’ll Need If you’ve been following along on social media, you’ve probably seen me testing this recipe quite a…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

Growing up in Türkiye, our holiday tables looked a little different than the ones we have here in the US. Kebabs were always on the menu, but whenever my mom wanted to make something special, she made these ground beef stuffed onions, or soğan dolması as we call it.

It has been years since I last made them, but seeing their recent popularity on social media made me pull out my mom’s handwritten notes and bring this recipe back to life.

Here are a few things that make this version special:

  • It has roots in Turkish cooking. There are many versions of stuffed onions across the Mediterranean and the Middle East, but the Turkish style uses pomegranate molasses to give the dish a gentle, sweet-and-tangy balance.
  • The ingredients are simple. Pomegranate molasses might sound unfamiliar, but most grocery stores now carry it. Everything else is a pantry staple, and I included plenty of substitutions so you can make it work with what you have on hand.
  • It looks impressive, but it is easier than it seems. Once you soften the onions and get the hang of rolling them, the rest of the process is surprisingly approachable and very forgiving.

If you have never made stuffed onions before, I think you will be pleasantly surprised by how doable this dish actually is.

Ingredients You’ll Need

If you’ve been following along on social media, you’ve probably seen me testing this recipe quite a bit. As I worked through each round, I learned a few things about choosing the right ingredients.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

The exact measurements are in the recipe card below, but these are the notes I kept from all that testing:

Onions: Look for onions that are firm, fresh, and heavy for their size. Yellow onions work beautifully because they naturally become sweeter as they cook, but Vidalia onions and Walla Walla onions will also work if you want an even milder flavor. Red onions are also an option, but stuffed red onions are slightly sweeter than yellow onions.

Pro tip: In the recipe card, you’ll see four medium onions. If you’re making this for the first time, go ahead and buy one extra just in case. Depending on the size, four to five onions usually give me about 20 to 22 usable layers, which is right around what you’ll need for this stuffed onion recipe.

Ground beef: Fat equals flavor, so I like using 85/15 ground beef because it stays juicy and tender. If you prefer something richer, use 80/20 ground beef. 

You can also use lamb if you like, or half lamb and half beef, which is pretty traditional. If you are looking for a lighter alternative, though not traditional, ground chicken would also work, but be aware that it would have a slightly different flavor profile.

White rice: I’m using long-grain white rice here, the everyday enriched kind that you can find in most grocery stores. 

My mom always rinsed the rice under cold water until it ran clear, so I do that too, but I know some people prefer not to wash their rice, and that’s perfectly fine.

Some people soak their rice before using it, which helps it cook a little faster, but since we are using a rather small amount, I do not think that it is necessary. 

Alternatively, medium bulgur wheat can be a good substitute for rice. It would have a distinct earthy flavor profile, but it would still be delicious.

Pomegranate molasses: Can you make it without it? You surely can. But, should you? Absolutely not, because pomegranate molasses takes these stuffed onions to another level, giving them the signature slightly sweet-and-sour taste. So, do not skip it.

Pro Tip: When shopping for it, look for a brand that uses 100% pomegranate juice and no added sugars. If you can’t find it in your local grocery stores’ Middle Eastern section, look for it online. My favorite one is this Pomegranate Molasses.

Red pepper paste: This is known as biber salçası in Turkish cooking. You can find mild or hot versions, and both work here. If you can’t find it, you can use an equal amount of tomato paste as a substitute, and it will still be delicious.

Most Middle Eastern supermarkets carry it, but if you can’t find it there, you can buy it online. I like Oncu Turkish Mild Pepper Paste, which has great depth without being overly spicy.

Spices: This part of the recipe is the most flexible, and you can get as creative as you want. I use ground cumin, dried mint, black pepper, and red pepper flakes for a little heat.

If you can’t get your hands on dried mint, you can omit using it or use a tablespoon of chopped fresh mint instead.

How to Make Stuffed Onions

If this is your first time making stuffed onions with meat, and it looks like a lot of work, let me assure you, it is not. Once you start stuffing and rolling your first couple of onions, you’ll see quickly that the whole process is actually quite simple.

Below, I am sharing every step of the process with the little things I learned from my mom and from making this Mediterranean dish over the years for my own family:

A collage of images showing the preparation of the onions to make stuffed onions.

Step 1 – Prep the onions: If there’s one part to pay a little extra attention to, it’s this step. We’re trying to separate the layers in one piece as much as we can. Even if a few tear, don’t worry, they still work just fine once they’re stuffed.

Start by cutting off both ends of each onion, peeling the outer skin, and making a single straight cut down to the center without slicing all the way through. Doing this helps the layers loosen easily after boiling. Use a sharp knife here to make it easier on yourself.

Step 2 – Boil the onions: Add the onions to a large pot of water, bring it to a boil, and let it simmer for about 15 minutes.  You don’t want them overly soft, just soft enough that they don’t rip when you start separating the layers later. 

A collage of images showing the onion layers and the beef and rice filling.

Step 3 – Let them cool and separate the layers: Spread the onions out on a plate and let them cool on the counter.

Pro Tip: It takes a while to cool down, especially the inner layers. If you are short on time, you can place them in a colander and run them under cold tap water to speed up cooling. However, it is imperative that you let them drain properly before you start stuffing and rolling them.

When cool enough to handle, carefully remove each layer of the onion, being gentle to avoid tearing it. You should have about 20-22 onion layers in the end. 

As you peel off each layer, you’ll notice a thin membrane. If you have the time, remove it; it helps the onions cook more evenly and prevents any chewiness. But if you’re in a pinch, you can skip this step. I’ve made this dish plenty of times, leaving the membrane on, and it still turns out great.

As you get closer to the middle, you’ll end up with the onion cores. Don’t throw them out. We’ll use them in the filling, so put them in a large bowl.

Step 4 – Mix the filling: Preheat the oven to 400°F (204°C), and while it heats, make the filling. Add the ground beef, rice, red pepper paste, tomato paste, all of the spices and seasoning, pomegranate molasses, and parsley to the bowl with the chopped onion cores.

Using clean hands, give it a good mix so that everything is evenly combined. You’re looking for a mixture that feels slightly sticky and moist but holds together when you press it between your fingers. 

Step 5 – Roll each layer into a little stuffed onion (aka dolma): Place about 1 ½ tablespoons of filling inside each layer and roll it tightly.

Pro Tip: As you stuff and roll, you’ll see that the very outermost layers of the onion are longer than the inner layers. I find that stuffed onions made with these longer layers are a bit chewy, so I cut them in half. This way, all layers are roughly the same size, and every stuffed onion tastes the same after everything is baked.

Stuffed onion in a skillet with the sauce.

Step 6 – Arrange them in the pan: I am using a 3 ½-quart cast iron skillet, but a large casserole dish would also work well. 

Place the stuffed onions in a spiral, starting from the outer edge, tucking each one right up against the next.

You want them close enough to support each other without squeezing them too tightly. In my 12-inch pan, depending on the size of my onions, I can usually fit 18-22 stuffed onions in one spiral layer.

Step 7 – Make the sauce: In a measuring cup, combine olive oil, pomegranate molasses, tomato paste, red pepper paste, garlic, salt, and boiling water. Whisk until everything dissolves. 

Pour the sauce right over the onions. You can cover the pan with foil or a large sheet of parchment paper.

Pro Tip: During my recipe testing, I kept thinking the sauce looked like too much. It isn’t. You need that liquid to help the onions and filling cook slowly and evenly, and most of it evaporates in the oven, leaving just the right amount behind.

Stuffed roasted before and after they are baked.

Step 8 – Bake: Place the onions in the oven, covered, for about 30 minutes to soften all the way through. Then uncover the dish and let them brown and caramelize around the edges for another 20 minutes or so.

You’ll see that the remaining liquid will be thicker and reduced almost in half.

Step 9 – Finish with fresh parsley and serve: I love adding a handful of parsley at the end to brighten the entire dish. Serve your baked stuffed onions warm, with extra sauce spooned over the top.

Expert Tips From My Mediterranean Kitchen

Stuffed roasted onions look fancy, but once you understand a few small techniques, the whole process becomes much easier (and more enjoyable).

Here are a few lessons I learned during my recipe testing, along with a few things I learned watching my mom make these when I was growing up in Türkiye.

Don’t over-boil the onions: Keep a close eye on them once they start boiling. Let them simmer just until they become soft enough to bend, usually around 15 minutes. If you cook them too long, the layers become mushy and tear easily when you try to separate them. 

Cool the onions before handling: Letting the onions cool takes some time. If you are in a pinch, you can run them under cold water to speed things up. However, it is imperative that you drain them properly before stuffing.

It is okay to cut long onion layers: The outer layers of the onion are sometimes too long for rolling. If they are, simply slice them in half. Too much onion wrapping around the filling can become chewy after baking.

You do not need extra oil: Some versions of this recipe online (especially on social media) add additional (between ¼ cup to ½ cup) olive oil to the filling. I tested this recipe both ways and did not think it was necessary, especially if you are using 85/15 ground meat.

That said, if you’re using leaner meat, feel free to add ¼ cup olive oil to keep the filling tender and moist.

Use boiling or hot tap water for the sauce: When making the sauce, it is hard to dissolve everything with cold (or even room temperature) water, so I recommend using hot water to make it easier on yourself. 

Use parchment paper or foil to cover: Most Turkish cooks use parchment paper to cover the dish. You need to cut it so it covers the entire surface and stays put. However, aluminum foil can also be used.

Ground beef stuffed onions in a skillet from the top view.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Beef stuffed onions garnished with parsley from the top view.
Print

Stuffed Onions Recipe

This Baked Ground Beef Stuffed Onions recipe is a showstopping main dish made with tender onion layers stuffed with a beef-and-rice filling. Everything bakes in a sweet-tangy pomegranate molasses sauce that caramelizes beautifully in the oven.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Cooling time (for Onions) 20 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 55 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 493kcal

Ingredients

For The Onions

  • 4 large onions ~ 2 ½ lbs
  • Salt

For The Filling

  • ½ lbs ground beef 85-15
  • ½ cup white rice rinsed under hot tap water
  • ¼ cup pomegranate molasses
  • 2 tablespoons red pepper paste Use tomato paste if you can't find it
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon allspice
  • ½ teaspoon dried mint optional
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes Urfa or Aleppo pepper, optional
  • 1 cup chopped fresh parsley plus more for garnish

For The Sauce

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ¼ cup pomegranate molasses
  • 2 tablespoons red pepper paste Use tomato paste if you can't find it
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 ½ cups boiling water or hot tap water

Instructions

  • Cut both ends of the onion and peel them one by one. Slice halfway through to the center without cutting all the way.
  • Fill a medium-sized saucepan with water and add the onions over medium heat. Bring to a boil and simmer for 15 minutes. The leaves will soften, and separate a bit.
  • Using a slotted spoon, carefully remove the onions from the boiling water and transfer them to a plate, and let them cool.
  • When cool enough to handle, carefully remove each layer of the onion, being gentle to avoid tearing it, and discard the thin membrane as needed. As you get closer to the middle, you’ll end up with the cores of the onions. Set them aside; we’ll use them in the filling.
  • You should have about 20-22 layers of onions in the end. Set them aside.
  • Meanwhile, preheat the oven to 400 degrees F.
  • While the oven is heating, make the filling. Into a mixing bowl, place ground beef, white rice, pomegranate molasses, red pepper paste, tomato paste, kosher salt, black pepper, ground cumin, allspice, dried mint, red pepper flakes, and chopped fresh parsley.
  • Chop the reserved onion cores and add them to the bowl. Give it a good mix to ensure everything is fully incorporated.
  • When it is time to stuff, fill each layer of the onion with a tablespoon of the meat filling, then roll tightly. Repeat this process for the remaining onion layers, then arrange them in a spiral pattern in a large skillet or casserole dish.
  • To make the sauce, whisk together olive oil, pomegranate molasses, red pepper paste, tomato paste, garlic, salt, and boiling water in a measuring cup until combined.
  • Carefully pour the sauce over the stuffed onions. You can cover it with foil or a large sheet of parchment paper.
  • Bake in the oven for 30 minutes, then remove the parchment paper and continue baking for an additional 20 minutes, or until onions turn golden brown.
  • Garnish with chopped parsley and serve immediately.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 18-22 stuffed onions, which is ideal for serving 4 adults, with each adult eating 4-5 stuffed onions. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: Prep the onions and the filling. Stuff and roll the onions and arrange them in a casserole or skillet. Cover tightly and keep in the fridge for up to 24 hours. When ready to cook, make the sauce and bake as directed.
  • Storage: Bring the leftovers to room temperature, place in an airtight container, and store in the fridge for up to 3-4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 493kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 40mg | Sodium: 1353mg | Potassium: 672mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 19g | Vitamin A: 1596IU | Vitamin C: 35mg | Calcium: 88mg | Iron: 4mg

What to Serve With Stuffed Onions

So you’ve made your beautiful stuffed baked onions. They’re tender, aromatic, and perfectly seasoned. But what should you serve alongside them to turn this into a complete meal?

Below are a few traditional and Mediterranean-inspired pairings to help you serve them the way they’re enjoyed across Türkiye:

Pair them with a cool yogurt sauce: A creamy yogurt sauce is one of the most classic pairings to dolma-style dishes. My Yogurt Dill Sauce adds a bright, herby note with lemon and fresh dill, while my Tzatziki Sauce Recipe is a classic pairing with thick Greek yogurt, cucumber, and garlic. 

Add a refreshing salad: A crisp salad never disappoints. Turkish Shepherd Salad is a traditional go-to with juicy tomatoes, cucumbers, and herbs, especially in the summer months. If you want something a bit more herby, Tabbouleh is another option with lots of fresh herbs.

Serve with rice or pilaf: To make this a little more filling, pair your stuffed onions with a starchy side dish. If you want a Turkish side, my Bulgur Pilaf is a classic, or try my Vermicelli Rice, another staple you’ll often see served alongside dishes like this in many Mediterranean restaurants. And if you want a gluten-free option, Lemon Quinoa brings a fresh, zesty note without overpowering the main dish.

How to Make Ahead, Store & Reheat 

One of the things I love most about this stuffed onion recipe is that you can make it ahead, and it tastes better the next day.  The flavors magically deepen as they sit, which makes it an ideal recipe for make-ahead dinners, holiday prep, or easy leftovers. 

Here’s how I do it:

Make Ahead: You have two make-ahead options:

  • You can prepare, stuff, and roll all the onions, arrange them in your pan, and refrigerate them unbaked, without the sauce, for up to 24 hours. When you’re ready to cook, simply mix the tomato sauce, pour it over the onions, and bake as directed.
  • Alternatively, you can bake them completely a day ahead. Let them cool, cover tightly, and refrigerate. Just pop them in the oven to warm thoroughly, sprinkle with fresh herbs, and serve!

Storage: Once baked, let the stuffed onions cool completely before storing. Transfer them to an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 4 days. 

Reheat: Reheat the stuffed onions in a 350°F (177°C) oven, loosely covered with parchment or foil, for 10-15 minutes, or just until warmed through. You can also microwave them if needed, but the oven keeps the texture softer and more consistent.

Freezing: Stuffed onions freeze very well. Once completely cooled, place them in an airtight container and freeze for up to 2 months. For the best texture, thaw them overnight in the refrigerator, then reheat.

FAQs

Can I make this recipe vegetarian?

Yes, you can make a vegetarian version. Simply increase the rice to 2 cups and add 3 tablespoons of extra-virgin olive oil to the filling. It is not traditional, but some cooked lentils or mushrooms can be added to the mixture to make it even more satisfying.

What if my onion layers fall apart?

This usually happens when the onions are overcooked. Boil them just until they’re soft enough to bend, but not mushy. Using firm, fresh onions also helps because the layers are sturdier.

Can I make stuffed onions ahead of time?

Yes. To do so, stuff the onions, arrange them in the baking dish, cover tightly, and refrigerate for up to 24 hours. When you’re ready to serve, simply add the sauce and bake.

Can I use brown rice?

Technically, yes, but it takes much longer to cook and stays much firmer inside the onions. For best results, stick with white rice (long-, medium-, or short-grain). If using brown rice, soak it for at least 1 hour to soften it before adding it to the filling mixture.

Can I use red or white onions?

Yes. Red, white, or yellow onions will all work for this recipe. Just make sure the onions you choose are fresh, firm, and not soft, so the layers hold up well when boiling and rolling.

How is this recipe different than Greek Stuffed Onions?

While the concept is pretty similar, the Greek version of this recipe does not use pomegranate molasses. It is also often made with ground pork, but, similar to my recipe here, ground beef and ground lamb can be good substitutes for pork.

Other Mediterranean Recipes You’ll Love

If these meat-stuffed onions made you curious to try more, I invite you to check out a few of my favorite recipes from the Mediterranean and Middle Eastern regions below:

  • If make-ahead meat dishes are your favorite, try my Greek Lamb Meatballs for an easy dinner or a quick appetizer.
  • You’ve probably seen the Doner Kebab recipe going viral on social media. It takes the century-old classic recipe and turns it into a weeknight dinner with a clever shortcut.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-onions/feed/ 0
Viral Doner Kebab https://foolproofliving.com/doner-kebab/ https://foolproofliving.com/doner-kebab/#comments Wed, 03 Dec 2025 02:41:53 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=85054 Ingredients You’ll Need The ingredients for this Turkish doner kebab are simple and easy to find. You can find the…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from front view.

Turkish cooking has been having a moment on social media, and I love seeing it finally get the attention it deserves. First, it was the Turkish Pasta trend; now, it is this homemade doner kebab. 

These shortcuts are clever because they make dishes that have been around forever feel doable on a weeknight with ingredients most people already have. The rolling technique you see everywhere was first shared by Mezemike, and it took off for a reason.

For me, this recipe hits close to home. I grew up in Bursa, Turkiye, where the authentic version of this dish, Iskender Kebab, was invented. So even though we never made it using this method, I immediately understood why people loved it. It captures the spirit of the dish in a much more doable way without a trip to Turkiye.

My goal here is simply to walk you through this shortcut in a clear and honest way, with a few tips to help you get as close to the real thing as possible in your own kitchen.

Ingredients You’ll Need

The ingredients for this Turkish doner kebab are simple and easy to find. You can find the full list of ingredients with exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes on a few ingredients from my testing:

Doner meat ingredients:

Doner meat ingredients from the top view.

Onion: While many viral versions use only the juice, I prefer using the whole onion, as it helps tenderize the meat, keeps it moist, and adds the depth that real doner has. To get it extra fine, I blend it into a puree, along with the garlic. 

If you don’t have a food processor, a box grater would work well too. Use the large holes to grate the onion, and reserve the juices.

Ground beef: It goes without saying that fat is flavor, so it is key here. I recommend using 85/15 ground beef for the best texture and taste. The shortcut doner kebab recipe uses ground beef, but in Turkey (depending on the region), it’s usually made with lean lamb. 

If you want to get as close as possible to the real deal, use ground lamb to make a lamb doner kebab. Lamb is the classic choice for traditional Turkish doner. Or alternatively, if you want to ease into it, you can try 50% ground beef and 50% ground lamb.

Greek yogurt: Yogurt tenderizes the meat and keeps it moist. I tested this recipe both with full-fat yogurt and 2%. While both work, the texture is richer with the full-fat kind.

Spices: The classic doner meat seasoning includes ground cumin, paprika, and red pepper flakes. If you want to get as close to the real thing as possible, I would also recommend adding a pinch of dried oregano.

For the vegetables: 

Roasting vegetables like tomatoes and peppers is optional, but they are the traditional accompaniment to doner kebab, whether you wrap the meat in lavash or serve it with rice.

Ingredients for the sauce and making durum.

Tomatoes: You can use any tomato variety. If using larger tomatoes, quarter them so they roast evenly and are easier to tuck into the wrap (aka dürüm) later on.

Green peppers: Any long, green pepper works here. Traditional Turkish doner shops use sivri biber, which are mild and have a thinner skin. But because I can’t find them here in the US, I usually use Anaheim peppers or jalapeños. If you’re sensitive to heat and using jalapeños, I recommend removing the seeds before roasting them. 

For the Sauce:

Most versions of the viral recipe don’t include this sauce, but I can’t, in good conscience, publish this recipe on my site without sharing it with you. If you ask me, the sauce is a must, and you just need 2 ingredients.

Butter: I am using unsalted butter so I can better control the seasoning. If all you have is salted butter, simply add a little less salt to the sauce.

Tomato paste & water: Use any brand of tomato paste (domates salcasi) you like. While not traditional, I sometimes change it up and use hot/mild red pepper paste (biber salcasi) for a spicier sauce.

For Serving:

Lavash bread: The classic bread used for wrapping meat is lavash. You can make lavash at home or buy it at the store. Here in the US, my favorite brand is Joseph’s, but I also like Trader Joe’s. 

Alternatively, you can stuff the meat in Pita Bread (in its pockets) to create a similar “sandwich” feel.

Sumac Onions: Optional, but I cannot imagine serving any type of Turkish kebab without them. It takes just a few minutes to put together and is essential to make it taste authentic.

How to Make This Viral Turkish Doner Kebab

Okay, there is a reason why this shortcut doner method has taken over social media. It gives you the same tender, well-seasoned meat you’d find in Türkiye, but in a quicker way you can easily make in your own kitchen for a weeknight dinner.

Here’s how to make it:

Steps showing pureing aromatics and making the meat mixture.

Step 1 – Prep the oven and aromatics: Start by preheating your oven to 400°F (204°C). While it heats, add the onion and garlic to your food processor and blend until smooth and pureed.

Don’t strain out the liquid; that moisture is what keeps the meat juicy and helps everything bind together. 

Step 2 – Mix the meat: Transfer the onion mixture to a large bowl and add the ground beef, tomato paste, yogurt, and spices. Using your hands, mix until everything is thoroughly combined for about 1-2 minutes. It should be well mixed, so you get a bit of each flavor in every bite.

Images showing the rolling of the meat mixture to make Turkish doner kebab.

Step 3 – Divide and shape the mixture: Once the meat is mixed, divide it into three equal pieces. During my initial testing of this recipe, I divided it into 4 portions, which worked well, but I felt the rolled doner was a bit thinner than I would like after cooking. 

That said, you can do either 3 or 4 pieces. It is more a matter of personal preference.

Step 4 – Roll the meat into a sheet: Place one piece of meat in the center of a 12×16 sheet of parchment paper, then place another sheet on top. Use a rolling pin (or your hands) to gently press it into an even rectangle. You want an even layer that’s neither too thin nor too thick.

Sometimes the meat pushes out of the sides of the parchment. Don’t worry, just tuck it back in so it’s not as thin, and keep going.

Pro Tip: Some of the videos I’ve seen on social media make it look so easy to roll out to a perfect rectangle. During my testing, I learned that the shape didn’t matter. Instead, the important thing was to roll the meat evenly on the parchment paper.

Photos showing the rolling of the meat to make the viral doner kabob recipe.

Step 5 – Roll it into a log: Remove the top parchment sheet. Now, starting from the short end closest to you, roll the meat tightly (with the bottom parchment still attached).

Transfer the rolled log to a sheet pan and repeat with the remaining pieces.

Pro Tip: Watching the videos on social media, you’ll likely see people roll the meat (like you are rolling cinnamon rolls) or fold it onto itself. As long as it is evenly rolled, both methods would work.

A collage of photos showing the preparation for the veggies with the rolled doner meat.

Step 6 – Add the vegetables: Once all three logs are on the pan, add the quartered tomatoes and whole peppers to the same pan (onto the side) and drizzle them with olive oil and a little kosher salt. 

Step 7 – Bake: Bake everything for about 15-20 minutes. When it’s done, the meat should look lightly browned, and the vegetables should be softened. 

Remove the pan from the oven and let everything cool for 5 minutes or just enough that you can unroll it without burning your hands.

Showing the cooked doner meat getting unrolled and torn into big pieces.

Step 8 – Tear the meat: Unroll each piece gently, then tear the meat into strips by hand. I don’t strip them down too small, just into large chunks.

Photo showing the texture of the butter and tomato sauce.

Step 9 – Make the tomato-butter sauce: Start by melting the butter in a small saucepan. Then, stir in the tomato paste using a fork (or even a whisk). At first, it will look a bit curdled, which is normal. Once cooked for 20-30 seconds, whisk in some hot water to achieve a more sauce-like consistency.

Pro Tip: Use hot (tap) water here; cold water will make the sauce harder to combine. Let it come to a gentle boil, then take it off the heat.

Expert Tips From My Turkish Kitchen

After testing this recipe multiple times (and growing up eating the real Turkish version), I’ve learned that a few small details make all the difference between a doner that tastes flat and one that tastes like it came straight from a shop in Türkiye. Here’s what helped the most:

Warm your bread: Your wrap is only as good as your bread, and there is nothing better than warmed lavash (or pita). You can quickly warm it in the oven or on a dry skillet, or simply set it on top of the warm meat for a minute to soften (and soak up a bit of the juices on top).

Even thickness when rolling: When you’re pressing the meat between the parchment sheets, you don’t want it paper-thin. We are aiming for even thickness so it cooks properly and stays juicy. If the meat spills out the sides of the parchment, just tuck it back in. Using a rolling pin makes it easier, but your hands work just as well.

Use sturdy parchment paper: Not all parchment paper is the same. Thinner parchment becomes soggy, tears easily, and makes rolling a lot harder. A sturdier brand helps the meat keep its shape, especially if you plan to refrigerate the logs overnight. I used 12×16 parchment sheets, and they held up beautifully.

Don’t overbake it: The meat cooks surprisingly fast. About 15-20 minutes is usually the perfect amount of time, and baking it any longer can dry out the meat. It should be tender enough to tear into strips.

Also, I’ve seen people put the doner meat under the broiler after unrolling it to make it “crispy”. Personally, I did not think that it was necessary as doner is supposed to be served tender and softer than crispy.

Brush and sear the wrap: This is an optional step, but if you have a few extra minutes, for a restaurant-style finish, you can brush the outside of the lavash with a little tomato-butter sauce and sear it in a skillet for 30-60 seconds or place it in a turned-off (but still warm) oven to warm it up a bit while you are assembling the rest of the wraps.

Doner kebab meat with roasted tomatoes and peppers on the side.
Print

Viral Doner Kebab Recipe

A shortcut version of Turkish doner kebab made with ground beef and rolled in parchment paper, just like the one trending on social media. When you serve it with roasted tomatoes, peppers, and the traditional tomato-butter sauce, it comes surprisingly close to the real thing in a fraction of the time.
Course Weeknight Dinner
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 483kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

For The Doner Meat

  • 1 onion medium-sized/peeled and cut into large chunks
  • 2 cloves garlic peeled
  • 1 lb ground beef 85/15
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
  • 2 tablespoons Greek yogurt full-fat or no fat (both would work)
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

For The Vegetables

  • 3 tomatoes quartered / medium sized
  • 2 green peppers
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • teaspoon black pepper

For The Sauce (optional)

  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • ¼ cup hot water
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt

For Serving (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 °F (204°C).
  • Place the onion and garlic in a food processor and pulse until fully chopped/pureed. Place it in a large bowl.
  • Into that same bowl, add in the beef, tomato paste, Greek yogurt, ground cumin, paprika, red pepper flakes, salt, and pepper.
  • Using clean hands, mix well until thoroughly combined.
  • Divide the mixture into 3 equal pieces*.
  • Grab a large sheet of parchment paper and place one of the pieces in the middle. Place another sheet of parchment on top and, using a rolling pin (or your hands), roll it out into a rectangle. Do your best to make it as even as possible.
  • Remove the parchment paper on top. Starting from the bottom with the short side facing you, roll the meat (with the parchment paper) onto itself in 2-inch increments until complete. Transfer it to a large sheet pan.
  • Repeat the same process for the remaining pieces.
  • Move the rolled meat to the side and add the tomatoes and peppers to the same sheet pan. Drizzle them with olive oil and season with salt and pepper.
  • Transfer it to the oven and bake for 20 minutes.
  • When done, unfold the rolled meat and tear it into large pieces.
  • To make the sauce, melt the butter in a small saucepan over medium heat. Add the tomato paste and water and mix until combined. Cook until it comes to a boil and remove from the heat.
  • To make “durum”, lay a piece of lavash on a cutting board and spread it with a tablespoon of tomato sauce. Add a handful of meat on top, along with some roasted tomatoes and peppers, and a handful of sumac onions (if using).
  • Drizzle it with more tomato sauce and gently roll it up from the bottom, tucking the filling in as you go.
  • Repeat the same process for the remaining lavash bread and doner meat. Using a sharp knife, cut it in half and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4 doner kebab wraps ideal for serving four adults. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storing leftovers: If you know you’ll have leftovers, I recommend storing all components of the recipe separately in airtight containers. If stored in the fridge, they should be good for up to 3-4 days.
    You can store the wraps as well, but I recommend consuming them in the next day or two. You can reheat in a low-heat (300°F) oven until warmed to your liking.
  • Some versions of this recipe divide the doner meat mixture into 4 pieces (instead of 3 as I did) for 1 pound of ground meat. During my testing, I thought the doner meat made with 4 pieces was too thin to my liking, but either way would work.
 

Nutrition

Calories: 483kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 23g | Fat: 38g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Trans Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 111mg | Sodium: 1064mg | Potassium: 838mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 1814IU | Vitamin C: 66mg | Calcium: 69mg | Iron: 4mg

How To Serve Doner Kebab?

You made the doner meat, roasted the veggies, and have the most delicious, silky tomato-butter sauce ready. Now it is time to serve. And if you want the full Turkish experience, pour yourself a cold Ayran, the simple salted yogurt drink we serve with every kebab dish. 

The good news is that you have a few options:

Make A Wrap (aka dürüm): 

Photo of the durum made with doner meat.

This is how they serve it in the viral videos, and, quite honestly, this is how you would find it in Turkey if you buy it from a street vendor. It is called dürüm and is usually made by rolling the meat in lavash bread.

To assemble, place a warm piece of lavash bread on a cutting board and spread it with a generous spoonful of the tomato sauce.

Add a handful of the doner meat, some roasted peppers and tomatoes, and a spoonful of Sumac Onions. Drizzle it with a tablespoon of the tomato sauce.

Roll the lavash tightly, tucking the filling in as you go. Slice in half, then serve immediately with extra sauce on the side. 

Pro Tip: If you prefer something sturdier or don’t have lavash on hand, you can use store-bought or Homemade Pita Bread or any of your favorite flatbreads instead.

Iskender-Inspired Plate: 

I grew up in Bursa, where doner kebab is often served Iskender-style. It uses the same ingredients you already prepared, but the assembly gives it a completely different feel. 

If you want to serve your doner meat this way, place torn pieces of warm pide bread on a plate, drizzle with tomato sauce, pile the meat on top, and finish with more sauce. 

Serve it with a dollop of creamy yogurt on the side, along with the roasted peppers and tomatoes.

With Rice:

Depending on the region, especially when you eat doner kebab in a restaurant, it often comes with rice, a few French fries, and some pickles on the side. After it is assembled, the tomato sauce is poured over the meat and rice, turning it into a simple yet just as delicious meal. 

If you want to serve it that way at home, I highly recommend making my Vermicelli Rice to keep it as close to the real thing as possible.

Viral Turkish doner recipe served with sumac onions and tomato sauce from the top view.

How to Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Reheat

Make ahead: You have a few great make-ahead options:

  • Prep the rolls the day before: You can fully roll the meat logs ahead of time and refrigerate them until you’re ready to bake. The only thing to keep in mind is the parchment paper. Some get soft and wet easily, so choose a good-quality one to help the logs hold their shape overnight. I like this precut parchment paper that is not only sturdy enough but also easy to roll.
  • Prep the meat mixture ahead: If you’d rather roll it fresh the next day, simply mix the meat mixture, transfer it to an airtight container, and refrigerate. This resting time allows the aromatics to mingle and develop even further.

Pro Tip – Make the sauce fresh: The tomato-butter sauce only takes a few minutes to make and tastes best when made right before serving. I do not recommend making it ahead of time for the best results.

Storage: If you know you will have leftovers, store the meat, sauce, and roasted vegetables separately. They all keep well in the fridge, in an airtight container, for 3-4 days. This helps the texture stay closer to its fresh state. 

If not, as long as stored in an airtight container, the rolls will still hold up nicely and keep well in the fridge for 1-2 days.

Freezing: You can freeze the doner meat in two easy ways:

  • Freezing raw rolled logs: Simply wrap each roll tightly in stretch film (or place it in an airtight freezer-safe container) and freeze for up to 2 months. When you’re ready to enjoy, thaw it overnight in the fridge, then bake as directed.
  • Freezing the cooked meat: After baking, tear the meat, let it cool completely, and freeze it in an airtight container or freezer bag. For the best texture, reheat it in a skillet rather than in the microwave.

Reheating: If you store the meat separately from the rest of the ingredients, you can warm it up in a skillet over medium heat with a splash of water or a little butter. I would recommend avoiding the microwave, as it tends to dry out the meat and make it chewy.

If you have leftover sauce, warm it up in a skillet and add a little warm water to thin it out.

FAQS

Can I make this with ground chicken or turkey?

Yes, you can. Just keep in mind that in this recipe, more fat equals more flavor. If you are choosing to use chicken or turkey, choose dark-meat ground chicken or dark-meat ground turkey to replicate the rich flavors doner kebab is known for.

Is this an authentic Turkish doner?

Not exactly. Traditional doner is made on a vertical spit and slowly roasted for hours. This version is a shortcut that went viral online because it captures the spirit of doner in a way that’s easy to make at home.

What’s the difference between doner, shawarma, and gyro?

All three are sliced, seasoned meats cooked on a rotating spit, but the spices and toppings vary depending on the part of the Mediterranean/Middle East they are served:
– Döner is Turkish. Compared to shawarma and gyro, it is less seasoned, usually made with beef or lamb, and served with tomato sauce, savory yogurt, and grilled vegetables.
– Shawarma (Middle Eastern) is heavily spiced with ground turmeric, clove, cinnamon, and cardamom. It is traditionally made with chicken and beef.
– Gyro (Greek) includes dried oregano, garlic, and Mediterranean herbs, and is typically served with tzatziki. It is usually made with chicken or beef.

Can I make this without parchment paper?

I don’t recommend it. The parchment is what helps the meat hold its shape as it bakes. Without it, the logs won’t roll tightly, and the meat can spread or fall apart.

Can I make this in the air fryer?

Yes, just make sure the rolls fit inside your air fryer basket. Cook them at 400°F (204°C) for about 15 minutes. Be sure to check it around the 12th-minute mark, as air fryers tend to cook faster than ovens.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Turkish Recipes You Might Also Like

If you enjoyed this homemade doner kebab recipe, here are a few more Turkish recipes I think you’ll love:

  • If you’re craving something bold and spicy, my Adana Kebab is as close to the authentic version as you can get at home. It’s the traditional lamb kebab I grew up eating, and this homemade version still captures the rich, smoky flavor of the original.
  • For a comforting and simple weeknight dinner, my Turkish Stuffed Eggplant is a classic. The roasted eggplant with the garlicky tomato-beef filling makes it one of the most iconic dishes in Turkish cuisine.
  • And if you want something quick and nostalgic, try my Turkish Meatballs. Made with just a couple of simple ingredients, they’re the meatballs I grew up eating in Turkey.


This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/doner-kebab/feed/ 14
Thanksgiving Fruit Salad https://foolproofliving.com/thanksgiving-fruit-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/thanksgiving-fruit-salad/#respond Mon, 24 Nov 2025 20:47:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=84688 Ingredients You’ll Need You’ll need two sets of ingredients for this festive fruit salad recipe: Mostly fall fruits for the…]]>
Aysegul from the front view.

When I think about Thanksgiving, my mind immediately goes to the turkey, all the cozy vegetable sides, and of course, the pies. What we do not often think about is having something on the lighter side.

I first made this fall fruit salad a few years ago for a big family gathering where we had both kids and older relatives at the table. 

The pies still stole the show, but a few people quietly thanked me for having an option that felt a little lighter without taking away from the holiday spirit. I especially love it because:

  • It uses a mix of everyday fall fruit like apples, pears, oranges, and pomegranates that you probably have on hand.
  • The maple-citrus dressing comes together quickly and helps keep the apples and pears from browning.

Yes, there is a bit of chopping, but once everything is in the bowl, it adds something fresh to all the richer dishes on the table.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You’ll need two sets of ingredients for this festive fruit salad recipe: Mostly fall fruits for the salad and just a few basic ingredients for the dressing.

You can find the full ingredient list in the recipe card, and below are some notes from my recipe testing. 

Fruit Salad Ingredients

Fruits used in the recipe in small bowls from the top view.

Apples: You can easily make this fall fruit salad with one variety of apples, but if you have it, combining two types, like Gala or Honeycrisp with Fuji, gives a way better balance of sweetness and texture. If you prefer a little tartness, you can also mix in one Granny Smith apple. There are no strict rules here, just pick apples that are firm and not overly ripe.

Pears: The same principle goes for pears as well. Bartlet and Anjou are my favorites, but any type would work. When shopping, choose pears that are ripe but still firm so they hold their shape in the salad. 

Grapes: I’m using seedless green grapes for their sweet-tart flavor, but red grapes would work as well. Go with whichever you like best, but I recommend choosing seedless grapes for the best texture in the salad. I like to cut them in half, but if they are too large, you can quarter them as well.

Oranges: Any type of oranges, Navel, Cara Cara, or even Blood Oranges would work beautifully in this autumn fruit salad recipe. You can cut them into small cubes or section them if you have a few extra minutes.

If you need a shortcut, you can also use canned mandarin oranges, but keep in mind that most brands have added sugars, so your Thanksgiving fruit salad will be sweeter. Regardless, if you go down that route, be sure to drain them well.

Kiwi: Look for kiwi that is a little soft when you press it, soft enough to be sweet, but not mushy.

Pomegranate seeds: I love adding pomegranate to this salad because it feels so festive and adds a bright, tart flavor. You can certainly de-seed it yourself, but nowadays, stores sell fresh arils ready to use, which is definitely a good time saver.

If you do not have pomegranate seeds or prefer an alternative, dried cranberries are a good substitute. The dried fruit would give a welcome chewiness and a bit more sweetness to the overall recipe.

Pecans: This is my secret ingredient. The salad tasted good the first time I tried it without pecans, but once I added them, it completely transformed the dish, taking it to a whole other level. They add the best crunch. Walnuts could work too, but pecans are my favorite here.

If you prefer a nut-free option, you can omit it or use pumpkin seeds instead.

Dressing Ingredients

The dressing for this salad is light and simple, and the best part is that it comes together in less than a minute. You will need:

The dressing ingredients from the top view.

Maple syrup: You can use either maple syrup or honey in this dressing. I also recommend adjusting the amount based on how sweet your fruit is. If your fruit is very sweet, you may want a little less, and vice versa.

Orange juice: I use freshly squeezed orange juice because it not only flavors the salad but also helps keep the apples and pears from browning with its acidity. You could also use store-bought orange juice, just make sure to choose one without added sugars since both the fruit and maple syrup are already plenty sweet.

Ground cinnamon: I’m using it here because it complements the fall fruits very well, but you can also use apple pie spice or pumpkin pie spice if you prefer a slightly different fall flavor.

How to Make Fruit Salad For Thanksgiving

When I first tested this recipe, I chopped all the fruit, set it in a bowl, and then mixed the dressing. The apples and pears started browning right away, which wasn’t ideal.

What worked so much better was starting with the dressing in a large bowl, then adding the fruit as I cut it. The acid in the orange juice helps slow browning and keeps everything looking fresh. So, grab a big bowl and follow along.

A collage of images showing the steps of make the dressing and adding the apples and pears in there.

Step 1 – Make the dressing: Add the maple syrup, orange zest, orange juice, vanilla extract, and cinnamon to a large salad bowl, whisking until well combined.

Step 2 – Prep and add the fruit: Once the dressing is ready, start chopping the fruit. I like to start with apples and pears first so I can ensure they interact with the acid in the bowl, which slows browning. From there, you can continue with kiwi, pomegranate seeds, oranges, and grapes.

Gently toss all your fruit to coat it with the dressing.

Thanksgiving fruit salad recipe in a bowl before and after it is mixed.

Step 3 – Add the pecans and garnish: Right before serving, add the pecans to keep them crisp. If you want to add a little color and freshness, add a handful of torn fresh mint leaves. Give everything one last gentle toss, and it’s ready to serve.

Make-Ahead, Storage & Serving Tips

While this Thanksgiving fruit salad is always best the day it’s made, you can also prepare it in advance if you coat the fruit well with the citrus dressing. Here’s how to make it ahead, store it, and serve it so it still tastes fresh:

Make ahead: You can prepare this fruit salad 2-3 days in advance, which is especially helpful for busy holiday cooking. Just be sure your apples and pears are well coated in the citrus dressing, as the orange juice helps prevent them from browning. I also keep the pecans separate until right before serving so they don’t get soggy.

Storage: You can store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator. It will taste its best within the first 2-3 days. If the fruit looks a little soft after it’s been in the fridge, a squeeze of fresh orange juice or lemon juice, or a small drizzle of maple syrup or honey, brightens it back up.

Freezing: I do not recommend freezing fruit salad. The fruit becomes mushy once thawed and loses its fresh texture.

Expert Tips for Perfect Fruit Salad for Your Thanksgiving Table

Slightly ripened fruit works best: When shopping for this recipe, take a few minutes to pick fruit that’s ripe but not overly soft. You want that sweet-juicy moment when you bite in, without the fruit turning mushy once everything is mixed.

Coat apples and pears in citrus right away: Apples and pears oxidize quickly, so I always mix the orange dressing in the bottom of the bowl first, then add the apples and pears. The citrus coats the fruit the moment it goes in, keeping it fresh.

Cut the fruit into equal sizes: Aim for roughly ½-inch bite-sized pieces so the salad feels balanced and you get a little bit of everything in each bite.

Add pecans right before serving: Pecans soften if they sit in the dressing too long, so add them in at the end. If you have a few extra minutes and want to take this fall fruit salad recipe up a notch, toast your pecans in a dry pan for a few minutes to bring out more of their earthy flavors.

Use a mix of seasonal colors and textures: It’s optional, but I really encourage you to play with different varieties of fruit. For example, instead of sticking to one type of orange, try using both a Navel and a Cara Cara. You can do the same with apples and pears. It gives the salad a nicer mix of textures and a little more interest in every bite.

Chill before serving: Refrigerating the salad for 10-15 minutes before serving is optional, but it makes this fruit salad even more refreshing.

Serve in small jars: When I make this for Thanksgiving or Friendsgiving, I like to spoon it into little jars, almost like jam jars. It makes it easier because it is already portioned out. Plus, your guests won’t have to worry about it getting lost on a crowded plate.

Fruit salad for Thanksgiving in a bowl from the top view.

What to Serve It With

This autumn fruit salad is versatile and pairs well with so many things, whether you’re serving it to kids, having it for breakfast, or adding it to a holiday spread. Here are a few ideas:

  • If you’re serving this to kids, you can add my Fruit Dip Recipe on the side. It makes the salad feel more like a treat and is always a favorite with little ones.
  • You can also spoon some fruit salad over a bowl of  Vanilla Yogurt for a quick breakfast or snack. 
  • And if you want to take things up a notch for the holidays, serve the fruit salad with a dollop of my light and airy Maple Whipped Cream. It adds just the right touch of sweetness, making the whole dish feel extra special.

FAQs

How do you keep fruit salad from turning brown?

The best way to prevent apples and pears from browning is to coat them with an acidic ingredient, such as orange juice, which helps slow down the oxidation.

Can I make a fruit salad the night before?

Yes, this fruit salad holds up well when made the night before. Just be sure the apples and pears are fully coated in the orange juice mixture (to prevent them from browning), then give the salad a gentle toss before serving.

What fruits should I avoid in fruit salad?

Most people don’t like adding bananas to fruit salads because they turn mushy as they sit. In my opinion, it is a personal preference, and there are no strict rules. Instead, the important thing is to pick fruit that is neither overly ripe nor soft, and vice versa.

Can I use canned fruit in Thanksgiving fruit salad?

Yes, you technically can. However, keep in mind that most canned fruit is packed in a sugary liquid or juice, which will make your fruit salad sweeter. If you decide to go down that route, be sure to adjust the amount of maple syrup you use in the dressing so it is not overly sweet.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Fruit Salads You Might Like

If you enjoyed this Thanksgiving fruit salad, here are a few more fresh and delicious fruit salads I think you’ll love:

  • If you want something light to enjoy in the mornings, my Breakfast Fruit Salad is a simple recipe you can also make ahead. It’s easy to make and perfect for quick breakfasts or weekend brunch.
  • For something more festive, my Christmas Fruit Salad includes a mix of seasonal fruit tossed in a similar maple-citrus dressing. It’s a great way to add a pop of festive color to your Christmas celebrations.
Thanksgiving fruit salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Thanksgiving Fruit Salad Recipe

A crowd pleaser, this Thanksgiving Fruit Salad is a lighter addition to your dessert lineup made with fall fruits like apples, pears, oranges, and pomegranate arils. No cooking required and comes together quickly.
Course Vegan side dish
Cuisine American Vegan
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 208kcal

Ingredients

For the dressing:

  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup or honey
  • 1 teaspoon orange zest
  • ½ cup orange juice freshly squeezed
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • teaspoon ground cinnamon or apple spice

For the fruit:

  • 2 medium apples cut into cubes ~ 3 cups
  • 2 medium pears cut into cubes ~ 3 cups
  • 1 cup seedless green grapes cut in half
  • 1 cup pomegranate arils
  • 2 oranges cut into small pieces ~ 2 cups
  • 1 kiwi cut into cubes ~ ½ cup
  • 1 cup pecans or walnuts

Optional Garnish:

  • A handful of fresh mint leaves torn

Instructions

  • To make the dressing, mix together maple syrup, orange zest, orange juice, vanilla extract, and cinnamon in a large bowl until combined.
  • Add in the cubed apples and pears to the bowl and give it a quick toss to ensure they are coated with the dressing (aka the acid in the orange juice) to prevent browning.
  • Then add in the grapes, pomegranate arils, oranges, and kiwi to the bowl. Toss to combine.
  • When ready to serve, add the pecans and toss. If using, garnish with fresh mint leaves and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 8-9 cups of fruit salad, ideal for 8 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: You can make this recipe a day (or two) in advance. Just follow the recipe as written (except adding the pecans and mint garnish), place in an airtight container, and store it in the fridge. When ready to serve, transfer it to a serving platter and garnish with pecans and fresh mint leaves, if using.

Nutrition

Calories: 208kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 3mg | Potassium: 361mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 24g | Vitamin A: 171IU | Vitamin C: 41mg | Calcium: 44mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/thanksgiving-fruit-salad/feed/ 0
Compound Butter for Turkey https://foolproofliving.com/compound-butter-for-turkey/ https://foolproofliving.com/compound-butter-for-turkey/#comments Fri, 14 Nov 2025 13:45:55 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78361 Ingredients You’ll Need With Substitution Ideas The key ingredients in this compound butter recipe have the perfect balance of fresh…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from front view.

Growing up in Türkiye, we did not celebrate Thanksgiving, so I learned how to cook a turkey as an adult after moving to the U.S. more than 20 years ago. Over the years, watching more experienced cooks and learning from a few dry turkeys myself, I discovered one very important truth:

There is a tiny window between juicy perfection and dry disappointment.

So I started focusing on the techniques that truly keep turkey moist. One option is using a Turkey Injection to add seasoning and moisture inside the meat, but I also wanted an option that was easier and required no special tools.

That is where this compound butter, which I specifically created for turkey, comes in.

In the simplest terms, it is softened butter mixed with herbs, garlic, and spices that slowly melts under the skin as the turkey roasts, keeping the meat juicy and helping the skin turn beautifully golden and crisp.

To me, this make-ahead friendly recipe is a simple shortcut with big rewards. And in this post, I will walk you through everything you need to know, from the herbs and spices to use to the easiest way to spread it under the skin so you can confidently cook a tender, flavorful, perfectly browned turkey that everyone will love.

Ingredients You’ll Need With Substitution Ideas

The key ingredients in this compound butter recipe have the perfect balance of fresh herbs, citrus, and garlic, resulting in a perfectly seasoned turkey. You can find the exact measurements and the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few important notes from my testing:

Ingredients for butter mixture for turkey.

Unsalted butter: I like to use unsalted butter to control the amount of salt. With that said, you can use salted butter and reduce the salt to ¾ teaspoon.

Fresh herbs (or dried herbs): Fresh herbs will give you the best flavor. I like adding fresh rosemary, fresh thyme, and fresh sage, but you can also incorporate soft herbs like fresh parsley or chives.

While I recommend using fresh herbs, dried ones can also be used as an alternative. Use the chart below when substituting:

For 1 Stick (4 oz) of ButterDried Herb/Seasoning Equivalent
1 tbsp fresh rosemary1 tsp dried rosemary
1 tbsp fresh rhyme1 tsp dried thyme
1 tsp fresh sage1/3 tsp dried sage
2 cloves fresh garlic1/2 tsp garlic powder

How to Make Compound Butter for Turkey (Step-by-Step)

Once your ingredients are ready, this recipe can be prepared in under 5 minutes. Here’s how to make it step by step:

A collage of images showing how to make butter seasoning for turkey.

Step 1 – Mix butter, herbs, and garlic: In a small bowl, combine softened butter, rosemary, thyme, sage, garlic, lemon zest, Kosher salt, and black pepper. Mash the herbs into the butter with the back of a fork or a rubber spatula until well combined, for about 1 minute. If you’re using salted butter, just reduce the Kosher salt slightly.

A collage of images showing how to roll compound butter for thanksgiving turkey.

Step 2 – Use immediately or shape into a log: At this point, your turkey compound butter recipe is ready to use. You can use it right away or roll it up for later use. 

If you are planning to use it later, place the butter on a sheet of parchment paper or plastic wrap. Then shape it into a log, wrap it tightly, and refrigerate for at least 3 hours.

Pro tip: I like to twist the ends of the parchment like a candy wrapper. It helps the butter keep its shape and makes it super easy to slice later.

Make-Ahead, Storage, and Freezing Tips

One of the reasons I love using this compound butter for Thanksgiving turkey is that it can be made ahead of time, and it stores well. Here’s how I do it:

Make Ahead and Storage: Prepare the butter as directed, then shape it into a log and wrap it tightly in parchment or plastic wrap. I like to do a double wrap (plastic wrap followed by an airtight container) to keep it fresh and prevent it from picking up any fridge odors. It will keep well in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

Freezing: Follow the same wrapping steps and store the butter in a freezer-safe bag or container for up to 3 months.

Thawing: When you’re ready to use it, take it out of the freezer and let it sit at room temperature for about 1 hour, or until it softens enough to slice and spread.

Sliced Thanksgiving turkey compound butter with a knife on the side.

How to Apply Compound Butter Under Turkey Skin (Step-by-Step)

Now that our compound butter is ready, it’s time to put it to use. If it’s your first time spreading compound butter under the turkey skin, don’t worry, as it’s easier than it looks.

A person showing how to place butter and herbs under skin for turkey.

Step 1 – Dry the skin: Let your turkey rest at room temperature for about an hour before you start. This is critical because cold skin is rigid and prone to tearing, but a rested bird’s skin will loosen up and be much more forgiving.

Set your turkey on a clean cutting board and pat the skin dry with paper towels on all sides. This will help the butter stick better and ensure that it crisps up beautifully in the oven. 

Step 2 – Loosen the skin: Locate the neck opening and gently slide your fingers between the skin and meat to loosen it. 

If you feel resistance, stop immediately. Instead of forcing separation, gently wiggle your fingers so that it is loose enough to push the butter under the skin.

Step 3 – Apply the butter: Take about two tablespoons of your turkey butter herb rub and spread it under the skin, focusing on the breast and thighs. Spread it as evenly as possible by massaging the entire bird, including both the under and outer skin. 

Don’t worry about it being perfect, as the butter will melt while the turkey roasts.

Step 4 – Roast the turkey: Place the prepared turkey in a roasting pan with aromatics such as onions, carrots, and celery.

Compound Butter vs. Dry Rub: Which is Best for Your Turkey?

I’ll be honest, when it comes to seasoning the whole bird, this turkey compound butter recipe is my go-to. However, it is not the only way. If you are wondering whether to use this herbed butter or opt for my Homemade Turkey Rub, the choice comes down to your goal:

  • Choose Compound Butter for:
    • Maximum Moisture and Juiciness: The fat melts beneath the skin, self-basting the white meat throughout the long cooking time, which is key to a tender breast.
    • Golden-Brown Skin: The butter is brushed over the skin, which helps brown the turkey beautifully and develop a rich, buttery flavor.
    • Make-Ahead Simplicity: You can prepare this compound butter days in advance, saving time on Thanksgiving day.
  • Choose a Turkey Dry Rub for:
    • Ultra-Crispy Skin: A dry rub acts as a dry brine, helping to draw moisture from the skin and give you an extra-crispy exterior.
    • Convenience & Speed: If you are short on time and need a quick way to add seasoning, the dry rub is much faster to apply than the compound butter.

FAQs

How much compound butter do I need for turkey?

Over the years of using this compound butter when making our Thanksgiving turkey, I learned that 8 tablespoons (1 stick or 4 ounces) is enough for a bird that is up to 12 pounds, which is about ¾ tablespoon per pound. The important thing here is even distribution under and over the skin without overdoing it.
For a larger bird, you can easily multiply the recipe. If your turkey is between 12 and 18 pounds, multiply the ingredients by 1.5 times.

When should I butter my turkey?

It’s best to butter the turkey right before roasting. Applying the butter just before it goes in the oven helps the skin get crispy while the meat stays juicy and tender throughout cooking.

How to make butter stick to turkey?

If the butter isn’t spreading easily, it’s usually because the turkey skin is damp or the butter is too cold. I like to take the turkey out of the fridge about 1 hour before roasting and pat the skin completely dry with paper towels before adding the butter.

Can I add compound butter to the turkey cavity?

I’ve found it’s best to spread the butter under and over the skin rather than inside the cavity. That way, it melts evenly and keeps the skin golden instead of soggy.

Expert Tips for the Best Compound Butter for Turkey

If this is your first time making compound butter, these notes from several rounds of testing will help you get it just right every time:

  • Use softened butter: Let the butter sit at room temperature for about an hour, until it’s soft and spreadable. If it’s too firm, it won’t blend smoothly with the herbs and seasoning.
  • Rinse and dry your herbs: If you’re using fresh herbs, wash and dry them thoroughly before mincing, as they can hold onto moisture, which makes the butter watery. I like to place the washed herbs between two pieces of paper towels to absorb excess moisture; alternatively, put them in a salad spinner to remove as much liquid as possible.
  • Mince herbs finely: Chop your herbs as finely as possible to ensure they distribute evenly throughout the butter. 
  • A word on using fresh garlic and botulism: When using fresh garlic to make compound butter, keep in mind that a foodborne illness called botulism can occur if garlic is stored at temperatures between 50 °F (10 °C) and 113 °F (45 °C).  Therefore, be sure to keep this seasoned butter in the refrigerator unless you plan to use it within the next hour or so.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Delicious Ways to Use Compound Butter (Turkey and Beyond)

Now that you have this perfect turkey butter prepared, it’s ready to transform your Thanksgiving centerpiece. In fact, this is what I use in my Butter Herb Roasted Turkey and Roasted Turkey Breast recipes.

That being said, just because I’m featuring this compound butter for turkey does not mean it cannot be used in other ways. It is truly the perfect finishing touch to many different meals. Here are a few suggestions:

  • Grilled or Roasted Meat Recipes: It’s hard to find a steakhouse that doesn’t serve a slice of compound butter over their hot, juicy steaks. Make a restaurant-quality meal at home by serving rounds of herb butter on top of Grilled Steak, Beef Tenderloin, or Roasted Chicken Breast.
  • Seafood: Don’t you love a warm, garlicky butter with seafood? Use this herb butter mix to elevate Grilled Salmon or Grilled Shrimp.
  • Roasted or Grilled Vegetables: You can truly elevate the flavor of roasted vegetables with this compound butter. Serve it as the topping for Grilled Corn or finish Roasted Butternut Squash with a few melting spoonfuls of this butter.
  • Bread: Butter and bread are a classic pair. Spread a few thin rounds over warm slices of my  Jalapeno Cheddar Cornbread, or use it as the butter base when making my Air Fryer Garlic Bread.
Thanksgiving butter with herbs sliced.
Print

Compound Butter for Turkey Recipe

Here's a fantastic compound butter for turkey that you can make in minutes. This is probably the easiest way to flavor your Thanksgiving turkey with succulent flavors from fresh (or dried) herbs, garlic, and lemon zest. Make ahead friendly, this recipe is my secret sauce for properly seasoned and moist turkey.
Course Condiment
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 8 tablespoons
Calories 104kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 oz unsalted butter 1 stick – at room temperature
  • 1 tablespoon fresh rosemary finely minced or 1 teaspoon dried rosemary
  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme finely minced or 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon fresh sage finely minced or ⅓ teaspoon dried sage
  • 2 cloves fresh garlic finely minced or pressed
  • ½ teaspoon lemon zest
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Place the softened butter, rosemary, thyme, sage, garlic, lemon zest, kosher salt, and pepper in a bowl. Mix until well combined using a fork.
  • You can use it right away, or you can turn your compound butter into a log. If you are not using it right away, transfer the butter mixture onto a piece of parchment paper or stretch film and shape it into a log.*
  • Wrap it tightly so it holds its shape. Transfer it to the fridge and let it rest for at least 3 hours.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 8 tablespoons (4 ounces) of compound butter, which is ideal for a turkey that weighs 10-12 pounds. If your bird is larger, you can multiply the recipe and vice versa. The calorie information below is for one tablespoon.
  • *If it is too soft, you might have to chill it in the fridge for 30 minutes before rolling
  • Make Ahead and Storage: Prepare the butter mixture as directed. Follow the instructions to shape it into a log and wrap it tightly. Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for five days.
  • Freezing: Store it in a freezer-safe container or freezer bag for up to 3 months. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight, and be sure to take it out of the fridge at least an hour before use.

Nutrition

Calories: 104kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 30mg | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 15mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 0.02g | Vitamin A: 403IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 11mg | Iron: 0.2mg
Thanksgiving compound butter in a bowl from the top view.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/compound-butter-for-turkey/feed/ 2
Easy Mashed Sweet Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/easy-mashed-sweet-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-mashed-sweet-potatoes/#comments Tue, 04 Nov 2025 20:24:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15392 Ingredients You’ll Need & Why They Work This recipe requires only four main ingredients, plus a few optional add-ins. You…]]>

This is the only way I make mashed sweet potatoes.

Aysegul

When it comes to Thanksgiving side dishes, I have a few go-to recipes, and this creamy sweet potato mash has been one of them for over 10 years. I first came across the recipe in Cook’s Illustrated, and it has never let me down.

What I love most is its flexibility. You can make it right before serving dinner, or prepare it ahead of time and reheat it without losing any of its creaminess. I usually keep it simple, but it’s also the perfect base for adding your own twist, whether you prefer a sweet touch with maple syrup or a savory one with herbs and spices.

Over the years, I’ve tried it both slightly sweet and boldly savory, and it always turns out creamy and delicious. I don’t know about you, but for me, this is the best kind of recipe I need for the holidays: easy, reliable, and open to your own creativity.

Ingredients You’ll Need & Why They Work

This recipe requires only four main ingredients, plus a few optional add-ins. You can find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are a few notes from my testing:

Ingredients from the top view with text on each one.

Sweet Potatoes: I use the standard sweet potatoes commonly found at most U.S. grocery stores. The most popular kinds are Jewel or Garnet; they both work in this recipe and offer a naturally sweet taste and creamy texture. 

Look for firm ones with smooth skin and no visible bruises. Peel them and cut into similar-sized chunks so they cook evenly.

Unsalted Butter: I used unsalted butter so I can adjust the salt myself, but salted butter can also be used. If you want to make these mashed potatoes dairy-free, you can swap in your favorite vegan butter.

Heavy Cream: If you look at the recipe below, you might think that only 2 tablespoons of heavy cream won’t be enough to cook all the potatoes, but it is. Both sweet potatoes and butter will release their juices, which is plenty to steam them in the pan.

While it won’t be as creamy, you can substitute it with half-and-half, regular milk, or almond milk for a vegan option.

Seasonings: I keep it basic with kosher salt and black pepper. However, if you want a hint of warmth, add a pinch of ground cinnamon and a touch of nutmeg; they both pair particularly well with sweet potatoes.

Maple Syrup (Optional): I personally love how it brings out the natural sweetness of the potatoes, but if you prefer not to add any sweeteners, you can leave it out.

How to Make Mashed Sweet Potatoes

When it comes to mashed sweet potatoes, the first question that always arises is: should you bake, steam, or boil them? While there are recipes for each, over the years of making this creamy sweet potato mash, I’ve found that the easiest and most reliable way is none of those. 

Instead, cooking cubed sweet potatoes right in the pan with a bit of butter and cream is the right answer. 

Images showing the adding of sweet potatoes, cream and butter to the pan.

Step 1 – Cook the Sweet Potatoes: Place the peeled and cubed sweet potatoes in a large pot with butter, cream, a splash of maple syrup, and salt and pepper. There’s no need to add water as the potatoes release their own liquid as they cook. 

Next, cover the pan with a tight lid so they can steam. This step is important because it keeps the potatoes from drying out. Stir every so often to keep them from sticking to the bottom.

Also, keep in mind that this whole process is quite quick, so keep a close eye on it.

Person showing how to mash sweet potatoes after they are cooked.

Step 2 – Mash To Your Liking: Once the potatoes are soft and tender, mash them right in the pot. I like to use a potato masher or even a fork for a more chunky texture.
For a perfectly smooth consistency, consider using an immersion blender or a potato mill.

Easy mashed sweet potatoes garnished with butter and pecans in a bowl.

Step 3 – Season and Serve: Taste the mash and add a little more salt or pepper, as needed. Then, transfer it to a serving bowl and finish with your favorite garnish.

Expert Tips for the Best Mashed Sweet Potatoes

Although this sweet mashed potatoes recipe is as simple as it gets, a few tricks will help you achieve the best results. Here are my notes from making it over the years:

  • Potato masher vs. food processor: A masher works perfectly for a more rustic texture. If you use a food processor, pulse instead of blending continuously, so the mash stays creamy rather than gluey.
  • Use a pot with a tight-fitting lid: The lid helps the potatoes steam in their own juices, which makes them creamy without the need for extra liquid.
  • Keep a close eye on it: This recipe comes together quickly, usually in about 20 minutes. Keep the heat at medium to medium-low and give them a stir a couple of times. Potatoes cook quicker than you think, and if they are left alone, they can stick to the bottom.
  • Cut the potatoes the same size: This helps them cook evenly, so you don’t end up with some pieces still firm while others are mushy.

FAQs

Why are my mashed sweet potatoes watery?

With many recipes, this occurs when the potatoes are boiled but not drained properly. Since this recipe cooks the potatoes in their own juices, you don’t have to worry about excess water.

How do I fix a dry mash?

If the mash feels too thick, stir in a splash of warm cream or milk until it reaches to your desired level of consistency.

Can I use yams instead?

I do not recommend using yams in this recipe. Here in the US, most people refer to sweet potatoes as yams but they are not the same thing. True yams are very starchy with a mild flavor so they won’t deliver the same results.

Serving Suggestions

This is one of my go-to Thanksgiving sides, and it pairs beautifully with both holiday favorites and simple weeknight meals. Here are a few of my favorite ways to serve it:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Mashed sweet potatoes in a bowl garnished with butter and thyme.
Print

Easy Mashed Sweet Potatoes Recipe

Most mashed sweet potato recipes boil the sweet potatoes, and while that is a good approach, it takes a long time, and you lose most of the flavor in the boiling water. My recipe here cooks them in a pot along with a bit of butter and heavy cream. The result is a super creamy sweet potato mash that comes together in under 30 minutes.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 343kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter cut into 4 pieces, extra for topping if preferred
  • 2 tablespoons heavy cream
  • 2 pounds sweet potatoes 3 medium-sized , peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 1 teaspoon maple syrup optional
  • 3/4 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon pecans as garnish – optional
  • 1 teaspoon fresh herbs thyme or parsley, chopped – optional

Instructions

  • Place butter, heavy cream, sweet potatoes, maple syrup, salt, and black pepper in a medium-sized saucepan with a tight fitting lid.
    Person pouring in heavy cream into saucepan.
  • Stir well to combine.
    Person mashing sweet potatoes with a potato masher.
  • Cook, stirring occasionally, over low heat until sweet potatoes are soft (almost falling apart), 15-20 minutes. You can check doneness by inserting a knife into a sweet potato. If it comes in and out easily, it should be ready to mash.
    Person checking the doneness of a sweet potato cube with a knife.
  • Using a potato masher (or a fork), mash the potatoes. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
    Person mashing sweet potatoes with a potato masher.
  • Place in a bowl or a plate (like I did) and garnish with pecans and/or butter.
    Mashed sweet potatoes in a bowl garnished with butter, thyme, and pecans.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields approximately 4-5 cups of mashed sweet potatoes, enough to serve 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make-Ahead: You can prepare the mashed sweet potatoes 1 to 2 days in advance of serving. Simply let them cool completely, then store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator.
  • Reheat: There are a few simple ways to warm them up:
    • Stovetop: Warm them gently over low heat with a splash of cream or butter until they reach your desired consistency. Stir frequently to prevent it from sticking to the bottom of the pot.
    • Oven: Place them in an oven-safe dish, cover loosely with foil, and let them warm up for about 10-15 minutes. 
  • Freezing: You can also freeze it in a freezer-safe container or bag for up to 2 months. Just thaw it overnight in the fridge and reheat to enjoy.

Nutrition

Calories: 343kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 39mg | Sodium: 565mg | Potassium: 791mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 32640IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 81mg | Iron: 1mg

Holiday Variations and Garnish Ideas

I usually garnish with a couple of pecans, but this mash is super flexible. Here are some of my favorite ways to spice it up:

For a sweet version: You can garnish with cinnamon, brown sugar, roasted marshmallows, or add a little extra maple syrup. A touch of fresh orange zest or lime zest are also good options.

For a savory version: Mix in a small clove of roasted garlic (or try this quick air fryer roasted garlic) and a small amount of fresh herbs like fresh thyme or rosemary. You can also add a sprinkle of shredded parmesan and a handful of fresh chives. 

For the holidays: If you want to take it up a notch for Christmas or Thanksgiving, I recommend browning the butter. Before adding the sweet potatoes to the pot, let the butter simmer until browned. 

You can also garnish with candied bacon or toasted pumpkin seeds for crunch.

Maple sweetened easy mashed sweet potato recipe placed on an oval dish served with pecans

More Sweet Potato Recipes 

If you are like me and can’t get enough of sweet potatoes, here are a few more recipes I make every year around the holidays:

  • My adaptation of Trisha Yearwood’s Sweet Potato Soufflé Recipe has been one of the most popular holiday potato recipes on the blog, thanks to its thick butter and pecan streusel-like topping.
  • If you’re looking for something both sweet and savory, try my Sweet Potato Stacks. It’s baked thin slices of sweet potatoes that are perfect for brunch, dinner, or any holiday meal.
  • And if you’re craving something warm and comforting, this Vegan Sweet Potato Soup is silky, spiced with ginger and carrots, and perfect as either a holiday starter or a simple weeknight meal.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/easy-mashed-sweet-potatoes/feed/ 18
Roasted Brussels Sprouts with Tahini Yogurt Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-tahini-yogurt-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-tahini-yogurt-sauce/#respond Sat, 01 Nov 2025 19:45:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=84257 Ingredients You’ll Need This baked Brussels sprouts recipe might seem a little fancy at first, but I promise it’s simpler…]]>

Roasted Brussels Sprouts with a Mediterranean Twist

Aysegul

Let’s face it, perfectly crispy and tender roasted Brussels sprouts already have their place on the holiday table, but why not spend 5 more minutes to give them a little Mediterranean flair and turn them into a showstopper? 

Growing up in Turkiye, I learned how a few simple ingredients, such as olive oil, Greek yogurt, garlic, and tahini, can transform even the most familiar dishes into something a bit more thoughtful and creative.

This crispy Brussels sprouts recipe follows that same philosophy: an easy way to take a holiday classic and elevate it with bold, balanced flavors, all without adding any extra stress to your cooking routine.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This baked Brussels sprouts recipe might seem a little fancy at first, but I promise it’s simpler than it looks. You can find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my testing to make sure it all comes together perfectly:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.

For the Brussels sprouts: 

Brussels Sprouts: When shopping, take the time to choose firm, bright green sprouts that are similar in size so they roast evenly. 

Seasoning: I kept the Brussels sprouts seasoning simple with paprika, ground cumin, kosher salt, and black pepper. 

For the Tahini Yogurt Sauce:

The Tahini Yogurt Sauce recipe I am using in this baked Brussels sprout recipe is one of the first recipes I learned from my mom. It is also a staple in many Mediterranean kitchens.

Greek Yogurt: I recommend using a thick Greek yogurt instead of regular yogurt. It’ll give you a creamier texture and will spread smoothly.

Tahini: I really like Soom’s tahini because it’s super creamy, smooth, and easy to work with. Be sure to give your tahini a good stir and a quick taste before using it, as the flavor and texture can vary between brands.

Garlic: I am using freshly minced garlic, but if you prefer a milder taste, you can use ¼ teaspoon of garlic powder as an alternative, or simply omit it.

For Garnish:

Pine Nuts: Taking the time to toast the pine nuts makes all the difference, and it’s, in my opinion, what takes this oven-roasted Brussels sprouts recipe to the next level. 

Toasting them is so easy! Simply add them to a dry skillet and toast over medium heat for 4-5 minutes, stirring often, until they’re golden and fragrant. 

Pomegranate Arils: I am using them to add a festive color, more texture, and to balance the creaminess of the sauce. In a pinch, dried cranberries can be used as a substitute.

Pomegranate Molasses (optional): If you can get your hands on it, a drizzle of pomegranate molasses is a classic Mediterranean finishing touch. Alternatively, you can use balsamic glaze as a substitute. It will have a different flavor profile but will still taste delicious.

How to Make Crispy Roasted Brussels Sprouts: Oven Method

The secret to getting that irresistible crisp edge and tender center is high heat, space on the pan, and a touch of olive oil. Here’s exactly how I roast Brussels sprouts so they come out golden and crisp every single time:

Person arranging Brussels sprouts on a sheet pan.

Step 1 – Prep the Brussels Sprouts: Preheat your oven to 425°F (204°C) and line a sheet pan with parchment paper. Trim the ends of each Brussels sprout and slice them in half. Transfer the sprouts to the pan and drizzle them with extra virgin olive oil, and sprinkle with paprika, ground cumin, salt, and pepper.

Person seasoning Brussels sprouts with ground cumin and paprika on a sheet pan.

Step 2 – Arrange the Sprouts Cut-Side Down for Maximum Caramelization: This may seem like an extra step, but it’s crucial for achieving the best texture. Flip each sprout cut-side down and make sure they’re spaced evenly on the pan. When the flat sides touch the hot pan, they caramelize beautifully. Otherwise, the moisture will trap and steam them instead.

Freshly roasted Brussels sprouts from the top view.

Step 3 – Roast: Bake the Brussels sprouts for about 20 minutes, tossing them once halfway through so they brown evenly. Since each oven is different, check on them around the 18-minute mark. You’re looking for golden edges and centers that are soft enough to pierce with a fork but still hold their shape.

If they’re not crispy enough, leave them for a few more minutes, keeping a close eye on them.

Step 4 – Let Them Cool: Once the Brussels sprouts are out of the oven, allow them to cool in the pan for a few minutes before assembling, allowing the steam to escape and keeping the outsides crisp.

Assembling the Baked Brussels Sprouts with Yogurt Tahini Sauce

Now that we have roasted the Brussels sprouts, it is time to put them all together. Honestly, this is my favorite part as it takes no more than 2 minutes but looks so impressive.

Person making the tahini yogurt sauce for the recipe.

Step 1 – Make the sauce: If you’ve never paired roasted vegetables with a cool yogurt sauce before, you’re in for a treat. To make my Yogurt Tahini Sauce, whisk together thick Greek yogurt, lemon juice, minced garlic, and salt in a bowl. 

Step 2 – Spread: Place a large serving platter (or an oval plate, as shown in the pictures) on a flat surface and spread the yogurt sauce evenly on the bottom in a layer using the back of a spoon. This creamy base should be easy to spread but nice and thick.

Roasted Brussels sprouts served over yogurt sauce with tahini.

Step 3 – Add the Brussels Sprouts: Add the now slightly cooled Brussels sprouts directly over the sauce. It does not have to be perfect; let some of the sprouts overlap or fall to the sides. 

Step 4 – Garnish and Serve: Finish it off with toasted pine nuts for added crunch, a handful of pomegranate seeds for a touch of sweetness, and a drizzle of pomegranate molasses, if using.

Helpful Tips for the Best Roasted Brussels Sprouts

After testing this recipe a few times, I found a few small details that make a big difference in getting Brussels sprouts that are perfectly crisp on the outside and tender on the inside:

  • For the Best Crisp: The key to perfectly golden Brussels sprouts is spacing them so the steam doesn’t trap, which makes them soft instead of crispy. Arrange them cut-side down to get that beautiful golden crust where they touch the pan.
  • Using parchment paper: Direct contact with the hot pan helps the cut sides caramelize more. I’ve tested both ways, and thanks to the high 425°F/218°C oven temperature, the difference was negligible. So, choose whichever matters more to you: easy cleanup or maximum crispiness.
  • Toss halfway through: Giving them a quick stir at the halfway point helps them brown evenly and prevents one side from overcooking or burning. 
  • Dry them thoroughly: Make sure the sprouts are completely dry before seasoning them. It will help them roast better. If you’re short on time, a good shortcut is to buy pre-cut, ready-to-eat Brussels sprouts, which can be easily found in most large grocery stores.

FAQs

How do you prepare Brussels sprouts for roasting?

Rinse them under cold water to remove any debris, then dry them really well. Trim the woody ends and cut each sprout in half.

How long to roast Brussels sprouts at 425°F?

At this temperature, they’ll roast in about 20 minutes. If your sprouts are larger, you may have to roast them a bit longer (no more than 5 minutes).

How do you know when Brussels sprouts are cooked?

The outer layers should look golden brown with a crispy texture, while the insides feel soft and tender in the center when pierced with a fork.

How do you season Brussels sprouts?

Brussels sprouts take well to warm, earthy spices. Start with salt and pepper, then add a warming spice like paprika, cumin, or coriander. They’re also great with smoked paprika, garlic powder, or a little cayenne if you want some heat.

Can I reheat leftovers?

Yes! While roasted Brussels sprouts are always best fresh out of the oven, you can revive leftovers by warming them in a 400°F (200°C) oven for 5-7 minutes to restore their crispness. I don’t recommend microwaving them, as they’ll soften too much and lose their crispiness.

More Brussels Sprouts Recipes to Try

There is a reason why Brussels sprouts are one of the most popular Thanksgiving vegetable sides. They are so versatile and take on pretty much any flavor. So, if you are in need of more inspiration, here are a few Brussels sprouts recipes from the archives:

  • If you love a crisp and tangy green salad that makes sprouts shine, look no further than my Kale Brussel Sprout Salad
  • For another brussels sprouts recipe perfect for your holiday table, try my Maple Balsamic Brussels Sprouts. This 5-ingredient recipe is just as colorful and easy to make.
  • If you’ve never had shredded Brussels sprouts, you’ll love my Shaved Brussels Sprout Salad. It’s a bright and crunchy salad that is tossed with apples, hazelnuts, and goat cheese. 
  • For an easy sheet-pan side, try my Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes. This is the perfect simple fall side that works for both simple weeknights and holidays.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Roasted Brussels sprouts garnished with pomegranate seeds and served over yogurt tahini sauce.
Print

Roasted Brussels Sprouts with Yogurt Tahini Sauce Recipe

These roasted Brussels sprouts are crispy on the outside, tender on the inside, and served over a creamy tahini yogurt sauce for a bright Mediterranean twist. Finished with toasted pine nuts, pomegranate seeds, and a drizzle of pomegranate molasses, this simple side dish feels restaurant-worthy yet easy enough for any weeknight or your holiday table.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 389kcal

Ingredients

For The Roasted Brussels Sprouts:

  • 1 ½ lbs Brussels sprouts cleaned and sliced in half lengthwise
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Tahini Yogurt Sauce

  • 1 cup Greek yogurt full-fat
  • 2 tablespoons tahini
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

As Garnish

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 425 °F/204 °C. Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchement paper.
  • Place Brussels sprouts on the sheet pan. Drizzle them with olive oil and sprinkle them with paprika, ground cumin, salt, and pepper.
    Person seasoning Brussels sprouts on a sheet pan.
  • Give it a good toss to ensure that the sprouts are evenly coated with everything. Arrange the Brussels sprouts cut side down and roast them for 20 minutes, tossing them halfway through.
    Person arranging Brussels sprouts on a sheet pan.
  • Remove from the oven and let them cool down while you are working on making the yogurt sauce.
    Crispy roasted Brussels sprouts on a sheet pan from the top view.
  • While the sprouts are roasting, make the tahini sauce. In a medium bowl, whisk together yogurt, tahini, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and pepper.
    Two images side by side showing the making and spreading of the yogurt tahini sauce.
  • When ready to assemble, spread the yogurt sauce on a serving platter. Arrange the Brussels sprouts over the top. Sprinkle them with toasted pine nuts and pomegranate arils. If using, finish it off with a drizzle of pomegranate molasses.
    A collage of images showing the roasted Brussels sprouts being assembled.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 4-5 cups of roasted Brussels sprouts ideal for 4 generous servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • How to Make Ahead: I’ve tested this recipe both fresh and prepped ahead, and while it’s best right out of the oven, it still tastes wonderful the next day. To prep ahead, you can roast the sprouts and make the sauce, then store them separately in the fridge for up to one day in advance. On the day off, you can reheat the sprouts in a 400-degree oven for 7-8 minutes and then assemble the recipe as written.
  • Storage: Place the leftovers in an airtight container and store in the fridge for 2-3 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 389kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 3mg | Sodium: 937mg | Potassium: 920mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 1423IU | Vitamin C: 151mg | Calcium: 148mg | Iron: 4mg

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-tahini-yogurt-sauce/feed/ 0
Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-sweet-potato-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-sweet-potato-salad/#respond Tue, 14 Oct 2025 19:13:31 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83779 Would you believe me if I said I never had a sweet potato until I moved to the U.S. in…]]>

Would you believe me if I said I never had a sweet potato until I moved to the U.S. in my early 20s? The fact is, sweet potatoes aren’t a typical ingredient in Turkish/Mediterranean cooking.

However, that doesn’t mean we can’t incorporate some of those classic Mediterranean flavors into a salad that could easily be the centerpiece of your holiday table or, really, any time you need a great fall salad. 

To me, this Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad is just that. Made by roasting sweet potatoes with shallots and chickpeas, layering them with arugula, and topping everything with candied walnuts and feta cheese, it may sound a bit unexpected, but I promise you it works wonderfully.

Ingredients You’ll Need Plus Smart Swaps:

You’ll find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here’s a closer look at what goes into this roasted sweet potato salad, and a few simple swaps, to help you make it your own:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

The Core Components: Sweet Potato & Shallots

Sweet potatoes: When choosing sweet potatoes, go for ones that feel firm with smooth skin and have no soft spots. Smaller to medium-sized potatoes are ideal as they’re sweeter, creamier, and easier to manage than the larger, starchier ones. Once peeled and chop them up into even pieces so they roast evenly. 

PRO Tip: Some people incorrectly call sweet potatoes yams, but they are not the same thing. This recipe is tested only with sweet potatoes.

Shallots or Red Onion: Roasting them in large chunks turns them super sweet and caramelized, but if you are not a fan of large chunks of onion in your salad, you can slice them thinly before roasting.

However, I find that the large pieces give you more caramelized flavor compared to the sliced version. 

Alternatively, you can use a large red onion as a substitute for shallots.

Chickpeas: I am using canned chickpeas for convenience. Though it is imperative to take the time to pat them dry well after draining, as they won’t crisp up if they are still soaking wet.

Green, Cheese, and Dressing

Arugula: I usually buy triple-washed arugula from the store to save on time. 

I think the slightly bitter, peppery taste of arugula pairs beautifully with the rest of the ingredients. However, if you prefer something milder, you can use spring mix or baby spinach. For a heartier baked sweet potato salad, you can use massaged kale

Regardless of the salad greens you are using, make sure that they are rinsed and spin-dried so that the salad dressing can coat the greens well.

Maple Candied Walnuts: I use a handful of walnuts for extra crunch and some sweetness. You can also use pecans or almonds, or for a nut-free version, go for roasted pumpkin seeds or sunflower seeds. Maple syrup is my choice of sweetener, but agave or honey would also work.

Feta Cheese: This is a Mediterranean classic, but you could also add goat cheese instead. For a vegan, dairy-free option, simply omit the feta or use a plant-based feta cheese.

Optional Add-Ins and Flavor Boosters

Pomegranate molasses and arils: While this is also a Mediterranean classic and works beautifully in this salad, I know not everyone has it in their pantry. It will change the overall taste a bit, but a drizzle of balsamic reduction would be a good alternative to pomegranate molasses.

Again, optional, but I also like to add a handful of pomegranate arils for a pop of color.

Grains/seeds: If you are making this sweet potato salad as a part of your weekly meal prep and want it to be a bit more filling and satisfying, you can add a cup (or two) of cooked quinoa, couscous, farro, or even bulgur wheat.

How to Make Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad

Here’s how this salad comes together: first, we roast the veggies and make the candied walnuts, and then we make a simple vinaigrette and assemble. Here’s exactly how I do it step by step:

Sweet potatoes, shallots and chickpeas on a sheet pan from the top view.

Step 1 – Roast the Vegetables: After testing this recipe multiple times, I found that roasting everything at once makes cleanup so much easier without sacrificing crispness. 

Grab a large baking sheet, as we want to make sure all the veggies have enough room to roast evenly. I like to use parchment paper for easy clean up, but it is optional.

Spread sweet potatoes, shallots, and chickpeas on the sheet pan, drizzle them with olive oil, salt, and pepper, and give them a good toss. Roast everything in a preheated 425 °F /218°C oven for 20 minutes. Be sure to give it a toss halfway through to ensure everything browns and caramelizes evenly.

A collage of images showing how to make maple candied walnuts.

Step 2 – Make the Candied Walnuts: My version of making maple candied walnuts here is super simple. Simply mix walnuts with maple syrup, spread onto a sheet pan lined with parchment paper, sprinkle with coarse salt, and roast for 5-7 minutes in the oven.

I usually roast them while the veggies are in the oven, so I don’t have to wait later on.

Whatever you do, do not (I repeat, do not) skip the parchment paper (because they will stick to the pan) and sea salt (it helps make them even more delicious).

A collage of photos showing how to make the dressing for the salad and how to dress arugula.

Step 3 – Prep the Dressing and season arugula: When the veggies are cooling, make the dressing. It is as simple as it gets: Add olive oil, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and pepper to a small bowl and whisk to combine. 

When you’re ready to serve, place the arugula in a large bowl and drizzle with the dressing. Using your clean hands or a pair of tongs, gently toss to ensure that all the greens are coated with the dressing.

Give it a taste and make sure they are seasoned well. If necessary, add more salt and pepper. 

A collage of photos showing the assembly stages of making this roasted sweet potato salad.

Step 4 – Assemble: You can assemble the salad in the bowl with the now-well-seasoned arugula, but since we are planning to serve this as a showstopping centerpiece for Thanksgiving, I transfer it to a large oval serving platter. 

Then all we need to do is to top them off with the roasted veggies, maple candied walnuts, crumbled feta cheese, and, if using, drizzle everything with a few tablespoons of pomegranate molasses. I also add a handful of pomegranate seeds to make it even more colorful and festive, but it is optional.

Making This a Festive Holiday Centerpiece: Make-Ahead & Presentation Tips

This Mediterranean fall salad is a fantastic alternative to your usual boring roasted sweet potatoes that everyone serves on Thanksgiving.

Mediterranean sweet potato salad on a plate from the top view.

And, the good news is that you can make each component of the recipe ahead of time and assemble it right before serving. Here’s how I do it:

Presentation: Platter vs. Bowl

Serve on a Platter: I strongly recommend serving this salad on a large oval platter instead of a deep bowl, which not only makes for a much prettier presentation but also helps the delicate arugula hold its shape since it’s not weighed down by the toppings. It also ensures that every guest gets a bit of everything with each serving.

Make-Ahead Strategy (For a Crispy Salad)

  • Roast Components Ahead: You can roast the sweet potatoes, shallots, and chickpeas, and prep the candied walnuts and salad dressing a day or two in advance.
  • Bring to room temperature: Ensure the roasted veggies and nuts are completely cooled before storing them or adding them to the arugula, as warm ingredients will melt the feta and cause the delicate greens to wilt.
  • Store Separately: Store the cooled components in airtight containers in the refrigerator, and assemble everything right before serving.

Storage of Leftovers

  • Leftovers Keep Well: Leftovers do keep well for up to 3 days in the refrigerator if kept in an airtight container.
  • Arugula will Wilt: The arugula will naturally wilt once dressed. However, a good toss before serving brings it back to life. Always taste for seasoning and add more salt or pepper as necessary before serving.

Serving Suggestions

This Mediterranean baked sweet potato salad is as versatile as it is beautiful. Serve it warm or at room temperature, making it perfect for a cozy fall dinner or your Thanksgiving spread. It is surely one of my favorite Thanksgiving vegetable sides that I make every year.

Here are a few of my favorite dishes to pair it with:

With Turkey: If you’re planning on making a complete Thanksgiving spread, serve it alongside my Herb Roasted Turkey. Or, pair it with my Baked Turkey Tenderloin for a smaller holiday meal or simple weeknight dinner.

With Chicken: For another simple weeknight option, try serving it with my Baked Bone-In Chicken Breast. Alternatively, if you want to keep the Mediterranean flavors going, serve it alongside my Harissa Honey Chicken for a feast that is guaranteed to impress.

Vegetarian: This salad makes the perfect side to my Stuffed Eggplant as a Mediterranean-inspired meatless meal.

FAQs

Can I use canned sweet potatoes?

I wouldn’t recommend it since they’re too soft and won’t caramelize properly in the oven. That said, if it’s all you have on hand, just bake for about 10 minutes to warm them through.

Can I serve it cold?

Yes, this salad tastes great warm, at room temperature, or chilled straight from the fridge.

Can I air fry the veggies?

You technically can, but it will be hard to fit them all at once. If you prefer to roast everything in the air fryer, I recommend either doing it in two batches or air frying each veggie separately to ensure even roasting.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Mediterranean Salads You Might Like

I love keeping a few salads in rotation that are just as easy to make as this sweet potato salad recipe. Here are a few other Mediterranean salads I never get tired of:

  • My go-to for BBQs, picnics, and meal prep is this Mediterranean Pasta Salad. It is easy to make, and just uses a few pantry staples and fresh veggies.
  • Shepherd’s Salad (Çoban Salatası) is a refreshing Turkish tomato and cucumber salad tossed with olive oil and lemon juice. It’s a summer staple I grew up eating in Turkey.
  • If you want a quick, plant protein-packed salad that is ready in 30 minutes, try my Mediterranean Quinoa Salad. It can also be served cold or warm and it is another salad recipe that you can make ahead.
Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad from the top view on a serving platter.
Print

Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad Recipe

Sweet Potatoes are not common in the Mediterranean, but that doesn’t mean we cannot use them in a salad that embodies the flavors of the region. Made by roasting sweet potatoes tossed with chickpeas, feta, and candied walnuts and serving them on a bed of arugula, this make-ahead salad is worthy of your holiday table as a colorful centerpiece or a humble yet filling lunch to take to work with you on a Tuesday.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Cooling time 10 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 250kcal

Ingredients

For The Veggies

  • 2 large sweet potatoes 1 ½ lbs peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 3 shallots medium size – peeled and sliced/quartered (or 1 large red onion, cut into wedges)
  • 1 can chickpeas 15-ounce- drained, rinsed, and patted dry
  • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Candied Walnuts

  • ½ cup halved walnuts
  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup
  • 1/8 teaspoon flaky sea salt

For The Dressing

  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons fresh lemon juice
  • 1 garlic clove minced
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Salad:

  • 3 cups arugula leaves loosely packed, rinsed and spin dried
  • ¼ cup crumbled feta cheese 2 oz.
  • 2 tablespoons Pomegranate molasses* optional

Instructions

  • Preheat your oven to 425°F (220°C). Line a sheet pan with parchment paper.
  • Place cubed sweet potatoes, shallots, and chickpeas onto the baking sheet. Drizzle them with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Toss to ensure they are evenly coated with the seasonings.
    Roasted veggies on a sheet pan from the top view.
  • Roast for 20 minutes, tossing halfway through, until the potatoes are golden, the shallots are caramelized, and the chickpeas are lightly crispy.
  • To make the candied walnuts, in a small bowl, mix together the walnuts with maple syrup.
    Candied walnuts in the making.
  • Line a small baking sheet with parchment paper and spread the walnuts evenly. Sprinkle them with a pinch of flaky sea salt and roast them in the oven for 5-7 minutes or until lightly toasted and golden. It is okay to roast them while the veggies are roasting.
  • When roasted, remove the veggies and walnuts from the oven and let them cool for 10-15 minutes.
  • Meanwhile, make the salad dressing by whisking together olive oil, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and pepper in a bowl.
    Dressing for the salad and tossing the arugula with it by hand.
  • To assemble the salad, place the arugula in a large salad bowl. Drizzle it with the dressing and toss to coat.
  • Pile the veggies on top and give it another big toss.
    A collage of images showing the stages of the assembly of the recipe.
  • Garnish with candied walnuts, crumbled feta, and drizzle with pomegranate molasses (if using) right before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6-8 (loose) cups of salad that is ideal for serving 6 people as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • *A good substitute for pomegranate molasses is balsamic reduction. The flavor will change slightly, but it will still be delicious. Alternatively, if you do not have either of them, you can omit using them entirely.
  • Make ahead: You can prepare all components of the recipe in advance, let them reach room temperature, store them in an airtight container in the fridge, and assemble the salad right before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 250kcal | Carbohydrates: 26g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 6mg | Sodium: 748mg | Potassium: 362mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 10953IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 84mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-sweet-potato-salad/feed/ 0
Quinoa Stuffed Acorn Squash https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-stuffed-acorn-squash/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-stuffed-acorn-squash/#comments Tue, 07 Oct 2025 19:43:54 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20747 If you’ve ever hosted a holiday dinner, you know the struggle: one guest wants turkey, another is vegetarian, and someone…]]>

If you’ve ever hosted a holiday dinner, you know the struggle: one guest wants turkey, another is vegetarian, and someone else is vegan (and gluten-free, of course). You need a dish that can compete with turkey while meeting all the dietary requirements.

That’s where this Quinoa Stuffed Acorn Squash recipe comes in. I came up with it when my best friend showed up with her new boyfriend to last year’s Thanksgiving dinner, who happens to be vegan. And let me tell you, it served its purpose.

It worked beautifully as a plant-based holiday main dish for him, while the rest of the crowd enjoyed it as a side dish with turkey. The good news is that you can serve it warm, at room temperature, or cold, making it a no-fuss recipe that checks all the boxes.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This is one of those recipes that includes all the best festive fall ingredients. The full list with exact amounts is in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my recipe testing:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Acorn squash: While it may be available year-round in most grocery stores, it is at its peak in the fall and winter months. To choose the best squash, look for a mix of dark green and orange skin colors that look slightly dull (not shiny). It should feel firm and heavy. You can use traditional green acorn squash or try white, golden, or even carnival squash. 

Quinoa: Use the type of quinoa you prefer, such as white, red, black, or a mix of all three. You can cook quinoa on the stove, make microwave quinoa, or even make pressure cooker quinoa for a hands-off method. If you are not a fan of quinoa, you can swap it with cooked wild rice, farro, or couscous.

Apples:  I love using Fuji apples here, but Gala and Honeycrisp also work. If you like a tangier bite, go for Granny Smith. You can also swap the apples for pears for a sweeter bite.

Dried Fruit: I prefer dried cranberries for this recipe, but I like to chop them so they are easier to chew. You can also mix it up with other dried fruits, such as chopped apricots or dates.

Nuts: Pecans are my favorite here, but you can use walnuts, almonds, or whichever nut you prefer. 

For a nut-free option, try toasted pumpkin seeds or sunflower seeds. I usually opt for roasted nuts for extra flavor, but raw ones also work well.

Herbs: I am using fresh parsley, but you can also add other fresh holiday herbs like thyme, sage, or rosemary. During the fall, stores like Trader Joe’s often have holiday herb bundles, and they work perfectly here.

Optional Additions:

This is one of those recipes you can really customize and make your own. Here are a few of my favorite ways to mix it up:

Pomegranate Arils: For an extra fall touch, add a handful on top for a pop of color and tartness.

Maple syrup: If you enjoy the salty-sweet combination, whisk a tablespoon of maple syrup with olive oil and brush it over the squash prior to sprinkling it with the spice mixture.

Chickpeas: For a protein boost and a more filling dish (especially if you are serving it as a vegan main dish), you can stir in a 15-oz can of (drained and rinsed) chickpeas into the stuffing.

Mushrooms: For a distinctive yet delicious umami boost, consider adding sautéed or roasted mushrooms to the filling. 

Cheese: If you don’t mind making the dish vegetarian, you can garnish it with a handful of crumbled feta or Parmesan cheese for a creamy and salty bite.

How to Make Roasted Vegan Stuffed Acorn Squash

From start to finish, this vegan stuffed squash takes less than an hour to make. The process consists of three parts: roasting the acorn squash, preparing the quinoa and apple filling while it bakes, and filling the roasted squash with the stuffing. Here’s how I do it: 

Images showing how to cut acorn squash for stuffing.

Step 1 – Cut the Acorn Squash: You should exercise extreme caution when cutting acorn squash, especially if you have kids around. Start with a sharp knife to make the job easier and safer. 

First, cut a thin slice off the bottom so it can sit flat on your cutting board. Then cut from top to bottom vertically, pressing the tip of the knife into the center and working your way down until you have two halves. 

Lastly, scoop out the seeds and stringy bits inside. You can toss these or bake them; they make a delicious crunchy snack. 

Photos showing how to season and prepare acorn squash for roasting.

Step 2 – Season and Roast the Squash: Preheat the oven to 400°F (204°C) and line a baking sheet with parchment paper. 

Mix together onion powder, garlic powder, cinnamon, cumin, salt, and pepper in a small bowl. Brush the cut sides of the squash with a little olive oil and sprinkle it with the spice mixture.  

Place the acorn squash halves cut-side down to help the edges caramelize and keep the flesh tender. Roast for about 40 minutes, until you can easily slide a fork through the meat. Your kitchen will smell heavenly while these are baking.

A collage of images showing the quinoa filling and stuffing the roasted squash.

Step 3 – Make the Quinoa Filling: While the squash is roasting, sauté the onion and celery in a pan over medium-high heat until softened for 8-10 minutes, stirring frequently.

Then, add the apples and cook until they’re just soft enough, but not mushy. Stir in the garlic, cooked quinoa, cranberries, and pecans. Let it sit so the quinoa absorbs all the flavors, and add the parsley at the very end.

Step 4 – Assemble and Serve: Remove the roasted acorn squash halves from the oven and let them cool for 10 minutes. Then flip and fill each half with the quinoa mixture.

The acorn squash filling/stuffing recipe below yields 3-4 cups of filling. If you have leftovers, you can enjoy them as a side dish or a quick lunch the next day. It can also be served as a standalone side dish.

You can serve your filled acorn squash right away, or optionally, for a crispy, golden topping, return the stuffed squash to the oven and bake for an additional 10 minutes until the pecans are toasted and the quinoa looks golden brown. Garnish with fresh parsley, pomegranate arils, and your preferred toppings before serving.

Make Ahead, Storage & Reheating & Instructions

I love making this stuffed vegan squash recipe not only because it is a feast for the eyes, but also because you can easily prepare it ahead and serve it warm or cold, making it easy to incorporate into your holiday meal prep schedule.

Make Ahead: You can prepare the quinoa stuffing 1-2 days in advance, bring it to room temperature, and store it in an airtight container in the fridge. You can also roast the squash halves a day ahead, let them cool to room temperature, and refrigerate. When you are ready to serve, reheat the filling, stuff the squash, and warm them in the oven at 275°F (135°C) until heated through.

Alternatively, you can assemble the whole thing a day in advance, bring to room temperature, and store it in an airtight container. An hour before serving, you can reheat it in a low-heat (275°F (135°C)) oven for 15 minutes, or until heated through.

Storage: After the stuffed squash has cooled to room temperature, it can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. The leftovers make the most delicious lunch the next day.

Freezing: While you can technically freeze baked acorn squash, I don’t recommend it. It causes the squash to release extra water when thawed, resulting in a mushy texture and minimal flavor.

Expert Tips for Success

Microwave before cutting: Acorn squash can be hard to cut, especially if it is newly harvested. If you are having trouble cutting it, you can place it in the microwave for 1-2 minutes in 30-second increments to soften. Keep a close eye on it and check often rather than letting it run the whole time.

Cutting vertically vs horizontally: As you can see in the pictures, I cut my acorn squash vertically, but it is a personal preference. You can cut it horizontally if it is easier for you. However, be sure to cut a small amount from the top and bottom so they can sit straight after they are flipped.

Extra Caramelization: This is optional, but for a more golden, caramelized finish, flip the roasted squash cut-side up and place it under the broiler for 1-2 minutes after it’s finished baking. Just keep a close eye on it so it doesn’t burn.

Roast cut-side down: This is a crucial step, as it helps the edges caramelize and makes the flesh extra tender and sweet. While I didn’t think it was necessary, if you prefer, you can flip them at the end and put them under the broiler for a minute or two for even more caramelization.

Cook quinoa with stock: One of the best ways to season quinoa is by using stock instead of water as the cooking liquid. I usually use my homemade vegetable stock I make from scraps, but store-bought vegetable stock would also work. I highly recommend rinsing quinoa before cooking for optimal flavor.

Keep the filling moist: If you make it earlier in the day (or reheating), the quinoa mixture may dry out slightly. You can stir in a splash of water or stock to keep it fluffy and add more moisture.

Toast the nuts: Yes, it is an extra step, but toasting pecans (or pumpkin seeds) in a dry skillet takes just a few minutes and is a major upgrade in the overall taste of the filling. So, if you have a couple of extra minutes, place the nuts/seeds in an empty skillet and toast (keeping a super close eye on them) for 5-7 minutes over medium heat before adding them to the filling.

What to Serve with Quinoa-Stuffed Acorn Squash

This quinoa stuffed squash is one of those recipes that can play more than one role on your holiday table. You can enjoy it as a main dish for a vegetarian or vegan dinner, or serve it as a side alongside your favorite holiday mains. Here are a few of my favorite pairings:

FAQs

Can I make this ahead for Thanksgiving?

Yes, you can cook the quinoa filling a day or two before and keep it in the fridge in an airtight container. You can also roast the squash halves ahead of time and store them refrigerated for up to three days.

Can I freeze stuffed acorn squash?

Technically, yes, but I do not recommend it. The squash becomes watery and loses its texture once thawed.

Can I use butternut squash instead?

Yes, butternut squash also works. You can roast butternut squash halves or air-fry them and fill them with the quinoa mixture, following the same recipe.

What’s the safest way to cut acorn squash?

The secret is to use a sharp knife and start by slicing a thin piece off the bottom so the squash sits steady. Then cut from top to bottom to split it in half, and if it feels too tough to cut, microwave it for a minute or two to soften the skin.

What if I don’t like quinoa?

You can easily swap the quinoa for cooked rice, wild rice, farro, or even couscous for a similar filling.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Acorn Squash Recipes You Might Like

If you enjoyed this vegan acorn squash recipe, you might like these other fall favorite squash recipes:

  • If you are craving a fall salad, try my Acorn Squash Salad. Made with arugula, pepitas, cranberries, goat cheese, and pomegranate seeds, it has everything you crave during the holiday season.
  • Another reader favorite squash recipe is my Roasted Acorn Squash Slices! It takes the basic acorn squash but turns it into an easy side dish with a quick maple-cinnamon glaze.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Quinoa stuffed acorn squash garnished with pomegranate seeds.
Print

Quinoa Stuffed Acorn Squash Recipe

Tender roasted squash halves filled with a savory-sweet quinoa stuffing of apples, cranberries, pecans, and fresh herbs. Vegan, gluten-free, and make-ahead friendly, this is the perfect holiday main or side dish.
Course Side
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 10 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 291kcal

Ingredients

To Roast the Acorn Squash

  • ¼ teaspoon onion powder
  • ¼ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 4 large acorn squash cut in half and seeds removed

To Make the Stuffing:

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 onion medium-size / chopped (~1 1/4 cup)
  • 3 stalks celery chopped (~3/4 cup)
  • 1 apple peeled and cut into small ½ inch cubes
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 ½ cups cooked quinoa from 1 cup uncooked quinoa
  • ½ cup dried cranberries chopped finely
  • ½ cup pecans coarsely chopped
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped, plus more as garnish
  • Handful of pomegranate seeds as garnish (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400°F (204 °C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • In a small bowl, mix together onion powder, garlic powder, cinnamon, cumin, salt, and pepper.
  • Brush the insides of acorn squash with olive oil.
    Acorn squash halves getting seasoned and roasted on a sheet pan.
  • Sprinkle each half with the spice mixture, ensuring that it is evenly distributed.
  • Arrange the squash cut-side down and roast for 40 minutes, or until a knife inserted into the flesh of one of the squash comes out easily. Let it cool on the counter for 5 minutes before stuffing.
  • While the acorn squash is roasting, make the stuffing. Heat olive oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Add the onion and celery, and cook, stirring frequently, until translucent, 5-6 minutes.
  • Add the apple and cook for 3-4 more minutes, or until the apples are softened.
  • Stir in the garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
    A collage of images showing the quinoa stuffing and as the acorn squash is getting stuffed.
  • Add the cooked quinoa, cranberries, pecans, and season with salt and pepper. Give it a stir and turn the heat to medium-low. Let it cook for 7-8 minutes, stirring occasionally to ensure it remains moist. If you feel like it is drying, add in a few tablespoons of water.
  • Taste for seasoning and add more, if necessary. At the last minute, stir in the parsley.
  • To assemble, fill each roasted acorn squash half with the stuffing and garnish it with pomegranate seeds (if using) and more parsley before serving.
    Vegan and gluten free quinoa stuffed acorn squash on a plate.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 8 halved stuffed acorn squash, which is ideal for serving 8 as a side dish. If you are serving it as a main dish, I would recommend serving 2 halves per person. The nutritional values listed below are per serving of one half.
  • Filling: Take the time to cut up your apple evenly to ensure that you get some with each bite. I also recommend chopping up the cranberries for the same reason.
  • Make ahead: You can roast the acorn squash and make the filling a day (or two) in advance. Bring them to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge. Assemble and bake right before serving.
  • Storing leftovers: Bring them to room temperature and store in the fridge in an airtight container for 3-4 days. 

Nutrition

Calories: 291kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Sodium: 461mg | Potassium: 979mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 1037IU | Vitamin C: 29mg | Calcium: 104mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-stuffed-acorn-squash/feed/ 30
Harissa Roasted Carrots https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-carrots/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-carrots/#respond Mon, 29 Sep 2025 21:22:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83581 Growing up in the Mediterranean, the first thing you learn is that vegetables are never an afterthought. Most meals are…]]>

Growing up in the Mediterranean, the first thing you learn is that vegetables are never an afterthought. Most meals are actually planned around them, and this recipe is a perfect example of that. 

Everyday ingredients like rainbow carrots (naturally sweet, inexpensive, and beautiful when roasted) become the star of the plate when paired with harissa, the North African chili paste I turn to often in my cooking. 

And of course, we can’t forget the whipped feta, the creamy and tangy spread that social media has made famous for good reason.

I tested this dish several times to ensure the steps are clear and the cleanup is minimal. Ready in about 50 minutes from start to finish, the result is a side that looks stunning on the table but comes together with ease. It is such a great recipe to serve as part of a holiday spread, alongside a weeknight meal, or even as an appetizer on a mezze platter.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This recipe has three main components: the creamy whipped feta, the roasted harissa carrots, and the assembly finished with a honey drizzle.

Below, I am sharing some helpful notes on ingredients from my recipe testing. You can find the exact measurements in the recipe card below.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

For the Carrots:

Carrots: I love using rainbow carrots here because they’re colorful, and when they get roasted, they become slightly caramelized, which pairs beautifully with harissa. 

However, any carrots you have on hand would work. The important thing is to choose ones that are similar in size so they roast evenly. 

Before roasting, I like to give them a good scrub and peel them for a smoother texture, although this step is optional. I usually grab about two to three bunches for this recipe, and if any are very thick, I slice them in half lengthwise.

Harissa: You can go a few different routes here:

Honey: This is a key ingredient in this recipe, so don’t skip it. It helps caramelize the carrots and tames the spiciness of harissa. If you don’t have honey on hand, you can substitute it with maple syrup or agave syrup.

Garnishes: Here is where you can mix it up and make this recipe your own. The toppings are what take these harissa-glazed carrots to the next level. Here are my favorites:

  • Drizzles: I am using honey because the sweet and spicy combo is unbeatable. You can also try maple syrup for a deeper sweetness or opt for tahini lemon sauce for a savory flavor.
  • Nuts: My go-to is pistachios, but almonds, cashews, or even toasted pine nuts would be delicious. If you can, toast them slightly in a pan to enhance their flavor.
  • Fresh Herbs: I opted for parsley, but you can use any herb you love, such as dill, cilantro, or mint. You can even use the carrot tops; just wash and dry them thoroughly before chopping them finely.
  • Optional: During the holiday season, I also use a handful of pomegranate seeds to add a pop of color.

For the Whipped Feta: 

For the creamiest base, start with a block of feta packed in brine rather than the pre-crumbled kind. And for the yogurt, choose plain, unsweetened whole milk Greek yogurt for the creamiest texture. 

Ingredients for the creamy whipped feta spread.

You’ll find the full whipped feta ingredients in the recipe card below. For more tips, steps, and variations, check out my full Whipped Feta Recipe post. 

Alternatively, you can use Cava’s Feta Sauce or my Tahini Yogurt Sauce as a spread; both will provide a similar creamy base.

How to Make Harissa Carrots

The beauty of this recipe is that most of the work happens in the oven. While the carrots roast and caramelize, you whip the feta and prep the toppings. 

Step 1 – Prep the pan: Set your oven to 400°F (204°C) and line a large sheet pan with parchment paper for easy cleanup. 

I know some people recommend against using parchment paper to achieve the most browning, especially when roasting root vegetables like carrots. I prefer to use it to make the clean up easier, but you can go either way.

Steps showing the making of the harissa and spreading it over the carrots.

Step 2 – Make the marinade & coat: In a small bowl, whisk together the olive oil, harissa, honey, and lemon zest. Always taste the mixture before adding any seasoning, especially if you are using a store-bought harissa. 

Add the carrots and toss until fully coated. I like to use my hands here to really work the marinade into all the nooks and crannies, but a pastry brush can also be used.

Images showing the roasted carrots and whipped feta.

Step 3 – Roast: Arrange the carrots in a single layer on the sheet pan, leaving a little space between each one so they bake and caramelize instead of steaming. 

Roast the carrots for about 30 minutes, flipping them halfway through, until caramelized and tender in the center. If your carrots are on the thinner side, start checking around the 25-minute mark.

Step 4 – Make the whipped feta: While the carrots are roasting, break the feta into chunks and add it to a food processor along with the Greek yogurt and lemon zest. 

Pulse it a few times, and then as the food processor is running, slowly drizzle in olive oil until smooth and creamy, scraping the sides as needed. Blend for about 40-45 seconds, until smooth, to maintain a thick and spreadable consistency.

Images showing the assembly of roasted harissa carrots recipe.

Step 5 – Assemble and Garnish: Once the harissa carrots are done, let them cool for 10 minutes so that when you add them on top of the feta cheese spread, they don’t melt.

Spread the whipped feta onto a large serving platter, arrange the carrots on top, drizzle with honey, and sprinkle with pistachios and parsley.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat

One of my favorite things about this honey harissa carrot recipe is that it can be served hot from the oven, made ahead, and enjoyed chilled. Not to mention, they store well in the refrigerator for later use.

Make Ahead: You can roast the carrots and make the whipped feta up to a day in advance. Store them separately or assemble them right away so the dish is ready to serve as soon as you need it. 

Storage: Store the leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 2-3 days. The whipped feta may firm up slightly as it chills, so take it out of the fridge 10 minutes before serving to allow it to become creamier. 

Reheating: When it comes to reheating, I do not recommend heating the whipped feta. However, you can reheat the carrots in a 325°F (163°C) oven for about 8-10 minutes, or until they are heated through. Then, reassemble the recipe as written.

Expert Tips for Best Results

While this harissa-roasted carrot recipe is quite simple to put together, here are a few things I learned during my recipe testing:

  • Pick similar-sized carrots: Choose carrots that are roughly the same size so they roast evenly. If some are very thick, cut them in half lengthwise so everything bakes at the same rate.
  • Taste before salting: Some harissa brands are saltier than others, so always give the marinade a quick taste before seasoning to avoid over-salting the carrots.
  • Flip halfway: Give the carrots a quick toss and turn them halfway through roasting so they caramelize evenly and don’t burn on one side.
  • Let them cool slightly: Let the carrots sit for 10 minutes before serving to prevent the whipped feta from getting melty and soggy.
  • Loosen thick harissa: Harissa paste can vary in thickness, so if yours is very thick, whisk in a splash of olive oil to loosen it and help coat the carrots more evenly.

Serving Suggestions

While you can enjoy these carrots straight from the oven, they are even better when paired with a full meal. Here are a few of my favorite ways to serve them:

Harissa roasted carrots garnished with pistachios and drizzled with honey.

FAQs

Can I use harissa powder instead of paste?

I wouldn’t recommend using harissa powder by itself for the full effect. Instead, you can make a quick harissa paste with harissa powder in minutes and use it to coat the carrots.

How do I tone down the spice?

You have a few options here. You can make your own harissa or buy a brand that offers a mildly spiced harissa. Additionally, keep in mind that serving the carrots over dairy naturally helps to tone down the spice.

What toppings or spices work best?

Chopped pistachios are my go-to, but almonds, cashews, or even toasted pine nuts are great alternatives. Fresh herbs, such as fresh parsley, dill, or cilantro, add a pop of color and freshness.

Do I need to peel carrots before roasting?

It is a personal choice. If you are buying organic carrots, you can give them a good scrub under cold water and roast them with the skins on. Still, if you prefer, you can peel them as well.

More Harissa Recipes to Try

When I have harissa on hand, I find myself adding it to everything from roasted vegetables to grain bowls. If you want more ways to use harissa, here are a few of my favorites:

  • My Harissa Dressing is a bright and spicy five-minute dressing that I drizzle over salads, grain bowls, grilled meats, and even roasted veggies.
  • For dinner, my BBQ Harissa Chicken is smoky, juicy, and takes just twenty minutes of hands-on time. And if you prefer a recipe that requires no grilling, then I suggest my Harissa Honey Chicken, which caramelizes beautifully in the oven for the perfect sweet-and-spicy bite.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Harissa roasted carrots garnished with pistachios and parsley.
Print

Harissa Roasted Carrots Recipe

These rainbow carrots are roasted with harissa until caramelized, then served over creamy whipped feta and topped with honey, pistachios, and fresh herbs.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 306kcal

Ingredients

For The Harissa Carrots

  • 2 lbs rainbow carrots (18-20 carrots) ~ 20 oz, scrubbed and peeled
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons harissa
  • 1 tablespoon honey plus more to drizzle on top
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest from one lemon
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt optional – add after tasting harissa first
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Whipped Feta

  • 8 ounces feta whole block
  • ½ cup Greek yogurt whole milk / unsweetened
  • 1 teaspoon Zest of a lemon
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil

As Garnish

  • 2 tablespoons honey
  • 2 tablespoons pistachios roughly chopped
  • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400°F (204°C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set aside.
  • In a large bowl, whisk together olive oil, harissa, honey, and lemon zest. Taste for seasoning and season with salt if necessary.
    Person making harissa sauce and spreading carrots with the sauce.
  • Add the carrots to the prepared sheet pan and spread the harissa mixture evenly, ensuring the carrots are fully coated with the mixture. Spread them on a single layer.
  • Roast for 30-35 minutes, flipping them halfway through to ensure even roasting.
  • Remove from the oven and let them cool down for 10 minutes.
    Side by side photos showing the roasted carrots and whipped feta.
  • While carrots are roasting, make the whipped feta. Break the feta into large chunks and place it in the bowl of a food processor fitted with the metal blade, along with Greek yogurt and lemon zest.
  • Pulse a few times to mix, and then turn the machine on and drizzle the olive oil over the tube. Let it run for 40-45 seconds, stopping once or twice to scrape the sides of the bowl to ensure even mixing.
  • Grab a large serving plate, spread the bottom with whipped feta cheese, and then transfer the now-slightly cooled harissa carrots on top.
    Photos showing the assembly of the dish.
  • Drizzle with 1-2 tablespoons of honey and garnish with pistachios and parsley.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields enough harissa carrots to serve 6 people, with approximately 3 carrots per serving, depending on the size of the carrots used. The nutritional values are per serving and include the calories coming from whipped feta.
  • Carrots: While I roasted the carrots whole, you can cut them into 1 1/2- to 2-inch chunks and roast them that way.
  • Spread at the bottom: Whipped feta is optional here, and you can serve the harissa carrots by themselves if you prefer. Alternatively, my yogurt tahini sauce would be a great option as a spread.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be placed in an airtight container and kept in the fridge for 3-4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 306kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.002g | Cholesterol: 34mg | Sodium: 803mg | Potassium: 588mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 25521IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 261mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-carrots/feed/ 0
Whipped Feta Dip https://foolproofliving.com/whipped-feta-dip/ https://foolproofliving.com/whipped-feta-dip/#respond Mon, 29 Sep 2025 19:54:13 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83576 Ingredients You’ll Need You only need four main ingredients to make this whipped feta recipe, so choose the best ones…]]>
Aysegul

Whenever I have friends over, I like to go beyond the usual meat-and-cheese plate and put together a spread that feels a little more Mediterranean and creative without being complicated. 

Over the years, I’ve built a few go-to menus that always get oohs and aahs, and after this whipped feta cheese recipe took off on social media last year, I added this version to the mix. Now I get the same question every time: “Is the recipe on the blog?

It’s popular for a reason: it’s incredibly versatile. Serve it as a cheese dip, spread it under roasted vegetables, or thin it into a sauce; top with savory herbs and spices or go sweet with honey and nuts. 

Think of this creamy feta recipe as a simple base you can dress up a dozen ways. After months of testing, I’ve dialed in the texture so it delivers every time.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You only need four main ingredients to make this whipped feta recipe, so choose the best ones you can find, as their flavor really shines through. 

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

You can find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are some notes from my testing:

Feta Cheese: For the creamiest whipped feta cheese, start with an 8-ounce block of feta packed in brine. You can use either cow’s milk or sheep’s milk feta, but the most important thing is choosing one you like for its flavor, creaminess, and saltiness.

I do not recommend pre-crumbled feta because it often contains caking agents that make the dip grainy. Since we will be blending everything in the food processor, there is no need to buy it pre-crumbled.

Greek Yogurt: Some whipped feta recipes call for cream cheese or sour cream, but I prefer using whole milk unsweetened Greek yogurt for a lighter, tangier base. 

Because it’s thicker and less watery than regular yogurt, it keeps the dip extra creamy while adding a subtle tang. For the best texture, avoid fat-free or 2% yogurt.

Olive Oil: Use your favorite extra virgin olive oil. It doesn’t have to be fancy or expensive, just something you like, since the flavor really shines through.

Lemon zest: Adding a little lemon zest brightens the dip, brings fresh aromatics, and adds a bit of tang.

Optional Add-Ins: I wanted to make this recipe with minimal ingredients, so it is quick and easy to put together. However, if you’d like, you can also add a clove of fresh or roasted garlic for a mild garlic flavor and a squeeze of lemon juice for a bit more tangy flavor.

How to Make Whipped Feta Cheese

Whipped feta comes together in just minutes, and the key is blending it just enough to achieve a smooth, creamy texture without overblending. Here’s how I do it step by step:

Step 1: Prep the feta: First, drain the brine, pat the block dry to prevent a watery dip, and break it into large chunks. This way, there is no excess moisture, and it can blend smoothly. 

Process photos showing how to make creamed feta cheese dip.

Step 2: Blend: Add the feta, Greek yogurt, and lemon zest to the food processor or blender. Turn on the processor and slowly pour in the olive oil through the feed tube. 

Pro Tip: Most whipped feta recipes use ¾ cup of Greek yogurt, but during my recipe testing, I found that using a lesser amount (½ cup of yogurt) yielded a more spreadable dip than a sauce-like, runny whipped feta.

Pouring the olive oil slowly helps the cheese and yogurt emulsify into a silky mixture. If you’re using a high-power blender, blend for a shorter time, as it will thin out more quickly.

A collage of images showing the making of the creamy Greek yogurt feta dip.

Step 3: Scrape halfway through blending: For a smooth and evenly blended whipped feta, stop the machine and scrape the sides with a spatula once or twice during the whipping process.

Doing this also helps with gauging the texture. I thought that 40-45 seconds of blending yielded the perfectly silky and smooth texture, but you can adjust the blending time according to your preference.

Step 4: Serve and garnish: Spoon into a bowl and finish with olive oil and your favorite toppings.

Ways to Customize Whipped Feta with Different Toppings

While this feta spread is perfectly delicious on its own, adding toppings is an easy way to dress it up and make it feel new every time you serve it. Choose a savory or sweet topping below and make it your own:

  • Savory Toppings: Sprinkle with fresh parsley, mint, or dill, plus a pinch of sumac, red pepper flakes, black pepper, or Aleppo pepper. You can keep it light, as I did in the photos, or spread it on a platter and layer on more herbs for a dramatic look.
  • Sweet Toppings: Drizzle a little honey and a handful of toasted pine nuts or crushed pistachios for a more dessert-like spread.
  • Spice Blends: If you prefer a lighter approach, sprinkle it with a pinch of my Mediterranean Seasoning or za’atar for an even more Mediterranean dip. Both bring a subtle herby flavor without overpowering the dip.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

Add this whipped feta cheese dip recipe to your collection of party appetizers asap! Why? Because it stores well and can be made ahead of time. Here’s how I do it:

Make-ahead: You can prepare it up to 2 days in advance. It gets slightly thicker as it sits. If you plan to serve it as a dip, you can serve it right away. However, though it is optional, if you want to use it as a spread for a perfectly creamy, silky texture, you can give it a quick whiz in the food processor right before serving. 

Storage: Transfer the dip to an airtight container. It keeps well in the refrigerator for 3 to 4 days. If the dip appears slightly separated after sitting in the fridge, let it rest at room temperature for a few minutes, then give it a quick stir before serving.

Freezing: I do not recommend freezing whipped feta as the texture changes and turns grainy once thawed, so it’s best enjoyed fresh.

Notes from My Kitchen: What I Learned Making This Recipe

After plenty of testing (and a few grainy batches), I’ve figured out what makes whipped feta turn out silky and creamy every time. Here are the tips I wish someone had told me from the start:

  • Use a block of feta cheese: A block of feta in brine is creamier and fresher, while pre-crumbled feta often contains caking agents that make the dip too grainy.
  • Taste your feta first: Some feta cheese sold at supermarkets can be very salty. Since this dip relies on just a few basic ingredients, it would be hard to mask that, so it is best to taste it before whipping it.
    • Too salty? Place the block in an airtight container with enough water covering it and let it sit in the fridge for a couple of hours or overnight. This helps reduce some of the excess salt.
  • Bring to room temperature: If possible, remove your feta from the fridge 5-10 minutes before blending. This is optional, but it will make your dip blend smoother. 
  • Food processor or blender: I prefer using a food processor because it allows for easier control over texture and thickness. In contrast, a blender (especially a high-speed blender) blends faster, which may result in a runny creamed feta cheese dip. Therefore, if you are using a blender, pulse and check often instead of running the machine continuously.

How To Serve Whipped Feta

Don’t get me wrong, this is a wonderful appetizer dip served with fresh veggies like radishes, cucumbers, and bell peppers. However, there are many other ways to use it in your daily cooking, especially if you are a fan of Mediterranean cuisine.

Images of recipe ideas that uses this whipped feta recipe.

Here are some of my go-to ideas:

  • Build a Mezze Platter: Serve your freshly made feta yogurt dip alongside other classics, such as Mediterranean Hummus, Tzatziki Sauce, Baba Ganoush, and fresh vegetables, warm Pita Bread, or pita chips.
  • Add it to any platter: This recipe is not just for a mezze platter. It is wonderful for any meat, cheese, or even seafood platter. I especially love it in my Smoked Salmon Platter.
  • Sandwich or Wrap Spread: Use it as a substitute for mayonnaise or other spreads in your favorite sandwiches and wraps. I love spreading it on lavash bread and then adding some Adana lamb kebab or Chicken Kofta before rolling it into a wrap.
  • As a Creamy Base: Spread a generous layer on a plate and top with roasted, grilled, or even air-fried vegetables. I love pairing it with my Harissa Carrots or Grilled Eggplant whenever I want an impressive side dish, or my Air Fryer Beetroot during the holiday season when I need a pop of color on the table.
  • With Grilled Meats and Kebabs: Serve it alongside Middle Eastern classics like Shish Tawook, Chicken Shawarma, or Lamb Kebabs for a cool, creamy contrast.
  • For Grain Bowls: Add a dollop over any of your Mediterranean bowls as a sauce. It works wonderfully with my CAVA Bowl and Chicken Shawarma Bowl.
  • Over toast with Eggs: Spread it on toast and top with fried or poached eggs, or serve it alongside Turkish Eggs for a savory breakfast or brunch.

FAQs

What’s the best feta for whipped feta?

Use a whole block of feta (not pre-crumbled feta) that you like the taste and creaminess of; it can be cow’s milk or sheep’s milk. I recommend choosing a brand that is not overly salty.

Can I make whipped feta without yogurt?

Yes, you technically can, but I find that the version made with yogurt is better. Still, you can use a splash of water or milk (about ¼ cup) to thin it out and blend until smooth.

How do I thicken whipped feta?

Start with a smaller amount of yogurt and add more as needed until you reach your desired consistency. If your dip turns out too thin and you want to thicken it, blend in a little more feta or chill it for 10-15 minutes to allow it to firm up as it cools.

Can I make this ahead of time?

Yes, you can make it up to 2 days ahead. Simply make a batch, store it in an airtight container, and give it a quick stir right before serving.

How long does whipped feta last?

It keeps well for 3-4 days in the refrigerator. Just give it a quick stir or pulse in the food processor before serving.

Can I freeze whipped feta?

I don’t recommend freezing this whipped feta spread as it turns grainy once thawed. It’s best enjoyed fresh.

Other Mediterranean Dips and Feta Recipes You Might Like

If you enjoyed this feta Greek yogurt dip, you might also like these other feta-packed and Mediterranean-inspired recipes I make regularly. They’re just as fresh and simple to make:

  • If you love that restaurant-style creaminess and sauces, try the cult favorite CAVA Feta recipe. It’s another wonderful dip (or topping) made with feta, roasted onions, jalapenos, and garlic.
  • If you want something cozy and baked, my Spinach and Feta Borek has a super crisp dough, melty feta, and is perfect for when you are having people over. 
  • And if you are in the mood for something refreshing, my Watermelon Cucumber Salad with cucumber, feta, and fresh mint is perfect for warm weather.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Person scooping whipped feta with pita bread.
Print

Whipped Feta Dip Recipe

This quick 5-minute whipped feta dip is made with just 4 simple ingredients. Creamy, tangy, and perfect for spreading or dipping.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 228kcal

Ingredients

  • 8 ounces feta cheese whole block (both cow's milk or sheep's milk feta would work)
  • ½ cup Greek yogurt unsweetened & whole milk/full fat
  • 1 teaspoon Zest of a lemon
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil plus more for drizzling on top

Optional toppings

  • Handful of fresh herbs such as parsley, dill, and mint
  • Pinch of Sumac or red pepper flakes

Instructions

  • Break the feta into large chunks and place it in the bowl of a food processor fitted with the metal blade.
    A collage of images showing the making of whipped feta cheese spread in a food processor.
  • Add in the Greek yogurt and lemon zest.
  • Turn the food processor on. While it is blending, slowly add olive oil through the tube.
  • Blend until smooth, no more than 40-45 seconds, stopping halfway through to scrape the sides as needed.
    A collage of images showing the whipped feta in a food processor and in a serving platter with veggies.
  • Transfer to a bowl and garnish with fresh herbs. Finish with a light drizzle of olive oil and a sprinkle of sumac or red pepper flakes.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ½ to 1 ¾ cups whipped feta, ideal for four servings. The nutritional values below are per serving and do not include calories from the optional vegetables and pita bread shown in the pictures.
  • Feta: Use a mildly salty block of feta for the best whipped feta recipe.
  • Storage: Transfer leftovers to an airtight container and store in the fridge for 3-4 days. Give it a stir before serving.
  • Troubleshooting Consistency and Texture: You have two variables to consider here: the amount of yogurt used and the blending time.
    • For a thicker dip, use ½ cup of yogurt, as written in the recipe.
    • For a looser, more sauce-like, spreadable texture, add ¼ cup more (a total of ¾ cup) yogurt.
    • Too grainy? Blend it a bit longer by stopping and scraping the sides a few times.

Nutrition

Calories: 228kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 52mg | Sodium: 656mg | Potassium: 72mg | Fiber: 0.04g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 241IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 308mg | Iron: 0.4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/whipped-feta-dip/feed/ 0
Mediterranean Baked Cod https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-baked-cod/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-baked-cod/#comments Mon, 22 Sep 2025 19:18:38 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83443 I recently started working out with a trainer, and one of the first things she mentioned was the importance of…]]>

I recently started working out with a trainer, and one of the first things she mentioned was the importance of incorporating more protein into my meals. Thinking you might be in the same boat, I looked through my recipe archives and realized I needed more quick, protein-rich dinners that I could rely on during the week. That’s how this baked cod recipe came to life.

Growing up in the Mediterranean, fish was always prepared with simple, fresh ingredients, and this version captures exactly that. The combination of roasted tomatoes, garlic, olives, and a drizzle of olive oil is the kind of everyday cooking I grew up with: straightforward, flavorful, and nourishing without being complicated. 

Even if you have never cooked fish before, this recipe is designed to be foolproof, easy enough for a Tuesday night, yet full of the fresh and vibrant flavors I know so well.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You only need a handful of simple, fresh ingredients to make this baked cod fish. The exact amounts are listed in the recipe card below, but below are a few notes and tips from my kitchen to help you get the best results:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.

For The Vegetables:

Cherry tomatoes: If you can, purchase colorful cherry tomatoes as they are sweeter and offer different flavors. I halve them, but if yours are on the bigger side, quarter them. With that being said, any kind of tomatoes you have on hand would work. Just be sure to cut them into small, even chunks.

Onion: I opted for shallots for their mild and sweet flavor. When roasted, they slightly caramelize and get even sweeter. Alternatively, you can use red onions (cut in large chunks) for a similar flavor or chopped scallions for a milder onion flavor.

Garlic: Freshly minced garlic cloves are my choice, but garlic powder can be substituted if you prefer a milder garlic flavor.

Olives: I am using pitted green olives (Castelvetrano olives are my favorite) in this recipe, but Kalamata olives or any other type of olive you like would also work. If you’re not a fan of olives, other briny ingredients like capers or marinated artichoke hearts can be substituted.

For The Cod:

Cod fillets: Cod is best when bought in season, which typically runs from September through May. I like using wild-caught fresh cod, especially from the Pacific or Icelandic. 

You can purchase this fresh fish as fillets or as a whole. If buying already cut cod, I recommend buying fillets that are equal in size so they bake evenly. 

While I used already cut fillets, you can cook a whole fillet using this recipe. Make sure it fits your baking dish, and keep in mind that the cooking time might be slightly longer.

When it is not in season, frozen cod can be used; just be sure that it’s completely thawed before cooking. If you can’t find cod, halibut, or haddock are good substitutes.

Pro tip: If you’re using frozen cod, the safest way to thaw it is to transfer it from the freezer to the fridge to thaw overnight.

If you want to thaw it quicker, place your fillets in a plastic bag and submerge them in cold water, changing the water every 15 to 20 minutes. Don’t thaw them at room temperature, as it can cause bacteria to grow. 

Seasonings for baked cod: I kept it simple and seasoned my cod lightly with a bit of olive oil, kosher salt, and black pepper. But other seasonings like paprika, oregano, or even a little bit of red pepper flakes would work beautifully. 

If you are into making your own seasoning blends, make a batch of my Mediterranean Seasoning and add a teaspoon over the fish to incorporate more flavors of the region. 

Fresh Herbs: You can play around here. I used fresh parsley, but thyme or basil would work really well. 

White wine or vinegar (optional): I wanted to keep this recipe alcohol-free, but if you’d like, a splash of dry white wine (or white wine vinegar) added to the vegetables before roasting adds brightness and depth. The acidity balances the sweetness of the tomatoes and the richness of the olive oil, making the dish taste lighter and more complex.

How to Make Baked Cod with Tomatoes and Olives

One of the best things about this Mediterranean cod recipe is how weeknight-friendly it is. You just have to pre-roast the veggies and add the cod halfway through. Here’s how I do it:

A collage of images showing how to prep the tomatoes, olives and onions before baking.

Step 1 – Prepare the veggie base: In a 9X13 casserole dish, toss together the cherry tomatoes, sliced shallot, fresh garlic, and olives with the olive oil. Season with salt and pepper and give it a good mix. Place it in your preheated oven at 400°F (204°C) and let it roast for 15 minutes or until the tomatoes soften. 

Person drying and seasoning cod fish for baking.

Step 2 – Season cod fish: As the veggies roast, pat your fish fillets dry with paper towels on both sides. Doing so helps the seasoning adhere to the fish and prevents it from steaming, so it bakes up tender and flaky instead of watery.

Drizzle the fish with olive oil and season both sides with salt and pepper.

Showing the Mediterranean cod before and after it is baked.

Step 3 – Add the cod and lemon slices: Once the roasted vegetables are ready, nestle the cod fillets around the roasted veggies and add a few lemon slices around the fish. I like to add the lemon slices at this point so they won’t overcook and taste bitter.

Step 4 – Bake: Roast for 15-17 minutes more, until the fish turns opaque and flakes easily with a fork (or hits 140°F / 60°C if you’re using a meat thermometer). Cod cooks quickly, so keep an eye on it to avoid drying it out.

Step 5 – Serve and enjoy: Spoon some of the roasted tomatoes, olives, and all the juices over the fish before serving. Finish with some fresh parsley and a squeeze of fresh lemon juice.

Make-Ahead, Storage & Reheating Tips

This oven-baked cod is at its best straight from the oven, but if you have leftovers, here’s how to store and reheat them:

Make-Ahead: You can prep the vegetables 1 day in advance, just store them in an airtight container in the fridge. When ready to cook, just toss with olive oil and seasonings and continue with the recipe. 

Storage: Let the cooked codfish cool to room temperature first, then store in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days.

Reheating: Warm gently in the oven at 300°F (150°C) for 5-7 minutes or until heated thoroughly or on the stovetop with a splash of water to keep it moist.

Freezing: I don’t recommend freezing, as the fish can turn watery and lose its texture once thawed.

Tips for the Perfect Baked Mediterranean Cod

Even though this recipe is quite simple to make, a few small details can make a big difference in the final result. Here’s what I found works best:

  • Always thaw frozen cod completely: For the best, flakiest texture, it is imperative that your fish is fully thawed before it goes into the oven. Cooking frozen or partially frozen cod will cause it to steam in the oven, leading to a watery and mushy texture.
  • Taste the olives first: Some olives can be extra salty, so tasting them first is always best to avoid oversalting the dish.
  • Pat the cod dry: This is essential for a flaky texture and helps the seasoning stick. Skipping this step can cause it to steam and turn mushy.
  • Use a meat thermometer: The best way to check doneness is to use a meat thermometer. It should register 140°F (60°C) when a thermometer is inserted in the thickest part of the fish.
Two images showing Mediterranean cod with tomatoes and olives in a casserole dish and served on a plate.

What to Serve with Mediterranean Baked Cod

You can enjoy this baked fish on its own with a glass of Sauvignon Blanc or a crisp rosé, but if you want to turn it into a full-on Mediterranean cod dinner, here are some of my favorite pairings:

  • With a starch: Serve it over my Lemon Orzo or Lemon Quinoa for a more filling plate.
  • With fresh greens: A veggie-packed salad is always a great pairing with fish, and this baked cod is no exception. Pair it with my Greek Cucumber Salad to continue with the Mediterranean flavors or with my Spring Mix Salad for a quick and easy green salad anyone can make.
  • Finish it with a sauce: A drizzle of Garlic Butter Sauce is an easy way to turn this dish into a restaurant-worthy meal.
  • Pair with warm bread: My Garlic Bread in Air Fryer or a loaf of my Staub Bread are perfect for soaking up the juices.

FAQs

What’s the best type of cod to use?

I recommend Fresh Atlantic or Pacific cod. Frozen fillets also work, just make sure they are fully thawed before cooking.

What temperature should I cook cod in the oven?

Roast the cod at 400°F (200°C) for it to cook through while staying moist.

How long should I bake my cod for?

For fillets that are 1 to 1 ½ inches thick, bake for 15-17 minutes at 400°F (204°C), or until the internal temperature reaches 140°F (60°C). The fish should be opaque and flake easily with a fork.

What should I season cod with?

I went with a basic extra virgin olive oil, salt, and pepper seasoning, but you can also use a pinch of paprika, oregano, or Italian seasoning.

Can I use other fish in this recipe?

Yes, you can. Haddock, halibut, snapper, or any mild white fish are all great substitutes.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Mediterranean Fish Recipes to Try

It is no secret that seafood dinners are a lifesaver when you need something quick and delicious without too much effort. Here are a few more similar recipes you might also like:

  • My Harissa Salmon Recipe is a sweet-and-spicy one-pan dinner that comes together in under 30 minutes.
  • For something crispy, try my Breaded Fish Recipe, which is baked with a breadcrumb coating, shallots, garlic, and fresh parsley.
  • Try my Grilled Mahi Mahi, marinated in citrus and herbs, then topped with fresh peach salsa.
  • My Shrimp Scampi without Wine is coated in a buttery garlic sauce and pairs perfectly with pasta or crusty bread.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Mediterranean Baked Cod from the top view.
Print

Mediterranean Baked Cod Recipe

Add this Mediterranean Baked Cod recipe to your weeknight dinner rotation. Made by roasting tomatoes, garlic, and olives in one casserole dish, this baked cod recipe is fresh, protein-rich, and ready in 45 minutes from start to finish.
Course Seafood
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 318kcal

Ingredients

For The Vegetables:

  • 2 cups cherry tomatoes halved
  • 1 medium-sized shallot sliced thinly
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ½ cup green olives sliced (or capers)
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil

For The Cod:

  • 4 cod fillets 1 ½ lbs / 5 to 6 oz. each (If using frozen, make sure it is thawed) *
  • 1 lemon sliced
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped, as a garnish

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400°F (204 °C).
  • Place cherry tomatoes, sliced shallot, minced garlic, and sliced olives in a 9X13 casserole dish.
    Two images showing how to prepare the tomato and olive mixture.
  • Drizzle it with 2 tablespoons of olive oil and sprinkle it with salt, pepper, and red pepper flakes, if using. Toss to combine.
  • Transfer to the preheated oven and bake for 15 minutes or until vegetables are softened.
  • Meanwhile, pat dry cod fillets with paper towels on both sides.
    Person patr drying and seasoning cod filets.
  • Drizzle them with 2 tablespoons of olive oil and season with salt and pepper.
  • Remove the veggies from the oven and carefully nestle the cod fillets and lemon slices in the vegetables.
  • Bake for 15-17 minutes or until the internal temperature of a cod filet registers 140 °F (60 °C) when a meat thermometer is inserted in the thickest part.
    Mediterranean cod in a casserole dish before and after it is baked.
  • When ready to serve, transfer a cod fillet to a plate and spoon it with some of the roasted veggies. Sprinkle it with fresh parsley right before serving.
    Baked cod with tomatoes and olives in a casserole dish.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 4 servings of baked cod, with each serving consisting of one fillet and roasted vegetables. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • *Don’t have cod? You can use any mild fish like haddock, halibut, or snapper.
  • Storing & reheating leftovers: Bring the baked cod to room temperature, place it in an airtight container, and store it in the fridge for up to 2 days.  Reheat in a low-heat oven, 300°F (150°C), for 5-7 minutes or until heated thoroughly.

Nutrition

Calories: 318kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 32g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Cholesterol: 73mg | Sodium: 805mg | Potassium: 963mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 859IU | Vitamin C: 39mg | Calcium: 63mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-baked-cod/feed/ 4
Kale Apple Slaw https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/ https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/#comments Tue, 16 Sep 2025 23:25:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=49034 Using apples in a savory salad isn’t new, but I think most apple salads miss a chance to pair them…]]>

Using apples in a savory salad isn’t new, but I think most apple salads miss a chance to pair them with something as sturdy and earthy as kale. A good dressing is key, especially when kale is involved, because let’s be honest, on its own, it’s not everyone’s favorite (my husband would agree). 

For me, the magic is in the balance of textures and tastes. Sweet, crisp apples meet earthy kale, all tied together with a dreamy maple Dijon dressing. Then comes the crunch from sunflower seeds, which makes every bite a little more exciting.

I call it a slaw because I was inspired by the Kale Apple Slaw at Tropical Smoothie Café, a cult-favorite dish that I loved so much that I had to recreate it in my own kitchen. It’s the kind of salad I make as part of my weekly meal prep because it holds up so well in the fridge. 

One bite and I think you’ll agree, let’s make it together.

Kale and Apple Slaw Ingredients 

You only need a handful of produce and a few basic pantry staples to make this fresh kale apple coleslaw. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my testing on ingredients and substitutions:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

For the Dressing

It is no secret that the dressing is the most important part of any kale salad, as sturdy kale leaves can use a ton of help when it comes to flavoring. I decided to use my Maple Dijon Vinaigrette as it offers the perfect balance of sweet and tangy flavors that complements the rest of the ingredients.

Below are a couple of notes from my recipe testing:

Maple syrup: I love the caramel-like sweetness it brings with the Dijon. For a lighter, citrusy twist, swap it with orange juice. Honey also works if you prefer a richer sweetness. I tested this slaw with all three, and while each works, they give the salad a slightly different character.

Apple cider vinegar: A key ingredient. It adds acidity to the dressing and also ties the apples into the overall flavor. If you don’t have it, red wine vinegar works too, but the taste is a little sharper.

For The Slaw

Apple: Crisp, firm apples hold up best. Fuji, Pink Lady, and Honeycrisp are my top picks, though tart Granny Smith is also great. Whatever you choose, slice or cube them just before serving to avoid browning.

Kale: I usually go with curly kale, but lacinato kale (aka Tuscan kale) works just as well. Each type has a different flavor and texture. If you’re not sure which to use, my Types of Kale guide can help you decide.

Seeds and nuts: I often use sunflower seeds, especially when I want to keep the recipe nut-free. When I do use nuts, I prefer raw almonds, pecans, or walnuts. Their mild taste lets the kale and apples stand out.

Cabbage: Red cabbage adds color and a subtle earthy note, but green cabbage works if that’s what you have. The thinner you slice it, the better it absorbs the dressing. I usually shred it with this insert I keep in my food processor, which I’ve found safer and quicker than a traditional mandoline. If you’re pressed for time, a bagged coleslaw mix is a fine shortcut.

Red Onion: Even though red onion has a stronger taste, I like using it here because it stands up well against hearty kale and crisp cabbage. If you prefer something milder, green onions are a good alternative.

How to Make Kale Apple Slaw

One of my favorite things about this kale apple salad, besides how fresh and crunchy it is, is how easily it fits into any meal. It lasts for days in the fridge and pairs with just about anything. Here’s how I put it together:

Step 1 – Make the salad dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together the maple syrup, dijon mustard, apple cider vinegar, olive oil, salt, and pepper. 

Then, add the sliced red onion to the dressing mixture and let it steep in the mixture while you prepare the rest of the ingredients. The vinegar takes away the sharp edge of raw onion, making it softer and slightly sweeter.

person showing how to make maple dijon vinaigrette

Step 2 – Prepare the salad: In a large mixing bowl, add the shredded kale, shredded carrots, and sliced red cabbage. Drizzle with the dressing and red onion, then use your hands to lightly massage the kale to break down the tougher parts of the leaves, making them more tender, less bitter, and better at soaking up the dressing. 

Pro Tip: Massaging kale might seem like an unusual practice, but I believe it is the secret to making kale tender, which is a common complaint among many people. Once massaged, it transforms into something much softer and easier to enjoy.

Person showing how to make kale apple slaw with step by step photos.

Step 3 – Serve: Top it off with the sliced apple and sunflower seeds. Toss the mixture one more time to evenly distribute the toppings, and serve immediately for the best crunch and freshest flavor.

Tropical smoothie kale apple slaw recipe in a bowl.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

This easy slaw recipe is meal-prep friendly, holding up beautifully in the fridge for days, so you can enjoy a crisp side dish all week long. Here are the best ways to ensure it stays fresh:

Make ahead: The Maple Dijon Vinaigrette can be prepared up to 2 days in advance and stored in a mason jar in the fridge. On the day you plan to serve, simply toss it with the kale, cabbage, and carrots, then add the apples just before serving. Assembly takes only about 5 minutes.

Storage: Once assembled, the slaw will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. For the best texture and color, slice the apples right before eating to prevent browning.

Kale and Apple Slaw in a bowl with two spoons on the side

What to Serve with Apple Kale Slaw

This kale and apple slaw is one of those salads that just works with almost anything. It’s crisp, colorful, and adds a fresh bite that makes any meal feel a little brighter. Here are a few of my favorite ways to enjoy it:

  • Pair it with grains: For a more filling meal, consider adding a cooked grain like quinoa, bulgur wheat, or wild rice. They will soak up the maple dijon dressing and turn it into a quick lunch you can grab from the fridge.
  • With turkey: If you need a light but satisfying dinner in under an hour, pair this slaw with my Turkey Tenderloin. The turkey is juicy, tender, and quick to cook, so you can have a balanced meal even on a weeknight. 
  • With chicken: My Baked Bone-In Chicken Breast is one of my favorite proteins to serve on top. The crispy skin and juicy meat add just enough richness.
  • With meatloaf: Serve the slaw with my Turkey Meatloaf to lighten up a classic comfort food dinner. The fresh crunch balances the comfort of the meatloaf without feeling heavy.

Expert Tips

While the recipe is pretty simple and straightforward, here are a few pro tips for making the best kale apple coleslaw:

  • Using red onion: Raw red onion can be sharp, even when thinly sliced. I like to soak it in water or massage it with salt to mellow the bite. In this recipe, I let it sit in the dressing instead, which softens the flavor while adding depth. If you enjoy raw onion as-is, you can skip this step.
  • Slice everything thinly: Large pieces of kale are tough to chew. Removing the stems and slicing the leaves into thin ribbons helps them absorb the dressing, making the salad easier to eat. 
  • Massage the kale: This is the step that turns tough kale into something tender and delicious. A quick massage not only softens the leaves but also helps the dressing cling to every bite. 
  • Blanch for a milder taste: If you find kale too bitter, you can blanch it. Just boil for a minute or two, then plunge into ice water. This quick step softens the leaves and tones down their bitterness.
  • Optional Add-Ins: You can easily make this salad your own with a few simple additions or swaps. Try dried cranberries or pomegranate seeds instead of apples for a sweet-tart twist, or add a handful of shaved parmesan to bring a savory, umami note that makes it even more delicious.

FAQs

What part of the kale do you cut off?

Remove the tough center stem (also called the rib) that runs down the middle of each leaf. It’s hard and chewy when raw, so strip the leafy greens away and chop them into bite-sized pieces for the best texture.

How can I make the kale less bitter?

The best way to reduce kale’s bitterness is to massage it with the dressing for 2-3 minutes to soften the leaves. This breaks down the tough fibers and makes the kale more tender and easier to chew. If you’re sensitive to bitterness, blanch the kale for 1-2 minutes before adding it to the salad.

How can I tell if I’m choosing good kale?

Look for kale with firm, crisp leaves that have a rich green color. Skip any that are starting to yellow, feel limp, or have wilted spots.

What’s the best apple to use in kale apple coleslaw?

Firm, crisp apples such as Honeycrisp, Fuji, Pink Lady, or Granny Smith work best.

Can I use a different dressing to make this kale and apple slaw recipe?

Yes. For a lighter, more citrusy flavor, try it with my Lemon Balsamic Dressing. For a creamy variation, use my Yogurt Salad Dressing.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Kale Recipes You Might Like:

If this recipe convinced you to give kale a chance, I am confident that you’ll be looking for more. So, here are a few other fresh kale salad recipes that I know you’ll enjoy:

  • If you’re in the mood for something cozy and seasonal, my Fall Harvest Salad is packed with all the fall flavors we love and is drizzled with a sweet dressing that ties it all together.
  • For a crunchy, make-ahead option, my Brussels Sprout Kale Salad includes shaved Brussels sprouts and kale with a bright vinaigrette.
  • And when you’re craving something simple and satisfying, my Kale and Avocado Salad comes together in minutes with a sweet-sour dressing you’ll want to drizzle on everything.
Kale Apple Carrot Slaw in a bowl with two spoons on the side
Print

Kale Apple Slaw Recipe

15 minute Kale Apple Slaw recipe that is perfect for a satisfying and filling meal. Also gluten free and vegan, you can make a batch as a part of your weekly meal prep and enjoy it throughout the week.
Course Salad
Cuisine American Vegan
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 407kcal

Ingredients

For The Maple Dijon Vinaigrette

  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup
  • 1 tablespoon dijon mustard
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ small red onion sliced thinly

For The Kale Apple Slaw

  • 6 cups curly kale (1 bunch destemmed and cut into ribbons)
  • 2 carrots shredded
  • 1 cup red cabbage sliced thinly
  • 1 apple sliced thinly
  • 1 cup sunflower seeds or any other nuts

Instructions

  • To make the salad dressing: Whisk together maple syrup, dijon mustard, garlic, apple cider vinegar, olive oil, salt and pepper in a small bowl or in a mason jar. Add in the sliced red onion and let it steep in it as you work on the rest of the ingredients.
    A collage of images showing the making of the dressing.
  • To make the Apple Kale Slaw: Place kale, shredded carrots and sliced red cabbage in a bowl. Drizzle it with the dressing. Using clean hands, give them a light massage making sure to distribute the dressing evenly throughout the salad. As you massage, the tough kale leaves will soften.
    Person showing how to massage kale for the slaw.
  • Top it off with sliced apple and sunflower seeds. Give it a toss and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 7 to 8 cups of salad and is ideal for four servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Steep the red onion: This is an optional step but letting your red onion slices soak in the dressing will give them a great texture and make them less bitter and overpowering.
  • Slice everything thinly: To make sure every bite of this recipe bursts with flavor, make sure you thinly slice all of your ingredients. Small pieces make it easier for your veggies to soak up the tangy dressing.
  • Massage the kale: Though it may seem like an odd step, massaging the kale is crucial to giving your leaves the perfect, tender texture. The massaging process infuses the kale with the acidic dressing, which helps break down the parts of fresh kale that are hard to digest.
  • Storage: Once prepared, kale and apple coleslaw will stay fresh in an airtight container for up to 3 days. Be sure to store it in an airtight container in the fridge.

Nutrition

Calories: 407kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Sodium: 381mg | Potassium: 585mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 8535IU | Vitamin C: 48mg | Calcium: 148mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/feed/ 2
Vegan Apple Crisp https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-apple-crisp/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-apple-crisp/#comments Sun, 14 Sep 2025 13:56:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=35696 Every fall, my husband and I make it a point to go apple picking. And like most apple-picking trips, we…]]>

Every fall, my husband and I make it a point to go apple picking. And like most apple-picking trips, we always come home with more apples than we need. When that happens, this simple vegan apple crisp is the first thing I turn to.

What I love about this version is that it delivers all the comfort of a traditional crisp but with a lighter approach. Instead of the usual butter-flour-sugar crumble, the topping is made with rolled oats, almond flour, shredded coconut, and a touch of coconut oil.

It’s still golden, crisp, and satisfying, just a little more in line with how I like to bake at home.

And the best part? It’s vegan, dairy-free, and gluten-free, so it’s one of those desserts you can easily share or enjoy yourself, no special occasion needed.

Ingredients You’ll Need

As it is with any fruit crisp recipe, this no-sugar-added apple crisp recipe consists of two sets of ingredients: the apple layer and the crispy topping. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few notes on  key ingredients to help you get the best results:

Ingredients for butterless apple crisp from the top view.

For The Apple Layer:

Apples: You can use any type of apples you like. Use one type of apple or a combination of apples that offer different flavors. I usually use Fuji, Gala, and Honeycrisp apples, as they are sweeter than most other types, which helps make the crisp minimally sweetened. I also like to incorporate a Granny Smith apple for a little tartness.

Maple syrup: I use a small amount of maple syrup to coat the apples, but you can also use one tablespoon of coconut sugar, brown sugar, agave, or even regular sugar.

Lemon juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice brightens everything up and keeps your apples from browning before baking. For this recipe, I wouldn’t recommend bottled juice.

Salt: I use kosher salt here. Don’t skip it, because even that tiny pinch enhances the sweetness coming from apples and makes the crisp taste richer.

Arrowroot powder: This helps the apple juices thicken as they bake, so you don’t end up with a watery crisp. An equal amount of cornstarch would be a great alternative.

For The Crisp Topping:

Oats: Use rolled oats (also called old-fashioned oats) for the best chewy texture. Quick oats will not work as they are thinner and tend to disappear into the bake. If you are curious about the difference, check out my Rolled Oats vs. Quick Oats guide for a full breakdown.

If you are following a gluten-free diet, make sure to purchase gluten-free certified rolled oats.

Almond flour: Almond flour and almond meal both work in this recipe. I often use Blue Diamond Almond Flour because it is finely ground and easy to find, but Trader Joe’s almond meal is a good choice, too. 

If you can’t find almond flour at the store (or need a cheaper alternative), you can make it at home following my comprehensive guide on How to Make Almond Flour.

How to Make The Best Vegan Apple Crisp: Step-by-Step Instructions

This easy vegan apple crisp might look like something that belongs on a holiday table and takes hours to pull off, but it is actually super simple to make. Here’s how I do it:

Step 1 – Prepare the apples: Chop your apples into small cubes. I prefer smaller chunks so they bake evenly and get soft all the way through. Once they’re cut, toss them in a medium bowl with maple syrup, lemon juice, cinnamon, salt, and arrowroot until everything looks coated. 

A collage of images showing the making of vegetarian apple crisp's topping.

Step 2 – Make the crisp topping: In a large bowl, stir together the oats, almond flour, shredded coconut, cinnamon, salt, coconut oil, maple syrup, and pecans. Mix until it starts to clump together in little bits because those clumps are what bake into those crunchy clusters everyone loves.

Rolled oats are the best choice here since they hold their shape in the oven and give you that real “crisp” texture. Quick oats are thinner and tend to disappear into the mix. 

Side by side photos showing the assembly of the recipe for vegan apple crisp.

Step 3 – Assemble the crisp: Spread the apple mixture evenly in a 9 or 10-inch baking dish. You can use a glass or ceramic pie plate or a square baking pan. The important thing is to ensure that cubed apples are spread evenly at the bottom of the dish.

Spread the topping on top. No need to worry about making it perfect. The uneven clusters are what make this simple apple crisp extra crunchy in the end.

A photo of the freshly baked no butter added apple crisp from the top view.

Step 4 – Bake: Bake in a preheated 350°F (177 °C) oven for about 40 to 45 minutes. You’ll know it’s ready when the topping is golden brown and you see the apples bubbling around the edges.

I did not experience this, but if the topping browns a little too quickly, you can cover the dish loosely with foil towards the end.

Step 5 – Cool and serve: Let the crisp rest for about 10 minutes before serving so the juices settle and the topping stays crunchy. I know it’s hard to wait, but it’s worth it.

How To Store, Reheat, and Freeze Apple Crisp

This gluten-free apple crisp is at its best when it comes out of the oven warm and sizzling, but you can definitely make it ahead or save leftovers to enjoy later. Here’s what I’ve found works best:

Storage: This recipe yields approximately 6 servings, and while it typically disappears quickly, any leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 or 5 days.

Reheating: When you are ready to serve, warm it in the oven at 300°F (149 °C) to 350°F (177 °C) for about 10 to 15 minutes. The microwave works in a pinch, but the topping will soften instead of staying crisp.

Freezing: Apple crisp freezes well for up to 2 months, and you have two options:

  • Freeze before baking: Assemble the crisp in a freezer-safe dish, cover tightly, and freeze. When you are ready, bake it straight from frozen at 350°F (177 °C), adding a little extra time until the apples are tender and the top is golden. This is the best option if you want the topping to stay crunchy.
  • Freeze after baking: Let the crisp cool completely, then wrap it well (to prevent freezer burn) and freeze. When you are ready to enjoy, thaw it overnight in the fridge and warm it in the oven at 350°F (177 °C) for 15 to 20 minutes. The topping will be softer than when freshly baked, but the flavor will still be delicious.
Apple crisp topped off with three scoops of vegan vanilla ice cream.

Expert Tips for the Best Apple Crisp

Even though this vegan apple dessert is one of the easiest desserts you can make, a few small details can really change the outcome. Here are my best tips from testing this recipe:

  • Cut the apples into small pieces: Aim for evenly cut, ½-inch cubes. Larger chunks take longer to cook and soften, which makes the baking time longer.
  • Prevent a watery filling: If your apples are extra juicy (like Honey Crisp), add ½ teaspoon more arrowroot powder or cornstarch to keep the filling from being too watery.
  • Let it rest before serving: Allow it to cool down for about 10-15 minutes before serving so the juices have time to settle.

Variations & Substitutions 

One of the best things about this butterless apple crisp is how easy it is to adapt to your own needs and preferences. Here are a few ideas from my recipe testing:

  • Nut-Free: If you want to skip the nuts, swap the almond flour for oat flour and leave out the pecans. The crisp topping will not be as crunchy, but it can be a good substitute.
  • Sugar-Free Keto: For a keto or sugar-free version, replace the maple syrup with monk fruit sweetener or your favorite keto sweetener. Alternatively, if you want to make a sugar-free apple crisp, you can omit adding maple syrup completely. It won’t have the subtle sweetness that maple syrup offers, but it will still be delicious.
  • Mix-ins and spices: Try soaking raisins in warm apple juice and stirring them into the filling along with a pinch of ground cloves for a bit more spiciness. You can also experiment with chopped dates and even add a dash of cardamom if you are a fan of those cozy spices.

FAQs

Do I need to peel the apples?

It is totally up to you. I prefer not to peel mine, but either way would work.

What is the best way to cut apples?

Use a sharp knife to cut the apple in half, remove the core, and then cut it into ½-inch to ¾-inch cubes. The important thing here is that they are equal in size, so they bake evenly.

How do I keep the topping crunchy?

The key to keeping the topping crunchy is to let it cool for 10 to 15 minutes before serving. This way, the apple crisp has some time to settle and harden before it is served.

What is the difference between an apple crisp and an apple crumble?

They are very similar apple desserts, with a minor difference. A crisp is usually made with oats and nuts in the topping, whereas a crumble typically has a topping made with just flour, sugar, and butter, so it’s more like a streusel.

Serving Suggestions

One of the best parts of this no-butter apple crisp is how versatile it is. It’s the perfect fall dessert to enjoy straight from the oven or dress it up with a few simple add-ons to make it extra special. Here are some of my favorite pairings:

A Glass of milk: Serve it with a glass of cold milk, or for a plant-based option, try my Homemade Almond Milk to balance the sweetness of the warm apples.

Ice Cream: You can never go wrong with a scoop of vegan vanilla ice cream on top. Alternatively, you can try my Coconut Milk Ice Cream for another dairy-free option or my Homemade Honey Ice Cream for a vegetarian option. 

Whipped Cream: If you prefer something lighter than ice cream, a dollop of Maple Whipped Cream on top adds just the right amount of sweetness without overpowering the apples.

Yogurt: You can even use this vegan apple crumble as a topping on my Vanilla Yogurt Recipe. It’s perfect for turning leftovers into a cozy breakfast the next day.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Apple Recipes You Might Like

If you loved this apple dessert, there are plenty of other apple recipes you can try this season:

  • My No Sugar Crockpot Applesauce is one of the simplest ways to use up extra apples and makes the perfect snack or baking staple during the fall months.
  • For a quick breakfast, try my Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal. It’s ready in 15 minutes and has all the warm fall flavors we love in a bowl. 
  • Or, if you’re feeding a crowd, Baked Apple Oatmeal is the ultimate make-ahead breakfast, perfect for fall.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Apple crisp in a bowl with a spoon in the bowl.
Print

Vegan Apple Crisp Recipe

The best vegan apple crisp recipe made without the use of butter and refined sugar (sweetened with maple syrup and fresh apples). Caramelized apples topped with almond flour-oat topping for a perfect vegan apple crumble for fall. Vegan, gluten-free, dairy-free, refined sugar free.
Course Breakfast Sweets, Dessert
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 6 servings
Calories 481kcal

Ingredients

For The Apple Layer:

  • 4 apples medium sized – cut into ½ inch cubes*
  • 1 tablespoon maple syrup
  • 1 teaspoon lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon 2 gr
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 2 tablespoons arrowroot powder or cornstarch – 14 gr

For The Crisp Topping:

  • 1 cup rolled oats not the quick-cooking kind- 100 gr
  • 1 cup almond flour 120 gr. (or almond meal)
  • ½ cup unsweetened shredded coconut 40 gr (optional)
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 7 tablespoons coconut oil melted and cooled
  • cup maple syrup
  • ½ cup pecans roughly chopped 50 gr

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350 degrees F.

To prepare the apples:

  • Place apples, maple syrup, lemon juice, ground cinnamon, kosher salt, and arrowroot powder in a bowl. Give it a stir. Place it in a 9 or 10-inch baking dish.

To prepare the crisp:

  • Mix together the rolled oats, almond flour, shredded coconut, ground cinnamon, kosher salt, coconut oil, maple syrup and pecans in a bowl. Mix until well combined.
    Person making crumb topping.

To Assemble & Bake:

  • Distribute the crisp topping onto the apples in an even layer.
    Collage of images showing the assembly of the apple crisp.
  • Bake for 40-45 minutes or until the topping turns lightly golden.
    Freshly baked apple crisp from the top view.
  • Serve with a scoop of vanilla ice cream or a cup of almond milk on the side.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 6 generous servings (approximately 3/4 to 1 cup per serving). The nutritional values below are per serving and do not include optional ice cream on top.
  • * What kind of apples should I use? Feel free to use any kind of apples you like. I personally prefer using two different kinds for different flavors, but either way would work.
  • Can I make it ahead? You can prep the apples a day in advance and keep them in an airtight container in the fridge until you are ready to use them. They will probably brown a little bit, but since you will bake them, it shouldn’t be a problem. I do not recommend making the vegan crumble topping in advance as it could get soggy. Luckily, it takes no more than 5 minutes to put all the ingredients in a bowl and mix them.
  • How to store the leftovers? This recipe serves 6 servings. I doubt that you will have any leftovers, but if you do, place it in an airtight container and keep it in the fridge for up to 2 days. When ready to serve, warm it in a low heat oven (250-300 degrees F) for 5-10 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 481kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 198mg | Potassium: 264mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 26g | Vitamin A: 72IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 89mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-apple-crisp/feed/ 10
Crockpot Applesauce (No Sugar Added) https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooker-unsweetened-applesauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooker-unsweetened-applesauce/#comments Sat, 13 Sep 2025 23:28:36 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=10762 Whether you enjoy it warm straight from the pot, spooned over oatmeal, used as a natural sweetener in baking, or…]]>

Whether you enjoy it warm straight from the pot, spooned over oatmeal, used as a natural sweetener in baking, or frozen for later, this homemade applesauce recipe is a cozy and versatile fall staple you’ll want to make again and again.

It seems to happen every fall. We go apple picking, and I come home with more apples than I know what to do with. On our last trip to Ellijay in North Georgia, I thought I had planned better, but once again, we returned with bags and bags of apples. 

That is when I turn to this homemade applesauce recipe. The slow cooker does all the work, and the best part is that no sugar is needed.

As the apples cook low and slow, their natural sugars become richer and sweeter, giving you an applesauce that tastes just right without any extra sugars. 

Over the years, I have tried this recipe with many different apple varieties and found that a mix of sweet and tart apples gives the best flavor and balance, which is why this is the version I keep coming back to.

Jars of applesauce from the front view.

Notes on the Ingredients You’ll Need

You really only need three main ingredients to make this applesauce crock pot recipe: apples, water, and some lemon juice. Everything else is optional. 

You can find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are some notes from my testing on base ingredients:

Apples: Any type of apple will work here, so use the ones you love most or mix a few. Apples like Fuji, Honeycrisp, and Gala are sweeter, while a Granny Smith apple or Cortland are a bit more tart. 

I usually go with a mix of Fuji, Honeycrisp, and Gala, and add one Granny Smith. And you do not need all of those. One or two types are sufficient.

You’ll need about 3 pounds total (6-8 medium apples), which makes around 4 cups of applesauce. If your apples are very different in size, weighing them is the easiest way to make sure you have enough.

I peel my apples because I prefer a creamy and smooth applesauce. However, if you prefer to cook them with their skin on, you certainly could, but just know your applesauce won’t be as smooth.

Water: You only need about 1/2 cup for 3 pounds of apples. If you want a sweeter applesauce, you can swap the water for apple juice.

Lemon juice: A little squeeze of fresh lemon juice brightens the flavor and keeps the applesauce from browning as it cooks. I’ve tested this recipe with and without it, and the version with lemon offered a more complex flavor.

Spices: Since I like to use this applesauce in baking and cooking, I keep the spices to a minimum, but feel free to pick and choose as you prefer. I find that a couple of cinnamon sticks, cloves, and a pinch of freshly ground nutmeg work beautifully.

Sweetener (Optional): Since the cooked apples are already sweet, I prefer not to add any sugar. However, if you want yours sweeter, you can sweeten it with granulated or brown sugar, honey, or maple syrup after it is cooked. Start with a small amount (about ¼ cup), taste, and adjust from there.

How to Make Applesauce in a Crockpot: Step-by-Step Instructions

The beauty of making applesauce in a slow cooker is that it’s almost completely hands-off. Simply peel and chop the apples and toss them into the crock pot, and let it do its thing. Here’s how I make it, step by step:

Step 1 – Prep the Apples: Peel, core, and chop about 3 pounds of apples. While you do not need to cut them perfectly, it is best to aim for medium chunks. This way, they can cook evenly and soften without turning mushy too quickly.

A photo of apples and cinnamon in a crockpot from the front view.

Step 2 – Load the Slow Cooker: Add the apples, lemon juice, water, spices, and a pinch of salt to the crockpot. Give everything a quick toss so the apples are coated. It may look like there is not enough liquid at first, but the apples will release a lot of their juices as they cook.

Step 3 – Cook: Cover with the lid and cook on high for 3 to 4 hours or on low for 5 to 6 hours. Use high heat if you want applesauce ready the same day, or low heat if you prefer to set it in the morning and come back to it later. If you can, stir it once or twice to keep the apples cooking evenly.

Step 4 – Mash or Blend: Once the apples are soft and falling apart, it is time to blend. The tool to use depends on the texture you are going for. Use:

I have tested all three, and it really comes down to what you like best.

Step 5 – Taste and Adjust: This applesauce is usually sweet enough on its own. But if you prefer a sweeter flavor, add a little sugar, honey, or maple syrup at this stage. I would recommend starting with a small amount, tasting it, and adding more if needed.  

Step 6 – Let it Cool: Enjoy warm, or let it cool completely before transferring to mason jars or airtight containers.

How to Store, Freeze, and Reheat Your Applesauce

Chances are you will end up with more applesauce than you can eat in one sitting, and personally, that is the best part. It keeps so well that you can enjoy it all week or even freeze it for later. 

Storage: Bring your applesauce to room temperature and scoop it into glass jars. It will stay fresh in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. 

Freezing: Divide it into smaller portions (I usually do 1 cup) and store in freezer-safe containers. I like using Weck jars because, unlike mason jars, they can be used to freeze food. Alternatively, you can use reusable bags (such as Stasher Bags) to save space in your freezer.

Thawing and Reheating: To enjoy, just thaw it overnight in the fridge. When you are ready to eat, warm it gently on the stovetop or in the microwave until it is heated through.

Notes from My Kitchen: What I Learned Making This Recipe

While this slow cooker applesauce recipe is simple, here are a few things I learned during testing that will help you get the best results:

  • Flavors get more intense as they cook: As apples cook down, the flavors concentrate. The apples become sweeter, lemon juice tastes more sour, and cinnamon gets stronger. Keep add-ins minimal at first. You can always add more later, but you cannot remove it.
  • Whole spices vs ground spices: In my first recipe testing, I used a small amount of ground cinnamon, but in the finished applesauce, the flavor was overpowering. Whole spices, such as cinnamon sticks or cloves, provide a more balanced result. If you only have ground spices, start with just a pinch and adjust to taste after blending.
  • Make it your own: Store-bought applesauce often comes in different flavors, but you can easily flavor your homemade version. My favorites are Maple-Vanilla (a splash of maple syrup and vanilla, which I love with pancakes on the weekend) and Pumpkin Spice (just a pinch is enough for a cozy fall twist).
  • Baby-friendly: If you are planning to serve this applesauce to your baby, keep it simple by skipping the spices and blending until very smooth. Freeze in silicone trays or small cubes for easy single servings. Always check with your pediatrician for feeding guidance.
Slowcooker applesauce in jars.

Favorite Ways to Use Crockpot Applesauce

You can enjoy your slow cooker apple sauce warm straight from the pot with a spoon, or simply eat it on its own as a snack. And that’s just the tip of the iceberg! Here are a few more ideas:

  • With yogurt or oats: Swirl some applesauce into Overnight Oats with Yogurt for a creamy, grab-and-go breakfast, on top of Slow Cooker Steel Cut Oats for something more cozy, or mix it into Oatmeal with Chia Seeds for an easy morning bowl. 
  • With chia pudding: Try it on top of Chia Pudding with Yogurt. The applesauce makes it sweeter while still keeping it quick and simple.
  • Sweeten your muesli: Mix a spoonful into your morning Muesli for a natural way to sweeten it. It blends in smoothly with the oats, nuts, and seeds, requiring no extra sugar.
  • As a baking swap: While the amount will depend on the exact recipe, you can use applesauce to replace oil or eggs in baked goods to keep them soft and moist. It also sweetens them in a natural way. I use it in my Cinnamon and Apple Baked Oatmeal recipe to keep oats moist and sweet.
  • Ice cream topping: Add a spoonful of applesauce over vanilla ice cream and top it off with a handful of pecans for a fall twist.

FAQs

What are the best apples for crockpot applesauce?

Any type of apple will work, but for the best flavor, I recommend using a mix of sweet and tart varieties. Fuji, Gala, and Honeycrisp add natural sweetness, while Granny Smith brings just enough tartness for balance.

Do I need to peel the apples?

It depends on the texture you are after. If you prefer a super smooth applesauce, it is best to peel them. However, some people prefer to leave it on to get more texture and fiber.

Can I use apple juice instead of water?

Yes, you can. If you do, I recommend skipping the addition of any sugar so it won’t be overly sweet.

Can I make this without a slow cooker?

Yes, you can cook it on the stovetop by simmering the apples with the same ingredients in a large pot over low heat until they soften (about 25 to 30 minutes). You can also use an Instant Pot on the manual setting for about 5 minutes, then quick-release and mash or blend.

Can you overcook applesauce?

While applesauce is pretty forgiving, it can overcook if left in too long. The sauce will become thicker, darker, and may start to stick to the bottom if there isn’t enough liquid left. To avoid this, keep an eye on the cooking time and check that there is always some liquid in the slow cooker as it cooks.

How does the texture change after frozen applesauce is thawed?

When applesauce is frozen, the water content forms ice crystals. After thawing, those crystals melt and can make the applesauce a little more watery. For best results, I recommend giving it a good stir.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Apple Recipes to Try

During the apple season, I make this slow cooker applesauce recipe on repeat, but I also love finding new ways to use apples throughout the week. Here are a few that I make often:

  • My Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal is a quick stovetop breakfast that comes together in just 15 minutes with oats, apples, almond milk, and some maple syrup.
  • For dessert, try my No Butter Apple Crisp. Made with oats and almond flour, it features a crispy topping that is dairy-free and refined sugar-free.
  • If you are looking for something fresh, my 15-minute Kale Apple Slaw is tossed in a tangy maple Dijon vinaigrette, making it the perfect side dish for your favorite protein.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Homemade applesauce in jars.
Print

Crockpot Applesauce Recipe

Learn how to make applesauce in your slow cooker with just a few simple ingredients. Made without any extra sugar, this is the best way to preserve apples and enjoy all year long.
Course Condiment/Sauce
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 4 hours
Total Time 4 hours 10 minutes
Servings 4 cups
Calories 181kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 3 pounds apples peeled, cored and cut into 1-inch cubes – 6-8 apples depending on their size
  • ½ cup water
  • 1 tbs lemon juice
  • 2 cinnamon sticks
  • pinch ground nutmeg optional

Instructions

  • Layer sliced apples in the bowl of a slow cooker. Pour in the water and lemon juice.
  • Add in the cinnamon sticks, salt, and ground nutmeg. Stir to combine.
  • Cook in high heat setting up to 3-4 hours, or in low heat setting for 5-6 hours. Depending on your slow cooker the timing might be slightly different so keep a close eye after the 3-hour mark. I also recommend giving it a stir a few times during the cooking process.
  • Transfer the now-softened-apples into a high power blender (such as Vitamix) and puree until smooth. Alternatively, you can use an immersion blender, but it might take longer for it to be completely pureed.
  • Let it cool completely and then divide it amongst jars.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 4 cups of applesauce. The nutritional values below are per cup.
  • When you first put all the ingredients in the crockpot, you might think that there is not enough liquid. During my recipe testing, I found that if you add more than 1/2 cup of water, the applesauce becomes too watery.
  • I intentionally used cinnamon sticks instead of ground cinnamon. As the apples cook, the flavors of every ingredient amplify. I found that ground cinnamon was a bit overpowering, whereas a cinnamon stick provided a more subtle cinnamon flavor. If you do not have cinnamon sticks, you can use ground cinnamon, but I recommend starting with a small amount, no more than 1/4 teaspoon.
  • Storage: Leftovers will keep fresh in airtight containers for up to 5 days in the fridge.
  • Freezing: Portion your applesauce into freezer-safe containers and freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight.

Nutrition

Calories: 181kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 5mg | Potassium: 364mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 35g | Vitamin A: 184IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooker-unsweetened-applesauce/feed/ 20
Grilled Caprese Chicken https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-caprese-chicken/ https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-caprese-chicken/#comments Sun, 07 Sep 2025 18:07:14 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83230 I’m a big fan of taking a proven flavor combination, like the classic Caprese (originally from Capri, Italy), which features…]]>

I’m a big fan of taking a proven flavor combination, like the classic Caprese (originally from Capri, Italy), which features tomatoes, basil, fresh mozzarella cheese, and balsamic, and finding new ways to bring it to the table. 

I first started making it a few years back during peak tomato season when my basil plant was overflowing and I had more cherry tomatoes than I knew what to do with. And of course, with a chicken-loving husband, I’m always looking for ways to make grilled chicken exciting. 

After testing a few marinades and toppings, I found that using my balsamic chicken marinade was the perfect base for this recipe. It adds just the right amount of tang to balance the creamy mozzarella and sweet summer tomatoes, while the grill brings out a smoky depth in every bite.

It’s the kind of easy, beautiful dinner you’ll want to make on repeat all summer long. Some people call it grilled Caprese chicken, others call it Caprese grilled chicken, but no matter the name, it’s always a hit.

Ingredients for the Perfect Grilled Caprese Chicken

While the ingredient list might look a bit long, chances are you already have most ingredients at home. This recipe is built around three main components: grilled chicken, a tangy balsamic marinade, and a fresh tomato salad.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

You’ll find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes to guide you as you cook:

For the Chicken:

Chicken Breasts: For this recipe, boneless, skinless chicken breasts are ideal. For even cooking, pound them to about ¾-inch thick so the thinner ends don’t dry out before the center is cooked through. 

Mozzarella Cheese: Go for thinner pieces (about ⅓ inch) and use two per chicken breast. I used fresh mozzarella here, but shredded mozzarella works just as well. Use about ¼ cup per breast, keeping in mind that shredded cheese will melt nicely but won’t provide the same creamy effect as fresh mozzarella.

Seasoning: I only used salt and pepper because the seasoning of this recipe relies heavily on the balsamic marinade. However, adding a pinch of dried oregano, Mediterranean seasoning, or Italian seasoning is perfectly fine if you’d like.

For the Marinade:

Olive Oil: Choose a high-quality extra virgin olive oil. Lately, I have been using Garcia de la Cruz for its smooth, well-rounded flavor. You will also need a little extra to brush on the grill grates so the chicken releases easily.

Balsamic Vinegar: For the best flavor, choose a balsamic vinegar labeled “aged,” ideally from Modena. It has a thicker texture and is a bit sweeter. That being said, any balsamic vinegar would work to make the marinade.

Honey: Adds a touch of natural sweetness. You can swap in brown sugar or white sugar if that’s what you have.

Dijon Mustard: Dijon has a stronger, tangier bite, which is what I am going for in this recipe. If you prefer a milder flavor, yellow mustard will work as well.

Garlic: I like to use freshly minced garlic in marinades for its stronger flavor, but if you prefer something milder, garlic powder works as well.

For the Caprese Topping:

Tomatoes: I prefer cherry or grape tomatoes in this recipe, as they are sweeter. However, larger heirloom or beefsteak tomatoes can also be used; just chop them into bite-sized pieces.

Basil: Fresh basil leaves add that classic Caprese finish. Tear them gently so they release their aroma without bruising too much. Alternatively, you could use store-bought pesto or make a batch of my Basil Pesto Vinaigrette for easy drizzling.

How to Make Juicy Grilled Chicken Caprese

The beauty of this recipe is that it works whether you’re making it the day of or marinating the chicken a day ahead. Either way, it comes together easily: grill the marinated chicken, melt some fresh cheese on top, and finish with a quick tomato topping. 

Here’s how I make it, step by step:

A collage of images showing chicken before and after it is pounded.

Step 1 – Pound the Chicken: Place the chicken breasts on a cutting board and pat them dry with paper towels to help prevent the mallet from slipping (just a safety tip). Cover with plastic wrap and gently pound each piece to about ¾-inch thickness so they cook evenly from edge to center.

A collage of images showing chicken marinade.

Step 2 – Marinade: In a large bowl, whisk together the balsamic vinegar, olive oil, honey, Dijon mustard, garlic, salt, and pepper until the mixture looks smooth. This is the same base as my Balsamic Chicken Marinade, which you can also use on its own for a quick and flavorful grilled chicken dinner.

If you want to get a head start, you can prepare the marinade the day before and store it in the fridge. Then, let it come to room temperature before using. 

Let the chicken marinate at room temperature for 30 minutes or an hour while you prepare the garnish, or refrigerate for up to overnight or no longer than 24 hours.

Tomato topping for grilled Caprese chicken.

Step 3 – Make the Caprese Garnish: In a medium bowl, combine the cherry tomatoes, garlic, olive oil, balsamic vinegar, salt, and pepper. Toss gently so the tomatoes keep their shape; overmixing can cause them to become mushy. 

Add the torn basil right before serving as well, to keep it fresh. If you prepare the garnish too far in advance, the basil may wilt, and the tomatoes will release more liquid.

A collage of images showing the chicken grilled and with mozzarella on top.

Step 4 – Grill the Chicken: Preheat your grill to medium-high heat, about 450°F (232°C). This higher heat helps sear the outside quickly, locking in the juices and creating those beautiful grill marks. 

Once the grill is ready, clean the grates thoroughly to remove any leftover bits, then brush them with oil to prevent sticking. Remove the chicken from the marinade and let the excess drip off to avoid flare-ups. 

Place the chicken on the grates and cook for 4 to 5 minutes on the first side without moving it, which helps the sear marks form and keeps the meat from tearing when flipped. Cook for another 3 to 4 minutes on the second side, or until the thickest part of the chicken reaches 160-165°F (71-74°C) on a meat thermometer. 

If you do not have a thermometer, look for clear juices running from the thickest part and a firm, springy texture when pressed.

Step 5 – Melt the Mozzarella and Rest: Top each chicken breast with two thin slices of mozzarella. Reduce the heat to medium-low, cover the grill, and cook until the cheese melts, about 3-4 minutes. During my testing, I found that two thinner slices melt more evenly than one thick slice, which can leave the center unmelted and cause the chicken to dry out.

If your grill has a warming rack, move the chicken there to hold the heat without overcooking. Otherwise, simply turn the grill off, close the lid, and let the chicken sit for 3-4 minutes. 

Transfer the chicken to a platter, cover loosely with foil, and rest for 5-10 minutes so the juices redistribute and every bite stays juicy.

Caprese chicken on a plate garnished with tomatoes and basil.

Step 6 – Garnish and Serve: Top each chicken breast with the tomato-basil garnish, and feel free to drizzle some of the tomato juices on top; they’ll make the chicken even juicier. Serve right away while the chicken is still warm and the cheese is still melty.

Make-Ahead, Storage, and Freezing Tips

Make Ahead: You can marinate the chicken and keep it in the refrigerator for up to 24 hours before cooking. I do not recommend making the tomato basil topping in advance, as it will become soggy as it sits. It is best to make it right before serving.

Storage and reheating: Store leftover mozzarella grilled chicken in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Keep the tomato-basil garnish separate to keep the chicken from getting soggy. 

When reheating, warm the chicken gently in a covered skillet over low heat (with a splash of water) or in a 300°F (150°C) oven until heated through. Try to skip the microwave if possible, as it can make the chicken rubbery and overcook the cheese.

Freezing: I don’t recommend freezing the recipe fully assembled, since fresh mozzarella and tomatoes don’t thaw well. 

For the best results, freeze the cooked chicken separately once it has cooled completely. Wrap each piece tightly in plastic wrap, place it in a freezer-safe bag, and freeze it for up to 2 months. When ready to serve, thaw overnight in the refrigerator. Reheat gently, then add fresh mozzarella slices during the last couple of minutes of warming. Finish with the tomato-basil topping.

Expert Tips for the Best Caprese Grilled Chicken

While this Caprese grilled chicken recipe is simple to put together, I wanted to include a few extra tips that I learned during my recipe testing to help you achieve juicy chicken with perfectly melted cheese every time.

  • Slice mozzarella while it’s cold, serve it at room temp: Fresh mozzarella is easiest to slice when it’s cold from the fridge. However, it melts more evenly if you let it warm up slightly before grilling. I recommend slicing it right after you prep the marinade, then letting it sit at room temperature while the chicken marinates.
  • Don’t grill straight from the fridge: If you marinated your chicken overnight, let it rest on the counter for 20-30 minutes before grilling. Cold chicken takes longer to cook through and can dry out before the center is done.
  • Rest the chicken after grilling: Let the chicken rest for 5-10 minutes after it comes off the grill. This allows the juices to redistribute throughout the meat, keeping it moist and tender when it comes time to slice.
  • Check doneness with a digital thermometer: The most reliable way to know your chicken is cooked through is to check that the thickest part reaches 165°F (74°C).
  • Prevent flare-ups: Let any excess marinade drip off before placing the chicken on the grill. Too much oil or sugar on the grates can cause flare-ups and burnt spots.
  • Basil: For the freshest taste and presentation, I recommend tearing fresh basil leaves instead of slicing them. The tearing method helps prevent bruising and keeps the basil’s color and aroma intact.

What to Serve With Caprese Grilled Chicken?

This grilled mozzarella chicken is one of those mains that goes with just about everything. It’s light but still filling, and that fresh tomato-basil topping makes it easy to pair with all kinds of sides. Here are a few of my favorite pairings:

Grilled chicken Caprese style on a plate.

FAQs

How do I keep cheese from sliding off?

Slice the mozzarella while it’s still cold (it cuts much more cleanly), then use two thin slices instead of one thick one. Thinner slices melt more evenly and adhere better to the surface of the chicken, which helps prevent them from sliding off as they soften.

What kind of mozzarella cheese is best?

I recommend using fresh mozzarella cheese as it holds its shape better. However, in a pinch, shredded mozzarella would also be a suitable substitute. I recommend using no more than ¼ cup and keeping a close eye on it while it is on the grill, as shredded mozzarella tends to melt faster.

Can I use chicken thighs?

Yes, you can. Chicken thighs are flavorful and juicy, but their uneven surface can make it trickier to keep the cheese in place. Chicken breasts provide a flatter surface, which makes melting and serving easier, but thighs are still a good substitute if that’s what you have on hand.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Caprese Recipes You Might Like

Caprese flavors are just too good to stop at one recipe, so if you’re craving more of that tomato, mozzarella, and basil magic, here are a few of my favorites.

  • My Eggplant Caprese layers grilled eggplant with juicy tomatoes, creamy mozzarella, and fresh basil for a simple vegetarian option.
  • For an easy lunch, try my Chicken Caprese Sandwich, which brings together the same fresh tomato, mozzarella, and basil combination on a soft bun.
  • When you’re craving something light and refreshing, my Caprese Pasta Salad is a fresh twist on pasta night.
  • If pizza is on the menu, my Caprese Pizza tops a crisp crust with fresh mozzarella, tomatoes, and basil for a simple yet comforting dinner.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Grilled Caprese chicken garnished with tomato salad and basil.
Print

Grilled Caprese Chicken Recipe

This Grilled Caprese Chicken is one of my favorite ways to turn the classic Caprese salad into a full dinner. Juicy balsamic-marinated chicken, melty mozzarella, and a fresh tomato-basil topping come together in a dish that's simple enough for weeknights but special enough to share.
Course Chicken Recipes, Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 466kcal

Ingredients

For the chicken:

  • 4 boneless skinless chicken breasts 6-8 ounces each
  • ½ cup balsamic vinegar
  • ¼ cup olive oil plus more for cooking and for grill grates
  • 1 tablespoon honey
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 2 cloves minced garlic
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 6 ounces fresh mozzarella sliced ¼ -inch thick (about 6 slices)

Tomato Garnish

  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes cut in half or quartered if too big
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon balsamic vinegar
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ cup fresh basil leaves torn, plus more as garnish
  • 4 tablespoons of balsamic glaze optional

Instructions

  • Place the chicken breasts on a cutting board and pat them dry with paper towels. Place a sheet of stretch film over the chicken and pound it to ¾-inch thickness. Repeat the same process for the rest of the chicken breasts and set them aside.
    Chicken breasts pounded with stretch film on top.
  • To make the marinade, in a large bowl, whisk together ½ cup of balsamic vinegar, ¼ cup of olive oil, 1 tablespoon of honey, 1 teaspoon of Dijon mustard, 2 cloves of minced garlic, 1 teaspoon of kosher salt, and ½ teaspoon of black pepper.
    Side by side images showing how to make balsamic chicken marinade.
  • Add the chicken breast to the bowl, ensuring it is fully submerged in the liquid. Cover with plastic wrap and let them sit on the counter while you work on the garnish and preheat the grill.*
  • To make the caprese garnish, place 1 cup of halved cherry tomatoes, 1 clove of minced garlic, 1 tablespoon of olive oil, 1 tablespoon of balsamic vinegar, ½ teaspoon of kosher salt, and ¼ teaspoon of black pepper in a bowl. Toss to combine. Add the torn basil leaves and set them aside.
    Images showing how to make tomato topping.
  • When ready to cook, preheat the grill over medium-high heat, about 450°F (232°C). Once hot, scrape the grates to remove any food residue and oil the grates.
  • Remove the chicken breasts from the marinade, letting the excess drip off, and place them on the hot grill. Grill for about 4-5 minutes, flip, and then cook for another 3-4 minutes. Check with a meat thermometer to ensure that the internal temperature registers somewhere between 160-165°F (71-74°C).
    Images showing the grilling of the chicken breasts with mozzarella slices on top.
  • Place the mozzarella slices (2 slices on each chicken) over the chicken breasts, turn the heat to medium-low, cover the grill, and continue to cook until the cheese is slightly melted for about 3-4 minutes.
  • If your grill has a wire shelf on top (inside the lid), place the chicken on it to prevent further cooking (and potentially drying).
  • Transfer the chicken breasts to a large platter and cover loosely with foil. Let them rest for 5-10 minutes.
  • Right before serving, garnish the chicken with the tomato salad we made earlier.
    Grilled Caprese chicken garnished with tomatoes on a plate.
  • If using, drizzle it with balsamic glaze and serve while still warm.

Notes

  • Yield: This recipe makes 4 caprese chicken, which is ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving and do not include the calories coming from the optional balsamic glaze.
  • Marinating time: If you have more time, you can marinate the chicken in the fridge for up to 2 hours or overnight. Be sure to take it out of the fridge 30 hours before grilling so that the chicken is not super cold when it hits the hot grill.
  • Grill pan: If grilling outside is not an option, you can also cook the chicken in a grill pan. 
  • Baked Version: No grill (or grill pan)? No problem! While I love the smoky flavor of grilled Caprese chicken, the baked version is just as easy to prepare. Start by marinating the chicken as written. Then place it on a parchment-lined baking sheet and bake in a preheated 400°F (204°C) oven for 18-22 minutes, or until the thickest part reaches 165°F (74°C) on a meat thermometer. During the last 3-4 minutes, add the mozzarella slices on top so they melt evenly. Once done, spoon the fresh tomato-basil mixture over the chicken and serve while it’s still warm and juicy.
  • Storing leftovers: Place leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Keep the tomato-basil garnish separate to keep the chicken from getting soggy. 

Nutrition

Calories: 466kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 34g | Fat: 30g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 106mg | Sodium: 1297mg | Potassium: 595mg | Fiber: 0.5g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 586IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 244mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-caprese-chicken/feed/ 2
Turkish Shepherd Salad https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/#respond Mon, 25 Aug 2025 18:22:56 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83027 What is Shepherd Salad? If there were such a thing as the easiest salad in the world, Shepherd Salad would…]]>

What is Shepherd Salad?

If there were such a thing as the easiest salad in the world, Shepherd Salad would probably top the list. 

The name may sound a little unusual, but it comes from humble origins. In the countryside of Turkey, shepherds carried simple, inexpensive ingredients like tomatoes, cucumbers, onions, and peppers. Out in the fields, they would quickly chop everything and dress it with olive oil and lemon juice for a fresh, no-cook meal.

Shepherd salad in a bowl with spoons on the side.

Because these were the kinds of ingredients that were affordable and easy to find, Shepherd Salad has always been considered a simple, everyday dish rather than a luxury.

Today, Çoban Salatası remains a staple across Turkey and the Eastern Mediterranean. While it shares some similarities with Greek Salad, Shepherd Salad does not usually include cheese or olives, keeping it lighter and more refreshing. 

I left Turkey over 20 years ago, but to this day, I still make this salad almost daily when summer produce is at its peak. It’s one of those recipes that instantly brings me back home.

Simple Ingredients You’ll Need 

You’ll only need a handful of fresh vegetables and pantry staples to make this easy summer salad. You can find the full ingredient list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my experience and from how it is traditionally made in Turkey:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.

Tomatoes: Use the ripest, juiciest tomatoes you can find. Heirloom, Roma, cherry, or even steak tomatoes all work well.

Cucumbers: The authentic Turkish shepherd salad recipe uses Persian cucumbers, which are crunchy and with fewer seeds compared to English cucumbers. However, both types can be used in this recipe. If your cucumbers are freshly picked, it is not necessary to peel them, but I recommend tasting them, as older cucumbers may have bitter skin.

Scallions: I opted for scallions (also known as green onions) for their mild flavor, but finely chopped red onion or white onion can be used if you prefer a sharper bite. If you’re using green onions, you can use both the white parts and the green parts.

Green peppers: Traditionally, this salad is made with a Turkish pepper called sivri biber, a long, slender pepper that can range from mild to hot. Since I can’t find it here in the US, I usually use Anaheim peppers or jalapeños. For a milder option, a green bell pepper works as well.

Lemon juice: For the best taste, use freshly squeezed lemon juice, but in a pinch, bottled juice would also work. You can also swap it with white wine vinegar, apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar for a slightly different tang.

Olive oil: I recommend using a mild-flavored extra virgin olive oil.

Sumac powder: Sumac is usually available in the Middle Eastern or Mediterranean section of most grocery stores, sold as sumac spice or sumac powder. I often buy mine online, and if you are new to sumac, I really like Eastanbul Sumac Spice.

Just be sure to check the best-by date, as sumac has a shorter shelf life than many other spices (usually around 6 months).

Fresh herbs: I use fresh flat-leaf parsley in this recipe, but you can easily switch it up with whatever herbs you have on hand. In Turkey, it is very common to add fresh mint, fresh dill, or even a mix of the two.

Optional Add-Ins (Modern Variations):

The traditional Shepherd’s Salad is made with just the basics, but you can easily make it your own with a few optional add-ins. Some of my favorites are:

Olives: A handful of olives is a delicious way to make this salad more substantial and filling. In Turkey, we often use briny, firm varieties like Gemlik olives, but Kalamata and black olives work as well. Any olives you enjoy, even simple green olives, will do the trick.

Feta cheese: For the best taste and creamy texture, choose a good-quality feta made from sheep’s or cow’s milk and stored in brine. 

Dried mint: In some parts of Turkey, a small pinch of dried mint is sprinkled over the salad for more of an earthy flavor. It is not used in every version, but it is a traditional touch that pairs well with the sumac.

Urfa Chile or Aleppo Pepper: For a little heat, you can also sprinkle in some Urfa Chile pepper, Aleppo pepper, or any red pepper flakes you have on hand. For the most authentic result, aim for a variety that isn’t too spicy so the fresh flavors of the salad can really shine.

How to Make Turkish Shepherd Salad (Step-by-Step Guide)

Making Shepherd’s Salad couldn’t be simpler. You don’t need any special equipment; just a sharp knife, a cutting board, and a bowl. Here’s how to prepare it:

A collage of images showing the assembling of shepherd's salad.

Step 1 – Chop the vegetables: One of the hallmarks of this salad is that everything is cut into small, even pieces. This way, every bite has a little bit of everything. Dice the tomatoes, cucumbers, scallions, and peppers, then transfer them to a large bowl.

Step 2 – Add the dressing: Drizzle the vegetables with lemon juice and olive oil. Sprinkle with sumac, salt, and black pepper.

A collage of images showing the mixing of Turkish tomato and cucumber salad.

Step 3 – Finish with herbs: Add the chopped parsley on top. Using salad tongs (or clean hands), gently toss until the vegetables are evenly coated. Tossing gently is key, as it helps keep the tomatoes from getting mushy.

Step 4 – Serve: Enjoy right away while the vegetables are crisp and fresh. Shepherd’s Salad is best served immediately, since the salt and lemon juice draw water out of the vegetables, and the salad can become watery if it sits too long.

Storing Leftovers & Making Ahead

Making Ahead: You can chop the vegetables a few hours in advance and store them covered in the refrigerator. For the best texture, wait to add the dressing until just before serving to keep the vegetables crisp and prevent too much liquid from collecting in the bowl.

Storing Leftovers: Place any leftovers in an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 2 days. Keep in mind that the vegetables will naturally release some liquid as they sit, which will make the salad softer the next day. If that happens, just give it a quick toss and, if needed, add a squeeze of fresh lemon juice to brighten it back up.

Freezing: Freezing is not recommended since the vegetables lose their crisp texture once thawed. For the freshest taste and crunch, enjoy this salad right away.

Expert Tips:

While Shepherd’s Salad is simple to make, a few small details can take it from good to truly authentic. Here are my best tips:

  • Use fresh ingredients: This salad depends on peak-season produce. Ripe, juicy tomatoes and crisp cucumbers make all the difference. If your vegetables aren’t in season, sprinkle them with a pinch of salt and let them sit for a few minutes to bring out their natural juices.
  • Finely chop the vegetables: The traditional way in Turkey is to cut everything into small, even pieces. This will give you a mix of everything in each bite, and it will also ensure the lemon and olive oil coat everything evenly.
  • Season just before serving: Salt and lemon juice draw liquid out of the vegetables, especially tomatoes. So to keep the salad crisp, add the dressing and seasonings right before you bring it to the table.
  • Mix gently: Toss the salad lightly with your hands or salad tongs so the tomatoes don’t break down and become mushy.
  • Keep it chilled: Shepherd’s Salad is especially refreshing when served slightly cold. If you prep the vegetables ahead, store them in the fridge and dress just before serving.

Delicious Ways to Serve Turkish Shepherd Salad:

The pairing options are endless for this Turkish tomato and cucumber salad. While you can enjoy it with nearly any meal, here are some of my favorite ways to serve it:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Turkish shepherd salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Turkish Shepherd Salad Recipe

An authentic Turkish Shepherd Salad (Çoban Salatası) made with juicy tomatoes, crisp cucumbers, peppers, onions, and parsley. Light, refreshing, and ready in just 15 minutes.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 119kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 medium-sized tomatoes diced into 1 ½ inch cubes
  • 3 Persian cucumbers peeled and sliced ¼ inch thick
  • 2 scallions both green and white parts, thinly sliced
  • 2 green peppers Aneheim peppers, jalapenos, or serrano peppers – seeds removed and sliced thinly
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon sumac
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Place tomatoes, cucumbers, scallions, and green peppers in a large bowl or a large platter.
    Side by side images showing the ingredients of Turkish shepherd's salad.
  • Drizzle it with lemon juice, olive oil, and season with salt, pepper, and sumac.
  • Sprinkle it with fresh parsley and toss to combine.
    Side by side photos showing the making of coban salad.
  • Serve it right away.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6 cups of salad (depending on the size of your vegetables), and it is ideal for 4 (large) servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: Place leftovers in an airtight container and keep them in the fridge for up to 2 days. It is normal for the vegetables to release their juices as they sit. Just give it a stir before serving.
  • Optional add-ins: As I was writing this recipe, I wanted to stay true to the traditional recipe. However, some modern-day versions of this recipe add other ingredients like a handful of crumbled feta cheese, chopped black olives, and a sprinkle of red pepper flakes (or Urfa chile if you can get your hands on.) All of these would be great addition to the recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 119kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 588mg | Potassium: 247mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 748IU | Vitamin C: 61mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg

FAQ’s

What’s the difference between Turkish Shepherd Salad and Greek Salad?

Both salads feature tomatoes and cucumbers as their base, but they are prepared and served differently. In Turkish Shepherd Salad, the vegetables are finely chopped so every bite has a mix of everything. It’s dressed simply with olive oil, lemon juice, and sometimes a sprinkle of sumac, and traditionally does not include cheese or olives (though you can add them if you like).

Greek Salad (Horiatiki), on the other hand, is made with larger chunks of vegetables and usually includes feta cheese, olives, and oregano, giving it a heartier and more briny flavor.

Can I add cheese to Turkish Shepherd Salad?

While it is not traditional, you can sprinkle it with a handful of crumbled feta cheese.

What does Çoban mean in Turkish?

Çoban, pronounced as Chough-bahn, means Shepherd.

Other Turkish Salads You Might Like:

Turkish cuisine is known for similar, easy-to-make salads like this one that you can make during the peak tomato season. A few of my favorites are:

  • Summer tomatoes mixed in with white beans and red onions, Piyaz (Turkish White Bean Salad) is yet another simple salad 
  • At every kebab restaurant in Turkey, you’ll find a side of ezme, and my version shows you how to make this authentic “Turkish salsa” at home with just a few simple ingredients.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/feed/ 0
Turkish Ezme https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-ezme/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-ezme/#respond Mon, 25 Aug 2025 18:22:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82987 What Is Turkish Ezme? Ezme is a finely chopped Turkish tomato salad or dip that you can make in 10…]]>

What Is Turkish Ezme?

Ezme is a finely chopped Turkish tomato salad or dip that you can make in 10 minutes. Today, I’m sharing my mom’s version, along with the tips I’ve learned from her, to make it authentically spicy or more gentle.

This year, I made it my mission to share some of my favorite kebab recipes, and you simply can’t talk about kebabs without mentioning their ultimate pairing: Turkish ezme

Turkish ezme on an oval plate from the top view.

Pronounced exactly as it looks, this bright tomato salad (or dip) is one of the most authentic dishes you’ll find alongside kebabs in Turkey.

Often described as a Turkish “salsa” by those trying it for the first time, for those of us who grew up with this simple dish, Turkish ezme is so much more. It’s refreshing, a little spicy, and the perfect companion not only to kebabs but to any grilled meats.

Originating from the regions best known for their kebabs, Gaziantep, Urfa, Adana, and Mardin, Turkish ezme is a staple that’s deeply woven into the kebab tradition. Each region puts its own spin on it; Gaziantep’s version (referred to as Antep Ezme) is usually spicier, while Urfa’s might lean more tomato-forward.

If you’ve ever been to a kebab restaurant, you’ll know what I mean. The moment you order, they don’t ask whether you’d like ezme on the side. They just bring it, often with a side of lavash or pita bread for scooping, along with other staples like cacik (pronounced ja-juk, aka the Turkish cousin of tzatziki) and hummus. It’s part of the ritual, and to me, it’s as essential as the kebab itself.

Traditional Turkish ezme is made with finely chopped onions, ripe tomatoes, and peppers mixed with red pepper paste, lemon juice, and a handful of spices. 

Depending on how it’s prepared, it can be spicy (called Acılı Ezme) or more mild if you remove the seeds of the peppers or cut back on the red pepper flakes.

Ingredients You’ll Need & Why They Matter

The ingredients in Turkish Ezme dip are simple, fresh, and rooted in the flavors of the Eastern Mediterranean. While it uses everyday ingredients, there are some nuances that I’d like to share to ensure your version is as close to the original.

Ingredients for the recipe with text on each ingredient.

Yellow Onion: Traditional Ezme is made with yellow or white onions. At first, a whole onion may seem like a lot, but once it’s finely chopped and mixed in, it melts into the salad and gives just the right balance. 

While not traditional, red onion would also work, but it would have a slightly sweeter flavor.

Garlic: The authentic version of this Turkish dipping sauce does not use garlic, but my mom always did, so I am following in her footsteps. That small tweak is what makes my family’s version unique. It can be omitted if you are a purist.

Kosher Salt: I use kosher salt not only to flavor the overall ezme but also to soften the chopped onion and garlic. It also helps mellow their sharp, raw flavors.

Tomatoes: Authentic Turkish ezme is traditionally made with tomatoes from the Southeastern region of Turkey. Because of the hot, dry climate, those tomatoes are less juicy than what we often find here in the US.

For the best results, use firm, not overly ripe, tomatoes such as Roma, heirloom, or even cherry tomatoes. Whatever you choose, it’s important to remove the seeds.

Ezme should be juicy enough to scoop up with bread but not watery. If taking the seeds out feels like too much work, you can chop the tomatoes finely and strain them briefly through a fine mesh sieve to get rid of the excess liquid.

In the winter months, when good tomatoes are harder to come by, some people turn to canned whole peeled tomatoes. While that can work in a pinch, I find the taste of fresh tomatoes makes the biggest difference in capturing the true spirit of ezme.

Green Peppers: The authentic recipe uses Turkish sivri biber. The name literally means “pointed pepper,” and that’s exactly what it looks like: long, thin, and tapering to a point. 

Since I cannot get my hands on sivri biber here in the US, I use Anaheim, jalapeno, or serranos as an alternative. I remove seeds to keep the spice levels mild, but if you prefer yours spicy (and want to make an acili ezme recipe, as we say in Turkish), feel free to keep some.

Red Pepper Paste (or Tomato Paste): Red pepper paste is yet another traditional ingredient used in most kebab and meze recipes. I buy mine online. Tukas’s red pepper paste is my favorite. However, tomato paste is a good substitute.

Lemon Juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice is the best, but if bottled juice is all you have on hand, that would work in a pinch.

Fresh Herbs: I kept the recipe simple and only used fresh parsley, but my mom always added a few tablespoons of chopped fresh mint and dill in addition to parsley. If you are growing your own herbs, this is a fantastic recipe to put them to good use.

Sumac: A sprinkle of sumac is the finishing touch for this Turkish salad. I buy sumac online, but you can find it in the Middle Eastern/Mediterranean section of your grocery store. If you can’t get your hands on it, you can omit it. Your salad will still taste great.

Urfa Chili Pepper (or Aleppo Pepper or Red Pepper Flakes): For a smoky finish, use the traditional Urfa chili (Urfa biber). If you prefer a bit more straightforward, less smoky, bright finish, use Aleppo chili (Pul biber). If you do not have either of those, a pinch of any red pepper flakes you have on hand would also work.

Optional Add Ins:

Classic Turkish ezme is usually made with the ingredients I listed above, but depending on the region and sometimes the creativity of the chef, you will find different variations. The add-ins below are not traditional in every version, but they are wonderful ways to build on the base and make it your own.
Pomegranate Molasses (optional): You’ll often see restaurants finish off this Turkish red sauce with a drizzle of pomegranate molasses, especially if they are serving it as a part of a meze platter. 

While it is an optional ingredient in this recipe, if you are into Mediterranean cooking, I highly recommend investing in a bottle. It provides a unique depth, a fruity tartness that can’t be replicated with just lemon juice.

When shopping for pomegranate molasses, look for a brand that lists only one ingredient: pomegranate concentrate. That way, you’ll get the purest taste without added sugar or preservatives. The one I always buy online is Eastanbul.

Olive Oil: A tablespoon (or two) of olive oil drizzled at the last minute makes it richer. I recommend an extra virgin olive oil that is mild in flavor, such as Garcia de la Cruz.

Walnuts: A close cousin of Turkish ezme is a dish called Gavurdağı Salatası. In some parts of Turkey, it’s common to add a handful of chopped walnuts, which makes the salad richer and adds a pleasant crunch. You can mix them in with the vegetables or simply sprinkle them on top as a garnish.

Pomegranate Seeds: For a beautiful pop of color, a juicy burst of sweet-tart flavor, and a delicate crunch that makes the dish feel even more special, you can add (2 tablespoons) pomegranate seeds.

How to Make Turkish Ezme?

Making this authentic recipe is surprisingly simple, and it all starts with fresh, high-quality ingredients. This Turkish dip gets its signature texture from chopping everything very finely by hand, which gives the salad its unique, crushed consistency. Here is how I make it in my kitchen:

Person chopping onions.

Step 1 – Mince and Soften the Aromatics: On a large cutting board, finely chop the onion and garlic. Sprinkle them with kosher salt and gently knead the mixture with your hands.
Adding the salt not only helps soften the raw onions but also mellow their sharpness. Transfer the mixture to a medium-size mixing bowl.

A collage of images showing of the cutting tomatoes and peppers.

Step 2 – Add the Fresh Vegetables: Using a sharp knife, carefully remove the seeds from the tomatoes and chop them finely. If you’d rather not fuss with seeding, chop them and give them a quick press through a fine mesh sieve to remove the extra liquid.

Next, remove the seeds from your peppers and chop them as finely as possible. When cutting peppers, I highly recommend wearing gloves if you have them. The oils can cause a burning sensation on your hands and sting really badly if you accidentally touch your eyes.

Transfer the tomatoes and the peppers to the bowl. Some cooks use a food processor for convenience, but I find it’s easy to over-process and end up with more of a puree of vegetables. I think hand chopping is worth the effort, especially if you are looking for the most authentic version of this Turkish red sauce.

Person mixing the ingredients for ezme in a bowl.

Step 3 – Mix in the Flavorings: Stir in the red pepper paste (or tomato paste), lemon juice, chopped parsley, sumac, and Urfa chili flakes (if using).

Step 4 – Thoroughly Combine: Using a large spoon, gently mix everything together until all the ingredients are well incorporated and evenly coated. Don’t rush this step, as ezme should feel like one unified mix, not separate vegetables.

Step 5 – Finish and Serve: You can serve it straight from the bowl, but if you want to do it the way we do it in Turkey, then transfer it to a small to medium-sized oval plate. Drizzle with pomegranate molasses or olive oil (if using) and serve right away, ideally with some warm pita or lavash on the side.

Make Ahead and Storage Tips

Make Ahead: This Turkish dip actually tastes even better after it has rested. I often make it a few hours in advance and let it chill in the fridge so the flavors can deepen and meld.

Keep in mind that the juices will settle as they sit, so you may have to drain them before serving.

Storage: Leftover ezme keeps well for 2-3 days when stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Just be sure to give it a good stir before serving, and again, drain the juices as needed.

Freezing: This dish is best when enjoyed fresh, so I do not recommend freezing it as it will lose its signature texture when thawed.

Expert Tips from My Turkish Kitchen

Use a fine mince when chopping by hand: The secret to ezme’s classic texture is how finely everything is chopped. You don’t want big chunks in there. Take your time when chopping; it is part of what makes this recipe so good.

Dealing with excess juice: Earlier, I mentioned removing the seeds from the tomatoes to get the authentic texture that ezme is known for. But if you don’t mind some extra juice, that’s perfectly fine too. It will still taste fresh and delicious.

Using a food processor: My mom would probably turn in her grave if she saw me recommending a food processor when making ezme. Traditionally, everything is chopped by hand, and I still believe that’s the best way to get the right texture. That said, I know it can be a real time-saver, especially if you’re making a big batch.

If you do decide to use one, here’s what I recommend:

  • Start with the harder vegetables (onions, garlic, peppers) and chop them finely before adding the softer tomatoes.
  • Once you add the tomatoes, use short pulses instead of running the machine continuously. This helps you avoid ending up with a puree and keeps that slightly crushed consistency that makes ezme special.

Make it your own: Once you’ve made the basic recipe I shared below, try creating your version by adding a bit more heat (there is a reason people ask for ‘acili ezme’, the spicy version of this dish) or incorporating some of the optional ingredients I mentioned above.

How to Serve Turkish Ezme (The Ultimate Kebab Side Dish)

Ezme is one of those dishes that goes with almost everything. While it’s a classic alongside kebabs, its fresh, tangy flavor also makes it a great match for other Mediterranean favorites, from grilled meats to mezze platters.

  • With Kebabs or Grilled Meats: Ezme is the ultimate side to dishes like Adana Kebab or Chicken Kebab. Its acidity and spice help balance the richness of the meat, which is exactly why it’s such a common pairing in Turkey.
  • Part of a Meze Platter: Add it to a Mediterranean-inspired mezze platter alongside hummus, baba ganoush, and muhammara. Don’t forget the lavash, Turkish pide bread, or pita bread (or pita chips) for scooping! This dish is meant for sharing.
  • As a Spread or Sandwich Topping: Use leftover ezme as a spread for sandwiches or wraps the next day. It’s especially good on my Grilled Lamb Burgers, adding a bright, tangy kick that makes them even more special.
Spicy ezme served on an oval plate from the top view.
Print

Turkish Ezme Recipe

This authentic Turkish Ezme is a refreshing tomato and pepper salad that pairs perfectly with kebabs or grilled meats. Quick, fresh, and versatile. Vegan, no-cook, and gluten-free recipe.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 73kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 yellow onion medium size
  • 1 clove garlic finely minced
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 4 medium tomatoes
  • 2 green peppers Anaheim, jalapeño, or serrano, seeded
  • 1 tablespoon Turkish red pepper paste or tomato paste
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped
  • 1 tablespoon sumac
  • ¼ teaspoon Urfa chili Aleppo pepper, or red pepper flakes (optional)
  • 2 tablespoons pomegranate molasses optional

Instructions

  • On a large cutting board, finely chop onion and garlic. Sprinkle with kosher salt and knead gently to soften. Transfer to a large bowl.
    Person chopping onions for ezme.
  • Remove the seeds of your tomatoes and give them a fine chop. Alternatively, you can chop them first and strain through a fine mesh strainer to remove the juices. Transfer the tomatoes to the bowl.
    Person chopping tomatoes and peppers on a cutting board.
  • Chop the seeded peppers finely and add them to the bowl.
  • Stir in the red pepper paste, lemon juice, parsley, sumac, and chili flakes (if using). Mix well to combine.
    Person mixing ezme salad ingredients in a bowl.
  • If using, drizzle with pomegranate molasses and serve*.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 2 to 2 1/2 cups of ezme, which is ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: Leftovers will keep well for 2-3 days when stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator.
  • *Let it rest before serving: It is optional, but if you have the time, chill it in the fridge for about 30 minutes before serving. This gives the ingredients a chance to mingle and develop deeper flavor. Just keep in mind that it will release some of its juices as it sits, so you may want to spoon out the excess liquid before bringing it to the table.
  • Adjusting the spiciness: If you prefer your ezme to be on the milder side, I recommend taking the time to remove all of the seeds of your peppers and avoid using red pepper flakes.

Nutrition

Calories: 73kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.5g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 624mg | Potassium: 512mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 1623IU | Vitamin C: 77mg | Calcium: 34mg | Iron: 1mg

FAQ’s

Is ezme spicy?

Ezme has a gentle heat, but you can easily control the spice level. If you prefer it mild (or not spicy at all), take the time to remove all of the seeds of your peppers and omit using red pepper flakes.

How does Acılı ezme vary by region?

In Turkey, every region puts its own spin on ezme. In Gaziantep, it’s usually spicier, in Urfa it leans more tomato-forward, and in Adana it often includes extra pepper paste. My mom’s version here is closest to what you would find in kebab restaurants across the country.

Can I make it less acidic?

Absolutely. If you’re sensitive to acidity, try reducing the amount of fresh lemon juice or skipping the pomegranate molasses. It will still taste fresh and delicious.

How long does Turkish ezme last in the fridge?

As long as it is stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator, it should still be fresh for up to 3 days.

Other Turkish Salads You Might Like:

If you’re already convinced to make this Turkish ezme salad recipe, you’re already on your way to creating a fantastic feast. Here are a few more fresh and delicious Turkish salad recipes to serve alongside your grilled meats:

  • My go-to Turkish summer salad, Piyaz, is A zesty and refreshing salad made with white beans, red onions, tomatoes, and parsley, all tossed in a simple lemon-olive oil dressing. It’s a perfect complement to rich, grilled meats.
  • For a simple side salad that will pretty much work with any grilled meat and vegetable, look no further than my Turkish Shepherd Salad.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-ezme/feed/ 0
Harissa Salmon https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-salmon/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-salmon/#respond Wed, 20 Aug 2025 16:24:09 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82909 My love for Sockeye Salmon started after a trip to Copper River in Alaska, where I had the chance to…]]>

My love for Sockeye Salmon started after a trip to Copper River in Alaska, where I had the chance to see how local fishers catch salmon during the short but intense fishing season. 

Ever since then, as soon as the Sockeye season starts, I begin thinking about how to make the most of it. This recipe is one of my favorite ways. It combines my love for harissa with the fatty richness of the salmon. Not to mention, it is a fantastic Mediterranean weeknight dinner.

Plus, it’s incredibly easy to prepare. Just mix the glaze, spread it on, and roast. It’s the kind of dish that feels a little fancy but fits perfectly into a busy weeknight.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You do not need a long list of ingredients to make this honey harissa salmon, and while you might have a few of them on hand, harissa is the one you may need to pick up or make from scratch. 

Ingredients for the recipe with text on the image for each ingredient.

You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are my notes on the key ingredients and why they make such a difference:

Harissa: Thanks to social media, harissa, a spicy and smooth chili sauce originating in Tunisia, is having a moment right now. And I have to say, it is for a good reason because it is delicious. 

As a little trivia, most versions of harissa you find at markets are the Moroccan version of this North African sauce, mixed in with other ingredients such as red peppers, preserved lemons, etc., compared to the original recipe made with dried chili peppers, olive oil, garlic, and spices.

Regardless of the version of harissa you use, in my opinion, it is the perfect spicy sauce for salmon.

And, when it comes to harissa for this spicy baked salmon recipe, you have a few options:

  • Homemade from scratch: You can follow my Harissa Sauce recipe for a homemade version, which takes about 45 minutes to make (with just 10 minutes of hands-on time).
  • Homemade from harissa powder: You can also make your own harissa spice blend (or buy it at the store) and turn that powder into a paste.
  • Store-bought: Or, you can buy a jar at grocery stores like Trader Joe’s and Whole Foods, in their “international,” “Mediterranean,” or “ethnic” sections. I tested this recipe with both NY Shuk and Mina, and while they both worked well, my husband and I thought NY Shuk’s preserved lemon harissa had a superior taste.

Still, regardless of the brand, keep in mind that spice levels vary, so give it a taste first and adjust the amount, especially if you’re serving kids. 

I’ve tested this recipe with both store-bought and homemade harissa, and while both work, if you have the time, I recommend making your own. It not only tastes better but also allows you to control the spice level.

Salmon: I like to use fresh wild salmon, especially Sockeye, available May through September. However, while wild-caught is my go-to, farm-raised can also be used. 

If you can’t get your hands on fresh salmon, you can use frozen salmon, but be sure to thaw it before using.

You can use Atlantic or Pacific salmon, and if you want to treat yourself and don’t mind spending a bit extra, king salmon is an amazing choice. Other options, such as Sockeye and Coho, are also excellent. 

You can cook a whole fillet or use pre-cut portions, just aim for center-cut pieces so they are an even thickness and cook at the same rate. Remember that thickness can vary, so you may need to adjust the cooking time.

Finally, you can use skin-on or skinless salmon; it is totally a personal preference.

Honey: Honey is my secret ingredient here, so don’t skip it. Just a tablespoon of it helps balance the heat coming from harissa, the fattiness from salmon, and the acid from lemon slices.

And in case you are wondering, it doesn’t make the whole dish sweet. Rather, it is there to tame the spiciness and offer a surprising sweet pop of flavor.

Olive oil: As it is with any recipe that uses just a few basic ingredients, using a good quality extra virgin olive oil is highly recommended in this baked salmon recipe. Choose one that you like the taste of. 

Lately, my go-to has been Garcia de la Cruz, but feel free to use any extra virgin olive oil you enjoy.

Lemon: We use a small amount of lemon juice in this spiced salmon to brighten up the harissa and lemon slices to garnish on top as it is baking in the oven. 

You can use lime instead, but keep in mind that the finished dish will have a slightly more tangy and aromatic flavor.

Garlic: In my opinion, fresh minced garlic is the best option, but for a milder flavor, you can also use a teaspoon of garlic powder instead.

Spices: I used kosher salt and black pepper, but you can add your favorites like paprika, cumin, coriander, or a pinch of cayenne for extra heat. Though I would refrain from incorporating too many spices, as we want the spicy harissa to shine. 

Fresh herbs: I used a small amount of fresh parsley, mostly for color and a pop of freshness. However, other herbs like fresh dill or cilantro can also be used for a slightly different but just as delicious flavor.

How to Make Harissa Salmon: Step-by-Step Instructions

Cooking salmon with a harissa glaze can look quite simple, but a few small details will make sure it turns out tender, flaky, and perfectly balanced between sweet and spicy. Here is how I do it and why each step matters:

Step 1 – Preheat your oven and prep the pan: Set your oven to 375°F and line a baking sheet with parchment paper to make cleanup easier and prevent the glaze from sticking or burning. This temperature is ideal for salmon because it cooks the fish through but without drying it out in only 12-14 minutes.

A collage of images showing of the making of the dressing.

Step 2 – Make the glaze: In a small bowl, whisk together the harissa, honey, olive oil, lemon juice, minced garlic, salt, and pepper. I like to mix the liquids first, then add the seasonings so the honey blends in smoothly. The smoother the glaze, the more evenly it will spread over the salmon, giving you a seasoned bite each time. 

Be sure to give it a taste and adjust as needed. If your harissa is very spicy, feel free to add a small amount of honey or lemon juice to balance the heat and adjust the seasoning as needed.

A collage of images showing how to prepare salmon to bake.

Step 3 – Prep the salmon: Pat the salmon dry on both sides with paper towels to remove that extra moisture. This is an important step in that it helps the glaze stick well on the fish and allows it to roast rather than steam, resulting in a nice, lightly crisp salmon.

Images showing honey harissa salmon before and after it is baked.

Step 4 – Glaze generously: Next, place the salmon on the baking sheet and spread the harissa mixture over the top, making sure to get the sides too. You want it fully coated so every bite is seasoned. 

I like to finish with a few lemon slices on top before baking, because as they cook, they release a bit of juice that soaks into the glaze. This adds a pop of brightness that balances the harissa and makes it visually appealing.

Step 5 – Bake: Place your salmon in the oven and let it bake for about 12 to 14 minutes. You will know it is ready when the thickest, center part of the fillet is between 125 and 135°F on an instant-read thermometer. Be sure to check in the middle and not the thinner ends, since those cook faster and can give you a misleading reading. 

We are keeping the temperature gentle and the cook time short because the goal is soft, moist salmon that flakes apart with just a fork. Overcooking can dry it out quickly, so keep an eye on the clock. With that being said, if you prefer a more well-done fillet, bake for about 15-17 minutes.

Step 6 – Garnish and serve: When the salmon comes out of the oven, top it with fresh parsley for freshness. I also like to put extra lemon wedges on the table so everyone can squeeze fresh lemon juice over the salmon.

Expert Tips

Even though this harissa salmon recipe is quick to put together, a few small details can make a big difference in how juicy and perfectly cooked your fish turns out. Here are my notes from years of cooking salmon and testing this recipe:

Remove salmon and harissa from the fridge before use: Remove the salmon from the fridge and let it sit at room temperature for about 10 minutes before cooking. Starting with cold salmon can cause it to cook unevenly. This also applies to harissa, especially if you are using a store-bought brand. It spreads more easily when it is at room temperature.

No need to cover with foil: Some recipes suggest covering the salmon with foil, but since this one cooks quickly, leaving it uncovered helps the glaze caramelize while still keeping the salmon tender. 

Use a meat thermometer: This is the best way to avoid dry salmon. Aim for 125 to 135°F in the thickest, middle part of the fillet. If you are using a different type of salmon, you may need to adjust the cooking time depending on its thickness. 

If you don’t have a thermometer, you can gently peek in the middle with a fork. It should flake easily and look cooked through, not raw or pinkish.

Don’t overcook: Salmon cooks pretty quickly, and overcooking is the fastest way to dry it out. By using a gentle oven temperature and baking it just long enough, you end up with soft, flaky fish that comes apart easily with a fork and stays nice and juicy.

Coat all sides with the glaze: Take a minute to make sure to cover every bit of the salmon with the harissa and honey mixture, not just the top. As it bakes, the mixture caramelizes, and with the roasted lemon on top, it’s absolutely delicious.

What To Serve With This Spicy Salmon Recipe?

One of my favorite things about this spicy baked salmon recipe is how easy it is to turn it into a complete meal. You can keep it light with a fresh salad, add something hearty like a grain, or drizzle it with a creamy sauce. Here are a few ideas:

Grains: Light, citrusy grains go so well with the heat from the harissa. My Lemon Orzo or Lemon Quinoa add a nice freshness and are great for soaking up that extra glaze.

Salads: If you are looking to keep the Mediterranean-theme going, pair it with either my Mediterranean Pasta Salad or Quinoa Tabbouleh. If you want something cooling to balance the spice, my Creamy Cucumber Salad is always a hit.

Sauce: A drizzle of Yogurt Dill Sauce on top or on the side is the easiest way to add creaminess and a fresh, herby touch that works perfectly with the spicy-sweet salmon.

How To Store and Reheat?

If you have leftovers, you can definitely enjoy this salmon the next day. It’s great cold over a salad, or you can gently reheat it so it stays moist.

Storage: Once the salmon has cooled, store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. If possible, keep it whole instead of flaking it apart, as this helps it retain more moisture when reheated.

Reheating: Salmon dries out quickly, so it is best to reheat it low and slow. Here, you have two options:

  • In the oven: Pop it in a low heat oven (275 °F / 135 °C) for about 7-10 minutes or until heated thoroughly.
  • In a skillet: Place the salmon in a non-stick skillet over low heat with a splash of water to create a little steam to keep the fish moist as it reheats. Keep a close eye on it as it warms very quickly.

Make Ahead: This recipe comes together so quickly that I wouldn’t bother making it ahead. You’ll get the best texture and flavor when it’s fresh from the oven.

Freezing: I don’t recommend freezing cooked harissa salmon. The texture of the fish changes, and it loses that soft, flaky quality we love.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Harissa salmon fresh out of the oven garnished with lemon slices.
Print

Harissa Salmon Recipe

This baked harissa salmon recipe is spread with a sweet and spicy honey-harissa glaze for a quick and easy dinner you can make in under 30 minutes.
Course Dinner, Seafood
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 14 minutes
Total Time 24 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 309kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoons harissa homemade or store-bought
  • 1 tablespoon honey
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice or lime juice
  • 1 garlic clove minced
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 ½ lbs salmon filet skin on or off*
  • 1 lemon sliced
  • Fresh parsley leaves for garnish

Instructions

  • Preheat your oven to 375 °F (191 °C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Into a bowl, place harissa, honey, olive oil, lemon juice, minced garlic, salt, and black pepper. Whisk until fully combined. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Set it aside.
    Person making the harissa sauce for the salmon.
  • Pat-dry the salmon on both sides using a few sheets of parchment paper. Transfer it to the prepared baking sheet.
  • Spread the harissa mixture evenly on the salmon, ensuring that all the top and sides are fully covered. There is no need to spread harissa at the bottom. Top it off with a few slices of lemon.
    Photos showing the salmon being prepared for baking.
  • Bake in the preheated oven for 12-14 minutes or until your salmon registers between 125 to 135 °F.
    Photos showing harissa salmon before and after it is baked.
  • Garnish with parsley and serve it with lemon slices/wedges on the side.

Notes

  • Salmon: I prefer using wild Alaskan salmon (such as Sockeye Salmon or King Salmon) in most of my salmon recipes, and this one is no exception. However, you can use any salmon you can get your hands on. If it is thawed, be sure to fully thaw it before spreading it with harissa. Also, keep in mind that the baking time could change based on the thickness of your salmon.
  • A Whole filet or slices? Both would work. I usually shop for salmon in Costco, and they sell it as a filet. However, sliced salmon can also be used. 
  • Skin on or off: Both would work.
  • Storage: While this dish tastes best fresh out of the oven leftovers can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 309kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 34g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 94mg | Sodium: 517mg | Potassium: 924mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 151IU | Vitamin C: 18mg | Calcium: 32mg | Iron: 2mg

FAQs

Can I substitute harissa?

In a pinch, you can use Turkish red pepper paste (biber salcasi) or even sriracha. Just know they are not quite the same. Sriracha is tangier and sweeter, while harissa has a deeper, spicier kick that is fantastic in marinades, dips, soups, and roasted meats. If you swap, the overall flavor will be a little different, but still delicious.

How do I know when my salmon is done?

If you have a meat thermometer, aim for 125 to 135°F in the thickest, middle section of the fish. If you do not have one, use a fork to gently peek inside. The salmon should flake easily and look opaque, not raw or too pink in the center.

How spicy is harissa salmon?

The spice levels depend on the harissa you are using. If you are making it home, you can adjust the spice levels by removing most of the seeds from the chilies. If you are buying harissa from the store, choose a brand that suits your taste and spiciness preference.

Can I grill harissa salmon?

You sure can. I usually use my Grilled Salmon Recipe as a guide when grilling. Simply preheat your grill to 350 °F/177 °C. Place salmon, skin side down, and cook uncovered for 3 minutes or until it releases easily. Carefully flip and cook the other side for another 3 minutes or until the thickest part of it registers 125 °F to 135 °C.

Can I make this recipe with frozen salmon?

You sure can, but be sure to thaw your salmon fully before using it in the recipe.

Can I make harissa salmon in the air fryer?

Yes, you can. For best results, use 2-3 salmon fillets instead of a whole side of salmon. Preheat your air fryer to 400°F and cook the fillets for about 5 minutes. Then, carefully spread the salmon with harissa paste over the top and continue cooking for another 2-3 minutes, or until the salmon is cooked through and flakes easily. Just keep in mind that cooking time may vary depending on the thickness of your fish.

Other Harissa Recipes You Might Like:

If you love harissa and are in need of more creative ideas to use it, these recipes are worth a try:

  • My Harissa Vinaigrette is a quick CAVA-inspired dressing that you can drizzle over salads, grain bowls, grilled meats, or roasted veggies.
  • For a simple weeknight dinner, Grilled Harissa Chicken pairs tender chicken with the bold, smoky kick of harissa and comes together with just 20 minutes of hands-on time.
  • When you’re craving a sweet-and-spicy combo (similar to this harissa honey salmon recipe), my Harissa Honey Chicken combines harissa with honey, garlic, and lemon for roasted caramelized chicken thighs.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-salmon/feed/ 0
Grilled Flank Steak Salad https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-flank-steak-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-flank-steak-salad/#respond Tue, 12 Aug 2025 20:16:42 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82744 During the summer months, I try to avoid turning on the stove or oven. If I can make it on…]]>

During the summer months, I try to avoid turning on the stove or oven. If I can make it on the grill, that is where you will find me, especially when peak summer produce is at its best. This marinated flank steak salad is the perfect way to celebrate the season in one big fresh bowl. 

Grilled marinated flank steak salad from the top view.

For years, I grilled flank steak with just salt and pepper, but lately, I have been marinating it for a few hours, which really amps up the flavor. The rest is simple: toss in whatever summer produce you have on hand, such as tomatoes, corn, or radishes, and make it your own. But really, take my recipe as a place to start and make it your own. 

It is a fantastic summer salad recipe you will want to make again and again.

Simple Ingredients You’ll Need

You’ll find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here are a few notes you need to bring this grilled steak salad to life: 

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Flank Steak: 

I usually use about 1½ pounds of flank steak. When buying flank steak to use in this salad, ask your butcher to give you a piece that is well marbled for the best flavor. 

You can certainly keep it simple with a little salt, pepper, and olive oil, but I opted to use my Flank Steak Marinade, which only takes about an hour to work its magic. 

Salad Dressing: 

I’m using my Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette for this recipe because it pairs beautifully with the grilled steak and vegetables. If you’re in the mood for something lighter, my Lemon Vinaigrette is a great option too. You can even make the dressing a day ahead and keep it in the fridge until you’re ready to serve.

For the Salad:

Lettuce: I like using romaine for the crunch, but any salad greens you have on hand will work. Arugula or a simple spring mix are great options, too. Just make sure they’re thoroughly washed, dried, and chopped into bite-sized pieces. 

Corn: I grill my corn on the cob right before grilling the flank steak, but any corn, whether it is thawed frozen corn or drained and rinsed canned corn, would work in this recipe.

Tomatoes: I like using cherry tomatoes, but any tomato will work. Roma, heirloom, or any ripe summer tomato is a good option. If you’re using cherry tomatoes, slice them in half or into quarters if they’re too big. For other tomatoes, cut them into bite-sized pieces so they’re easy to mix into the salad.

Radishes:  I use regular red radishes, but any variety works. Just slice them thinly so the acid in the dressing can cut through their bitterness and give them a lightly pickled taste.

Scallions: I opted for thinly sliced green onions (including both the white and green parts) for their milder flavor. But if you’re after something with more bite, thinly sliced red onions are a great option.

Avocado: Choose a ripe avocado. I recommend adding it just before serving so it stays fresh and does not turn brown. You can slice or cube it depending on your preference.

Cheese: I used fresh mozzarella for its mild flavors. If you can get your hands on them, fresh mozzarella pearls are ideal, but you can also buy a whole mozzarella and cut it into bite-sized cubes. 

Alternatively, for a bolder cheese option, crumbled goat cheese or blue cheese can also be used.

How To Make Grilled Flank Steak Salad?

This marinated flank steak salad recipe consists of two main parts: first, we marinate the flank steak, then we grill it and assemble the salad. I usually marinate the steak the night before so it’s ready to go, making this a perfect weeknight summer dinner. 

Below are the step-by-step instructions, along with helpful notes from my recipe testing:

Person making a flank steak salad and adding it into a bowl with the steak.

Step 1 – Make the Marinade: In a mixing bowl, combine all the marinade ingredients and whisk until smooth. I like to start with the wet ingredients first, then add the seasonings so everything blends evenly. Place the flank steak in a shallow glass dish or a resealable plastic bag. 

Pour the marinade over the surface, ensuring it’s evenly coated, then gently press or massage it in to allow the marinade to soak in. Cover and let it rest for at least 1 hour, or refrigerate up to overnight. Avoid marinating for more than 24 hours, as the acidity can break the meat down quite a bit and affect the texture.

Person making salad dressing and grilling the meat.

Step 2 – Make the Salad Dressing: In a small bowl, combine the balsamic vinegar, lemon juice, minced garlic, kosher salt, and pepper. Whisk to combine. Then, while whisking, slowly drizzle in the extra virgin olive oil until the dressing looks smooth and emulsified. Doing so helps the oil and vinegar come together without separating too quickly.

During my recipe testing, I’ve found that using a combination of balsamic vinegar and lemon juice gives the dressing a nice balance of depth and brightness, complementing the balsamic flavors in the steak marinade.

Step 3 – Grill the Steak: Preheat your grill to 500°F. High heat is key here because it sears the steak, creating those beautiful grill marks. Scrape the grates clean to remove any leftover bits so the meat can get even contact with the heat, then coat them generously with olive oil. Place the steak directly on the grill and cook for about 4 to 5 minutes per side for medium-rare. Use an instant-read thermometer (affiliate link) to check doneness and avoid overcooking, especially with lean cuts like flank steak.

If you’re not sure what temperature to aim for, here’s a quick guide to help you cook your steak just the way you like it:

  • Medium-rare: 130 to 135°F (3 to 4 minutes per side)
  • Medium: 140 to 145°F (4 to 5 minutes per side)
  • Medium-well: 150 to 155°F (5 to 6 minutes per side)

I usually aim for medium-rare to keep the steak juicy and tender. Going much past medium can cause it to dry out.

Step 4 – Rest the Steak: Transfer the steak to a platter and cover with foil. Let it rest for at least 10 minutes while you prepare the salad. This allows the juices to redistribute so they stay in the meat when sliced, keeping every bite juicy and tender.

A collage of images showing the dressing of the salad and the slicing of the grilled steak.

Step 5 – Assemble the Salad: In a large salad bowl, combine the chopped romaine lettuce, grilled corn, cherry tomatoes, thinly sliced radishes, thinly sliced green onions, avocado (sliced or cubed), and cubed mozzarella. 

That being said, if you are assembling this salad a few hours in advance, it is best to add the avocado at the last minute to prevent it from browning. The same goes for the dressing; it is best to drizzle it right before serving to keep the salad crispy and fresh.

Taste and adjust the seasoning as needed. Sometimes all it needs is a pinch of salt or a touch more acidity to bring everything together.

Step 6 – Slice the Steak: Slice the steak thinly (about ½ inch thick) against the grain. This means cutting across the natural lines you see running through the meat. Those lines are muscle fibers, and cutting across them makes each bite softer and easier to chew. 

The steak salad on a large plate from the top view.

Step 7 – Arrange and serve: Arrange the meat on top of the salad and serve while still warm.

Expert Tips for the Best Results

  • Plan ahead for grilled corn: If you’re planning to grill your corn, be prepared to set aside a bit more time, as it takes longer to grill corn than flank steak. Corn usually needs 10-15 minutes on the grill (depending on size), while flank steak takes about 5-7 minutes. I recommend starting with the corn first, so everything finishes around the same time.
  • Dressing and greens: The beauty of this salad is that it can be made with whatever salad greens you have on hand. I use romaine lettuce because I find that it gives a nice bite and crunch to the overall salad. It is also able to withstand the salad dressing for a longer time. 
    If you choose to use more delicate salad greens like arugula or spring mix, it is best to drizzle the salad with the dressing right before serving to prevent soggy greens.
  • Avocado: Add avocado just before serving to keep it fresh and prevent it from browning.
  • Best Timing for Serving: I recommend making the salad (without the dressing) while the steak is resting. Dress the salad, give it a quick toss, and then slice the steak and place it right on top so it’s ready to serve.

How to Store Leftovers?

Storage: I always recommend storing the steak separately from the salad because once the greens sit with the dressing, they start to get soggy pretty quickly. 

If you know you’ll have leftovers, let everything come to room temperature first, then place the steak and the salad in separate airtight containers before popping them in the fridge. Both will keep well for up to 3 days.

Reheating (optional): You can enjoy this straight from the fridge, but if you’d rather have it warm, just reheat the steak on its own before adding it back to the salad. Right before serving, give the salad a good toss to redistribute everything, and if needed, add a pinch more seasoning since the juices tend to settle at the bottom and the greens can lose a bit of their seasoning as they sit.

FAQs

Can I use a different cut of steak?

Yes. Skirt steak is the closest substitute and works really well with this marinade. Sirloin is another great option if you prefer something a little thicker and more tender. Just keep in mind that cooking times will vary depending on the cut and thickness, so use an instant-read thermometer to get it just right.

Can I make this salad ahead of time?

You can prepare the components ahead of time, such as making the dressing and cooking the steak. I recommend storing everything separately and assembling the salad just before serving so the greens stay crisp and fresh.

What if I don’t have a grill for the steak?

You can cook flank steak in a hot cast-iron skillet on the stovetop or under the broiler in your oven. For the stovetop, sear it in a lightly oiled skillet for 3-5 minutes per side for medium-rare. For the oven, broil it on a rack set over a baking sheet for about 5-6 minutes per side, depending on your preferred doneness. Always let it rest for 5-10 minutes before slicing against the grain.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Flank Steak Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you’re a fan of this grilled flank steak salad, you’ll want to try these other flank steak recipes:

  • Switch up your usual taco night with my Flank Steak Tacos, pairing them with your favorite toppings and enjoying them on warm tortillas.
  • For a satisfying and comforting meal, my Chimichurri Steak Sandwich has juicy grilled steak with fresh chimichurri on soft bread for a lunch or dinner you’ll want to make on repeat.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Grilled flank steak salad with utensils on the side.
Print

Grilled Flank Steak Salad Recipe

This grilled flank steak salad is packed with tender marinated steak, crisp romaine, sweet grilled corn, creamy avocado, and fresh mozzarella. Tossed in a tangy balsamic dressing, it's a fresh, meal-worthy summer salad perfect for weeknights or backyard gatherings.
Course Dinner, Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Marinating Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 45 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 551kcal

Ingredients

For the flank steak marinade:

  • ¼ cup olive oil plus more to oil the grill grates
  • cup soy sauce
  • ¼ cup balsamic vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 2 tablespoons Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 tablespoon honey
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon sweet paprika
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 ½ lbs flank steak

For The Salad Dressing:

  • 3 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 garlic clove peeled and minced
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/2 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1/4 cup extra virgin olive oil

For The Salad:

  • 2 heads romaine lettuce rinsed, dried, and roughly chopped (about 6 cups)
  • 2 cups corn kernels grilled, or frozen, and thawed or canned and rinsed
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes cut in half
  • 3 small radishes sliced thinly
  • 3 scallions chopped (both white and green parts)
  • 1 ripe avocado sliced
  • 1 cup fresh mozzarella cheese cubed or crumbled goat cheese or blue cheese

Instructions

  • To make the marinade, grab a large enough container that can accommodate your flank steak and place ¼ cup of olive oil, ⅓ cup of soy sauce, ¼ cup of apple cider vinegar, 2 tablespoons of lemon juice, 2 tablespoons of Worcestershire sauce, 1 tablespoon of Dijon mustard, 1 tablespoon of honey, 3 cloves of minced garlic, 1 teaspoon of sweet paprika, ½ teaspoon of ground cumin, ½ teaspoon of kosher salt, ¼ teaspoon black pepper in it. Whisk until smooth.
    Flank steak marinade being poured into a bowl.
  • Cover and let it marinate in the fridge for at least an hour or overnight (no more than 24 hours.)
  • While the meat is marinating, make the salad dressing. In a small bowl, place 3 tablespoons of balsamic vinegar, 2 tablespoons of freshly squeezed lemon juice, 1 clove garlic, peeled and minced, 1 teaspoon kosher salt and 1/2 teaspoon freshly ground black pepper. Give it a whisk. While still whisking, slowly add the 1/4 cup of extra-virgin olive oil. Whisk until fully incorporated and smooth. Set it aside.
    A collage of images showing the dressing being made and the meat grilled.
  • To grill the steak, preheat a gas grill to 500 degrees °F. Scrape the grill grates and coat them generously with the oil.
  • Place the flank steak on the grill and cook for 3-4 minutes on each side for rare (internal temperature is 130 to 135 °F), 4-5 minutes on each side for medium (internal temperature is 136 to 145 °F), or 5-6 minutes on each side for medium-well (internal temperature is 146 to 155 °F).
  • When it reaches your desired doneness, transfer the grilled flank steak to a platter and cover it with foil. Let it rest while you prepare the salad.
  • To make the salad, place 6 cups of roughly chopped romaine lettuce, 2 cups of corn, 1 cup of chopped cherry tomatoes, 3 small sliced radishes, 3 thinly sliced green onions, 1 sliced avocado, and a cup of mozzarella pearls in a large salad bowl.
    Person adding the dressing over the salad and the steak is sliced.
  • Drizzle the dressing over the salad and toss to ensure that all of the ingredients are evenly coated. Add more seasoning to taste and adjust as needed.
  • Slice the steak against the grain (1/2-inch thick slices) and layer it over the salad just before serving.
    Grilled marinated flank steak salad from the top view.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 10 cups of salad that is ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storing leftovers: If you know you’ll have leftovers, I recommend storing the salad and the meat separately. If not, place the leftovers in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Corn: You can use any corn you have on hand. Frozen (and thawed), Canned (and drained) or grilled fresh corn would all work. If you are planning to grill your corn, I recommend setting aside a bit more time as it takes longer for corn to grill (compared to the flank steak).

Nutrition

Calories: 551kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 35g | Fat: 34g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Cholesterol: 83mg | Sodium: 1721mg | Potassium: 1358mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 18731IU | Vitamin C: 25mg | Calcium: 224mg | Iron: 6mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-flank-steak-salad/feed/ 0
Flank Steak Marinade https://foolproofliving.com/flank-steak-marinade/ https://foolproofliving.com/flank-steak-marinade/#comments Tue, 12 Aug 2025 20:13:41 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82742 I’ve been making flank steak for years, but it wasn’t until we bought our first gas grill a couple of…]]>

I’ve been making flank steak for years, but it wasn’t until we bought our first gas grill a couple of summers ago that I really started perfecting it. I was first drawn to this cut because it’s budget-friendly and cooks quickly, which makes it perfect for busy weeknights or casual weekend grilling.

Back then, I kept things simple with just salt and pepper. The steak was fine, but it never had that “wow” factor. That changed once I began experimenting with marinades, and the version you see here quickly became my go-to. 

Grilled flank steak sliced on a plate.

What makes this the best flank steak marinade is the balance of soy sauce, vinegar, Dijon mustard, and a touch of honey (or brown sugar). Paired with high heat and a quick cook time, it transforms this lean cut into a tender, juicy steak that people can hardly believe is flank steak.

Ingredients You’ll Need

The full list of ingredients is in the recipe card below, but after making this recipe countless times, I’ve gathered a few notes on what makes these key ingredients so important:

Ingredient for the recipe from the top view.

Olive oil: Use a good-quality extra virgin olive oil here. Nowadays, my favorite brand is Garcia de la Cruz (affiliate link) with its smooth and earthy flavor. You’ll also want to keep a little extra oil to grease your grill grates right before grilling to prevent the meat from sticking to the grill. 

Soy sauce: Soy sauce is the secret ingredient that gives the steak its deep, salty, savory, and umami kick. I’ve tried using just salt before, but soy sauce adds so much more depth. If you’re following a gluten-free diet, tamari or coconut aminos work just as well.

Apple Cider Vinegar: As the primary acid in this recipe, vinegar helps tenderize the meat. I use apple cider vinegar in this recipe, as it is commonly found in most households. However, balsamic vinegar or red wine vinegar would also work. Keep in mind, though, depending on the vinegar you use, that the flavor profile of your marinade will be slightly different.

For example, using an aged balsamic from Modena will give you a deeper, sweeter taste.

Lemon or lime juice: I recommend using freshly squeezed juice for the best taste. I usually go with lemon juice for its slightly tangier flavor, but lime juice works just as well. While freshly squeezed juice is best, in a pinch, bottled juice will work too.

Dijon mustard: When it comes to mustard, I like to use Dijon mustard for its strong, tangy flavors, but if you prefer a bit of texture in your marinade, you can also use grainy mustard. Yellow mustard will work in a pinch, though it has a milder taste.

Sweetener of your choice: A small amount of sugar helps balance the tangy and umami flavors of the marinade. I use honey in my recipe, but brown sugar would also work.  Either way, be sure to whisk it well so that it’s fully dissolved to prevent the sugar burning on the grill.

Fresh garlic cloves: For the best taste, I recommend using freshly minced garlic. But if you prefer a milder flavor, garlic powder works too.

Seasoning for Flank Steak: For the spices in this marinade, I’ve found that sweet paprika and ground cumin work best, but if you prefer a smokier flavor, you can swap in smoked paprika. You can also add fresh or dried herbs that complement the rest of your meal. Choose ones that echo the flavors in your side dishes for a harmonious pairing.

Flank steak: When buying flank steak, look for a cut that is well marbled and has a bright red color that looks fresh and moist. It is best to choose a flank steak that is even in thickness. My recipe calls for 1 ½ lbs of flank steak that is  ¾ to 1 inch thick, which is ideal for grilling.

How to Marinate Flank Steak? Step-by-Step Instructions

Marinating flank steak is one of the simplest ways to ensure it turns out tender and full of flavor. It really is as easy as whisking a few ingredients together in a large bowl and letting the steak soak up all that goodness.

Here’s exactly how I do it with some helpful tips on every step:

Flank steak marinade in a bowl and being poured over the meat.

Step 1 – Make the marinade: In a mixing bowl, combine olive oil, soy sauce, vinegar, lemon juice, Worcestershire sauce, Dijon mustard, honey, garlic, paprika, cumin, salt, and pepper. Whisk until everything is fully incorporated and the marinade looks smooth. 

I find it helps to start with the wet ingredients first, then add in the seasonings so everything blends evenly. This is especially helpful when using ingredients like honey or Dijon mustard, as it ensures they dissolve smoothly and don’t clump.

Step 2 – Add the steak: Use a large, shallow dish (ideally one with a tight-fitting lid) that’s big enough to hold your flank steak in a single layer so it can lie flat and be fully coated in the marinade. 

If you’re working with a larger cut or want less cleanup, a resealable plastic bag will work as well. Pour the marinade over the top, making sure the entire surface is covered.

I like to press the steak gently into the marinade to help it really soak in. If you’re using a plastic bag, seal it tightly and massage the marinade into the meat to distribute the liquid evenly. 

Marinated flank steak before and after it is grilled.

Step 3 – Cover and marinate: Cover your dish with a tight-fitting lid (or seal your bag). If you can plan ahead, marinating overnight in the fridge is my go-to, but even a quick 1-hour marinade will still give you good flavor. Depending on your schedule, here’s how I do both:

  • 1 Hour Marinade: If all you have is an hour, you can let it sit at room temperature on your kitchen counter, which helps take the chill off the meat, allowing it to cook more evenly later. 
  • Overnight Marinade (preferred method): If you can plan ahead, marinating it overnight in the fridge is even better. Just don’t go past 24 hours; the acids in the marinade will start to change the texture, and instead of tender, the meat can turn a little mushy.

How To Cook Marinated Flank Steak?

Once your steak is marinated and ready to go, it’s time to cook. While my preferred method for cooking is on the grill, I know that it is not always possible. The good news is that you can cook your marinated steak on the stove or in the oven.

Below are the steps for each method:

On The Grill

Step 1 – Preheat the grill: When it comes to grilling marinated beef flank steak, we’re aiming for high heat, around 500°F. You want that grill nice and hot so you get a good sear on the steak without overcooking the inside. 

While the grill heats up, give the grates a good scrape to remove any residue. Then, use a paper towel dipped in oil to coat the grates generously to prevent sticking and help you get those beautiful grill marks.

Step 2 – Prepare the steak: Remove the steak from the marinade, letting the excess drip off. We don’t want it soaking wet when it hits the grill, which can cause flare-ups and burn the outside before the inside cooks. 

As the first side cooks, you can spoon a little of the leftover marinade over the top to keep the uncooked side moist. However, once you flip the steak, you should discard any marinade that has been in contact with raw meat.

Step 3 – Grill: Place the steak directly on the grill and cook for about 4 to 5 minutes per side for medium-rare. The best way to determine if it has reached your ideal doneness is to use an instant-read thermometer (affiliate link). If you’re not sure what temperature to aim for, here’s a quick guide to help you cook your steak just the way you like it:

  • Medium-rare: 130 to 135°F internal temperature (3 to 4 minutes per side)
  • Medium: 140 to 145°F internal temperature (4 to 5 minutes per side)
  • Medium-well: 150 to 155°F internal temperature (5 to 6 minutes per side)

I usually go for a medium-rare to medium level of doneness with flank steak to keep it juicy and tender, but feel free to adjust based on your preference. Just remember, since it’s a lean cut, going much past medium can start to dry it out.

Step 4 – Rest before slicing: Once your steak is cooked to your liking, transfer it to a cutting board or platter and let it rest for about 5 to 10 minutes. This will give the juices time to redistribute, so when you slice into it, they stay in the meat instead of running out and keeping every bite juicy and tender.

In The Oven

I’ll be honest, my favorite way of cooking flank steak is on the grill, but let’s face it, sometimes grilling is not an option. The good news is that you can get a similar result using your oven’s broiler, and it’s just as easy.

Step 1 – Turn the broiler on: Set your oven to the “broil” setting on high. For the best results, place the oven rack in the upper third section, about 5-6 inches from the heat source.

Step 2 – Prepare the pan: Line a baking sheet with parchment paper (or aluminum foil), then set a wire rack over it. The rack is key because it allows hot air to circulate completely around the meat as it roasts, helping us create crispy edges and evenly cooked flank steak.

Step 3 – Broil: Remove the steak from the marinade and let the excess drip off before transferring it to your prepared sheet pan. Broil for 5-6 minutes on each side, or until it reaches your desired doneness. The best way to know when it’s ready is by inserting an instant-read thermometer into the thickest part of the meat. For a quick guide on what temperatures to aim for, see the doneness temperature chart in the grilling section above.

Step 4 – Rest and slice: When the cooking time is completed, transfer the steak to a plate, cover loosely with foil, and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before slicing.

On The Stove Top:

When it comes to cooking your marinated steak on the stove top, a cast-iron skillet works best as it retains heat very well. Simply:

Step 1 – Heat the skillet: Grab a large (10 or 12 inch) cast iron skillet and heat it over medium-high heat until sizzling hot. You can check if it is hot enough by spraying it with a drop of water. If it evaporates right away, it should be good to go.

Step 2 – Prepare the steak: Remove the marinated flank steak from the marinade, making sure to remove any excess. This is an important step in that excess liquid will steam the meat instead of searing it. I even recommend patting it dry with a few sheets of paper towels to make sure that it is as “dry” as possible.

Step 3 – Cook the steak: Transfer the steak to the skillet and sear for 3-4 minutes or until nicely browned. Flip the steak and cook for another 3-5 minutes, depending on the level of doneness you prefer.

Expert Tips:

Even though marinating flank steak is a simple process, a few small details can make all the difference in how tender and juicy your steak turns out. Below, I am sharing my notes from my recipe testing to help you make the best marinated flank steak:

  • Don’t put cold meat on the grill: If you’re marinating your flank steak overnight, take it out of the fridge 30-60 minutes before grilling. You don’t want to put super cold steak onto a hot grill, as it won’t sear properly, and the outside can overcook before the inside comes up to temperature.
  • Let the excess marinade drip off: Before cooking, I always let the steak rest for a moment over the bowl or dish to let any extra marinade drip off. Too much liquid on the surface can cause the steak to steam instead of sear, especially if you’re grilling or using a cast-iron skillet. Also, since the marinade contains acid, putting the steak on the grill while it’s still dripping can cause flare-ups. Letting it drip off helps avoid all that and gives you better control over the cook.
  • Aim for medium doneness: Since flank steak is a thinner, leaner cut, I usually aim to cook it to medium. This gives you a tender, juicy result without drying it out. If you go much past that, it can start to get tough and chewy.
  • Let it rest before slicing: Just like with any steak, let it rest for 5 to 10 minutes on a cutting board before slicing. This allows the juices to redistribute throughout the meat instead of spilling out, keeping every bite tender.
  • Always slice against the grain: This is the key to keeping flank steak tender. The long muscle fibers run in one direction, and cutting across them shortens those fibers, making each bite easier to chew.

What To Serve It With?

One of the things I love most about this flank steak marinade recipe is how versatile the steak turns out. You can serve it on its own for a simple dinner or build it into bowls, tacos, or hearty salads. No matter how you enjoy it, here are some of my favorite recipes to round out the meal:

Grilled Vegetables: If you’re making this as a summer meal, it pairs beautifully with grilled vegetables like Grilled Eggplant or Grilled Corn on the Cob. Both are easy to prepare alongside the steak and bring that same fresh-off-the-grill taste to the plate.

Marinated flank steak served over a salad.

Salad: My Grilled Flank Steak Salad is a fantastic, meal-worthy salad that is everything you want in a bowl on a warm summer dinner. If you want a different option, my Original Caesar Salad, tangy Mediterranean Pasta Salad, or creamy Coleslaw with Greek Yogurt all complement the steak perfectly without overpowering it.

Potatoes: If you’re looking to add something hearty, try a side of crispy potatoes. I recommend my Fingerling Potatoes in an Air Fryer for a quick option or my simple Smashed Fingerling Potatoes.

Butter Sauce: And don’t forget a drizzle of something buttery to finish it off. A spoonful of Roasted Garlic Butter or my simple buttery Garlic Sauce takes this steak over the top and ties the whole meal together.

How To Store, Freeze, and Reheat?

If you have leftovers, this grilled flank steak keeps well and makes for an easy second meal. Remember, the key to great leftovers is preserving moisture. By following these simple steps, you can enjoy this delicious flank steak days or even weeks later with the same great taste:

Storage:

If you’re planning to store leftovers, I recommend keeping the steak whole. It helps lock in moisture and makes it easier to reheat without overcooking. Once it’s cooled, wrap it up or transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days. 

If it’s already sliced, that’s okay, you’ll just want to reheat it in a cast-iron skillet with a splash of water to bring back some of that texture.

Freezing:

If you plan on freezing it, I recommend freezing the cooked steak whole. Let it cool completely first, then wrap it tightly in parchment paper or plastic wrap to help prevent freezer burn. Place it in a freezer-safe bag and press out as much air as you can before sealing. It’ll keep well in the freezer for up to 3 months.

When you’re ready to enjoy it again, thaw it in the fridge overnight. For a quicker option, submerge the sealed bag in a bowl of cold water and let it sit for about 30 minutes.

Reheating: 

If you stored your steak whole, the best way to reheat it is in the oven. Preheat to 275°F, wrap the steak loosely in foil, and warm it for 10 to 15 minutes or until heated through. Covering is important as it will help lock in moisture and keep the steak from drying out.

If your steak is already sliced, I recommend reheating it in a cast-iron skillet over medium heat. Add a splash of water or beef broth to keep it moist, and warm just until heated through. This helps bring back some of that texture and gives the edges a slight crisp without overcooking the inside.

Whichever method you use, reheat low and slow. Since flank steak is lean, high heat can dry it out fast.

FAQs

How long can you marinate flank steak?

You can marinate flank steak for as little as 1 hour at room temperature if you’re short on time. For the best results, though, I recommend marinating it overnight in the fridge. Just be sure not to go over 24 hours, as the acid in the marinade can start to break the meat down and affect the texture.

Can I freeze raw flank steak in the marinade?

Yes, you technically can. Freezing pauses the marinating process, and as the meat thaws, it will continue to absorb the flavor. The key is to cook the meat as soon as it is thawed, to ensure that the acidic ingredients don’t alter its texture too much.
To freeze, place the raw meat and the marinade in a freezer-safe bag and remove all the air. Freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight before cooking.

Can I freeze marinated flank steak after it is cooked?

Yes, you can. For best results, freeze the steak whole. This helps maintain its moisture and texture when you reheat it. Make sure it’s fully cooled, then wrap it tightly in parchment paper or plastic wrap to avoid freezer burn. Transfer it to a freezer-safe bag, remove as much air as possible, and seal. It’ll keep well in the freezer for up to 3 months.

What is the best way to slice flank steak?

Always slice flank steak against the grain. This means cutting across the visible lines of muscle fibers rather than parallel to them. Doing this shortens the muscle fibers and gives you tender and easy-to-chew pieces every time.

Can I use this marinade for skirt steak as well?

Yes, you can. Skirt steak is a similar cut that is lean and perfect for high-heat cooking, so it benefits from the same balance of acidity, salt, and sweetness.

Flank Steak vs. Flap Steak: Are they the same?

Most people are confused about these two cuts of meat, but they are not the same. Flank steak comes from the cow’s lower abdomen, while flap steak is cut from the bottom sirloin, just next to the flank. With that being said, this marinade can be used for flap steak and deliver great results.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Steak Recipes You Might Like:

If you enjoyed this easy flank steak recipe, there are plenty of other ways to enjoy it too:

  • For an easy weeknight dinner or a get-together, you can’t go wrong with my Flank Steak Tacos. These pair perfectly with fresh toppings and warm tortillas.
  • If you’re craving something hearty and satisfying, my Chimichurri Steak Sandwich is always a hit.  Imagine perfectly cooked steak wrapped in chimichurri sauce in a soft, crusty bread. It’s everything you want in a sandwich.
  • Or if you’re in the mood for something lighter, try the cult-favorite, Houston’s Thai Steak Noodle Salad for an impressive yet easy steak dinner recipe.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Grilled marinated Flank steak sliced on a plate.
Print

Flank Steak Marinade Recipe

Here's an easy flank steak marinade that transforms a budget-friendly cut into a tender, juicy steak every time. Made with simple pantry staples, it's perfect for grilling, broiling, or searing flank steak for an easy, crowd-pleasing meal.
Course Meat
Cuisine American
Diet Halal
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Marinating Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 25 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 266kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • ¼ cup olive oil plus more to oil the grill grates
  • cup soy sauce
  • ¼ cup apple cider vinegar or balsamic vinegar or red wine vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice or lime juice
  • 2 tablespoons Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 tablespoon honey or brown sugar
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon sweet paprika
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 ½ lbs flank steak

Instructions

  • Select a container that is large enough to fit your flank steak comfortably, ideally one with a fitting lid. Alternatively, you can also use a resealable plastic bag.
  • Add in ¼ cup of olive oil, ⅓ cup of soy sauce, ¼ cup of apple cider vinegar, 2 tablespoons of lemon juice, 2 tablespoons of Worcestershire sauce, 1 tablespoon of Dijon mustard, 1 tablespoon of honey, 3 cloves of minced garlic, 1 teaspoon of sweet paprika, ½ teaspoon of ground cumin, ½ teaspoon of kosher salt, ¼ teaspoon black pepper. Whisk to combine.
    Flank steak marinade being poured over the meat.
  • Add the flank steak and ensure that the whole piece is submerged in the marinade.
  • Cover and refrigerate for at least 1 hour, preferably overnight, but no longer than 24 hours.
    Flank steak in the marinade and then on the grill.

To Cook it on the Grill:

  • When ready to cook, preheat a gas grill to 500°F.
  • Scrape the grill grates to remove any possible food residue. Dip a wad of paper towel into a bowl of oil and coat the grates generously with the oil.
  • Remove the flank steak from the marinade, letting the excess marinade drip off. Discard the marinade.
  • Place the meat on the grill and cook for 3-4 minutes on each side for rare (internal temperature is 130 to 135 °F), 4-5 minutes on each side for medium (internal temperature is 136 to 145 °F), or 5-6 minutes on each side for medium-well (internal temperature is 146 to 155 °F).
  • When it reaches your desired doneness, transfer the grilled flank steak to a platter and cover it with foil.
  • Let it rest for 5 minutes, and then slice it against the grain. Serve while still warm.

To Broil in The Oven

  • Set your oven to the "broil" setting on high. For the best results, place the oven rack in the upper third section, about 5-6 inches from the heat source.
  • Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set a wire rack over it.
  • Remove the steak from the marinade and let the excess drip off before transferring it to your prepared sheet pan. Broil for 5-6 minutes on each side, or until it reaches your desired doneness.
  • Transfer the steak to a plate, cover loosely with foil, and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before slicing.

On The Stove Top

  • Place a large cast-iron skillet over medium high heat and heat it until sizzling hot.
  • Remove the marinated flank steak from the marinade, making sure to remove any excess. Transfer it onto a clean plate and pat dry with a paper towel to remove as much of the liquid as possible.
  • Transfer the steak to the skillet and sear for 3-4 minutes or until nicely browned. Flip the steak and cook for another 3-5 minutes, depending on the level of doneness you prefer.

Video

Notes

  • Let it come to room temperature before grilling: If you are marinating your steak overnight, take it out of the fridge and let it rest on the counter 30 to 60 minutes before grilling. If you put cold marinated steak on a hot grill, it won’t sear properly. It’s likely that the outside will cook before the inside is cooked.
  • Level of doneness: Please use the grilling times I listed in the post as a place to start. The grilling time could change based on the thickness of your flank steak. The best way to check doneness is with a meat thermometer.
  • Storage: If you’re planning to store leftovers, I recommend keeping the steak whole. Once it’s cooled, wrap it up or transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days. If it’s already sliced, that’s okay too. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 266kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 68mg | Sodium: 1077mg | Potassium: 495mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 173IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 41mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/flank-steak-marinade/feed/ 2
CAVA Cucumber Mint Lime Drink (Copycat Recipe) https://foolproofliving.com/cava-cucumber-mint-lime-drink/ https://foolproofliving.com/cava-cucumber-mint-lime-drink/#respond Tue, 05 Aug 2025 12:59:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82635 As I set out to recreate CAVA’s cucumber mint lime drink, I started with a base of lime juice, almost…]]>

As I set out to recreate CAVA’s cucumber mint lime drink, I started with a base of lime juice, almost like making a classic limeade. At first, I blended cucumber juice, lime juice, and a bit of simple syrup. It was good, but honestly, it just tasted like limeade. It was nothing memorable.

Then I came across a tip that suggested enhancing limeade with lime zest and a splash of lemon juice. That tip was golden. Those two small additions completely transformed my simple drink into something bright, layered, and refreshing, and more importantly, just like the version I love at CAVA.

CAVA copycat mint lime cucumber drink in glasses garnished with mint lime, and cucumber slices.

This homemade cucumber mint lime juice drink recipe has that exact light, crisp, and not overly sweet flavor. It’s also incredibly easy to customize, can be served non-alcoholic or as a cocktail, and is also make-ahead friendly, making it a total crowd-pleaser for any warm day. Not to mention, making your own is way more cost-effective than buying at the store.

Cava Cucumber Mint Lime Ingredients

To make this copycat CAVA cucumber mint limeade, you only need a few simple, fresh ingredients you probably already have in your fridge/pantry. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my testing:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.

For the Mint Simple Syrup

Sweetener: Traditionally, simple syrup uses equal parts sugar and water. I like to use honey (or agave syrup) instead, inspired by my Honey Simple Syrup recipe, to keep the drink naturally sweetened. Both options work beautifully.

Mint: Any fresh mint you grow or can find in your local supermarket will do. Peppermint or spearmint are both great choices.

For the Drink

Cucumbers: I prefer Persian cucumbers for their crisp, sweet taste, but English cucumbers are a great substitute. Peeling is optional, but if you keep the skin on, give it a taste first to make sure it’s not bitter, since older cucumber skins can sometimes be tough and a bit bitter.

Lime and Lemon Juice & Zest: Freshly squeezed juice is best for a bright, clean taste. Bottled juice works in a pinch, but if you can, squeeze your own. When I was testing this recipe, I noticed that using only the juice didn’t quite capture the citrusy kick that makes CAVA’s version so refreshing.

That’s when I decided to add the zest of both lime and lemon. It turned out to be the missing piece, bringing the drink much closer to the one I first enjoyed at CAVA.

Ice: Cubed or crushed ice keeps the drink cold and refreshing.

For the Garnishes

This is where you can have some fun. Add cucumber slices, sliced lime, or fresh mint sprigs for a pretty, restaurant-style touch.

How To Make Cucumber Mint Limeade?

Although it may seem like a lot of steps, making this refreshing drink is actually quite simple. Just follow the easy steps below:

A collage of images showing the making of simple syrup and cucumbers in a food processor.

Step 1 – Make the mint simple syrup: To keep my drink naturally sweetened, I am making a batch of my honey syrup recipe. That being said, you can make it with regular simple syrup by using 3/4 cup of granulated sugar and 3/4 cup of water, following the same steps.

If you are following in my footsteps, combine honey (or sugar) and water in a small saucepan over medium heat. Cook, stirring occasionally, until the honey fully dissolves. Refrain from boiling honey, as exposure to high heat can potentially degrade the nutritional value and natural flavors of your honey.

Remove from the heat and stir in the mint leaves, ensuring they are fully submerged. Let them steep for 15-20 minutes, then strain and set aside to cool.

Step 2- Puree the cucumbers: Cut the peeled cucumbers into small chunks and transfer them into a food processor or high-powered blender and blend until smooth and lightly pureed. 

A collage of images showing the making of cucumber juice.

Step 3- Strain the juice: Pour it into a fine-mesh strainer set over a bowl (or a nut milk bag would also work). Use the back of a spoon or spatula to press out as much of the juice as possible. In the end, you should get about ½ cup of cucumber juice.

A collage of photos showing the mixing and making of the cucumber lime mint drink.

Step 4 – Mix the drink: Grab a large pitcher and pour in all the prepared ingredients, starting with cucumber juice, lime and lemon zests and juices, now-cooled mint simple syrup, and 2 cups of cold water. Give it a good stir to ensure everything is thoroughly mixed.

Step 5 – Chill & Serve: Cover and refrigerate for an hour or two to allow the flavors to blend together. When ready to serve, fill glasses with ice and pour the drink over it. Garnish it with a sprig of fresh mint and your other preferred garnishes.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

One of the best parts about this cucumber mint limeade is how easy it is to prepare ahead of time. It’s perfect for entertaining or for keeping a refreshing drink ready in the fridge all week.

Make Ahead: The mint simple syrup can be made 1-2 days in advance and stored in an airtight jar or bottle in the refrigerator.

If you’d rather mix the whole drink ahead, you can prepare it a day in advance. Just cover and refrigerate until ready to serve.

Storage: Store the finished drink in a sealed pitcher in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days.

It’s normal for the liquid to separate as it sits. Just give it a good stir before pouring.

Freezing for Later:

A fun option is to freeze the cucumber mint limeade in ice cube trays. Once frozen, drop the cubes into a glass of water or sparkling water for a light, refreshing sip without making a whole batch.

I like using silicone ice cube molds (affiliate) so the cubes pop out easily.

Expert Tips:

Adjust sweetness to your liking: If you’ve ever made lemonade or limeade, you know that not all lemons and limes taste the same. Some are sweeter while others can be quite tart. I find that about ¾ cup of simple syrup is just right for this cucumber mint drink, but you can easily adjust it according to your taste buds. If it tastes too strong, add a bit more water. If you’d like it sweeter, stir in a touch more syrup until it’s just right for you.

Freshly squeezed juice is best: Fresh limes and lemons make all the difference in this mint and cucumber drink. While bottled juice is a convenient shortcut, it often tastes flat or even slightly bitter. If you can, take the extra few minutes to squeeze your own; it gives the drink a much brighter, cleaner taste.

Don’t skip the straining: It may feel like an extra step, but straining makes a big difference. For a smooth, pulp-free cucumber drink, be sure to strain the mixture before serving. It keeps the drink light, clean, and refreshing.

Chill thoroughly: For the best taste, let the cucumber mint refresher chill in the refrigerator for at least 1-2 hours before serving. This gives the flavors time to meld together. If you’re short on time, you can cut the chilling time by starting with cold ingredients, like refrigerated cucumbers and citrus.

Don’t forget the garnishes: A few simple garnishes can take this beverage from everyday to eye-catching. Add lime slices, sliced cucumber, and a sprig of mint (though be sure to remove the woody stems) to make it look as refreshing as it tastes. For the prettiest presentation, serve it in a clear glass or pitcher over ice; it’s an instant crowd-pleaser.

Variations

One of the best parts about this cucumber mint drink recipe is how easy it is to customize. With just a few simple swaps or additions, you can make it fit any occasion, like serving it to kids on a hot afternoon or mixing it up for friends at happy hour.

Add Sparkling water: For a bubbly twist, replace some or all of the water with sparkling water. You can even use lightly flavored sparkling water  (like Bubly or Spindrift) that you enjoy. It adds a refreshing fizz and makes the drink feel extra special.

Turn it into agua fresca: For a lighter taste, similar to a cucumber mint agua fresca, use less citrus and more water.

Make it a cocktail: This limeade is the perfect base for gin, vodka, or even white rum. Add a splash over ice for a refreshing adult beverage.

Add some ginger: If you enjoy a little spice, try steeping a few slices of fresh ginger in the mint simple syrup. It adds a subtle warmth and zing that balances beautifully with the cool cucumber and bright citrus.

What to Serve It With

This cucumber mint lime CAVA recipe is honestly one of those drinks that just goes with everything. It’s light, refreshing, and makes whatever you’re eating taste even better. But if I had to pick my favorites, these are the times I always want a glass in my hand:

FAQs

Can I substitute fresh lime juice for bottled juice?

Yes, you can. However, please keep in mind that freshly squeezed juice will be better in terms of flavor.

Should I peel the cucumbers for this drink?

Peeling is optional, but here’s a little trick: if you decide to keep the skin on, give it a taste first. Older cucumber skins can sometimes be a little bitter, and I wouldn’t recommend that for this drink.

How long does Copycat Cava Cucumber Mint Limeade last?

As long as it is kept in an airtight container in the fridge, this drink will taste fresh for up to 5 days. You may notice some natural separation, which is completely normal. Just give it a quick stir before pouring, and it should be good to go.

Can I make this drink alcoholic?

Absolutely! This limeade is the perfect base for a summer cocktail. It pairs wonderfully with a splash of white rum, gin, or even vodka. You can just add a shot or two over ice, and you’ve got a fantastic new happy hour drink ready to go!

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Similar Drink Recipes You Might Like

If you’re as obsessed with this CAVA drink as I am, you’ll love these other refreshing recipes from the archives:

  • If you are in search of the most refreshing summer drink on a hot day, look no further than my Strawberry Basil Mocktail. Made in just a few minutes with strawberries and fresh basil, it’s such a nice twist to the classic version.
  • Elevate your lemonade game with my go-to Rosemary Lemonade Recipe, made from scratch with a unique hint of vanilla.
  • Inspired by a trip to Dominica, my honey-sweetened Iced Ginger Tea is a true summer treat for any ginger lover.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

CAVA copycat cucumber mint lime garnished with a sprig of mint.
Print

CAVA Copycat Cucumber Mint Lime Recipe

If you've been looking for a good recipe for CAVA's Cucumber Mint Lime Juice Drink, you are in the right place! This refresher is cool, crisp, and just the right amount of citrusy. Perfect for get-togethers, cocktails, or a refreshing sip for the kids.
Course Non Alcoholic Drink
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 3 minutes
Cooling time 2 hours
Total Time 2 hours 23 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 153kcal

Ingredients

For the simple syrup:

  • cup honey or sugar
  • cup water
  • 1 cup fresh mint leaves rinsed and picked over – plus more as garnish (15 g)

For the drink:

  • 6 Persian cucumbers peeled and cut into chunks or 2 English cucumber (peeled), plus more as garnish
  • Zest of 1 lime 1g – about 1 tsp
  • Zest of 1 lemon 1g – about 1 tsp
  • 1 ½ cups fresh lime juice about 10-12 medium-sized limes
  • ½ cup fresh lemon juice about 5 medium-sized lemons
  • 2 cups water

As Garnish:

  • 1 lime sliced
  • Ice for serving

Instructions

  • Make the Mint Syrup: In a small saucepan, combine honey (or sugar) and water. Warm over medium heat, stirring occasionally, until the honey dissolves completely. Remove from the heat and stir in the mint leaves. Make sure they're fully submerged. Let steep for 20 minutes, then strain and set the syrup aside to cool.
    Images showing how to make cucumber juice.
  • Juice the Cucumbers: Place peeled cucumbers in a food processor and blend until smooth. Set a fine mesh sieve or colander over a bowl and pour in the puree. Use a spoon or spatula to press out as much juice as possible. You should get about ½ cup of cucumber juice.
    Images showing how to make cucumber juice.
  • Mix the Drink: In a large pitcher, combine the cucumber juice, lime zest, lemon zest, lime juice, lemon juice, and the cooled mint syrup. Add 2 cups of water and stir well.
    A collage of images showing how to make the drink.
  • Chill: Cover and refrigerate for 1-2 hours to allow the flavors to blend together.
  • Serve: When ready to serve, fill glasses with ice, cucumber slices, and lime slices. Pour the drink over the ice and garnish with fresh mint.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6 to 7 cups of limeade, ideal for serving 6 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Simple syrup: I made a honey simple syrup to keep my drink naturally sweetened, but you can make a regular simple syrup by mixing an equal amount of granulated sugar with water (1 to 1 ratio). Do not skip this step, otherwise the sugar will not dissolve in the drink.
  • Taste and adjust: Not all lemons and limes are created equal. Some can be sweet, some can be too tart. Once you mix all the ingredients, be sure to give it a taste and adjust with more water or syrup.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in a bottle or jar with a tight fitting lid for upto 3-4 days. Be sure to give it a good shake before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 153kcal | Carbohydrates: 42g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.3g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 12mg | Potassium: 261mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 34g | Vitamin A: 424IU | Vitamin C: 34mg | Calcium: 47mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cava-cucumber-mint-lime-drink/feed/ 0
Sumac Onions Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/sumac-onions/ https://foolproofliving.com/sumac-onions/#respond Tue, 29 Jul 2025 21:22:27 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82353 What Are Sumac Onions? Growing up in Turkey, sumac onions were always on the table. For us, they were what…]]>

What Are Sumac Onions?

Growing up in Turkey, sumac onions were always on the table. For us, they were what pickled onions are for many American homes: a simple, tangy side that brightens up almost any meal.

While we called it “sumac onions” and served it more like a condiment, some people also refer to it as a “red onion salad” and serve it as a side dish. Both are perfectly acceptable.

Sumac onions in a bowl from a top view.

Now, in case you are not familiar, the key ingredient is sumac. It is a deep red spice made from dried berries (not peppers, though many people think so) with a tangy lemony flavor and slightly earthy taste. Unlike chili powders, it isn’t spicy hot.

When mixed with thinly sliced red onions, sumac helps tame their sharpness, turning them into a slightly sweet and refreshing bite. That’s why you’ll often see sumac onions served alongside meat-centric dishes like lamb, beef, or chicken kebabs. They cut through the richness and spice, bringing a welcome crunch and a pop of brightness to every bite.

Simple Ingredients You’ll Need

You’ll need only a few basic pantry staples to make this sumac onions recipe. You can find the complete list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my recipe testing:

Ingredients for sumac red onions in bowls from the top view.

Red Onion: Since this is the main ingredient, use a fresh red onion and slice it as thinly as possible. A sharp knife works well, but a mandolin ensures even slices. In a pinch, you can substitute white or yellow onions, though the flavor will be slightly different.

Extra Virgin Olive Oil: A mild-flavored olive oil works best.

Lemon Juice: My mom always used lemon juice, as most Turkish families do, but other acidic ingredients like apple cider vinegar, red wine vinegar, or lime juice also work. Keep in mind, though, that the flavor profile will vary depending on the acid you use.

Kosher Salt: I used Diamond kosher salt, but if you are using other brands like Morton’s or sea salt, I would use half the amount and adjust it as necessary.

Sumac: Usually available in the Middle Eastern section of most supermarkets, sold as sumac spice or sumac powder. If you’re new to sumac, I really like Eastanbul sumac spice (affiliate link). Keep an eye on the best-by date, since sumac typically has a shorter shelf life than many other spices, about 6 months.

Red Pepper Flakes (Urfa Chili or Aleppo Pepper): Optional, but the authentic version often uses a pinch of Urfa chili or Aleppo pepper. If you can’t get your hands on either one of those, any other red pepper flakes you have on hand would also work.

Fresh Chopped Parsley: Finely chopped parsley is traditional, but you can switch it up depending on the dish you are serving it with. For example, fresh mint pairs beautifully when serving with lamb.

Pomegranate molasses (optional): A drizzle of pomegranate molasses is optional, but it would add a nice sweetness, especially if you are serving this with kebabs.

Tomatoes (optional): If I am serving this sumac onion salad with lamb kabobs like the traditional Adana Kebab, I add a handful of halved cherry tomatoes. They bring a pop of color and an extra touch of freshness.

How to Make Sumac Onions (Step-by-Step Guide)

Making Turkish sumac onions is as straightforward as it gets. You don’t need any special equipment, just a sharp knife and a bowl. Follow these simple steps, and you’ll have a tangy, refreshing side ready to serve with your favorite dishes.

A collage of images showing thinly sliced onion and a bowl of onions mixed with the rest of the ingredients.

Step 1 – Slice the onions: On a sturdy cutting board, cut the red onion in half lengthwise. Remove the skins and slice thinly into half-moon shapes. A sharp knife works best, but always keep the flat side of the onion against the board for safety.

Step 2 – Mix the ingredients: Place the sliced onion in a medium bowl. Add the olive oil, lemon juice, kosher salt, sumac, and Aleppo pepper (if using).

A collage of images showing thinly sliced red onions being massaged and garnished with parsley.

Step 3 – Massage: Using clean hands, gently massage the onions for 1-2 minutes, until they have softened slightly and absorbed the seasonings.

Step 4 – Garnish and rest: Sprinkle with chopped parsley and toss to combine. If you have the time, cover and refrigerate for 10-15 minutes before serving to let the flavors meld.

Helpful Expert Tips

Whether you’re serving sumac pickled onions as a condiment for kebabs or tucking them into sandwiches, this recipe is simple enough for anyone to make. Still, a few tips can help you get the best results on your first try:

  • Soak the onions if needed: If you’re sensitive to the strong, pungent taste of red onions, soak the slices in cold tap water with a pinch of salt for about 10 minutes, then drain before mixing. This works especially well if you plan to serve them right away. However, keep in mind that if you are making them ahead, this step is unnecessary, as their sharpness naturally mellows as they sit in the fridge.
  • Use fresh sumac: Unlike many other spices, sumac has a relatively short shelf life. Check the freshness before using it. I list one tablespoon in the recipe, but I often add closer to 2 tablespoons at home because I love the flavor. Taste and adjust to your preference.
  • Slice evenly: Try to cut the onions into even slices so each bite has the same texture and balance of seasoning. A mandolin can be helpful, but a sharp chef’s knife works just fine.
  • Don’t skip the massage: Gently massaging for a minute not only softens the onions but also helps them absorb the sumac and other seasonings more fully. 
  • Serve slightly chilled: While you can enjoy them right away, serving them chilled adds a refreshing crunch that pairs especially well with rich meat dishes.
  • Watch out for stains: Sumac has a deep red color, and when mixed with red onions, it can easily stain.. Avoid wearing your favorite white shirt while preparing it, and consider using gloves if you prefer.

Delicious Ways to Serve Sumac Onions

The pairing options are endless for this Turkish onion salad. While you can serve it with nearly any savory dish, here are some of my favorite ways to enjoy it:

  • With Kebabs & Grilled Meats: Sumac onions are the classic pairing with the rich, smoky kebabs that Turkish, Lebanese, and other Middle Eastern cuisines are known for. I especially love to serve on top of my Adana Kebab, Chicken Shish Tawook, Doner Kebab, and Oven Chicken Kebabs.
  • With Shawarma: Their tangy bite balances the spices in shawarma beautifully. Try them with my Easy Chicken Shawarma or Beef Shawarma.
  • In Bowls: Add freshness and brightness to grain or salad bowls. They’re perfect on top of a Chicken Shawarma Bowl or a Homemade CAVA Bowl.
  • With Seafood Dishes: They pair wonderfully with Grilled or Baked salmon, adding contrast to the richness of the fish.
  • Make it a part of your mezze platter: Serve it along with other mezze platter staples like Hummus, Muhammara, and Baba Ganoush.
  • Vegetarian & Vegan Favorites: Sumac onions bring life to plant-based meals, adding a burst of freshness that makes every bite more satisfying. I love serving them alongside Rice with Vermicelli or crispy Falafel.

Storing Leftovers & Making Ahead

Making Ahead: This recipe is perfect for meal prep since the onions continue to mellow and develop flavor as they sit. You can make them 2–3 days in advance and store them in an airtight container or mason jar in the fridge.

Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers refrigerated for 3 to 4 days. Just give them a quick stir before serving to mix the seasonings back in.

Freezing: Freezing isn’t recommended, as the onions lose their crisp texture once thawed. For the best taste and crunch, enjoy them fresh.

Zoomed in photo of sumac onions in a bowl.

FAQs

What do sumac onions taste like?

Sumac onions have a bright, tangy taste with a hint of sweetness. The sumac adds an earthy, citrus-like note that softens the sharpness of raw red onions.

How do you make raw onions less strong/pungent?

If you find raw onions too sharp, soak the slices in a bowl of cold water with a pinch of salt for about 10 minutes, then drain well before using.

How long do sumac onions last / How should I store sumac onions?

They should last for 3-4 days as long as they are stored in an airtight container or a jar with a tight-fitting lid.

Can I add other ingredients or variations?

Yes, absolutely. Sumac onions are very versatile. You can drizzle in a little pomegranate molasses for extra sweetness, swap in fresh mint instead of parsley, or add spices like ground cumin for a different twist.

Other Middle Eastern/Mediterranean Condiments You Might Like

If you enjoy this onion sumac salad, chances are you’ll love other Middle Eastern and Mediterranean condiments too. Here are a few to try next:

  • If you’re a fan of the bold, spicy flavors of the region, my homemade harissa recipe is a must-try.
  • Bright and earthy with lemon and garlic, tahini sauce is one of the easiest ways to add depth to grilled meats or roasted vegetables.
  • When you want to mellow out the richness of kebabs or grilled meats, everyone’s favorite creamy Greek white sauce (known as tzatziki) made with cucumber, garlic, and dill is hard to beat.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Turkish red onion sumac salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Sumac Onions Recipe

These quick and tangy Sumac Onions are a quick Middle Eastern condiment. Made with thinly sliced red onions, lemon juice, olive oil, and sumac, they add a refreshing, citrusy bite that balances rich dishes like kebabs, shawarma, or grilled fish. Serve as a side, condiment, or salad for a fresh pop of flavor.
Course Condiment
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 45kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 red onion medium sized
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoon sumac
  • ¼ teaspoon Urfa or Aleppo pepper or red pepper flakes
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Cut onions in half lengthwise, remove the skins, and slice thinly into half-moon shapes. Transfer to a medium bowl.
  • Add the olive oil, lemon juice, Kosher salt, sumac, and Aleppo pepper.
    Two images side by side showing onions being thinly sliced and onions in a bowl garnished with sumac.
  • Using your hands, gently massage the onions for 1–2 minutes until they soften slightly and absorb the seasonings.
  • Add the parsley and toss to combine.
    A collage of images showing sumac onions massaged and then garnished with parsley.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes ½ to ¾ of sumac onions, which would be ideal for serving 4 adults. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Onions: While the traditional recipe is made with red onions, in a pinch, you can use white onions, but keep in mind that the flavor profile will be slightly different.
  • Make Ahead: These onions get even better as they sit. You can prepare them 2-3 days in advance and store them in an airtight container or jar in the fridge.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in the fridge for up to 4 days. Just give them a quick stir before serving to mix the seasonings back in.
  • Freezing: Not recommended, as the onions lose their crisp texture once thawed. For the best flavor and crunch, enjoy them fresh.

Nutrition

Calories: 45kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 0.4g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 295mg | Potassium: 61mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 207IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 10mg | Iron: 0.2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/sumac-onions/feed/ 0
Lavash Bread Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/lavash-bread-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/lavash-bread-recipe/#comments Tue, 29 Jul 2025 21:19:46 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82286 If you’ve ever been to a Middle Eastern or Mediterranean restaurant, chances are you’ve had lavash. Similar to pita, it’s…]]>

If you’ve ever been to a Middle Eastern or Mediterranean restaurant, chances are you’ve had lavash. Similar to pita, it’s the go-to bread for serving with kebabs, dips, and salads. Growing up in Turkey, I learned early on that you simply don’t eat kebab without a piece of warm lavash.

Yes, you can find it at the store, but once you taste a freshly cooked, puffed-up lavash straight from the skillet, there’s no going back. And the best part? It’s easier to make than you think.

In this post, I’ll walk you through the step-by-step process of making lavash bread, complete with foolproof tips and troubleshooting advice, so you can confidently make it at home anytime.

What is Lavash? A Journey Through This Ancient Flatbread

Lavash (or lavaş, as we call it in Turkey) is a soft, thin flatbread with ancient roots stretching across the Middle East and Central Asia. While the lavash bread recipe may vary slightly from region to region, it is a staple in many countries across the region, including Armenia, Iran, Kazakhstan, Azerbaijan, and Turkey.

At its core, lavash is as simple as bread gets: just flour, water, salt, sugar, milk (optional), and yeast. But despite the short ingredient list, the result is anything but basic. 

Depending on where it’s made, lavash can be thick and chewy or paper-thin and crisp. 

My version here sits right in the middle; soft enough to wrap around your favorite kebabs but sturdy enough to use it as a utensil to scoop up dips and salads just like we do in Turkey.

Essential Ingredients for Lavash Bread

The traditional lavash bread recipes you’ll find in cookbooks are usually made with just three ingredients: flour, water, and salt. 

While that version is beautiful in its simplicity, it can take a bit more time and technique to get right. In my version, I use a small amount of yeast to help the dough rise more easily, a splash of milk for a softer texture, and a touch of sugar (or, in my case, honey) to feed the yeast and get it bubbling faster.

You’ll find the exact measurements of this homemade lavash recipe in the recipe card below, but here are a few essential notes and tips from my testing to help you get the best results every time.

Ingredients for the recipe are in small bowls from the top view.

Water: We use lukewarm water (around 110 °F – 43 °C) to activate the yeast. The temperature is important here because if it is colder, the yeast will not activate, and if it is hotter, it will kill it. 

Yeast: I use instant yeast in this recipe, but I still bloom it in warm water with a bit of honey to give it a head start. This step isn’t always necessary with instant yeast, but I’ve found it helps create a better rise and a more reliable dough. 

If you only have active dry yeast, you can use it the same way, just make sure it foams up before moving on.

Sugar: A small amount of sugar helps feed the yeast and encourages it to bubble up during the resting period. You can use granulated sugar, but I like to use honey to keep this recipe free of refined sugar. Either one will do the job.

Extra Virgin Olive Oil: I use a little bit of extra virgin olive oil, mostly for flavor. It adds a subtle richness to the dough and helps keep the lavash soft. 

Milk: A small amount of milk makes the dough softer and adds a slightly richer texture. I use whole milk, but any kind you have on hand will work. Just make sure it’s at room temperature so it doesn’t interfere with the rising time. 

If you prefer a dairy-free version, you can use water instead.

All-Purpose Flour vs. Bread Flour: The recipe I am sharing here is made with all-purpose flour, which yields a soft and pliable dough that is perfect for rolling kebabs. If you prefer a sturdier, chewier texture, you can swap in bread flour instead. It has a higher protein content, which gives the dough more structure.

Kosher salt: I used Diamond kosher salt, which is less salty than most kosher salts. If you use other brands, such as Morton’s, be sure to use half the amount. 

Step-by-Step: How to Make Lavash Bread at Home

Whenever I make any kind of bread, I always want to know how far in advance to start, especially if I’m planning to serve it for dinner. This easy lavash recipe takes about 1.5 hours from start to finish, including time to knead, rise, and cook. So if dinner’s at 7, starting around 5:30 pm is just right.

This recipe makes 10 lavash, just in case you are planning ahead or cooking for a crowd.

Here’s how to make lavash at home, step by step:

Yeast is activated and mixed with oil in a bowl.

Step 1 – Activate the Yeast: Place the lukewarm water (around 110°F / 43°C) and honey (or sugar) in a measuring cup. Stir well to make sure the honey is fully dissolved. Add the yeast and let it sit for 5 minutes, or until you see a grey-ish thick layer of bubbly foam on top. Then stir in the olive oil and milk until fully combined.

Wet ingredients are added into the dry ones and mixed.

Step 2 – Combine Wet & Dry Ingredients: In a large mixing bowl, combine the flour and salt. Pour in the yeast mixture and knead the dough with clean hands for about 5 minutes, or until no dry flour remains. 

At this point, the dough (and your hands) will be sticky, and that is totally normal. As you knead, turn the dough frequently to ensure everything comes together evenly.

The bread dough risen and then kneaded.

Step 3 – First Rise: Cover the bowl with a clean kitchen towel (or loosely with plastic wrap) and let it rise in a warm part of your kitchen for 20 minutes. By the end of that time, it should look a little smoother and slightly puffed in volume.

Step 4 – Knead the Dough: Lightly flour your kitchen counter and transfer the dough over. Knead it for about 5 minutes.

You don’t really need much of a technique here, but when I’m kneading it, I usually press the whole dough with the heel of my hand, push it away, fold it back over, and give it a turn. Then I just keep repeating that motion until the dough feels smooth and stretchy.

It shouldn’t be too sticky, but if it is, go ahead and sprinkle in a bit more flour, just a little at a time (no more than a tablespoon). You don’t want to use too much flour, as this can make your lavash too dry or stiff.

Alternatively, you can knead the dough in a stand mixer using the dough hook. However, keep in mind that you might not need to knead it as long. The visual cue to pay attention to is for the dough to be smooth and no longer sticking to the sides.

The dough rolled and cut into the balls.

Step 5 – Divide the Dough: Shape the dough into a log approximately 12 inches long and divide it into 10 equal pieces. When you go with 10, each lavash ends up being about 9 to 10 inches in diameter once it is rolled out and cooked. If your skillet is smaller, you can divide the dough into 12 and make slightly smaller ones.

You can totally eyeball it, but if you want all your lavash to be about the same size, a kitchen scale helps.

Grab a dinner plate and sprinkle it with a little flour. Roll each piece into a ball and place them on the plate. Then cover them loosely with a kitchen towel and let them rest for 20 minutes.

The lavash dough is rolled out.

Step 6 – Heat the Skillet & Roll Out the Dough: When you are ready to cook, heat a large (10- or 12-inch) nonstick or cast-iron skillet over high heat until it is really hot. This part is essential because if the pan isn’t hot enough, the dough will stick. You’ll know it is ready when a few drops of water sizzle and disappear almost instantly.

While the pan heats up, start rolling out the dough. Take one ball at a time and roll it into a 9- to 10-inch circle using a rolling pin. Do your best to keep it round, but I’ll be honest; it is a little tricky at first. 

The good news? It gets easier the more you do it, and honestly, a slightly wonky lavash still tastes just as good.

The lavash cooked in a skillet from the top view.

Step 7 – Cook the Lavash: Before you start rolling, grab a basket (a tortilla warmer works beautifully if you have one) or a bowl and line it with a kitchen towel. We need a place to store the freshly cooked lavash and keep it soft and warm. Set that aside.

Carefully transfer the rolled-out dough to the hot skillet. Within 10 to 15 seconds, you should see little bubbles start to form on the surface. Give it a flip, cook for another 10 seconds, then flip again. As it cooks and puffs, you’ll see golden brown spots start to appear, which is exactly what we want.

Keep flipping every 10-15 seconds, and cook for about 40-50 seconds total, or until both sides are cooked and it has some nice color.

Transfer the freshly cooked lavash to your prepared basket and cover it with the towel to keep it warm. Then just repeat the process (roll, cook, and store) for the remaining dough balls.

Expert Tips 

Roll it out thin: The key to getting soft, pliable lavash is rolling the dough really thin. I know it is tempting to focus on making a perfect circle, but honestly, thinness matters more than shape. Even if your lavash isn’t perfectly round, it will still taste great.

And if you have a pasta machine, that is a great shortcut to get an even, thin sheet of dough without too much effort.

Go easy on the extra flour: It is tempting to keep adding flour if the dough feels sticky, but try to trust the process and the visual cues I mentioned earlier. Only add more flour when the dough really starts to stick (especially while rolling), and try to work quickly. Too much flour can lead to stiff, dry lavash, and we definitely don’t want that.

Keep it warm: Don’t skip setting up a spot to keep the cooked lavash warm. Otherwise, while you are busy cooking the rest, the earlier ones will cool down and lose their soft, pliable texture. And you don’t need anything fancy; a basket or a bowl lined with a clean kitchen towel works perfectly.

Work faster with a buddy: The most time-consuming part of this recipe is rolling and cooking the lavash. But it goes a lot quicker (and is honestly more fun) if you have someone helping out. I usually rope my husband in. He is in charge of the skillets and cooks two at a time while I roll out the dough. Teamwork makes it so much easier.

Stay close while it cooks: These flatbreads cook fast, so it is important to keep a close eye on them, even while you are multitasking. I know you’ll likely be rolling out the next one while one is cooking (I do the same), but try not to turn your back on the skillet. It gets very hot, and things move quickly, so just stay aware, especially if you have young kids around.

Troubleshooting Common Lavash Baking Issues

While this lavash flatbread recipe is pretty straightforward, I ran into a few hiccups during testing, so I wanted to share some tips in case you experience the same. Here are a few common issues and what might be causing them:

Dough isn’t rising: After the first 20-minute rest, your dough should be slightly larger and less sticky. If that is not happening, chances are your yeast was not properly activated. This usually comes down to the water being too cold or too hot. If you don’t see bubbles on top during the blooming stage, it is best not to add that mixture to the flour and just start fresh with a new batch.

Dough is too sticky or too dry: Before the first rise, the dough will be sticky, and that is completely normal. After it rests and you begin kneading, it should smooth out and become easier to handle. 

A little flour on the counter is fine if it is sticking too much, but try not to overdo it. Too much flour can dry the dough and make the lavash stiff.

Lavash isn’t bubbling in the skillet: If you are not seeing bubbles after placing the dough in the pan, there are usually two possible reasons: either the skillet isn’t hot enough, or the dough was rolled too thick.

Serving Suggestions:

If you’re wondering how to use lavash, the short answer is anywhere you’d use your favorite flatbread. But like most bread recipes, there are so many other ways to enjoy it. Below are a few of my favorite recipes to pair with lavash:

Adana kebab rolled in lavash bread.

Kebabs: The most traditional way to serve lavash is as a wrap for kebabs, like my Turkish Adana Kebab and Homemade Doner Kebab. Its thin, soft texture makes it perfect for rolling, and it does a great job soaking up all the delicious juices from the meat. That said, you don’t have to stop at kebabs. Any grilled meat, like my Shish Tawook,  works beautifully wrapped in lavash.

Shawarma: Beyond kebabs, homemade lavash is the perfect wrap for your favorite shawarma recipes, such as my Chicken Shawarma or Beef Shawarma. Just roll up the meat with your favorite toppings for a delicious, handheld meal.

Scooping Mezes and Dips: While pita is often the go-to for serving with meze like baba ganoush, hummus, or muhammara, warm lavash is just as good, if not better. Tear off a piece and use it to scoop up the dips right off the plate. No spoon needed.

Breakfast: Lavash is also fantastic with a simple Turkish breakfast spread. I love serving it alongside cheeses, olives, Turkish eggs, and freshly sliced tomatoes and cucumbers. And if I feel like treating myself a bit, I sometimes even brush it with some melted butter while it is still warm.

Other versatile uses: Lavash is one of those breads you can serve with just about anything. Use it to dip into soups and stews, wrap up leftovers, or even turn it into a quick wrap. Any time you find yourself reaching for bread, lavash will do the job beautifully.

​​How to Store, Freeze and Reheat Lavash

I’ll be honest, lavash is best on the day that it is made while it is still warm. As it cools, it tends to lose its softness. That said, if you store it properly, it is still great the next day. Here’s how I do it:

Storage: Let the lavash cool to room temperature, then place it in an airtight container or sealable zip-top bag. Keep it in the fridge for up to 3 or 4 days.

Freezing: Once cooled, place the lavash in a freezer-safe container or freezer bag with sheets of parchment paper between each piece. Try to remove as much air as possible before sealing. It will keep in the freezer for up to a month. When you’re ready to use it, thaw overnight in the fridge.

Reheating: You have two options here:

  • In the oven: Preheat the oven to 325°F. Lightly spray the lavash with water, place it on a baking sheet, and warm for 8 to 10 minutes or until heated through. You can reheat multiple pieces using this method.
  • In the microwave (my favorite method): Lightly wet two sheets of paper towel and wrap the lavash in between. Microwave for 30 seconds, then carefully remove the towels. If it needs a bit more time, repeat for another 10 to 15 seconds. When using this method, it is best to reheat your lavash one piece at a time.

Frequently Asked Questions

What’s the difference between lavash and pita?

Lavash and pita are both Middle Eastern flatbreads, but they’re not quite the same. Pita is usually thicker and bakes up with a pocket in the center, which makes it great for stuffing. Lavash, on the other hand, is thinner, softer, and more flexible, making it easier to use as a wrap.
Additionally, pita is usually cooked in a very hot oven, whereas lavash bread is often cooked on a skillet, griddle, or traditionally (especially in Armenia) in a tonir (or tandoor) oven.

Can I make lavash without yeast?

Yes, you can. I like to use yeast because I find yeasted dough to be easier to work with, but you can make lavash using only flour, salt, and oil.

Can I make lavash on a griddle?

Yes, you can. A griddle works just as well as a skillet, especially if you want to cook more than one lavash at a time. Some people even prefer to roll the dough into an oval shape to fit better on a rectangular griddle.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Bread Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you’re a fan of lavash, chances are you love Middle Eastern breads just as much as I do. Here are a few more recipes from the archives:

  • Stop buying pita at the store and try making your own. It’s easier than you think. Check out my post on how to make pita bread, complete with foolproof tips perfect for beginners.
  • If you’ve ever had a traditional Turkish breakfast, you’ve probably had simit. Some people call it Turkish bagels, and once you try it, you’ll understand why it’s such a favorite. This one’s worth your time.
  • No sourdough starter? No problem. My no-knead olive bread is one of the easiest, most hands-off bread recipes you can make. Just mix, let it rest, and bake.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Lavash bread in a basket from the top view.
Print

Lavash Bread Recipe

This easy lavash bread recipe is made with just a few basic ingredients you probably already have on hand and cooked on the stovetop until soft and lightly puffed. Perfect for wrapping kebabs, scooping dips, or serving with your favorite Middle Eastern dishes.
Course Bread
Cuisine Middle Eastern, Turkish
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Rolling and resting time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Servings 10 servings
Calories 211kcal

Ingredients

  • ¾ cup warm water at 110 °F degrees
  • 1 teaspoon honey
  • 1 ½ teaspoon instant yeast aka quick rise yeast – (5g)
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • ½ cup whole milk at room temperature
  • 3 ¼ cups all purpose flour plus more for rolling (423 g)
  • 1 ¼ teaspoons kosher salt 8g

Instructions

  • Place ¾ cup of warm water and 1 teaspoon of honey in a measuring cup. Stir to ensure that the honey is fully dissolved.
    The yeast activated and mixed with olive oil in a bowl.
  • Add the yeast and stir until it is well combined. Let it rest for 5 minutes. It will have a thick layer of bubbles on top.
  • In the same measuring cup, add ¼ cup olive oil and ½ cup milk. Give it a good stir. Set it aside.
  • Combine 3 ¼ cups all-purpose flour and 1 ¼ teaspoons kosher salt in a large bowl.
    Dry ingredients are being mixed with the wet to make lavash dough.
  • Add the yeast mixture and knead for 5 minutes, first mixing the dough until no flour remains and then turning it into a ball. In the end, it will be a very sticky dough, and that is normal.
  • Cover the dough with a clean kitchen towel and let it rest in a warm part of your kitchen for 20 minutes. It will get slightly larger in size.
    The dough is placed in a bowl to rise and a person is kneading it.
  • Transfer the now-rested dough to a lightly floured surface.
  • To knead the dough, press it with the heel of your hand, then push it away, fold it back over, and rotate it 45 degrees. Repeat this process for 5 minutes or until the dough is smooth. If it’s too sticky to work with, sprinkle in a bit more flour, 1 tablespoon at a time.
  • Shape the dough into a log and divide it into 10 equal pieces.
    The dough is cut into smaller pieces.
  • Roll each piece into a ball, dust it with flour, and transfer it onto a plate. Loosely cover the plate with a kitchen towel and let it rest for 20 minutes.
  • When you’re ready to cook, heat a large (12-inch) nonstick or cast-iron skillet over high heat for 5 minutes. The pan needs to be very hot to keep the dough from sticking. To test, flick a few drops of water into the skillet. If they sizzle and disappear right away, it’s ready.
  • While the pan heats up, roll out one dough ball into a 10-inch circle using a rolling pin and more flour as needed. As you roll, it might be tricky to keep a perfect circle, and that’s totally fine. Just do your best.
    Lavash dough rolled out with a rolling pin.
  • Carefully transfer the rolled dough to the hot skillet. Cook for 10 seconds (you’ll see bubbles forming), then flip. Cook for another 10 seconds, then flip again. Repeat for a total of 3-4 flips or until it looks fully cooked and has golden spots.
    Lavash cooked in a skillet from the top view.
  • As soon as it’s done, wrap the warm lavash in a clean kitchen towel and place it in a basket to keep warm. Continue adding each cooked piece to the basket, keeping them wrapped so they stay soft and warm while you finish the rest.
  • Repeat the same rolling and cooking process with the remaining dough balls.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 10 lavash, each approximately 9 to 10 inches in diameter. The nutritional values below are per piece.
  • Storage: Bring the leftover bread to room temperature and store in an airtight container (or a Ziploc bag) for up to 4 days.
  • Reheating: You can reheat in a low-heat oven (325°F) for 8-10 minutes, or until thoroughly warmed through. Or you can wrap it in a lightly wetted paper towel and microwave for 30 seconds. 
  • A word on the yeast: I used instant rapid yeast as I find that it blooms faster but active dry yeast can also be used.
  • This recipe was adapted from Betul Tunc’s cookbook Turkuaz Kitchen’s lavash recipe with minor changes.

Nutrition

Calories: 211kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 298mg | Potassium: 79mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 20IU | Vitamin C: 0.01mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/lavash-bread-recipe/feed/ 8
Adana Kebab Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/adana-kebab/ https://foolproofliving.com/adana-kebab/#comments Tue, 29 Jul 2025 21:17:13 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82217 Recently, a local reader challenged me to share how to make this iconic kebab at home. Having grown up in…]]>

Recently, a local reader challenged me to share how to make this iconic kebab at home. Having grown up in Turkiye and with a good friend who owns a kebab restaurant in Adana (and serves nothing else!), I felt uniquely qualified to take on the challenge.

In this post, I will walk you through every aspect of creating these juicy, flavorful skewers with confidence. I’ll share how to choose the right meat, the true authentic seasonings, essential shaping techniques, and foolproof grilling tips I’ve picked up through my own recipe testing.

Adana wrap on a plate from the top view.

What Is Adana Kebab?

At its essence, Adana Kebab (or as we call it, Adana Kebap) is Turkey’s most iconic grilled lamb skewer. Hailing from the city of Adana, this traditional recipe is made with just a handful of core ingredients: finely ground lamb, tail fat, a specific Turkish red pepper called kapya, fiery Urfa chili flakes (or Aleppo pepper), salt, and black pepper.

Although many online versions include aromatics and spices like onion, garlic, or cumin, the authentic recipe adheres to those five basics.

The traditional method also calls for hand-mincing the meat with a special curved knife called a zırh (affiliate link), threading it onto wide metal skewers, then grilling it over charcoal for a deeply smoky, rich result.

The True Secret of Adana Kebab: Ingredients and Their Role

When it comes to the ingredient list for this Turkish classic, the most important thing to remember is that less is more.

Sure, you can add onion, garlic, or spices like cumin and coriander. But my suggestion is to first master the basics of the authentic recipe, and then tweak it to your own preferences from there.

Ingredients for Turkish lamb kebabs in bowls from the top view.

You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here is a more detailed breakdown of what you will need.

The Meat: Lamb, Beef, or Both?

That said, even though I just made a case for sticking to tradition, I’ll be the first to bend the rules a bit, starting with the most important part of the recipe: the meat.

The authentic version is made by chopping lamb (typically from the shoulder) and tail fat with a curved knife called a zırh (in the US, it is referred to as a cleaver knife).

The goal with using a tool like zırh is to chop the meat and fat together, back and forth, so that it (almost) forms a paste. In a way, you’re grinding the meat yourself, by hand, until the fat and muscle bind naturally.

Now, as much as I love the idea of sticking to the original, even as someone who cooks for a living, I don’t own a zırh.

And as for tail fat? Let’s just say it’s not exactly easy to find.

So, in the spirit of making this Turkish skewers recipe doable for home cooks (dare I say it, even on a weeknight), I use ground lamb instead. I know it’s not quite the same, but I truly believe it’s the next best thing.

Now, you might be wondering: can you use ground beef instead, or a combination of both? The answer is yes and yes. But there’s one very important detail to keep in mind: fat content.

What makes Adana Kebab so iconic, and so delicious, is the fat. Fat doesn’t just add richness. It also helps the meat hold together and cling to the skewer as it cooks. It’s the secret to that signature juicy texture and the reason these kebabs don’t dry out or fall apart on the grill.

Since ground lamb naturally has more fat than beef, you’ll need to make adjustments if you’re using beef. Look for a fatty grind, ideally a 60/40 ratio if possible. 

If you’re buying from a butcher, ask for ground chuck with extra fat, or see if they can add in some beef fat trimmings for you.

Signature Seasonings of Adana: Red Pepper, Urfa Chili, and Salt

There’s a common belief that most kebab recipes rely heavily on aromatics like onion and garlic, along with spices such as ground cumin, coriander, and paprika.

Red Pepper

While that might be true for many types of kebab, this ground lamb skewer recipe challenges that idea. Instead of layering in lots of spices, it highlights one very specific ingredient: a red pepper called kapya. Native to Turkey, kapya peppers are known for their sweet and smoky flavor and add a distinctive depth to the original recipe.

I would have loved to use Kapya here, but since it’s not widely available in the US, I went with the next best thing I could find: red Fresno peppers.

If you can’t get your hands on those, a red bell pepper will also work.

Urfa Chili Flakes (Pul Biber)

The next signature ingredient is Urfa chili pepper (affiliate link), also known as Aleppo-style red pepper flakes. Urfa chili has a deep, earthy heat that’s mild yet complex, and it complements the richness of the lamb beautifully.

If you can find it, it is absolutely worth using. That said, you can use any red pepper flakes you have on hand. And, of course, feel free to adjust the heat level to suit your preferences.

Paprika

To help round out the flavor of the red pepper, especially when using substitutes like Fresno or bell pepper, I like to add a little extra depth with paprika. I use two teaspoons of my favorite kind to help bring in some of the sweetness and smokiness that kapya naturally offers.

This is also a great place to put your own spin on the recipe. Use sweet paprika, smoky paprika, or a combination of both, depending on what you prefer and have on hand.

Salt & Pepper

Finally, we have salt and black pepper.

And I’ll say this upfront. The amount of salt might surprise you. The recipe calls for one tablespoon of kosher salt for two pounds of ground lamb. It may sound like a lot, but it is essential.

Salt not only enhances the taste, but it also helps the meat bind and hold its shape on the skewer.

Of course, not all salts are created equal. I use Diamond Crystal kosher salt (affiliate link), which is lighter and less salty by volume than many other brands. If you are using something like Morton’s kosher salt, I recommend starting with half the amount and adjusting to taste.

I also add a touch of black pepper to round out the simple seasoning.

The Essential Tool Worth Investing in for Home-Style Adana Kebab

Whenever I share a recipe here on the blog, I try to avoid using tools or gadgets that most home kitchens don’t already have.

But in the case of this Turkish lamb skewers recipe, I wanted to stay as true to the original as possible, which meant making one small exception; I had to buy the thick, flat metal skewers (affiliate link) traditionally used in Adana.

My thinking is this: if you enjoy making kebabs at home, this is a worthy one-time investment that will more than pay off in the long run.

During my recipe testing, I first attempted to make these kebabs using thin bamboo skewers commonly found in most households. I had such a hard time getting the meat to stick and hold that signature thickness. The mixture kept slipping off or falling apart during grilling, which made the whole process stressful.

That’s when I realized that the people who have been making this Adana recipe for generations must know what they’re doing. So, I ordered a set of one-inch-wide kebab skewers (affiliate link), and the difference was night and day.

Here is how it is helpful:

  • The thicker skewers give you more surface area to work with when shaping the meat. 
  • Their width helps the meat cling better, and the longer body allows you to form a full-length kebab that cooks evenly over the grill. 
  • They also help the meat stay intact when exposed to high heat, which is especially important when working with a high-fat mixture like this one.

How to Make Adana Kebab at Home

Once you have your ingredients prepped and your skewers ready, the rest comes down to technique. It’s not difficult, just a few key steps to follow for the best results. Here’s how I break it down:

Preparing your kebab mixture:

Step 1 – Chop and Drain the Red Peppers

Start by removing the seeds and chopping the red peppers as finely as you can. This helps them blend seamlessly into the meat mixture, rather than showing up as visible chunks.

After chopping, place the peppers in a fine mesh strainer and press gently to release their juices. This step is essential as we want to remove as much liquid as possible so the mixture doesn’t become too wet or soggy when it’s time to shape.

Meat mixture in a bowl from the top view.

Step 2 – Prepare the Meat Mixture

In a large mixing bowl, combine the drained chopped peppers, ground lamb, paprika, red pepper flakes, salt, and black pepper. Using clean hands, mix everything together until fully combined and evenly seasoned.

Once it’s mixed, divide the meat into equal portions based on how many skewers you plan to use. My set came with three skewers, so I divided the mixture into three even parts. You can eyeball it or, if you prefer precision, weigh the portions using a kitchen scale.

If you want to make it ahead, just cover the bowl and place it in the fridge. In fact, if you can plan ahead, I highly recommend it. Giving the mixture a chance to rest helps the flavors come together and settle into the meat. An overnight rest (up to 24 hours) can really make a difference.

Shaping your Adana Kebabs

The meat is being threaded onto the skewer.

Step 3 – Thread Onto the Skewers

When you’re ready to thread the meat, start by setting up your workstation. Grab your skewers, a small bowl of water to wet your hands, and bring out the meat mixture from the fridge.

To thread, take one portion of the ground lamb mixture, shape it into a ball, and gently insert the skewer through the center. Using your hands, press and spread the meat down the length of the skewer, turning it as you go to create an even shape.

If or when the mixture starts to feel sticky, lightly wet your hands to prevent the meat from sticking too much. Just be careful not to overdo it. A little water goes a long way, and too much can make the mixture too soft to hold together.

As you work, do your best to keep the thickness even from top to bottom. Once you’ve shaped the kebab, take a moment to gently press and seal the top and bottom ends of the meat onto the skewer.

Step 4 – Create the signature ridges

Adana skewers shaped from the top view.

If you’ve had Adana Kebab before, you’ve probably noticed the pattern of shallow ridges pressed into the surface. They’re not just for appearance. These indentations help the meat cook more evenly over high heat and give the kebab its signature look.

To make them, use your thumb and forefinger to gently press along the length of the meat, making shallow marks every couple of inches. Rotate the skewer and repeat the same motion on the other side.

Grilling Your Kebabs

Step 5 – Grill

Lamb kebabs on the grill.

The traditional way to cook Adana Kebab is over a charcoal grill, which gives it that distinct smoky taste and slightly crisp exterior. That said, I used my gas grill for this version to keep it simple and approachable for home cooks. Both methods work well, and below you’ll find tips for each.

If using a gas grill: Preheat your grill to 400°F to 425°F. Clean the grill grates thoroughly and brush them with oil to prevent sticking.

Carefully place the Adana kebab skewers on the grates and grill, turning them frequently to ensure even cooking and a nice char on all sides.

Depending on the thickness and length of your kebabs, this will take about 10 to 12 minutes.

Because the meat is rich in fat, you may see flare-ups as it cooks. That’s completely normal, but it’s important to stay close to the grill while they’re cooking. 

Adjust the heat as needed and continue rotating the skewers to avoid burning and help them cook evenly.

If using a charcoal grill: Light your charcoal and let the coals burn until they’re covered with a thin layer of white ash.

Spread them out evenly and position the skewers directly over the heat. Grill the kebabs, turning them every couple of minutes to ensure even cooking and that nice, smoky char.

The total time will be similar, around 10 to 12 minutes, again depending on the heat level and the size of your skewers.

Similar to cooking it on a gas grill, keep a close eye during grilling, especially if you notice flare-ups. The goal is juicy, charred kebabs that stay intact from grill to plate.

Step 6 – Let It Rest While Making Sumac Onions

Sumac onions before and after they are mixed.

Once the kebabs are grilled, transfer them to a sheet pan and cover loosely with foil. Let them rest for about 5 to 10 minutes so the juices have time to settle back into the meat.

While the kebabs are resting, you can prepare one of the classic accompaniments to Adana Kebab: sumac onions, a traditional onion salad that beautifully balances the richness of the meat.

They’re easy to make, but if you’d like a more detailed breakdown, feel free to check out my Sumac Onions recipe.

To make a quick batch, combine sliced red onion, olive oil, lemon juice, kosher salt, sumac, and a pinch of red pepper flakes in a medium bowl. Using clean hands, gently massage the onions until they have softened slightly. Finish with a sprinkle of chopped parsley.

Assembling and Serving

Step 7 – Assemble:

Adana wrap being assembled and placed on a plate from the top view.

With the meat grilled and your sumac onions ready, all that’s left is the bread. Traditionally, Adana Kebab is served with lavash, a soft Mediterranean-style flatbread.

It’s similar to pita bread, and you can usually find it in most supermarkets. Of course, if you’d like to try making your own, I also have a homemade lavash recipe available for you to follow.

To assemble, place a piece of lavash flat on a plate and use it to slide the meat off the skewer. Since my skewers are quite large, I like to cut the kebab in half while it’s still on the skewer, then slide each half off gently. The meat should release easily.

From there, simply top it with a generous spoonful of sumac onions, a few slices of tomatoes, and a sprinkle of fresh parsley before rolling it up.

Needless to say, it is best to enjoy your Adana wrap while it’s still warm.

Expert Tips: Troubleshooting Adana Kebab

As you can see, making this Turkish Adana Kebab recipe doesn’t require any unusual ingredients or complicated cooking techniques. Still, while preparing this post, I made a few mistakes and learned a few things that I think would be helpful, especially if you’re making it for the first time.

Below are some tips to help you get the best results:

Falling off the skewer during grilling: During my recipe testing, I had a couple of kebabs fall apart on the grill. In the end, I realized there are two main reasons this can happen:

  • Not enough fat: If the meat doesn’t have enough fat, it will have trouble sticking to the skewer and keeping its shape. So don’t skip the fat, especially if you’re using ground beef or a beef-lamb mix.
  • Ends not sealed properly: Sealing the ends means gently squeezing and securing both the top and bottom of the kebab where the meat meets the skewer. If this step is skipped, the meat may loosen or fall off when exposed to high heat.

Even thickness is key: As you’re threading the skewers, make sure the meat is evenly distributed from end to end. I’ll admit, it takes a little practice, but once you shape your first one, it gets easier. Taking the time to shape the kebab evenly helps it cook properly and stay intact.

Let it rest: As with any kebab recipe, letting the meat rest in the fridge before grilling makes a big difference. That chill time allows the salt to work its way through the mixture and gives the flavors time to meld.

Keep a close eye on the grill: Because of the high fat content, flare-ups are normal while grilling. This is where you may need to manage the heat a bit. Stay close by, and turn the skewers often so they cook evenly without burning.

Using make-shift skewers: During my research for this recipe, I came across a few versions where people used makeshift skewers by wrapping bamboo skewers (or wooden skewers) with aluminum foil.

I’ll be honest, I haven’t tried that method myself. After testing this recipe more than five times, I can say that even with thick metal skewers, getting the meat to stick takes a bit of technique. So while it might work in a pinch, I’d be hesitant to recommend it. In my experience, investing in proper wide skewers makes the process much more reliable and much less frustrating.

How to Serve Adana Kebab: Authentic Turkish Pairings for a Complete Meal

So you made your Adana Kebab, garnished it with sumac onions, and wrapped it in warm lavash. Good for you! But what if you want to take it up a notch?

Below are a few traditional pairing ideas in case you’d like to serve it the way we do in Türkiye:

Pair it with a classic Turkish salad: Turn your kebab into a full feast by serving it alongside a fresh salad like the classic pairing, Turkish Ezme. Alternatively, you can go with a traditional Shepherd’s Salad (Çoban Salatası), a white bean salad like Piyaz, or even my Greek Cucumber Salad for a cooling contrast.

Add grilled vegetables: If you have a little extra time, grill some tomatoes or green peppers on the side while your kebabs are cooking. These simple vegetables add a lovely charred flavor and are often served right on top of the kebab in restaurants across Türkiye.

Serve with rice or bulgur pilaf: For a more substantial meal, pair your kebab with a starch. My Vermicelli Rice or Bulgur Pilaf are both authentic and satisfying options that round out the plate perfectly.

Drizzle it with yogurt sauce: While not traditional, a spoonful of tzatziki sauce or my yogurt mint sauce can be a nice addition, especially if you’re serving this to kids or anyone who prefers a milder dish. The creamy yogurt helps balance the spices and adds a cooling contrast to the richness of the meat.

Don’t forget the ayran: In Türkiye, if you order Adana Kebab at a restaurant, chances are your server will bring out a glass of ayran without even asking. This cool, tangy yogurt drink helps balance the spices in the kebab and brings everything together. The good news is you can make ayran at home in just a few minutes.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Adana kebab on a plate served over lavash.
Print

Adana Kebab Recipe

This Adana Kebab recipe is a home-cook-friendly version of the iconic Turkish ground lamb kebab, made with ground lamb, red peppers, and Urfa chili (also known as red pepper flakes). Threaded onto wide skewers and grilled to perfection, it's rich, juicy, and full of authentic flavor. Served with lavash and sumac onions, it's a complete meal that brings the taste of Türkiye to your own backyard.
Course Dinner, Lamb
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Halal
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 12 minutes
Resting time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 32 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 669kcal

Ingredients

For the kebab

  • 2 red peppers red fresno chilis or ½ red bell pepper
  • 2 lbs ground lamb or 1 lb ground lamb + 1 lb ground beef
  • 2 teaspoons paprika
  • 1 teaspoon Urfa chili flakes or Aleppo pepper or red pepper flakes
  • 1 tablespoon kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • Water to wet your hands

For the Sumac Onions

  • 1 medium-sized red onion sliced
  • 1 tablespoons olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoons sumac
  • ¼ teaspoon Urfa chili flakes Aleppo pepper or red pepper flakes
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped

To Serve with

  • 6 Lavash or pita bread

Instructions

  • Start by preparing the peppers. Remove the seeds and chop them as finely as you can. Place the chopped peppers in a colander set over a bowl and let them drain to release their juices. Once drained, transfer them to a large mixing bowl.
  • Add the ground lamb, paprika, Aleppo pepper, salt, and black pepper to the bowl with the peppers.
    Ground lamb mixed with red peppers and spices in a bowl.
  • Using clean hands, mix everything together until fully combined and the seasonings are evenly distributed.
  • Divide the meat mixture evenly based on the number of skewers you have. For example, if you have 3 skewers, divide the mixture into 3 equal portions.
    A person is threading the meat onto the skewer.
  • Take one portion, shape it into a ball, and gently insert the skewer through the center.
  • Fill a small bowl with cold tap water and keep it nearby. Using your hands, carefully press and spread the meat down the length of the skewer, turning it as you go to ensure even thickness all around. Lightly wet your fingers as needed to prevent the meat from sticking to your hands. Remember that just a little water is enough to help shape the kebabs without making the mixture too wet.
    Adana kebab on skewers ready to grill.
  • Once shaped, gently press and secure the top and bottom edges of the meat where it starts and ends on the skewer. This is an essential step in that it helps prevent the meat from breaking apart during grilling.
  • To create the traditional ridges, use your thumb and forefinger to lightly press along the length of the kebab, making shallow marks every couple of inches. Rotate the skewer and repeat on the other side. These ridges help the meat cook evenly and give the kebabs their signature look.
  • Preheat your gas grill to 400°F-425°F. Clean the grill grates well and brush them with oil to prevent sticking.
    Turkish Adana on the grill.
  • Once the grill is ready, place the Adana kebab skewers on the grates. Grill for 10-12 minutes, turning them often so they cook evenly and develop a nice char on the outside.
  • Keep in mind that because the meat has a higher fat content, you may experience flare-ups. Stay close to the grill and adjust the heat as needed to prevent burning.
  • Once cooked to your liking, cover the meat with foil and let it rest for 5-10 minutes.
  • While the meat is resting, make the sumac onions. In a medium-sized bowl, mix the sliced onions, olive oil, lemon juice, salt, sumac, and red pepper flakes.
    Sumac onions in a bowl.
  • Using clean hands, gently massage the onion mixture until slightly softened. Garnish with parsley.
  • When ready to assemble your Adana kebab, grab a lavash (or pita bread), place the meat on top, and garnish with sumac onions. Roll and serve right away.
    Adana kebab served on lavash with sumac onions on top.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves six adults and the nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Using beef instead of lamb: You can make this recipe with beef or with a mixture of beef and lamb, but it is important that you use a cut that is high in fat or ask your butcher to incorporate some beef trimmings to your ground beef.
  • Keep a close eye while grilling: Because the meat is rich in fat, you may see flare-ups as it is grilling. That’s expected, but it’s essential to stay close to the grill while they’re cooking.
  • Storage: Bring your kebabs to room temperature and store in the fridge for up to 3-4 days.
  • Reheating: Warm in a low oven set to 300°F (150°C) for about 10 to 15 minutes, or until warmed through. Cover loosely with foil to prevent it from drying out.

Nutrition

Calories: 669kcal | Carbohydrates: 45g | Protein: 33g | Fat: 39g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Cholesterol: 110mg | Sodium: 1755mg | Potassium: 487mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1809IU | Vitamin C: 56mg | Calcium: 39mg | Iron: 6mg

Storing, Reheating and Freezing Instructions:

While freshly grilled Adana Kebab is always best, leftovers can be stored, frozen, and reheated with good results. Here’s how I handle it:

Storage: Let the kebab cool to room temperature, then place it in an airtight container. Store it in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.

Freezing: Wrap the leftover meat tightly in parchment paper, then wrap again with aluminum foil to keep everything in place. Transfer to the freezer and store for up to 1 month. When ready to use, thaw overnight in the fridge.

Reheating: Reheat in a low oven set to 300°F (150°C) for about 10 to 15 minutes, or until warmed through. Cover loosely with foil to prevent it from drying out.

Can You Make Adana Kebab Without a Grill? (Oven & Stovetop Alternatives)

While many online sources suggest you can easily cook Adana Kebab in the oven or on the stovetop, the truth is, the very essence of true Adana Kebab comes from cooking it over an open flame.

To be perfectly honest, that signature smoky flavor and crisp exterior are incredibly difficult to replicate without a grill.

However, I understand not everyone has a grill, and /or weather conditions may not cooperate to grill kebabs on the outside.

In that case, you can adapt this recipe, but it’s important to know you’ll likely be missing out of the signature smokey flavors. These alternatives are best thought of as Adana-style ground lamb kebabs, not a substitute for the real thing.

Cooking in the Oven

Step 1: Line a quarter sheet pan with a wire rack. This helps the meat cook evenly and allows air to circulate underneath. Preheat your oven to 400°F (204°C).

Step 2: Spread the meat mixture onto the rack in an even layer. Using a knife or spatula, divide it into 6 to 8 portions to mimic the shape and size of skewers.

Step 3: Bake for 20 to 23 minutes. Finish with 1 to 2 minutes under the broiler to develop a bit of char on top.

Cooking on the Stovetop

To be completely honest, I don’t recommend trying to cook full skewers on a skillet. It’s just too difficult to manage the thickness and shape. Instead, I suggest turning the meat mixture into Adana Kofte-style meatballs, which are easier to handle and still delicious.

Step 1: Form meatballs. Use a small cookie scoop or tablespoon to portion out the meat. Roll and gently flatten each one in the palm of your hand, then set them aside on a plate.

Step 2: Heat the pan. Add about a tablespoon of oil to a cast-iron or heavy-bottomed skillet. Heat it until it’s shimmering and very hot-this ensures you get a nice sear rather than steaming the meat.

Step 3: Cook in batches. Add the meatballs to the skillet, being careful not to overcrowd the pan. Cook them on all sides until nicely browned and cooked through, working in batches and adding more oil if needed.

FAQs

Is Adana kebab very spicy?

It depends. The heat in Adana Kebab comes mainly from the red peppers and Urfa chili used in the recipe. The level of spiciness can vary based on how many pepper seeds you include and how hot your red pepper flakes are.

If you want a milder version, simply remove all the seeds from the peppers and use less Urfa chili or substitute with a milder variety. If you like it spicy, keep some of the seeds and use more chili to dial up the heat.

Can I add onion, garlic, or other spices like cumin to this recipe?

You can, but keep in mind that it won’t be considered authentic Adana Kebab anymore. The traditional version is very simple and doesn’t include aromatics like onion or garlic.
That said, if you’d like to experiment with your own version, you can absolutely add them. Just make sure to grate them finely (or use a food processor to chop it finely) and strain out any excess liquid before mixing them into the meat. This helps keep the mixture from getting too wet and falling apart on the grill.

How do I know when Adana Kebab is cooked through?

You will know that it is fully cooked when it is nicely browned with grilled marks on the outside, is firm to touch and juicy when cut open.

What if I don’t have wide metal skewers?

Wide, flat metal skewers are essential for shaping and grilling Adana Kebab properly. If you don’t have them, you can try doubling up bamboo skewers or flattening them slightly, but keep in mind that the results won’t be quite the same.

You’ll likely lose the traditional look, and there’s a higher chance the meat won’t stay in place during grilling.

Other Authentic Turkish Recipes You Might Like:

If you’ve landed on this page, I suspect you’re a fan of Turkish food and maybe looking for even more foolproof, beginner-friendly recipes from my home country. Below are a few more classics you might also enjoy:

  • If you’ve ever been to a kebab restaurant and looked over the menu, chances are you’ve seen Turkish Red Lentil Soup on the list. It’s a simple 30-minute soup that’s just as beloved and familiar as Adana Kebab.
  • And if you’re in the mood for something cozy and quick, Turkish Pasta is another weeknight favorite that’s gone viral for a reason. It’s easy to make and loaded with comforting flavors.
  • Treat yourself to Türkiye’s most famous breakfast dish with my Turkish Eggs (Çılbır), poached eggs nestled on garlicky yogurt, drizzled with spicy butter, and ready in minutes. It’s truly a unique and satisfying experience!

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/adana-kebab/feed/ 2
Watermelon Cucumber Salad with Feta and Mint https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/ https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/#comments Wed, 16 Jul 2025 21:24:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=9222 Having grown up in the Mediterranean means having a few cooling staples like this cucumber, watermelon, and feta salad in…]]>

Having grown up in the Mediterranean means having a few cooling staples like this cucumber, watermelon, and feta salad in your back pocket. Summers get so hot that refreshing, no-cook dishes like this are a staple on every table.

Versions of this salad show up all across the Mediterranean, from Italy to Greece and beyond. The ingredients may vary slightly, but the combination of juicy watermelon, crisp cucumbers, briny feta cheese, and fresh herbs is a classic in many Mediterranean kitchens.

Every year, as soon as watermelons showed up at the market, my mom would start making it on repeat. With the sweet juiciness of watermelon, the crunch of cold cucumbers, and the creamy-salty bite of feta, it’s the kind of dish that doesn’t need much fuss to shine.

This is what summer tastes like where I’m from: easy, filling, and somehow always the first thing to disappear from the table.

Watermelon Feta Mint Salad Ingredients

This summer watermelon salad with feta and cucumber starts with an easy honey-lime dressing and a short list of ingredients. You can find the complete list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes to consider when shopping for this refreshing salad.

The ingredients for watermelon cucumber salad from the top view.

For the Salad Dressing:

I use my honey-lime dressing in this watermelon mint feta salad because the sweet, floral brightness of lime and honey pairs beautifully with the natural sweetness of the watermelon.

Olive Oil: Choose a light and balanced extra virgin olive oil that isn’t overly peppery or grassy. You want something that supports the salad without overpowering the other ingredients. My current favorite single-source olive oil brand is Garcia de la Cruz (affiliate link.)

Lime Juice: Freshly squeezed lime juice is best, but bottled works in a pinch. If you don’t have lime, freshly squeezed lemon juice is an acceptable substitute. It will taste slightly different but still refreshing. You can also add a little lime zest (about ¼ teaspoon) to enhance the citrus notes. Just be sure to zest the lime before juicing it.

Honey: A floral local honey works especially well here, but maple syrup or agave are good alternatives if that’s what you have. Just know they’ll shift the flavor slightly.

For the Salad:

Watermelon: You’ll need 8 cups of watermelon cut into small 1-inch cubes. Seedless watermelon is the easiest option, but if you’re using regular watermelon, try cutting along the natural lines of the seeds to remove them more easily.

Cucumbers: Persian cucumbers offer great crunch, but regular English cucumbers also work well. I usually peel mine, especially if the skin tastes bitter, which can happen if the fruit has been sitting for a while. Removing the seeds is optional.

Fresh Herbs: The classic combo is watermelon, feta, and mint, but I like to add a little torn fresh basil for even more freshness. I don’t recommend using dried herbs here, as their flavors tend to overpower the dish.

Feta Cheese: I recommend buying a block of feta and crumbling it yourself. It’s creamier, fresher, and gives you more control over the size and texture of the crumbles. If you’re looking for alternatives, mild cheeses like goat cheese or queso fresco would also work well.

How to Make Watermelon Cucumber Salad (Easy Step-by-Step Instructions)

This watermelon and cucumber salad recipe comes together in just 15 minutes from start to finish. Here’s how I make it, step by step:

A collage of images shwowing the dressing for watermelon cucumber salad and the ingredients in a bowl.

Step 1- Make the Dressing: In a mason jar or small bowl, combine the olive oil, fresh lime juice, salt, and honey. Shake or whisk well until the mixture is fully emulsified and appears creamy and cohesive, with no oil separation. If you’d like to save even more time, you can make the dressing in advance and store it in an airtight jar in the fridge for up to 2 days.

Step 2 – Assemble the Salad: Grab a large bowl (one that gives you plenty of room to toss later without squishing anything) and add the diced watermelon, sliced cucumber, and fresh mint and basil. I recommend tearing the herbs by hand instead of chopping them with a knife. This helps preserve the delicate texture of the basil and prevents it from bruising or darkening.

A collage of images showing Mediterranean watermelon salad being drizzled with the dressing.

Step 3 – Add the Dressing: Right before serving, drizzle the dressing over the salad. Gently toss with a large spoon (or two spoons, for an even gentler touch), taking care not to mash/bruise the watermelon cubes.

Step 4 – Finish with Feta: Top the salad with crumbled feta cheese just before serving. If you’d like, finish with a pinch of flaky sea salt to bring out the natural sweetness of the watermelon.

Watermelon Cucumber Salad Variations & Easy Add-Ins

Looking to truly make this watermelon cucumber mint salad recipe your own? Below are a few easy ways to switch things up using ingredients you may already have at home. These are optional, but they’re great if you want to build on the base recipe.

Change up the dressing: When I want a different twist, I swap the honey-lime dressing with my Lemon Balsamic Dressing. Watermelon cucumber salad with balsamic vinaigrette is just as bright and tangy. You can also finish the salad with a drizzle of balsamic reduction right before serving for a deeper, more concentrated flavor.

Make it heartier: If you’re making this watermelon feta salad as part of your meal prep, stir in a cup (or two) of cooked quinoa, bulgur, or wild rice to make it more filling. For a more traditional green salad base, add a handful of salad greens or baby spinach.

Add Summer tomatoes:  Juicy sliced summer tomatoes (I like heirlooms for salads like these) add another layer of flavor and make the salad even more seasonal and vibrant.

Add Onion: A little onion can bring a nice savory bite. You can use thinly sliced red onions, Pickled Red Onions, or Roasted Red Onions. For a milder option, chopped scallions work well too.

Make it vegan: To make this a vegan-friendly salad, simply omit the cheese or use a store-bought or homemade vegan feta. And don’t forget to swap the honey in the dressing for maple syrup or agave.

Foolproof Tips for the Best Watermelon Cucumber Salad

Making this watermelon feta cucumber salad is simple, but here are a few tips to help you get the best results on your first try:

Be gentle when mixing: Use a light hand when tossing the salad to keep the delicate ingredients from breaking apart. A large spoon or your hands work best for gently combining everything.

Choose a good watermelon: Look for a ripe watermelon that feels heavy for its size and has a large yellow field spot. That spot means it had time to ripen on the vine, which usually means better taste and juiciness.

Cut your watermelon and cucumber evenlyDice the watermelon into bite-sized pieces, or use a melon baller for a more decorative look. For the cucumber, peeling is optional, but I recommend slicing it thinly or cutting it into evenly sized cubes so you get both watermelon and cucumber in every bite.

Do not skip the salt: It may sound unusual, but adding a bit of salt to sweet watermelon makes a big difference. It brings out the natural sweetness and enhances the flavors of both the watermelon and cucumber.

Serve it chilled: This watermelon salad tastes best when it is nice and cold. I like to refrigerate the watermelon, cucumber, and feta before prepping so that everything is cool and refreshing when it is time to serve.

Assemble at the last minute: For the best texture, combine the watermelon, cucumber, herbs, and dressing just before serving. This keeps the watermelon and cucumber from getting soggy.

How to Make Ahead and Store?

If you are planning to make this watermelon cucumber feta salad recipe ahead of time, here are my best tips:

Make Ahead: To save valuable time when you’re ready to serve, you can prep the components ahead: Cut the watermelon, slice the cucumbers, crumble the feta, and make the dressing. Store each component in a separate container with a tight-fitting lid. Assemble your feta watermelon cucumber salad right before serving to ensure the best texture and prevent sogginess.

Storage: Leftover salad will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. However, be aware that the watermelon mixture will collect water as it sits. Simply drain, sprinkle salad with fresh herbs, and mix with a touch more dressing to bring it back to life before serving.

A close up of watermelon salad with feta and mint in a bowl.

What to Serve with Watermelon Cucumber Salad?

There are so many options when it comes to serving this watermelon salad with feta and mint. While I usually make it for lunch and serve it by itself, you can easily pair it with meats and vegetables for your summer meals. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

Grilled Protein: Enjoy it as a light lunch or dinner, and serve it as a side dish to hearty grilled meat and seafood like Grilled Pork Chops, Shrimp Kebobs, Grilled Shrimp, Grilled Mahi Mahi, Shish Tawook, or Greek Yogurt Chicken.

Vegetarian Dinners: Keep the entire meal plant-forward and serve it as a wonderful addition to vegetarian main meals like Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant, Baked Eggplant Ziti or Lemon Ricotta Pasta.

Picnic & Potluck Dishes: This salad is always a hit at summer BBQs, picnics, and potlucks. Pair it with other crowd-pleasers like my No Mayo Coleslaw or Greek Yogurt Coleslaw, or Caper Potato Salad.

Quick Answers to Common Questions (FAQs)

Does watermelon and cucumber taste good together?

Yes, watermelon and cucumber are exceptionally delicious when paired together. The juicy watermelon is the perfect balance to the crisp cucumber.

What is watermelon salad made of?

Watermelon salad consists of watermelon, cucumber, fresh mint, fresh basil, and feta cheese tossed in a lime or balsamic vinegar-based dressing.

How do I pick a ripe watermelon quickly?

Look for one with a creamy yellow field spot, a dull rind (not shiny), and that feels heavy for its size. When you give it a gentle tap, it should sound deep and hollow.

What if I don’t have fresh mint?

Fresh mint adds a lot to this recipe, but if you do not have any on hand, you can simply leave it out. The salad will still be delicious, just a little less aromatic.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Savory Fruit Salads You Might Also Like:

If you love sweet and savory salads, you are in the right place. Here are a few other fruit-forward recipes you might want to try:

Watermelon and cucumber salad in a bowl with two spoons in the bowl.
Print

Watermelon Cucumber Salad Recipe

This Watermelon cucumber salad is an incredibly refreshing savory fruit salad that is flavored with honey lime dressing. Ready in 15 minutes, it is the perfect summer salad you can serve for lunch or take with you to summer potlucks, picnics, and BBQ parties.
Course Lunch
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 290kcal

Ingredients

For the Honey Lime Dressing:

  • 4 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 3 tablespoons fresh lime juice from 1 lime
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoon honey

For The Salad:

  • 8 cups fresh watermelon ~ 5 to 6 lbs – cut into 1-inch cubes (preferably seedless)
  • 2 Persian cucumbers peeled and sliced ¼ inch thick, or English cucumbers
  • 3 tablespoons fresh mint roughly torn
  • 2 tablespoons fresh basil roughly torn
  • ½ cup feta cheese crumbled (or goat cheese)
  • Pinch sea salt optional

Instructions

  • Mix olive oil, fresh lime juice, salt, and honey in a mason jar and shake vigorously. Set aside.
    Watermelon salad dressing and the ingredients in a bowl.
  • Place watermelon cubes, sliced cucumber, fresh mint, and basil in a large salad bowl.
  • Right before serving, drizzle the dressing over the salad. Give it a gentle toss being careful not to bruise or break the watermelon chunks.
  • Sprinkle the feta cheese on top, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary. Alternatively, you can sprinkle it with a pinch of sea salt. Serve cold.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 8 cups of cucumber watermelon salad ideal for serving 4 adults. The nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Serve it chilled. This salad is best when served cold. I like to keep each ingredient in the refrigerator before and after prepping. This way, all the salad is perfectly chill (and super refreshing) before serving.
  • Assemble at the last minute: Toss all the ingredients with the dressing just before serving. This keeps the integrity and texture of the watermelon and cucumber intact.
  • Be gentle while tossing: Use gentle hands to keep the delicate ingredients’ shape and structure.
  • Make Ahead: Prepare all the ingredients and store them in separate containers. You can also make the dressing 3 days in advance and keep it in a mason jar in the fridge. Toss it all together just before serving.
  • Storage: Leftover salad will keep fresh in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. However, be aware that the watermelon mixture will collect water as it sits. Drain, sprinkle salad with fresh herbs, and toss with a touch more of the honey lime dressing to bring it back to life before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 290kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 365mg | Potassium: 434mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 24g | Vitamin A: 2056IU | Vitamin C: 30mg | Calcium: 131mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/feed/ 6
Easy Tzatziki Sauce Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/#comments Tue, 01 Jul 2025 16:52:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15923 What is Tzatziki Sauce? (Beyond the White Gyro Sauce) You know that question about your desert island food? Tzatziki would…]]>

What is Tzatziki Sauce? (Beyond the White Gyro Sauce)

You know that question about your desert island food? Tzatziki would be mine. 

At its core, tzatziki is a yogurt-based dip made with strained yogurt (also known as Greek yogurt), cucumber, garlic, lemon juice, and herbs (typically dill or mint).

Referred to by many names, such as Greek Tzatziki sauce, Tzatziki Sauce, and Cucumber Yogurt Sauce, it can be served as a dip, a sauce, or even as a dressing. 

It pairs well with just about anything, from meat to gyros, to Turkish kebabs, to grilled or roasted vegetables.

While many people in the U.S. know it as the white sauce that comes with a gyro, that version is often heavier, sometimes made with mayonnaise or sour cream, and doesn’t always include cucumber. 

My homemade tzatziki sauce recipe is different here. It’s the real thing. The kind of tzatziki you’ll find on tables in homes across Turkiye, Greece, and beyond.

Essential Ingredients for Authentic Tzatziki (And Why They Matter)

The good news is that this easy tzatziki recipe requires only a few simple ingredients and comes together in minutes. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful tips to keep in mind when shopping:

Tzatziki sauce ingredients from the top view with text on the image.

Full-fat Greek Yogurt (also known as Strained Yogurt): I think the best yogurt for tzatziki is a whole-milk, plain Greek yogurt. It yields a rich and creamy tzatziki dip, a main characteristic of this Mediterranean sauce.  If your container has any liquid sitting on top, be sure to strain that out before using.

You can also use plain, unsweetened yogurt or even low-fat or fat-free yogurt, but the texture will be a bit looser compared to Greek yogurt.

Fresh Cucumber: Either Persian or English cucumbers work well. I like to peel them first, as some cucumber skin can be bitter. Still, it is a personal preference.

I grate them using the large holes on a box grater and then drain them in a mesh sieve. It might seem like an extra step, but thoroughly draining the grated cucumber helps eliminate excess liquid, giving you the thick, creamy consistency that this cucumber tzatziki sauce is known for.

Fresh Garlic Cloves: The traditional version of this Mediterranean yogurt sauce calls for fresh, finely minced garlic. I usually add two cloves per 1 ½ cups of yogurt, but feel free to adjust the amount based on your preferences. 

If you prefer a milder flavor, garlic powder is a fine substitute. Since it’s more concentrated, I recommend using about 1 teaspoon per 1 ½ cups of yogurt.

Fresh Herbs: I like using fresh dill, but fresh mint is another classic option. In Turkiye, it’s also common to use dried dill or mint if fresh isn’t available. That said, I think fresh herbs bring a brighter, more vibrant taste.

Fresh Lemon Juice: Just a squeeze is enough to brighten the flavors and balance the richness of the yogurt.

Kosher Salt and Black Pepper: You won’t need anything beyond basic seasoning here. Start with the amounts listed in the recipe and adjust to taste.

Extra Virgin Olive Oil (Optional): You won’t see olive oil listed in my recipe because my mom never used it. I find that thick, whole-milk yogurt gives the sauce all the richness it needs. However, if you’d like to add it, a tablespoon of olive oil per 1 ½ cups of yogurt is a good starting point.

How to Make Easy Homemade Tzatziki: A Step-by-Step Guide

Making a delicious tzatziki with yogurt, shredded cucumber, and lemon juice doesn’t require any special cooking techniques, so anyone can do it.

A collage of images showing how to strain grated cucumber and make the yogurt mixture.

Step 1 – Grate and drain the cucumber: Using the large holes of a box grater, grate the peeled cucumber and transfer it to a fine-mesh strainer. Press down with a spatula to release the excess moisture. I usually let it sit for a few minutes to help the juices drain completely.

Once drained, you should have about 1 cup of grated cucumber.

Alternatively, you can wrap the shredded cucumber in a clean tea towel and squeeze it by hand to remove as much liquid as possible.

Step 2 – Whisk the yogurt base: In a medium bowl, combine the Greek yogurt, freshly squeezed lemon juice, minced garlic, salt, and black pepper.

Whisk until smooth and creamy. This is also a good time to give it a quick taste and adjust the seasoning if needed.

A collage of photos showing how to make tzatziki from scratch.

Step 3 – Add cucumber and herbs: Fold in the drained cucumber and fresh dill or mint. Mix until everything is evenly combined.

Step 4 – Cover and chill:
You can serve it right away, but if you have the time, cover and let it rest in the fridge for at least 30 minutes. This allows the flavors to meld and deepen.

A bowl of tzatziki surrounded with vegetables.
Print

Easy Tzatziki Sauce Recipe

An easy tzatziki sauce recipe that you can make in minutes and serve with all your savory Mediterranean/Middle Eastern dishes.
Course Sauce
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 61kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 English Cucumber peeled (or 2 Persian cucumbers)
  • 1 ½ cups Whole Milk Greek Yogurt unsweetened and unflavored
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 2 cloves fresh garlic peeled and minced finely
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • cup fresh dill or fresh mint

Instructions

  • Using the large holes of a box grater, grate the cucumber. Transfer it into a fine-mesh strainer and strain all of its juices, pressing it with a rubber spatula. Set aside.
    A collage of images showing how to make the recipe.
  • In a medium-size mixing bowl, whisk together yogurt, lemon juice, minced garlic, salt and pepper.
  • Using a spatula, fold in the cucumber and dill. Transfer to a bowl.
    Person making the tzatziki in a bowl.
  • If you have time, cover with plastic, and let it sit in the fridge for a few hours before serving.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ¼ to 1 ½ cups of tzatziki sauce which is ideal for 4 servings as a condiment. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: Make the recipe as written up to 2 days before serving. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge. Be sure to give it a good stir before serving.
  • Storage: This sauce will stay fresh for about 3-4 days. Simply place leftovers in an airtight container and keep them in the fridge. If you notice any liquid separation, just give your Tzatziki a good stir before serving.
  • A word on olive oil: My recipe relies on rich yogurt for creaminess and does not require adding any olive oil, unlike some other tzatziki recipes. However, for extra depth, drizzle 1 tbsp extra virgin olive oil on top before serving.
  •  

Nutrition

Calories: 61kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 4mg | Sodium: 31mg | Potassium: 245mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 381IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 105mg | Iron: 1mg

Expert Tips from a Lifelong Tzatziki Maker

This recipe is pretty straightforward, but there are a few things I want to point out so you can end up with the best tzatziki on your first try:

  • Don’t skip draining the shredded cucumber: This is the single most important step when it comes to achieving that creamy texture tzatziki is known for. Yes, it’s an extra step, but it makes all the difference.
  • DIY Greek Yogurt: If you don’t have Greek yogurt, you can strain plain yogurt at home. Just place a fine-mesh sieve over a bowl and line it with cheesecloth (a paper towel will also work in a pinch). Add the yogurt, cover it, and let it sit in the fridge for a few hours. The longer it sits, the thicker it becomes.
    Since plain yogurt has more liquid, I recommend using about half a cup more than the recipe calls for to account for the liquid that will drain.
  • Avoid overmixing: Once you have folded in the cucumber and herbs, mix only until the ingredients are just combined. Overmixing can cause the cucumber to release more liquid, which may water down the sauce.
  • Do not skip the chilling: To me, the secret to the best tzatziki sauce is letting it rest in the fridge. This time allows the flavors (especially the garlic and fresh herbs) to develop and deepen. Even just 30 minutes makes a difference, but planning for an hour or two can yield even better results.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

Make Ahead: You can make this Greek tzatziki sauce recipe a day or two ahead. Just be sure to transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge.

Storage: Leftovers will keep for up to 3 days in the refrigerator. Give it a good stir before serving, and if any liquid has collected on top, simply pour it off or drain it before mixing.

Delicious Ways to Serve Tzatziki Sauce in Your Daily Cooking

Images showing food that uses tzatziki.

I may or may not have been caught eating this Mediterranean classic with a spoon. All jokes aside, tzatziki is a staple for a reason. It pairs beautifully with just about any meat or vegetable dish that could use a cooling, creamy contrast. Here are a few of my favorite ways to use it:

Kabobs and Gyros: Simply drizzle it right on top! If you want to try something different, try drizzling this sauce over my Karniyarik recipe (aka Turkish Stuffed Eggplant), Greek Yogurt Chicken, Shish Taouk, or Baked Chicken Kabobs, Chicken Shawarma, or serve it with Turkish Kofte

Sauce for Burgers and Sandwiches: I love using it as a spread for Greek Lamb Burgers (pictured above) or my Chicken Pita Wraps. It adds a creamy contrast and brings everything together.

Vegetables and Vegetable Dishes: A dollop of tzatziki can turn simple roasted eggplant into a delicious appetizer. It’s also a great match for baked zucchini fritters, crispy falafel, or just about any veggie-forward dish you’d serve at a gathering.

With Salads: Tzatziki isn’t just a dip; it makes a fantastic, creamy addition to various salads. I particularly love a dollop alongside or even mixed into my easy Greek salad for an extra layer of freshness.

Grain Bowls: Drizzle it over shawarma chicken bowls (pictured above) or make it part of a DIY Cava bowl. It adds creaminess and brightens the rest of the toppings.

Part of a Meze Platter: Serve it in a bowl as a dip on a large platter along with cheese and crackers, olives, hummus, muhammara, pita bread (or pita chips), and fresh raw vegetables.

Tzatziki Sauce Variations & Substitutions:

  • Dairy-Free/Vegan Options: To make this vegan or dairy-free, use a neutral-flavored plant-based yogurt. I prefer unflavored cashew yogurt, but coconut or almond milk yogurt can also work. Just make sure it’s unsweetened and as thick as possible for the best consistency.
  • Herb Variations: You can easily make this creamy tzatziki sauce your own by switching up the herbs. Fresh dill and mint are classic options, but parsley or chives are also great alternatives. No fresh herbs on hand? You can leave them out and still have a delicious dip.
  • Making it Thinner (like Turkish Cacık): If you have ever been to Turkiye, you’ve probably had cacik, a thinner version of tzatziki. To achieve that texture, simply use plain yogurt instead of Greek yogurt, or stir in about ½ cup of cold water (or more, depending on your preference) until you reach the desired consistency.

FAQs:

How Do You Spell Tzatziki?

The phonetic spelling is /tsaˈtsiːki/. The word for this Greek yogurt cucumber sauce is spelled T-Z-A-T-Z-I-K-I. It is a loanword from Modern Greek, which actually comes from the Turkish word cacık, of unknown origin.

How Do You Pronounce Tzatziki?

So, how do you say Tzatziki? The correct way to pronounce Tzatziki is “tsah-see-key.” Think of the tsah part as how you say “pizza,” without the first two letters.

Can Tzatziki sauce be frozen?

Technically, you can freeze yogurt, but after thawing, it loses its creamy consistency. This is generally true for most savory yogurt-based dressings or sauces. Therefore, I wouldn’t recommend freezing Tzatziki sauce.

Can I use non-fat yogurt?

Yes, you can use any plain yogurt you like. However, I recommend sticking to Greek Yogurt as it is thicker than other yogurt types. The higher the fat content, the more delicious and creamy it would be, but non-fat or low-fat plain yogurt would still do the job.

Do I have to strain the juice of the cucumber?

The correct answer is yes. Some people even go as far as straining yogurt and cucumber in a colander lined with cheesecloth overnight in the fridge. I guess it is because they prefer a thicker consistency. However, in my opinion, the thickness of Tzatziki is a personal preference. If you like yours runny then no need to strain the juices and vice versa.

Do I have to peel the cucumber?

It is a personal preference. I prefer to peel mine as some cucumber skin can be bitter.

Can I substitute sour cream for yogurt?

I don’t usually recommend it, as the flavor and texture are quite different. Sour cream is richer and tangier than yogurt, and it has a higher fat content, which can make the sauce feel heavier than intended.

What can i substitute for greek yogurt in tzatziki sauce?

If you don’t have Greek yogurt, you can use plain (unsweetened) yogurt to make tzatziki. Since it is not as thick as Greek yogurt (also known as strained yogurt), I recommend straining its liquid before use. Simply place it in a fine-mesh strainer lined with cheesecloth and set it in a bowl.

Other Yogurt Sauce Recipes You Might Also Like:

  • My Yogurt Dill Sauce is bright, herby, and perfect for serving with salmon, baked potatoes, or simple roasted vegetables.
  • A drizzle of my Greek yogurt salad dressing instantly turns any salad greens into a refreshing, creamy side that goes with just about any meal.
  • A spoonful of my Yogurt Tahini Sauce adds a creamy, nutty layer to grain bowls, roasted veggies, or just about anything that needs a little something extra.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/feed/ 25
Texas Caviar Recipe (Cowboy Caviar) https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/ https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/#comments Wed, 25 Jun 2025 18:24:29 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=22788 For years, I avoided this cowboy bean salad anytime I saw it at a potluck or outdoor party. If you’re…]]>

For years, I avoided this cowboy bean salad anytime I saw it at a potluck or outdoor party. If you’re like me and didn’t grow up eating it, you might agree that some versions can be overly sweet.

Then I came across Dorie Greenspan’s version in her cookbook Everyday Dorie (affiliate link) and decided to give it another shot. To my surprise, it was nothing like what I had tasted before. Her cowboy caviar dressing was perfectly tangy with just a touch of sweetness, balancing out the earthy beans in the best way.

Cowboy caviar in a bowl with two spoons on the side.

This recipe, sometimes called Texas Caviar, Cowboy Caviar, Cowboy Salad, or even Cowboy Bean Dip, is my take on her version, with a few minor tweaks.

Whatever name you use, it’s one of the easiest dishes to throw together, and it works as a dip, a salad, or a chunky salsa perfect with a side of tortilla chips.

Texas Caviar Ingredients

For a quick overview, find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below. But for truly foolproof results, here are my top tips as you shop and prep:

The Dressing Ingredients:

Some versions of this recipe use bottled Italian dressing, but I find those to be overly oily and lacking in depth. What makes this Cowboy Caviar dip different is the homemade lime and olive oil dressing. It’s just enough to coat the beans and veggies without weighing them down, adding brightness and balance in every bite.

Ingredients for cowboy caviar's dressing.

Here are a couple of helpful ingredient notes as you make the dressing:

Lime zest and lime juice: My version of the Texas Caviar dressing uses both lime zest and fresh lime juice to bring out a bright, tangy flavor. Four tablespoons of lime juice might sound like a lot, but trust me, it’s just the right amount.

If you prefer a milder taste, you can use 2 tablespoons of red wine vinegar and reduce the lime juice to 2 tablespoons.

And just a quick tip: it’s always easier to zest the lime before squeezing it.

Spices: I use a small amount of ground cumin and sweet paprika, following Dorie’s recipe. I think they add a beautiful depth and a welcome punch. Still, if you’re not a fan of either spice, feel free to leave them out.

Sweetener: I almost always reach for natural sweeteners like honey or maple syrup, but granulated sugar works in a pinch if that’s what you have on hand.

Garlic: Whenever I make a salad dressing, I love using fresh garlic. I think the sharp bite and depth of flavor just can’t be replicated. But if you prefer something milder, you can substitute it with 1 teaspoon of garlic powder.

Salad Ingredients:

A photo showing what's in Texas caviar.

Beans: I use a combination of black beans and black-eyed peas in my version of this Cowboy Caviar salad. In my opinion, black-eyed peas are pretty much a must in any Texas Caviar dip recipe. You can swap red kidney beans or pinto beans in place of the black beans if you’d like, and you’ll still get the heart of the dish.

Canned beans help keep things quick and easy, but you can absolutely cook them from scratch if that’s your preference.

Just be sure to rinse and dry them well before assembling the salad to avoid extra liquid watering it down.

Corn: In the summer, I love using fresh shucked corn when it’s in season. But if you’re making this at another time of year, frozen (and thawed) or canned (rinsed and drained) corn works just as well.

Onion: I use a combination of finely chopped green onions and red onions because I love the distinct flavors each one adds. You get a mix of color, crunch, and both mild and sharp flavors. If you prefer a milder taste, you can leave out the red onion. Or if you want something with more bite, skip the green and just use red.

Peppers: Most Texas Caviar recipes use a combination of red bell peppers and jalapeño, and for good reason. Each one brings its own unique flavor. If you like a bit of heat, feel free to leave some of the jalapeño seeds in for a touch of spiciness.

Tomatoes: During the summer months, I love using colorful cherry tomatoes for this Texas Caviar dip. But really, any kind of tomato will work. Heirloom, beefsteak, or even regular Roma tomatoes are all good options. Just be sure to cut them into small, bite-sized pieces so they mix easily with the other ingredients.

Avocado: It is optional and not traditional, but I think a ripe avocado makes a great addition, especially if you’re planning to serve this as a dip with chips on the side. Just be sure to cut it into small cubes so it blends in nicely.

Fresh Herbs: I used a handful of finely chopped fresh cilantro leaves, but if you are not a fan, you can use fresh parsley instead.

How To Make Texas Caviar?

Making this recipe takes no more than 15-20 minutes and requires no special equipment. 

Step 1 – Make the Cowboy Caviar Dressing: 

Person making Texas caviar dressing.

In a mixing bowl, whisk together the olive oil, lime zest, lime juice, ground cumin, paprika, kosher salt, honey, and garlic until fully combined.

Or, if you prefer, add everything to a mason jar, put the lid on, and give it a good shake.

You can also make the dressing a day or two ahead of time to speed things up even more when you’re ready to assemble the dip.

Step 2 – Assemble the salad:

Cowboy caviar salad from the top view in a bowl.

In a large salad bowl, combine the drained and rinsed black beans and black-eyed peas with the corn kernels, scallions, red onion, bell peppers, jalapeños, tomatoes, and chopped cilantro.

If you’re using avocado, I recommend adding it just before serving so it doesn’t brown.

Step 3 – Drizzle and Serve:

Images showing how to make Cowboy caviar.

Drizzle the dressing over the salad and gently toss to combine, being careful not to break up the beans too much.

This is also a good time to give it a taste and adjust the seasoning if needed.

Make Ahead and Storage Tips:

One of the best things about this Cowboy Salad recipe is that it can be made ahead of time (one or two days). In fact, I recommend it because the extra time allows the flavors to mingle and develop. Here’s how I do it:

  • To make ahead:
    Prepare the dressing and chop all the salad ingredients except the avocado. Toss everything together in a large bowl, drizzle with the dressing, cover tightly, and refrigerate. If you’re using avocado, add it just before serving to keep it from browning.
  • Storing leftovers:
    Transfer any leftover Cowboy Caviar to an airtight container and keep it in the fridge for up to 5 days. Before serving, give it a good stir and freshen it up with a squeeze of lime juice and a sprinkle of salt if needed.

Expert Tips for The Best Texas Caviar

While this recipe is pretty straightforward, below are a few helpful tips for the best results.

  • Let it rest: This step is optional, but I recommend letting the salad rest in the fridge for about an hour before serving. It gives the tangy lime juice dressing time to soak into the beans and veggies, bringing everything together.
  • Evenly cut vegetables: The most time-consuming part of this recipe is chopping the vegetables, but it’s worth taking your time. Aim to cut everything into similar-sized pieces so each bite feels balanced. Try to slice the tomatoes thinly and cut the peppers into small, bite-sized pieces, ideally smaller than the black-eyed peas.
  • Be gentle as you toss: When mixing the salad, go slowly and gently to avoid breaking the beans. This helps keep the texture nice and prevents everything from turning into mush. 

Cowboy Caviar Variations and Substitutions

Making this Cowboy Caviar dip your own is easy because, let’s face it, this simple recipe is endlessly customizable. Here are a few ideas to get you started:

  • Add more veggies: You can pack your Cowboy Caviar with even more fresh vegetables. Try thinly sliced cucumbers, chopped celery, or even finely diced radishes for extra crunch and color.
  • Add fruit: I’ve seen versions of this recipe made with sweet fruit like mango or pineapple. It might sound unexpected, but the sweetness pairs nicely with the tangy dressing, adding a refreshing twist, especially when served as a dip with chips.
  • Switch up the dressing: While my favorite part of this recipe is the tangy lime dressing, I sometimes change things up with my chili lime vinaigrette, which incorporates chili powder and adds a more Mexican-inspired twist.
  • Toss in grains: I love adding a cup of cooked quinoa, wild rice or farro to make it a filling salad especially if I am making this recipe as a part of my weekly meal prep.
  • Make it vegan: If you prefer a vegan version, just swap the honey for maple syrup or agave.

What To Serve with Texas Caviar?

It’s no secret that this recipe makes a great side dish or appetizer, whether you’re heading to a summer BBQ, a potluck, or packing lunch for work. But if you’d like to turn it into a full meal, you have plenty of options. Here are a few ideas:

  • Grilled Meats and seafood: Serve it alongside grilled chicken, shrimp, or salmon for a light and colorful plate. It’s a perfect match for summer cookouts or easy weeknight dinners.
  • With chips on the side: This Cowboy Salsa recipe makes a great appetizer when served with tortilla chips. I like using the scoopable kind, so you can get a little bit of everything in each bite.
  • With eggs: Scrambled eggs wrapped in a tortilla with a generous spoonful of Texas Caviar makes an excellent breakfast burrito. It adds freshness, texture, and just the right amount of zing to your morning meal.

FAQs

What is Texas Caviar?

Texas Caviar is a recipe originally created and served by Helen Corbitt, the culinary director of Neiman Marcus, in 1940s Dallas.

Made with a combination of canned or cooked beans (i.e. red, black, or pinto), black-eyed peas, peppers, tomatoes, garlic, and other extras like corn, avocado, mango, and various herbs and spices, since then it has stood the test of time and become a Southern classic.

Texas Caviar vs. Cowboy Caviar: Is There a Difference?

The dish was originally created in Texas, which is how it got the name “Texas Caviar.” Over time, people started calling it “Cowboy Caviar” as a fun, casual nickname.

How far in advance can you make cowboy caviar?

You can make Cowboy Caviar up to 2 days in advance. Just store it in an airtight container in the fridge, and it should still taste fresh and delicious. If you’re planning to include avocado, wait to add it until right before serving to keep it from browning.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Delicious Bean Salads You’ll Love

Fan of bean salads? Me too! Here are a few more that you might like:

  • My Corn and Black Bean Salad is yet another great alternative to a bean salad that you can serve with chips on the side.
  • What makes my Five Bean Salad recipe the best bean salad is the garlicky mustard dressing. Just like this cowboy caviar recipe, it uses a combination of canned beans and some lightly boiled fresh green beans.
  • If you have extra black eyed peas, then my Black Eyed Peas Salad is just as fresh and satisfying. Not to mention, it takes 15 minutes to make.
Texas caviar in a bowl with two spoons on the side.
Print

Texas Caviar Recipe

This Texas Caviar (aka Cowboy Caviar)loaded with black-eyed peas, corn, tomatoes, peppers, and tangy lime dressing makes the best salad, dip, or side dish. Ready in 30 minutes and can be made ahead.
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 192kcal

Ingredients

For The Dressing:

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon lime zest
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon paprika sweet or smoked
  • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon honey
  • 2 cloves garlic minced

For The Caviar Dip:

  • 1 can black beans 15-oz can, drained and rinsed
  • 1 can black eyed peas 15-oz can, drained and rinsed
  • ½ cup corn kernels frozen (and thawed), canned (and drained) or fresh corn would all work
  • 3 scallions both white and green parts are chopped
  • cup red onion chopped finely or diced
  • 1 red bell peppers chopped (approx. 1/2 cup)
  • 1 jalapeno pepper seeded and chopped
  • ½ cup cherry tomatoes sliced thinly
  • ½ avocado ripe – cut into small cubes
  • ½ cup fresh cilantro rinsed and chopped

To Serve With (Optional)

  • Your favorite hot Sauce
  • Tortilla Chips

Instructions

  • To make the dressing: Whisk together the olive oil, lime zest, lime juice, ground cumin, smoked paprika, salt, honey and garlic. Set it aside.
    Person making Texas caviar dressing with lime juice.
  • For the Texas Caviar dip (or salad): Place, black beans, black eyed peas, corn kernels, scallions, red onion, bell peppers, jalapeno pepper, cherry tomatoes, avocado, and fresh cilantro in a bowl.
    The ingredients for Cowboy caviar in a bowl from the top view.
  • Drizzle it with the dressing and give it a gentle toss. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
    Person drizzling the salad with dressing and mixing it.
  • If preferred, add in a few dashes of your favorite hot sauce and serve with tortilla chips.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 5-6 cups of Cowboy caviar ideal for serving 6 adults as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving and does not include the calories coming from (optional) tortilla chips.
  • Make ahead: You can make this recipe up to 2 days in advance. If you go in that direction, add the avocado right before serving to avoid browning.
  • Storage: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • If you want to go with more of the traditional Italian salad dressing route instead of the lime dressing I used, feel free to use my Italian salad dressing below: ¼ cups extra virgin olive oil
    2 tablespoons white wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar
    1 tablespoon freshly squeezed lemon juice
    1 clove of garlic, minced
    1 teaspoon dried basil
    1/4 teaspoon dried oregano
    ¼ teaspoon crushed red pepper (optional)
    ½ teaspoon Kosher salt (I use Diamond kosher salt)
    ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Nutrition

Calories: 192kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 326mg | Potassium: 386mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 982IU | Vitamin C: 39mg | Calcium: 31mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was originally published in March 2019. It has been updated with some additional information with no changes to the original recipe in July 2025.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/feed/ 44
Burrata Caprese https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/ https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/#comments Wed, 18 Jun 2025 22:05:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=67454 Key Ingredients to make Caprese Salad with Burrata Caprese burrata salad is a cinch to make and requires just a…]]>

Key Ingredients to make Caprese Salad with Burrata

Caprese burrata salad is a cinch to make and requires just a few key ingredients from the grocery store or farmer’s market. You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Below are some helpful tips as you shop for this recipe’s ingredients.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Burrata cheese: Fresh burrata cheese is a soft Italian cheese with a delicate, creamy center, similar in taste and texture to fresh mozzarella. It’s usually sold submerged in water in a tub. Before using it in your salad, take it out of the fridge and let it come closer to room temperature to enhance its flavor and texture. 

Also, drain off any excess liquid before tearing it into pieces.

Tomatoes: I like to use a mix of large heirloom tomatoes and sweet cherry tomatoes. The juicy heirlooms bring a meaty, steak-like texture to the salad, while cherry tomatoes add a pop of sweetness. Feel free to use any variety you have on hand, including Roma, beefsteak, vine-ripened, or grape tomatoes.

To get the best flavor, keep your tomatoes on the counter (not in the fridge) and try to use them within a few days of buying them. For easy, clean slices, I recommend using a serrated knife.

Fresh basil leaves: To finish the salad, use whole basil leaves or tear them gently with your hands instead of cutting them with a knife, which can bruise their delicate leaves and release bitter flavors.

Balsamic vinegar: If your budget allows, look for a traditional, aged balsamic vinegar from Modena. Its deep sweetness and complex flavor will elevate the salad. However, you can absolutely use a more affordable condiment-style balsamic vinegar and it’ll still taste delicious!

Extra virgin olive oil: I prefer a single-origin extra virgin olive oil with mild, fruity notes for this recipe. It adds a lovely finishing touch and complements the creamy burrata perfectly.

Seasonings: Keep it simple with kosher salt and freshly cracked black pepper. A final sprinkle of flaky salt adds a nice, salty crunch.

How to Make this Burrata Caprese Recipe?

The combination of burrata, tomato and basil is just as delicious here as a traditional caprese salad. The good news is that making it is quick and easy with only a few steps:

A collage of images showing how to make burrata Caprese recipe.

Step 1 – Prepare tomatoes: Slice the larger tomatoes using a serrated knife into ⅓-inch thick slices. If using cherry tomatoes, cut them in half (or you can quarter them as well). 

Grab a large serving platter and arrange the sliced tomatoes overlapping until it covers the bottom of the plate. 

Sprinkle it with salt to ensure they are properly seasoned.

Step 2 – Add burrata: Place burrata balls in the center of the serving platter. Alternatively, gently cut them into smaller pieces with a sharp paring knife and scatter the chunks over the sliced tomatoes. Alternatively, you can carefully tear into small chunks by hand.

Step 3 – Season: Sprinkle the tomatoes and burrata with the remaining salt and black pepper. Finish with a generous drizzle of olive oil and balsamic vinegar ensuring that each slice of tomato gets a bit of oil and a bit of balsamic vinegar.

Garnish with torn basil leaves before serving.

How to Store Leftovers?

Leftover burrata caprese will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for 2–3 days. Keep in mind that the burrata’s creamy center will solidify a bit over time, so it won’t be quite as creamy on days two and three.

Before serving leftovers, drain off any excess liquid to prevent them from becoming soggy. To “revive” your burrata caprese, add a few fresh tomato slices and some fresh basil leaves, then drizzle with a little extra olive oil and balsamic vinegar. Finish with a sprinkle of flaky salt for a fresh, vibrant bite.

Expert Tips

  • Use peak season tomatoes for the ultimate flavor. While creamy burrata may seem like the star of the show, slightly ripe, juicy tomatoes are just as crucial for the most delicious dish. When shopping for tomatoes for this recipe, take a moment to ensure that they are not overly ripe and free of any bruises.
  • Season tomatoes liberally:  Don’t be shy about salting the tomatoes. Properly seasoning them draws out their natural juices and enhances their sweet, vibrant flavor.
  • Serve at room temperature: To achieve the perfect burrata “ooze”, bring it to room temperature before tearing and adding it to the salad. This way, it will be extra creamy with a soft and spreadable texture.
  • Presentation is key: This is a showstopping salad that will become the talk of the table. Be creative – assemble the tomatoes somewhat haphazardly and whimsical. Allow the burrata to shine in the center or scattered into pieces.
  • Resist the urge to overcomplicate it: This is a super simple tomato salad that truly shines when made with in-season, high-quality ingredients. Stick to the basics and let the fresh flavors speak for themselves. There is no need for extra bells and whistles!
  • Double the recipe or halve it for a small crowd: The recipe below serves four, but I could honestly eat the whole thing myself. Double or triple the recipe for a large party, or halve it when serving for one or two.

Variations

While the combination of basil, burrata, and tomatoes is quite simple and effective, you can take this recipe to the next level by changing it up a bit. Here are a few variations I’ve tried and recommend:

  • Use balsamic reduction instead of balsamic vinegar: Balsamic reduction (also known as sweet balsamic glaze) is reduced balsamic vinegar that is sticky and sweet, and can add just another level of flavor to this burrata caprese salad recipe. Simply drizzle your burrata salad with balsamic glaze at the very end (instead of the balsamic vinegar drizzle) for a robust and tangy finish.
  • Change up the Dressing: Take it up a notch with a simple basil dressing for caprese salad, like Basil Vinaigrette or go for Balsamic and Lemon Dressing.
  • Add avocado: Although unconventional, a ripe avocado adds another layer of creaminess and color to this tomato burrata salad. Simply slice a ripe avocado (or cut it in cubes) for an added layer of flavor and texture.
  • Add summer fruit: Add a handful of summer berries, such as sliced juicy strawberries or raspberries, or some ripe stone fruit like peaches and apricots for a burst of color and natural sweetness.

What to Serve With Caprese Burrata Salad

When you put this Caprese salad with burrata on the table, I think we can all agree that it will be the star of the show. Make it a part of your Memorial Day Menu, Labor Day Menu, or 4th of July celebrations! Here are some pairing and serving suggestions:

  • Crusty Bread: Serve it with warm crusty bread like French baguette or No Knead Olive Bread on the side for an appetizer that is guaranteed to impress.
  • Bruschetta: Slice a baguette, brush with olive oil and toast just before serving alongside the tomato caprese with fresh burrata, or make it a part of your Meat and Cheese Platter.
  • Grilled or Roasted Meats: Give it a nice boost of protein and serve it as a side dish with Marinated Shrimp Skewers, Grilled Mahi Mahi, Greek Yogurt Chicken or Shrimp Scampi.
  • Pasta: Go all-out Italian and serve it with a main dish, such as my Garlic Butter Pasta or Lemon Ricotta Pasta.
  • Crisp White Wine: If all else fails, treat yourself to this gorgeous salad and a crisp, chilled glass of wine like an Italian Pinot Grigio or Sauvignon Blanc.
Burrata Caprese styled on a plate from the top view.

FAQs

What is burrata?

Creamy burrata cheese is an Italian cow’s milk cheese that features an outer shell of fresh mozzarella wrapped around a soft-center of stracciatella (cheese curds and cream).

Where does burrata cheese come from?

Burrata originated in Puglia, Italy at the Castel del Monte and since has become a global sensation around the world.

What’s the difference between burrata and caprese?

Burrata is the soft cheese ball with a creamy center, whereas caprese is the simple Italian salad that can be made with either burrata or fresh mozzarella.

What is the difference between burrata and mozzarella?

Burrata and mozzarella are both creamy, white, semi-soft Italian cheeses very similar in appearance. However, burrata is made with an outer layer of fresh mozzarella and filled with soft, stringy curd and cream known as stracciatella (the cheese, not the gelato). As a result, it has a super creamy texture and taste. Mozzarella is made from cow or water buffalo milk that is firm and bouncy.

How to cut burrata?

Instead of slicing it with a knife (as you would with mozzarella cheese), try breaking it using your clean hands. I usually like to break it into chunks, revealing all the creamy bits, and place it over the tomatoes.

How do you eat burrata?

Burrata is typically first sliced with a knife (or torn with clean hands) to reveal its creamy soft center, drizzled with olive oil and flakey sea salt, then eaten just as is with a fork, summer produce, or toasted bread.

Other Tomato Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

Whether you simply love the combination of tomato, basil, and burrata, or need some delicious ideas to use up your summer tomatoes, I have plenty of recipes I know you’ll love. Below are a few that I make over and over again during the peak tomato season:

  • My Caprese Chicken Sandwich is an open-faced sandwich that’s a wonderful weeknight recipe, with the same classic flavor profile as burrata caprese. It’s a fantastic summer dinner idea.
  • For a quick and easy weeknight dinner, my Pizza Caprese celebrates the flavors of the classic Italian recipe by turning it into a pizza that’s especially great when serving kids.
  • If you want to travel down to the South Mediterranean, try my Piyaz – Turkish Tomato White Bean Salad for another tomato salad recipe that’s a bit different but just as delicious.
  • Try my quick Tomato Cucumber Mozzarella Salad for a simple summer side that you can make in less than 15 minutes.
Burrata Caprese placed on a plate from the top view.
Print

Burrata Caprese Recipe

Put your fresh summer tomatoes to good use with this Burrata Caprese recipe that you can make in 10 minutes.This easy summer salad combines the classic Italian flavors we all love, but uses Burrata instead of mozzarella cheese.
Course Salad
Cuisine Italian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 93kcal

Ingredients

  • 4-5 large tomatoes
  • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt or flaky sea salt
  • 2 balls burrata cheese 8 ounces in total
  • ¼ cup fresh basil leaves torn
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil plus more for finishing
  • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar or balsamic glaze

Instructions

  • Slice tomatoes into ⅓-inch thick slices. Arrange them on a serving platter. Sprinkle tomato slices with ½ teaspoon salt.
  • Arrange burrata balls in the middle or gently break them with a sharp pairing knife and scatter the chunks over the sliced tomatoes.
  • Sprinkle everything with the rest of the salt and freshly ground black pepper. Drizzle with olive oil and balsamic vinegar.
  • Garnish it with basil leaves. Serve!

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves 4 generously. I usually serve one ball of burrata and two medium-sized tomatoes for 2 people. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply this recipe using this ratio.
  • Tomatoes: While we use heirloom tomatoes in the recipe, you can use any type of tomatoes you have on hand. Cherry tomatoes, vine-ripened tomatoes and even roasted tomatoes would work in this recipe.
  • You can serve burrata as a whole or gently break it to reveal the creamy center. This way, your guests can easily serve themselves.
  • Storage: Leftover burrata caprese will keep for 2-3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. However, keep in mind the buratta’s cream will solidify and lose its viscosity over time, so it will not be as creamy on days two and three.

Nutrition

Calories: 93kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 0.4mg | Sodium: 444mg | Potassium: 307mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1108IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 21mg | Iron: 0.5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/feed/ 2
Balsamic Chicken Marinade https://foolproofliving.com/balsamic-chicken-marinade/ https://foolproofliving.com/balsamic-chicken-marinade/#comments Wed, 04 Jun 2025 21:44:27 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81713 Whether you’re cooking on the grill, in the oven, or on the stovetop, this versatile marinade transforms everyday chicken breasts…]]>

Whether you’re cooking on the grill, in the oven, or on the stovetop, this versatile marinade transforms everyday chicken breasts (or thighs) into a flavorful, crowd-pleasing meal. Plus, it’s easy to make ahead, perfect for meal prep, and freezer-friendly, making it ideal for busy weeknights or laid-back weekend BBQs.

Key Ingredients for Balsamic Marinade for Chicken

You can find the full list of ingredients for this balsamic vinegar chicken marinade in the recipe card. Below are a few helpful notes to help you make it your own.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Balsamic vinegar: When choosing a balsamic vinegar, follow your taste buds and your budget. 

You can use a traditional, aged balsamic from Modena for deeper sweetness and complexity, or a more affordable condiment-grade balsamic vinegar. Both will work beautifully to add that sweet-tangy depth to your chicken.

I would not recommend substituting store-bought balsamic glaze here, as it is already sweet and thickened. As a result, it won’t work the same way in the marinade.

Olive oil: I recommend using a high-quality extra-virgin olive oil here. Its smooth flavor perfectly balances the tangy balsamic vinegar and creamy Dijon mustard, helping the marinade coat the chicken evenly and soak up all those delicious flavors.

Sweetener: While I used honey, other liquid sweeteners such as maple syrup and agave can also be used. If you prefer to use brown sugar instead, be sure to stir it thoroughly so that no grainy sugar particles are left behind.

Garlic: I find that fresh garlic cloves make this recipe shine, but for a milder flavor, you can use ½ teaspoon garlic powder (equivalent to 2 cloves of fresh garlic).

Fresh Herbs: I think chopped fresh thyme pairs beautifully with the tangy-sweet flavors in this balsamic vinaigrette marinade, but if you don’t have fresh thyme, use half the amount of dried thyme instead. 

Alternatively, a robust Italian seasoning blend or other fresh (or dried herbs) like rosemary and oregano would also work well in this recipe.

Chicken: While I used skinless and boneless chicken breasts, you can also use skinless and boneless chicken thighs. 

How To Make Balsamic Chicken Marinade?

Making this balsamic vinegar marinade for chicken is easy and quick (in fact, the base is very similar to my versatile Lemon Balsamic Salad Dressing). Here are the steps:

A collage of images showing how to make balsamic marinade for chicken.

Step 1 – Mix the Ingredients: Use a container large enough to comfortably hold two pounds of chicken, ideally one with a tight-fitting lid. 

Place the balsamic vinegar, olive oil, honey, Dijon mustard, minced garlic, thyme, salt, and pepper in the container and whisk until thoroughly combined.

Alternatively, you can use a heavy-duty resealable bag, such as a Ziplock bag (for easy cleanup), and pour marinade over the meat. This is especially ideal if you are making it in larger quantities.

Step 2 – Add the chicken: Place the chicken in the marinade, making sure each piece is fully coated. Cover tightly with the lid and refrigerate.

Chicken marinating in balsamic marinade from the top view.

Step 3 – Let time do the rest: Marinate the chicken in the fridge for at least 30 minutes or, if you have the time, overnight for maximum flavor.

How To Cook Balsamic Marinated Chicken?

What makes this balsamic vinegar-marinated chicken so versatile is that you can cook it in any way you like. During the summer months, I love to fire up the grill, while in cooler weather, I let the oven do the heavy lifting. And when I’m short on time, cooking them quickly on the stovetop makes for an easy and delicious lunch. Here’s how you can do it:

Balsamic marinated chicken breasts on the grill.

On The Grill:

This is by far my favorite way to cook chicken marinated in balsamic vinegar—the high heat seals in the juices and creates those beautiful charred grill marks. Here’s how I do it:

Step 1 – Prepare the grill: Preheat your grill to medium-high heat (about 425–450°F). Clean the grill grates to ensure there’s no residue from previous grilling sessions. Use a pad of oiled paper towels to thoroughly oil the grates to prevent the chicken from sticking.

Step 2 – Remove the chicken: Take the chicken out of the marinade, letting any excess drip off. This is an important step, as too much marinade can cause flare-ups on the grill.

Step 3 – Grill: Place the chicken breasts on the hot grill and close the lid. Grill for about 6 to 8 minutes per side. A good way to tell when it is time to flip is to gently lift the chicken. If it releases easily from the grill, it is ready to flip. If it is sticking, give it another minute or two. It will release naturally once it is properly seared. 

Please note that the timing may vary depending on the thickness of your chicken. Check for doneness by inserting a digital thermometer in the thickest part of the chicken—it should read 165°F.

Step 4 – Rest & Serve: Loosely tent the grilled balsamic-marinated chicken with foil and let it rest for 5–7 minutes, allowing the juices to redistribute before serving.

Balsamic marinated grilled chicken on a plate from the top view.

In The Oven:

When I’m after a more hands-off approach, I let the oven do most of the work for me. Below are the steps:

Step 1 – Preheat the oven: My go-to oven temperature for baking chicken is 425°F (218 °C). I find that any lower, and it takes longer; plus, caramelization happens better at this hotter temperature.

Grab a baking sheet and line it with parchment paper. This helps with cleanup later, but if you prefer a more caramelized, slightly sticky exterior, you can skip using it.

Step 2 – Arrange: Place the chicken breasts on the sheet pan. Just like with the grilling method, it is important to let any excess marinade drip off first. Otherwise, it will steam instead of roast, and you will miss out on that beautiful caramelized crust.

Step 3 – Roast: Let the oven do its magic for 20 to 22 minutes, keeping in mind that the exact timing will depend on the thickness of your chicken pieces. Rotate the pan halfway through for even roasting.

Again, the best way to check for doneness is by inserting a digital thermometer into the thickest part of the chicken and ensuring that it registers 165°F (74°C).

Step 4 – Rest & Serve: Remove from the oven, cover loosely with foil (or parchment paper) and let it rest 5-10 minutes before serving.

On The Stove Top:

I usually cook it on the stove when I am preparing my balsamic marinated chicken for lunch, to serve with a quick salad or rice on the side. Here’s how:

Step 1 – Heat your skillet: Heat 1 tablespoon of oil in a large (10–12 inch) skillet over medium-high heat. 

Pro Tip: It is essential that the skillet is shimmering hot before adding the chicken. A properly heated skillet ensures the chicken sears immediately, creating a flavorful crust and preventing it from sticking to the pan.

Step 2 – Add the chicken: Place the chicken breasts in the pan, making sure to (1) let the excess marinade drip off first and (2) avoid overcrowding the skillet. Giving the chicken enough space helps it sear and brown properly rather than steaming.

Step 3 – Cook: Let the chicken cook for 5 to 7 minutes on each side. Similar to the grilling method, if the chicken releases easily when you try to flip it, it is ready to be turned. If not, give it a few more minutes to develop a nice sear.

Use a digital thermometer to check doneness.

Step 4 – Rest and serve: Transfer the now-cooked chicken to a plate, cover with foil and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before serving.

How To Store, Freeze, and Thaw?

My favorite thing about this balsamic marinade recipe is that you can make a batch in minutes and have it ready to cook at a moment’s notice. 

It also freezes beautifully, making it perfect for those busy days when you need a quick and flavorful meal.

Storage and reheating: The leftover cooked or grilled balsamic-marinated chicken can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. You can reheat it in a low-temp oven (300 degrees F) for 10 minutes or until it is heated through, being careful not to overcook and dry it out.

Freezing: If you prefer to freeze, I recommend freezing the raw chicken in the marinade instead of cooking it first. Simply place the chicken and marinade in a freezer-safe bag or container, removing as much air as possible to help prevent any ice crystals from forming. It will keep well in the freezer for up to 3 months.

Thawing: Remove the frozen chicken and marinade from the freezer and let them thaw in the fridge overnight.

Balsamic marinated chicken served with a salad on the side.

Expert Tips:

While marinating chicken in this balsamic vinegar marinade is a straightforward process, there are a few key points to consider for optimal results.

  • Marinating time: I find that the ideal marinating time is between 30 minutes and 12 hours, maximum. Balsamic vinegar, as an acidic ingredient, helps break down the muscle fibers in the chicken, making it more tender and juicy.
    However, any longer than that and the acidity can start to break down the chicken too much, especially with lean cuts like chicken breasts, leading to a mushy texture.
  • Take the chicken out of the fridge 15-30 minutes before cooking: While it may sound like an extra step, letting the chicken come close to room temperature helps it cook evenly. If you put cold chicken directly into a hot pan, grill, or oven, the outside will start cooking quickly while the inside remains cold.
  • Save some of the marinade: Before adding the chicken, save a few tablespoons of the marinade to use for a light brushing at the end. I especially recommend this when you’re grilling. It adds a beautiful finishing touch, keeping the chicken juicy and glossy all at the same time.
  • Safety First: Discard any marinade that came in contact with raw chicken once you’re done with it. This helps prevent any foodborne illnesses or salmonella contamination.
  • Large Chicken Breasts: If you’re using very large chicken breasts, I recommend cutting them in half lengthwise or pounding them with a meat mallet to an even thickness. This not only shortens the cooking time but also helps them cook more evenly.

FAQs

How long can you marinate chicken in balsamic vinegar?

I recommend marinating the chicken for at least 30 minutes or up to 12 hours in the refrigerator.

Why did my balsamic chicken burn on the grill?

Balsamic marinated chicken can potentially burn if the grill is too hot or if you use too much sugar in the marinade.

Do I need to rinse the marinade off the chicken before grilling?

No, you do not. Just let the excess marinade drip off before cooking.

Pairing Suggestions with Balsamic Chicken

Starches: Pair it with my Seasoned Quinoa for a light meal, or turn it into a feast with Yukon Gold Mashed Potatoes.

Salads: During the summer months, when I need something quick and easy to serve with grilled balsamic chicken, I usually go for my 5 Bean Salad or Greek Cucumber Salad.

Vegetables: If you’re after a low-carb dinner, serve your balsamic marinated chicken with a side of my Garlic and Butter Green Beans or Sauteed Asparagus.

Make it a dinner: Try my Grilled Caprese Chicken, where I use this marinade and then grill the chicken with sliced fresh mozzarella for an easy summer dinner.

Other Chicken Marinade Recipes You Might Like:

If you enjoyed this recipe, I think you might also:

  • Enjoy my Yogurt Chicken Marinade. Similar to vinegar-based marinades, the lactic acid in yogurt gently tenderizes the meat, keeping it just as juicy and flavorful.
  • Like my Mediterranean Chicken Marinade recipe, it embodies the characteristics of the Mediterranean diet with fresh lemon juice, olive oil, and fresh herbs. And you only need 15 minutes of marinating time for the most succulent chicken recipe.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Balsamic chicken breasts sliced on a plate.
Print

Balsamic Chicken Marinade Recipe

This easy balsamic chicken marinade comes together in minutes using simple pantry staples. It’s perfect for grilling, baking, or pan-searing, and it leaves your chicken tender, juicy, and full of rich, tangy-sweet flavor.
Course Chicken
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Resting time 30 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 426kcal

Ingredients

  • ½ cup balsamic vinegar
  • ¼ cup olive oil plus more for cooking and for grill grates
  • 1 tablespoon honey
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 2 cloves minced garlic
  • 1 teaspoon chopped fresh thyme or ½ teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 lbs boneless skinless chicken breasts 6-8 oz each / or thighs

Instructions

To Make The Marinade:

  • In a large container with a lid, whisk together ½ cup balsamic vinegar, ¼ cup olive oil, 1 tablespoon honey, 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard, 2 cloves of minced garlic, 1 teaspoon chopped thyme, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, and ½ teaspoon black pepper until combined.
    A collage of images showing how to make balsamic chicken marinade.
  • Place the chicken in the container and ensure it is thoroughly coated with the marinade.
  • Cover it with the lid and refrigerate for 30 minutes or overnight.
    Chicken marinating in balsamic marinade.
  • When ready to cook, remove it from the fridge 10-15 minutes before you are prepared to cook.

To Cook on the Grill:

  • Preheat a gas grill to medium-high heat (450°F/232°C). Clean grill grates and brush them with vegetable oil.
  • Remove the chicken from the marinade, letting excess liquid drip off as much as possible, and place on the grill.
  • Grill for 6-8 minutes per side (the timing would change depending on the thickness of your chicken breasts) or until the thickest part of a chicken breast registers 165°F (74°C) when inserted with a meat thermometer.
    Balsamic grilled chicken on the grill from the top view.
  • Transfer the now cooked chicken onto a plate, cover with aluminum foil and let it rest for 5-7 minutes before serving.

To Cook in the Oven:

  • Preheat the oven to 425°F/218°C. Line a sheet pan with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Place the chicken breasts on the sheet pan and bake for 20-22 minutes, or until the internal temperature reaches 165°F / 74°C.
  • Remove from the oven and onto a plate. Cover with aluminum foil and let them rest for 5 minutes before slicing and/or serving.

To Cook on the Stove:

  • Heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a large skillet (10 or 12-inch cast iron skillet or a skillet grill is ideal) over medium-high heat.
  • When it is simmering hot, place the chicken breasts in the skillet, making sure not to overcrowd the pan.
  • Cook, turning once until they are fully cooked, 12-15 minutes, or until a digital thermometer inserted in the center of a breast registers 165°F /74°C.
  • Remove the chicken breasts from the skillet and onto a plate; cover with aluminum foil and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about ¾ cups of balsamic vinegar chicken marinade, enough for marinating 2 pounds of chicken which is good for 4 servings. The nutritional values listed below are per serving.
  • Let the excess marinade drip off: Regardless of the cooking method you are using, take the time to let the excess marinade drip off before cooking. This is an essential step for achieving perfectly cooked and lightly caramelized balsamic chicken, rather than burned or steamed chicken.
  • Storage and Reheating: Leftover cooked or grilled chicken can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Reheat in a low-heat oven (300°F / 149°C) for 10 minutes or so until it is warmed to your liking.
  • Freezing & Thawing: You can freeze raw chicken in marinade in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight before cooking.

Nutrition

Calories: 426kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 48g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 145mg | Sodium: 866mg | Potassium: 889mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 70IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/balsamic-chicken-marinade/feed/ 2
Mediterranean Chicken Marinade https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-chicken-marinade/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-chicken-marinade/#comments Wed, 04 Jun 2025 21:37:35 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81740 Inspired by my Turkish roots and my mom’s love for bold, homemade flavors, this marinade is truly foolproof. No more…]]>

Inspired by my Turkish roots and my mom’s love for bold, homemade flavors, this marinade is truly foolproof. No more bottled dressings or long waits needed. Just real, simple ingredients that deliver mouthwatering results with minimal effort. 

Whether you’re firing up the grill, roasting in the oven, or searing on the stovetop, my marinade for Mediterranean chicken guarantees tender, delicious chicken that’s perfect for meal prep or a fast, flavorful dinner.

Key Ingredients – Building Blocks of Flavor

The beauty of this chicken marinade is that it is made with everyday ingredients you likely already have in your pantry. You can find the complete list of ingredients in the recipe card below. Below are some helpful ingredient notes.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Olive Oil: I recommend using extra-virgin olive oil, which is the purest and least processed type of olive oil. Look for a brand that offers fruity flavors with balanced bitterness and a slight peppery finish.

Lemon zest: The zest of a lemon is essential for delivering the distinctive lemony flavors that Mediterranean chicken marinade recipes are known for. Keep in mind that zesting the lemon is much easier before juicing it, so zest first, then juice.

Fresh lemon juice: No bottled supermarket juice here. Take the time to juice fresh lemons as freshness is key to a bright, zesty flavor.

Garlic: For the most potent flavor, I recommend using 3 minced fresh garlic cloves. For a milder garlic flavor, feel free to use garlic powder.

Mustard: I prefer Dijon mustard for its smooth tanginess, which brings the marinade together beautifully. However, grainy mustard can also be a great choice, adding a bit of texture and richness.

Fresh herbs: For the most authentic Mediterranean chicken marinade, I used fresh oregano, chopped just before adding it to the mix. Fresh rosemary, thyme, or even parsley (for a milder flavor) also work well in this recipe. If you’re using dried herbs instead, they’re more concentrated, so use about half the amount of fresh to avoid overpowering the marinade.

Seasoning: While I used basic salt and pepper for seasoning my marinade, you can use your favorite seasoning blends or spices from your cabinet. I particularly like my Mediterranean spice blend, also known as Baharat Spice Mix, for its continuation of Mediterranean flavors.

Chicken: I tested this recipe both with skinless and boneless chicken breasts and thighs, and they both worked beautifully. However, I think this is an all-purpose chicken marinade that would work with any cut of chicken.

How to Make Mediterranean Chicken Marinade?

Making this chicken marinade is quick and easy (in fact, the base is very similar to my versatile Mediterranean Salad Dressing). While the steps are pretty straightforward, there are a few things to keep in mind. Below are the steps to follow:

Steps showing how to make the marinade.

Step 1 – Mix the Ingredients: Grab a large container with a tight-fitting lid (big enough to hold 2 pounds of chicken). 

Combine the olive oil, lemon zest, lemon juice, minced garlic, Dijon mustard, oregano, and a good pinch of salt and pepper. Whisk until everything is combined.

Alternatively, you can use a heavy-duty resealable ziplock bag, which makes cleanup easy and is especially handy if you’re doubling or tripling the marinade.

Step 2 – Add the chicken: Place the chicken breasts in the marinade, making sure each piece is fully coated. Cover tightly with the lid.

Chicken breasts submerged in the marinade.

Step 3 – Let it rest: Let the chicken marinate on the kitchen counter for 15 to 30 minutes.

Pro Tip: Due to the amount of lemon juice we’re using, marinating for longer can cause the chicken to start “cooking” in the acid, which can result in a slightly rubbery texture and an overpowering lemony flavor once cooked.

How to Cook Mediterranean Marinated Chicken?

In addition to being a quick marinade that only needs 15 minutes, you can cook your Mediterranean marinated chicken any way you like. While grilling is my favorite method for this chicken recipe, I also love roasting it in the oven for a hands-off approach. And when I need a quick sear, I turn to the stovetop. 

Below, you’ll find my tips and how I use each cooking method.

Marinated Mediterranean chicken on the grill.

On The Grill:

This is one of my favorite grilled chicken marinade recipes because as soon as the chicken hits the hot grill, the tangy juices lock in the flavors, and you get those beautiful grill marks. Here’s how I do it:

Step 1 – Heat Up the Grill: Start by preheating your grill to a medium-high heat about 425–450°F (218-232 °C). Give the grates a good scrub to remove any lingering bits from past cooks, then lightly oil them with a paper towel pad dipped in oil. This keeps the chicken from sticking and makes for easy flipping.

Step 2 – Prep the Chicken: Take the marinated Mediterranean chicken out of the marinade, letting any extra drip off. Too much marinade can cause flare-ups or uneven cooking, so this step is worth taking the extra time to do it right.

Step 3 – Grill Away: Place the chicken on the hot grill and close the lid. Grill for 6 to 8 minutes per side. You’ll know it’s ready to flip when it naturally releases from the grill. If it sticks, give it another minute. Patience here pays off! 

Use a digital thermometer to check for doneness; you’re aiming for 165°F (74°C) in the thickest part.

Step 4 – Rest and Enjoy: Once the chicken is grilled, transfer it to a platter, cover it loosely with foil, and let it rest for 5–7 minutes. This brief pause allows the juices to settle back into the meat, ensuring every bite is juicy and full of Mediterranean flavor.

In the Oven:

When I’m in the mood for a more hands-off approach, I let the oven do all the work.

Oven-roasting helps lock in moisture and ensures the meat cooks through gently and evenly, which is something you don’t always get with quicker, high-heat methods.

Step 1 – Preheat the Oven: Heat your oven to 425°F (218°C). This temperature is ideal for roasting chicken because it cooks quickly, helping the chicken stay juicy and flavorful. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper for easy cleanup, or skip the parchment if you prefer a slightly crispier exterior.

Step 2 – Arrange the Chicken: Place the chicken breasts on the sheet pan, making sure to let any excess marinade drip off first. This prevents the chicken from steaming and helps it roast to a golden perfection.

Step 3 – Roast: Bake the chicken for 20 to 22 minutes, rotating the pan halfway through for even cooking. Keep in mind that the exact timing will depend on the thickness of your chicken. Check for doneness with a meat thermometer. It should register 165°F (74°C) when inserted in the thickest part of a chicken breast.

Step 4 – Rest and Serve: Remove the chicken from the oven, cover loosely with foil (or parchment paper), and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before slicing and serving.

Grilled chicken from the top view.

On the Stovetop:

I often turn to the stovetop when I want to get a quick sear for lunch or an easy dinner. 

Step 1 – Heat Your Skillet: In a large skillet (10–12 inch), heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil over medium-high heat. You can also use a cast iron skillet if you prefer.
Pro Tip: Wait until the oil is shimmering hot before adding the chicken—this ensures a flavorful sear and prevents the chicken from sticking.

Step 2 – Add the Chicken: Place the marinated chicken breasts into the pan, shaking off any excess marinade first. Avoid overcrowding the pan to give the chicken space to sear properly.

Step 3 – Cook: Let the chicken cook for about 5 to 7 minutes on each side. If the chicken releases easily when you try to flip it, it’s ready; otherwise, let it cook a bit longer to develop that beautiful crust. Use a digital thermometer to check that the thickest part of the chicken reaches 165°F (74°C).

Step 4 – Rest and Serve: Transfer the cooked chicken to a plate, cover it with foil, and let it rest for 5-10 minutes to allow the juices to redistribute.

Expert Tips for the Best Mediterranean Chicken

While this recipe is straightforward and doesn’t involve any fancy steps, there are a few key points to keep in mind for optimal results. Here are some of the helpful insights I picked up while testing this recipe:

  • Reserve Some Marinade: It’s a good idea to set aside a few tablespoons of the marinade before adding the chicken. I love to use this reserved portion to brush over the grilled or cooked chicken at the end for a glossy finish.
  • Toss the Marinade: After marinating the chicken, discard any leftover marinade. This helps prevent the risk of spreading harmful bacteria, such as Salmonella.
  • Don’t Marinate for Too Long: Through testing, I found that the sweet spot for this lemon and olive oil chicken marinade is 15 to 30 minutes. Marinating longer can cause the chicken to become rubbery, so stick to the recommended time.
  • Cooking Times Vary: The cooking times in the recipe card are based on chicken breasts. If you’re using other cuts, such as chicken thighs, keep in mind that they may take a bit longer to cook. The foolproof way to check doneness is with a digital meat thermometer.
  • Pound the Chicken Breasts: I used chicken breasts that were around 6–8 ounces, which is considered a normal size. If yours are larger or thicker, use a meat mallet to pound them to an even thickness, which ensures even cooking and juicy results.
  • Garnish for Presentation: For an extra-special presentation, serve your Mediterranean chicken with slices of fresh lemon and a sprinkle of fresh herbs.

Storage and Freezing Tips

Storage and reheating: You can store leftover cooked chicken in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Reheat in a low-heat oven (300°F/149 °C) for 5-10 minutes, or until warmed to your liking.

Freezing: While freezing does slow down the effects of the acidic lemon in the marinade, it doesn’t completely stop it. As a result, when the chicken is thawed and cooked, it can end up rubbery and mushy. For that reason, I don’t recommend freezing the raw chicken in the marinade.

What to Serve with Mediterranean Chicken?

What I love most about this recipe is its versatility, transforming your marinated Mediterranean chicken into an impressive feast with endless pairing options to suit any crowd. Here are a few of my favorite ways to round out the meal:

  • Salads: Keep things fresh and light with salads that highlight Mediterranean flavors. My creamy yogurt cucumber salad or Greek salad are both low-carb, crisp, and refreshing recipes that pair perfectly with this chicken. If you’re after a vibrant splash of color, my Red Cabbage and Carrot Slaw adds a satisfying crunch and a pop of color.
  • Pilafs: For a more substantial meal or to incorporate into your weekly meal prep, pair your chicken with Mediterranean classics like my Bulgur Wheat Pilaf or Mediterranean Rice with Vermicelli. These cozy sides bring a warm, hearty balance to the lemony chicken.
  • Pasta: Looking for a comforting plate? Slice your chicken and serve it over or alongside my Garlic Butter Spaghetti or Lemon Ricotta Spinach Pasta for a delicious, easy-to-make dinner.
  • Sauce: Add an extra layer of Mediterranean flavor with classic sauces like my Tzatziki sauce or yoghurt tahini sauce. They’re creamy, cooling, and the perfect finish for this juicy chicken.

FAQs

Can I use this marinade for other proteins?

Yes! This Mediterranean marinade recipe is a great all-purpose option that works beautifully with seafood (like shrimp or salmon) and lamb.

Do I need to pat the chicken dry before marinating?

Patting the chicken dry does help the marinade stick better and more evenly coat the meat, but it will still work well if you skip this step.

Can I use the leftover marinade as a sauce?

No. Since the marinade has come into contact with raw chicken, it’s not safe to use as a sauce. Instead, if you’d like to brush it on the cooked chicken for extra flavor, set aside some marinade before adding the raw chicken.

How can I prevent my chicken from drying out?

Use a digital meat thermometer to make sure you don’t overcook the chicken. Once it reaches an internal temperature of 165°F (74°C), take it off the heat. Also, don’t skip the resting step because letting the chicken rest before slicing helps the juices settle back in, keeping every bite tender and juicy.

Other Chicken Marinade Recipes You Might Also Like

  • If you prefer a yogurt-based marinade that still captures those Mediterranean flavors, try my Yogurt Chicken Marinade. It’s creamy and packed with herbs.
  • For a more robust, vinegar-forward flavor, my Balsamic Vinegar Chicken Marinade is a fantastic option with its sweet and tangy notes.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim

Mediterranean marinated chicken on a plate.
Print

Mediterranean Chicken Marinade Recipe

This Mediterranean Chicken Marinade is a quick 15-minute marinade that infuses chicken with fresh, vibrant flavors. Made with basic ingredients, this foolproof recipe guarantees juicy, flavorful chicken that can be cooked on the grill, in the oven, or on the stovetop.
Course Chicken Recipes
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Marinading Time 15 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 430kcal

Ingredients

  • cup olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
  • cup lemon juice
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 tablespoon fresh oregano chopped or 2 tsp dried plus more as garnish
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 lbs chicken breasts boneless & skinless (6-8 oz each) or chicken thighs

Instructions

To make the marinade:

  • In a large bowl, whisk together ⅓ cup olive oil, 1 teaspoon lemon zest, ⅓ cup lemon juice, 3 cloves of minced garlic, 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard, 1 tablespoon chopped fresh oregano (or 2 teaspoons dried), 1 teaspoon kosher salt, and ½ teaspoon black pepper until fully combined.
    A collage of images showing how to make the marinade.
  • Add the chicken into the bowl, making sure it’s fully coated with the marinade.
    Chicken breasts in the marinade.
  • Cover with the lid and refrigerate for 15 minutes or up to 30 minutes.

To Cook on the Grill:

  • Preheat a gas grill to medium-high heat (about 450°F/232 °C). Clean grill grates and brush lightly with oil.
  • Remove chicken from the marinade, letting excess drip off, and place on the grill.
  • Grill for 6-8 minutes per side, or until a digital thermometer inserted into the thickest part registers 165°F (74°C)
  • Transfer the now-cooked chicken to a plate, cover with aluminum foil, and let rest for 5-7 minutes before serving.
    Grilled Mediterranean chicken from the top view.

To Cook in the Oven:

  • Preheat oven to 425°F/218°C. Line a sheet pan with parchment paper.
  • Place chicken breasts on the prepared sheet pan. Bake for 20-22 minutes, or until a digital thermometer registers 165°F (74°C)
  • Transfer the cooked chicken to a plate, cover it with aluminum foil, and let it rest for 5 minutes before slicing and serving.

To Cook on the Stove:

  • Heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a large skillet (10- or 12-inch cast-iron skillet or grill pan) over medium-high heat.
  • Once the oil is hot and shimmering, place chicken breasts in the skillet, making sure not to overcrowd the pan. You may have to cook them in batches.
  • Cook, turning once, for 12-15 minutes, or until a digital thermometer inserted into the thickest part of the breast registers 165°F (74°C)
  • Transfer the cooked chicken to a plate, cover it with aluminum foil, and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about ⅔ cup of marinade, enough for 2 pounds of chicken breasts, which is ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional information below is calculated per serving.
  • Drip off the excess marinade: Take a moment to let any extra marinade drip off before cooking. This is especially important if you’re grilling to prevent flare-ups.
  • Storage: Cooked marinated chicken can be stored in the fridge for up to 3 days. You can reheat it in a low-heat oven (300°F/ 149 °C) for 5-10 minutes or until it is warmed through.
  • Freezing: I do not recommend freezing raw chicken in this marinade. The acid in the lemon juice will continue to break down the chicken (similar to ceviche), leading to a rubbery texture when cooked.

Nutrition

Calories: 430kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 49g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 145mg | Sodium: 860mg | Potassium: 891mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 93IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-chicken-marinade/feed/ 2
Strawberry Banana Smoothie with Yogurt https://foolproofliving.com/strawberry-banana-yogurt-smoothie/ https://foolproofliving.com/strawberry-banana-yogurt-smoothie/#comments Fri, 23 May 2025 22:12:10 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=13979 Banana and Strawberry Smoothie Ingredients You’ll need only four basic ingredients to make this banana strawberry smoothie recipe. I have…]]>

Banana and Strawberry Smoothie Ingredients

You’ll need only four basic ingredients to make this banana strawberry smoothie recipe. I have listed all the ingredients in the recipe card below, but below are some helpful notes to make it your own.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Fresh strawberries: When they’re in season, I always go for fresh strawberries. They are naturally sweet, and I never feel the need to add extra sugar. If you’re making this in the off-season, frozen strawberries work too. Just be aware that your smoothie will be thicker, and you might need to add more milk to adjust the consistency.

Banana: Using a frozen banana gives this smoothie a creamy texture and chills it without needing ice. If you only have a fresh banana, that’s fine too. I usually go for a ripe, soft banana since it’s sweeter and helps avoid adding any sweeteners.

Yogurt: Any type of yogurt will work here. I usually use plain or vanilla yogurt that I make from plain yogurt. Plain Greek yogurt is a good option if you like a thicker smoothie, though you may need to add a little extra milk. For a dairy-free or vegan smoothie, plant-based yogurts like cashew or almond yogurt are great. Personally, I like cashew yogurt because it has a more neutral taste that doesn’t overpower the fruit.

Milk: You can use regular or any plant-based/dairy-free milk you have on hand. Almond milk, oat milk, or soy milk are all good choices and blend well with the other ingredients.

Optional Add-Ins

This strawberry banana smoothie recipe is simple and satisfying as is, but it’s also easy to customize. Here are a few optional add-ins you can try to make it your own:

Sweeteners: I find the smoothie sweet enough with just fresh fruit, but if you want a little extra, a drizzle of honey or maple syrup works well. I often use local honey, especially during allergy season.

Protein: If you want to turn this smoothie into a more filling breakfast or post-workout snack, adding protein is a great option. A scoop of your favorite protein powder blends in easily, or you can use a tablespoon of peanut butter (or almond butter) for extra creaminess and a touch of nutty taste.

Superfoods: While optional, adding a spoonful of chia seeds, ground flax seeds, or hemp seeds is an easy way to include a bit more fiber and protein. The good news is that they mix in well and do not change the taste much.

Greens: A small handful of spinach or baby kale blends in well and is an easy way to add more vegetables to your day. The fresh fruit does a great job masking the taste, especially if you’re making this for picky eaters (or trying to sneak in some greens yourself).

Flavor boosters: For an extra layer of warmth and sweetness, a tiny splash of vanilla extract can truly elevate this smoothie. It’s my secret touch that makes it taste a bit more gourmet without any extra effort.

How To Make a Strawberry Banana Smoothie with Yogurt?

Making this smoothie is as simple as it gets. It comes together in just a few minutes, and cleanup is minimal—perfect for busy mornings or a quick afternoon pick-me-up.

Grab your blender: If you have a high-powered blender like a Vitamix, this is a great time to use it. That said, a standard blender will work just fine for this banana and strawberry smoothie.

A collage of images showing how to make banana strawberry smoothie recipe.

Add ingredients: For best results, start with the softer ingredients. Add your liquids and softer ingredients, meaning your yogurt, milk, and fresh strawberries (and of course any of the optional add-ins, if using). Then top it with the frozen banana. This layering helps the blades move freely without getting stuck and blend everything more easily. This is especially helpful if you do not have a high-powered blender because “the vortex” that the softer ingredients create helps break the fruit more efficiently without overworking your blender.

Blend: Start on a low speed to help break down the fruit gradually and avoid splashes, then increase to high and blend until everything is thoroughly combined and smooth to your liking. If you like your smoothie thinner, add a splash more milk and blend again. 

Taste and adjust: Give it a quick taste. If you want more strawberry or banana flavor, feel free to toss in a little extra and blend again. Smoothies are wonderfully flexible, so make it your own according to your taste.

Strawberry banana smoothie in a glass garnished with a strawberry.

Helpful Tips

Using ice: I avoid using ice in my smoothies to prevent diluting the rich fresh fruit flavors. That said, if you’re using fresh bananas, a small amount of ice can help chill the smoothie without changing its consistency too much.

Consistency and texture: This is where you have so much creative control. If you prefer your smoothie thick and creamy, blend less or add a bit more fruit. For a thinner, smoother texture, just add more milk or yogurt.

Quick blender clean up: This strawberry banana smoothie takes just 5 minutes to make, but let’s be honest, cleaning the blender often takes longer. Here’s my go-to trick: fill the empty blender with warm water and a drop of dish soap, blend for about 30 seconds, then rinse. That’s it. No scrubbing needed!

FAQs

How do you freeze bananas to make this smoothie?

Peel and slice a ripe banana and place the slices on a sheet pan lined with parchment paper in a single layer. Place in the freezer for at least 3 hours or overnight.

Can I use a fresh banana instead of frozen?

Yes, you can. However, keep in mind that using frozen bananas make the smoothie creamy without using ice. If using fresh, feel free to use a handful of ice to make it cold.

How can I make my smoothie thicker or thinner?

Add more fruit to make it thicker or more liquid to make it thinner.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Smoothie Recipes:

It is no secret that smoothies are wonderful when you need a quick breakfast or snack. Over the years I have shared many smoothie recipes. Below are a few of my favorites. If you enjoyed this strawberry banana smoothie you might also like them.

  • My go-to green smoothie 👉🏻 This Pineapple and Kale Smoothie is a green powerhouse. Similar to this strawberry banana recipe it is made without any added sugar.
  • Favorite turmeric smoothie 👉🏻 I make this Turmeric Ginger Smoothie made with carrots, fresh ginger and fresh turmeric is sunshine in a glass.
Person serving a strawberry smoothie in a glass.
Print

Strawberry Banana Smoothie with Yogurt Recipe

A quick and easy strawberry banana smoothie made with yogurt, milk, and no added sugar. Perfect for breakfast or a refreshing afternoon snack. Ready in just 5 minutes!
Course Smoothie
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 173kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups fresh strawberries hulled and cut in half – 275 g
  • ½ cup plain yogurt or vanilla yogurt or plant based yogurt
  • ½ cup milk regular or plant-based milk
  • 1 frozen banana sliced 125 g.

Optional Add ins:

  • 1 tablespoon chia seeds
  • 1 tablespoon hemp seeds
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract

Instructions

  • Place strawberries, yogurt, milk, and frozen banana slices in a blender.
  • Start blending at low speed and then up the speed and blend until smooth.
  • Serve right away.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about ~ 2 cups of smoothie, ideal for 2 adult servings. The nutritional values below do not include calories from optional add-ins.
  • Storage: Place leftovers in an airtight container or jar and keep in the fridge for up to 2 days. Be sure to shake well before serving.
  • Freezing: For longer storage, you can freeze it in a freezer-safe container or popsicle molds for up to 1 month.

Nutrition

Calories: 173kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 53mg | Potassium: 618mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 20g | Vitamin A: 215IU | Vitamin C: 90mg | Calcium: 175mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/strawberry-banana-yogurt-smoothie/feed/ 6
Mediterranean Pasta Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-pasta-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-pasta-salad/#comments Thu, 22 May 2025 12:56:19 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81553 Even as someone who develops recipes for a living, I still have those moments before a get-together when I’m standing…]]>

Even as someone who develops recipes for a living, I still have those moments before a get-together when I’m standing in the kitchen wondering, what should I bring? I mean, I know I have a blog full of recipes, but when you’re serving a crowd with so many preferences and diet restrictions, it’s always a hard decision to make.

My experience is that this Mediterranean macaroni salad seems to please most people. For one thing, most people love the familiar “Greek” flavors (i.e. cucumbers, olives, tomatoes, etc.) and it rarely needs an introduction. To me, it is like a bistro pasta salad that is the most popular dish on the menu.

Cold Mediterranean pasta salad in a bowl with wooden spoons from the top view.

Key Ingredients:

The good news is that once you understand the process and the flavor profile, it’s easy to make this Mediterranean pasta recipe your own. You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but below are a few helpful notes and substitutions:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.

Pasta: I used farfalle (also known as bow tie pasta), but other shapes like rotini and fusilli would also work. I prefer these shapes as they hold on to the dressing, blend well with the rest of the ingredients, and are easy to scoop and eat cold. Of course, you can always use gluten-free pasta if preferred. 

Canned & fresh veggies: In my humble opinion, using a combination of canned and fresh vegetables is what makes this Mediterranean noodle salad a winner. And the best part is that if you do not have one ingredient (or you don’t care for it), you can use another. Here are a few optional add-ins and substitution ideas:

  • Onion: Use finely chopped red onion instead of scallions.
  • Tomatoes: If tomatoes are not in season, use finely chopped sun-dried tomatoes instead.
  • Fresh Herbs: Fresh oregano is the classic “Mediterranean” herb used in salads like this, but other herbs like fresh parsley, dill, and mint would all work.
  • Cheese: Not a fan of feta cheese? Use goat or no cheese if you prefer a vegan or dairy-free version of this pasta salad. 
  • Add protein: If you want to turn this into a more filling meal, feel free to bulk it up with a protein. Chickpeas are a great plant-based option and work beautifully with the Mediterranean flavors. You can also add grilled shrimp, chicken, or even canned tuna for a quick boost. Just be sure everything is cooled before mixing it in.
  • Pasta Salad Dressing: I used my go-to Mediterranean Vinaigrette, but my Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette would also be a great dressing option.

How to Make Mediterranean Pasta Salad?

Once you have the ingredients ready, making this Mediterranean diet pasta salad is no more than a few easy steps. You can find the detailed recipe below, but here’s how I put it together:

A collage of images showing cooked pasta and making of the pasta salad dressing.

Step 1 – Cook the pasta: I feel like most pasta salads either have too much pasta or too many “supporting” ingredients. For a salad with so many add-ins, I find that 8 ounces of pasta (which gives you about 4 cups cooked) is the right balance.

Cook it in well-salted boiling water until al dente, according to the package instructions. Then drain and rinse under cold water to stop the cooking process.

Pro tip: Let the pasta cool completely before adding the rest of the ingredients. If it’s too warm, it can wilt the veggies or melt the cheese. Plus, the dressing will soak in too quickly, leaving the salad a bit dry.

Step 2: Make the dressing: You can make the Mediterranean pasta salad dressing in a mason jar (great if you’re making it ahead) or a measuring cup, but if I’m making this for just us at home, I usually grab a large bowl and make it right there. 

That way, (1) I don’t have to wash another dish, and (2) I can start building the salad directly in the bowl.

No matter what vessel you’re using, start by adding the lemon juice, garlic, Dijon mustard, oregano, salt, and pepper. Then, slowly drizzle in the olive oil while whisking. This helps emulsify the dressing, making it a little creamy and helping it cling to the pasta.

Photos showing how to assemble the Mediterranean noodle salad.

Step 3 – Assemble the salad: Grab a large salad bowl. And I do mean large because we’ve got a good amount of vegetables going in. Add the cooled pasta along with the rest of the ingredients. It’ll look like a pile at first, and that’s totally fine.

Step 4: Dress and serve: Drizzle with the dressing and toss to combine. It might get a little messy, but that’s part of the charm of this easy pasta salad. Use tongs or two large spoons, and be gentle (and patient) as you toss.

If you have the time, cover and let it sit in the fridge for 30 minutes so the flavors can mingle.

Expert Tips:

Before you start cooking, here are a few tips to help you get the best results from this cold Mediterranean pasta salad. These small details can make a big difference in taste, texture, and presentation.

Drain the canned vegetables: One of the reasons this salad is so convenient is that it takes advantage of canned or jarred ingredients like artichoke hearts, roasted bell peppers, and olives. But if you don’t drain them properly, they can add too much moisture and water down the salad. Use a colander and drain each ingredient thoroughly before adding it to the bowl.

Taste for seasoning: Whenever I write a recipe with salty or briny ingredients like feta cheese and olives, I keep the added salt to a minimum. But let’s face it, not all feta or olives are created equal. Some are much saltier than others. So it’s always a good idea to taste those components first, then adjust the amount of salt in the dressing as needed.

Chop everything into similar sizes: For the best texture and an even bite, keep all the ingredients around the same size as the pasta. It’s a small thing, but it helps everything mix well and makes the salad easier to eat.

Serving Suggestions:

While this Mediterranean bow tie pasta salad can stand on its own, it also pairs well with a variety of main dishes. Below are a few of my favorite ways to serve it:

  • Roasted or grilled meat and seafood: This pasta salad is the ideal companion to a simply grilled salmonbaked chicken breast, or even lamb chops. The fresh, vibrant flavors of the salad beautifully cut through the richness of grilled proteins, making for a light yet satisfying meal.
  • Make it a Mediterranean weeknight dinner: Make a batch of my mom’s Chicken Kofta Recipe and serve it with your pasta for a true Mediterranean feast.
  • Bread: Serve it with a side of crusty bread (such as my Olive Bread) or warm pita bread to scoop up every last bit of that delicious dressing.
  • Fresh fruit: If all you need is a light and refreshing complement, serve it alongside a bowl of seasonal fresh fruit, such as watermelon, berries, or grapes.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Mediterranean cold pasta salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe

This Mediterranean Pasta Salad is a vibrant, make-ahead dish that’s perfect for gatherings, lunches, or easy dinners. It travels well and tastes even better after a few hours.
Course Vegetarian Pasta
Cuisine American Vegetarian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 350kcal

Ingredients

For the Salad:

  • 8 oz dry pasta farfalle, fusilli or rotini
  • 3 Persian cucumbers or 1 English cucumber – peeled and sliced thinly
  • 1 ½ cups cherry tomatoes quartered
  • 2/3 cup black olives such as Kalamata olives sliced or chopped – 3 oz.
  • 1 cup roasted red peppers sliced and drained (or cut into small strips) (I use jarred)
  • 1 cup marinated artichoke hearts quartered and drained (7 oz after drained)
  • 3 scallions thinly sliced
  • 2 cups arugula or baby spinach – washed and dried
  • 4 oz. feta cheese crumbled

For the Mediterranean Dressing:

  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice or red wine vinegar
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • ½ teaspoon fresh oregano finely chopped – or ⅛ teaspoon dried oregano
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt plus more to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil

Instructions

  • Bring a large pot of salted water to a boil. Cook the pasta until it’s al dente, according to the package directions. Drain and rinse under cold water to stop the cooking process. Set it aside.
    A collage of images showing the cooked pasta and salad dressing for the recipe.
  • While the pasta is cooking, make the dressing by whisking together 3 tablespoons lemon juice (or vinegar), 1 clove of minced garlic, ½ teaspoon Dijon mustard, ½ teaspoon chopped oregano, ½ teaspoon of Kosher salt, and ¼ teaspoon black pepper in a small bowl. Slowly drizzle in ¼ cup of olive oil while whisking until fully emulsified.
  • To assemble the salad, in a large bowl, combine the cooked and cooled pasta, cucumber, tomatoes, olives, roasted red peppers, artichoke hearts, scallions, arugula, and feta cheese.
    Images showing how to assemble the Mediterranean macaroni salad.
  • Pour the dressing over the salad and toss gently to ensure all ingredients are evenly coated with the dressing. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • If you have the time, cover and let it sit in the fridge for 30 minutes before serving.
    Pasta salad in a bowl with wooden utensils.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6-7 cups of pasta salad that is ideal for six (generous) servings as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead Instructions: Keep in mind that this salad gets better as it sits, so you can absolutely make it a day in advance. The only thing I recommend is holding off on adding the arugula or spinach until just before serving so the greens stay fresh and don’t wilt.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. It is normal to get a bit soggy as it sits. Be sure to give it a good toss and taste (and adjust) the seasoning before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 350kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 1104mg | Potassium: 314mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1027IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 154mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-pasta-salad/feed/ 4
Bulgur Pilaf https://foolproofliving.com/moms-bulgur-pilaf/ https://foolproofliving.com/moms-bulgur-pilaf/#comments Wed, 14 May 2025 11:56:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=7708 If you are unsure about what to do with that bag of bulgur in your pantry, you’re not alone. It’s…]]>

If you are unsure about what to do with that bag of bulgur in your pantry, you’re not alone. It’s just not as popular as grains like brown rice or quinoa here in the U.S. But you’re in the right place. 

I grew up eating (and cooking) this ancient grain on the regular, and on this site, you’ll find plenty of approachable and flavorful recipes using bulgur wheat. Start with this Turkish bulgur pilaf recipe, and when you are ready for more, learn How To Prepare and Cook Bulgur like rice or try my Chicken with Bulgur and Tabbouleh Salad recipes.

Turkish bulgur pilaf in a pot with a wooden spoon on the side.

What You Need To Know in a Nutshell

  • What is Bulgur Pilaf? Also referred to as bulgar pilaf, bulgur pilavi, or bulghur pilaf, this traditional dish is made by cooking bulgur with aromatic vegetables and spices. It’s a beloved staple across Mediterranean and Middle Eastern countries, especially in Turkish, Lebanese, and Armenian cuisines. Made with coarse bulgur, it has a chewy texture and a naturally nutty flavor that makes it both hearty and satisfying.
  • Two versions to choose from: Depending on the region (or your own preference), bulgur wheat pilaf can be made with vegetables like onions, tomatoes, and peppers, or kept more basic with toasted vermicelli. Both are equally simple to prepare and delicious in their own way.

How To Make Bulgur Pilaf?

This Mediterranean Bulgur Wheat Pilaf recipe comes together in just a few steps with pantry staples. Here is how you cook it:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.
  1. Gather your ingredients:  For the full list of ingredients, check out the recipe card below. Here are a few helpful notes and substitution ideas:
    • Bulgur: You’ll find several types of bulgur at the store, but for this recipe, coarse or extra coarse bulgur works best. I usually order mine online (affiliate link), but Bob’s Red Mill red bulgur is a good alternative and easy to find in most grocery stores.
    • Tomato: One large fresh tomato is all you need. If you do not have fresh tomatoes on hand, you can either omit it or add one more tablespoon of tomato paste.
    • Pepper: A small green bell pepper can be used instead of jalapenos.
    • Cooking liquid: For extra flavor, use vegetable stock or chicken stock instead of water.
    • Spices and herbs: Ground cumin and fresh parsley are classic choices, but feel free to experiment with other spices such as ground coriander and paprika. The same applies to fresh herbs.  If you have it on hand, a combination of fresh mint, dill, and parsley would be fantastic in this Mediterranean bulgur recipe.
A collage of images showing how to make bulgur pilaf with tomatoes and chickpeas.
  1. Saute aromatics: Heat olive oil in a medium saucepan over medium heat. Add onion, ground cumin, green pepper, and saute until translucent, 4-5 minutes. Stir in the minced garlic and tomato paste and cook, stirring constantly, for a minute or so.
  2. Add in the rest of the ingredients: Add in bulgur, chopped tomatoes, chickpeas, and your cooking liquid of choice. Season with salt and pepper, and stir to combine everything evenly.
A collage of images showing bulgur wheat pilaf before and after it is cooked.
  1. Let it cook: Bring it to a boil, put the lid on, and lower the heat. Let it simmer for 10-12 minutes or until most of the liquid is absorbed.
  2. Let it rest & serve: Off the heat, rest for 10 minutes (with the lid on), fluff it with a fork. Garnish with fresh chopped parsley and serve.

Bulgur With Vermicelli – Mom’s Version

A lot of Turkish rice dishes include vermicelli, like the classic Vermicelli Rice Pilaf. So it’s no surprise that bulgur pilaf with vermicelli is also a popular variation. As a matter of fact, it was one of my mom’s signature recipes. 

Bulgur wheat pilaf with vermicelli from the top view.

To cook Bulgur Pilaf with Vermicelli:

  1. Heat oil (or butter): You can use any oil, but as is usually the case, butter makes this pilaf taste better. Heat it on medium heat.
  2. Saute vermicelli: Add in ¼ cup of the vermicelli (or orzo) and saute until it is golden brown. It should feel like it is almost burning. 
  3. Add in the coarse bulgur wheat: Add in bulgur wheat and saute for 4-5 minutes while constantly stirring.
  4. Add in the liquid & bring it to a boil: Add in your cooking liquid (water, stock, or a combination), salt, and pepper. Stir to combine.
  5. Cook: Bring it to a boil, put the lid on, turn down the heat, and let it simmer for 12-15 minutes.

Expert Tips

  • Use the right bulgur grind: For the best texture, stick with coarse or extra coarse bulgur (sometimes sold as “pilavlik bulgur”). Finer (sold as fine bulgur) varieties tend to become mushy and won’t give you the signature chewy bite that it is known for. If you are new to cooking bulgur and adding it in your recipes, feel free to check out my post I wrote on Types of Bulgur Wheat.
  • Should you rinse bulgur before cooking? It’s totally up to you. Rinsing isn’t required, especially if your bulgur is pre-packaged and clean. But if you’re buying from bulk bins, a quick rinse under cold water is a good idea.
  • Toast for extra flavor: If you have a few extra minutes, toast the bulgur briefly before adding the liquid. It might come as an extra step, but doing so deepens the nutty flavor and adds a subtle complexity to the overall dish.
  • Liquid-to-bulgur ratio: My go-to ratio for 1:2, meaning for every 1 cup of coarse bulgur, you will need 2 cups of liquid. That said, depending on the brand and grind of bulgur, you might need slightly more or less liquid. If the grains still feel firm after the liquid is absorbed, add a splash of hot water, cover, and let it sit a bit longer.
  • Do not skip the resting: Letting the pilaf rest covered after cooking helps the grains fully absorb any remaining moisture and gives you a fluffier final dish.
  • Adjust the seasoning after cooking: Taste your bulgur pilaf before serving and adjust the salt, pepper, or herbs to your liking. While it is optional, a squeeze of lemon juice just before serving can brighten the flavors beautifully.

Serving Suggestions

Traditionally, bulgur pilaf is served with chicken or beef recipes as a side dish. That being said, it can stand on its own as a vegetarian dish, especially if it is served with a side salad. Here are a few of my favorite pairings:

  • Red meat: Bulgur pilaf pairs beautifully with hearty meat dishes, especially the ones with rich sauces that the pilaf can soak up. Try it with my eggplant beef stew or Ina’s pot roast to add a Mediterranean twist to your meal. And if you’re in the mood for something a little lighter, it goes perfectly with lamb meatballs.
  • Chicken: This pilaf is the perfect side dish for classic Middle Eastern chicken recipes. Serve it with juicy Shawarma Chicken or Shish Taouk for a meal that feels special but is super easy to pull together. 
  • Vegetarian: For a simple vegetarian meal, serve the pilaf with creamy cucumber and yogurt sauce (aka tzatziki), yogurt dressing, or a cold glass of ayran. Or, if you’re feeling a bit fancy, use it as a filling in my Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant recipe—it’s a beautiful dish that looks impressive but is easy enough for a weeknight dinner.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This Bulgur Pilaf recipe is one of the most popular Turkish recipes on Foolproof Living, and for good reason, it is absolutely delicious. If you try it, please leave a comment and rating below to let me know how it turned out. And don’t forget to tag your photos on Instagram with #foolproofeats so I can see and share your creations!

Turkish bulgur pilaf recipe in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Turkish Bulgur Pilaf Recipe

This Bulgur Pilaf recipe is a classic Middle Eastern/Mediterranean side dish made with simple pantry ingredients. Ready in about 20 minutes, it has a satisfying chewy texture and a subtle nutty taste, making it perfect to serve with meat, chicken, or as a light vegetarian meal.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 12 minutes
Total Time 22 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 214kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tbsp olive oil or butter
  • 1 onion chopped, medium sized (approximately 1 cup)
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 green pepper seeded jalapeno or a small bell pepper would work (approximately 1/2 cup)
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 tbsp tomato paste
  • 1 cup coarse bulgur both coarse and extra coarse bulgur would work for this recipe
  • 1 fresh tomato cut into small cubes (approximately 1 cup)
  • 1 can chickpeas 14 oz. can, drained and rinsed
  • 2 cups water or vegetable broth
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/4 teaspoon ground black pepper

Garnishes

  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Saute onion and tomato paste: Heat olive oil in a medium saucepan over medium heat. Add in onion, cumin and green pepper and saute until translucent, 4-5 minutes.
    Person showing how to saute veggies to make bulgur wheat pilaf.
  • Stir in the minced garlic and sautee for 30 seconds. Add in tomato paste and stir constantly for a minute or so.
  • Add in bulgur wheat, tomatoes, chickpeas, and water (or stock). Season it with salt and pepper.
  • Stir to combine, bring it to a boil, put the lid on, and turn down the heat to low. Let it simmer for 10-12 minutes or until most of the liquid is absorbed.
    Bulgur pilaf before and after it is cooked.
  • Off the heat, allow it to rest for 10 minutes (with the lid on), fluff it with a fork, garnish with parsley, and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 4 cups of bulgur pilaf, which serves four people as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Reheat in a pot with a splash of water over medium heat until warmed to your liking.
  • Freezing: Bring leftovers to room temperature, transfer to a freezer-safe container, and freeze for up to 2 months. Thaw it a day in advance in the fridge and warm it up on the stove before you are ready to serve it.
  • Bulgur and Vermicelli Pilaf: An earlier version of this recipe included a more basic bulgur pilaf made without tomatoes, tomato paste, vegetables (onion, pepper, etc.) and chickpeas. It is how my mother made it. To cook Bulgur Pilaf with Vermicelli:
    1. Heat oil (or butter): Heat oil in medium heat.
    2. Saute vermicelli: Add in 1/4 cup vermicelli and saute until it is golden brown for 5-6 minutes while constantly stirring it with a wooden spoon. It should feel like it is almost burning. 
    3. Add in the coarse bulgur wheat: Add in bulgur and saute for 4-5 minutes while constantly stirring.
    4. Add in the liquid & bring it to a boil. Add in your cooking liquid (water, stock, or a combination), salt and pepper. Give it a stir. Bring it to a boil, put the lid on, turn down the heat, and let it simmer for 12-15 minutes.
    5. Rest & Serve: Let it rest (with the lid on) for 10 minutes and then fluff it with a fork before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 214kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 661mg | Potassium: 407mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 499IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/moms-bulgur-pilaf/feed/ 49
Lamb Burgers Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/lamb-burgers/ https://foolproofliving.com/lamb-burgers/#respond Tue, 06 May 2025 20:00:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81378 How to Make Lamb Burgers? These Mediterranean lamb burgers are quick to prepare and easy to cook. Whether you’re using…]]>

What You Need to Know in a Nutshell

Before we jump into how to make lamb burgers, here are the key things to know that will help you get it just right:

How to cook the lamb patties: I like grilling them during the summer months, but if I make these burgers during the colder months, I cook them in the oven or on the stovetop. You’ll find the cooking instructions for all methods below.

How long does it take to cook? Depending on the thickness of your patties, on the grill, they take about 10–12 minutes. In the oven at 400°F, expect around 15–18 minutes. On the stovetop (using a cast iron skillet), go for 5–6 minutes per side.

Seasoning for lamb burgers: A flavorful blend of cumin, coriander, paprika, and lemon zest gives the ground lamb burgers a Mediterranean-style taste that pairs beautifully with tzatziki.

What to put on lamb burgers: We keep these Greek-style lamb burgers fresh and simple by layering the burger patties with tzatziki sauce, a slice of tomato, pickles, and curly greens. However, other burger toppings like pickled red onions, sumac onions, a dollop of CAVA’s feta cheese dip, or even a spoonful of harissa would also work beautifully, especially if you’re leaning into the Mediterranean flavors.

How to Make Lamb Burgers?

These Mediterranean lamb burgers are quick to prepare and easy to cook. Whether you’re using a grill, oven, or skillet, here’s how to do it with step-by-step photos:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Step 1 Gather your ingredients: You’ll find the complete list in the recipe card below. But here are a few quick ingredient notes and substitutions:

  • Ground Lamb: The base for this lamb patty recipe is ground lamb, which naturally has a higher fat content (typically around 20–25%), making it juicy. If you prefer something slightly leaner or want a milder taste, try a 50/50 mix of ground lamb and ground beef. Lamb and beef burgers still capture that Mediterranean feel but with a milder flavor that some people prefer.
  • Fresh Herbs: Parsley is essential for freshness. Mint is optional, but I recommend using it. Mint adds a bright, cooling note that helps balance the natural gaminess of the lamb.
  • Spices: Cumin, coriander, and paprika create a warm, aromatic base that complements the richness of the lamb. For more depth, you can use a tablespoon of my Mediterranean Spice Blend or Middle Eastern 7 Spice, which work beautifully with these ground lamb patties.
  • Toppings: We used tzatziki, tomato slices, pickles, and greens. For a different sauce for lamb burgers, try my Mint Yogurt Sauce or Lemon Tahini Sauce, which are quicker to make.
  • Hamburger Buns: Store-bought burger buns work just fine, but if you have the time, I highly recommend making my Brioche Burger Buns.
A collage of photos showing how to make the lamb mixture.

Step 2 Prepare the burger meat: Mix ground lamb, garlic, herbs, spices, lemon zest, salt, and pepper in a large bowl until just combined. Resist the urge to overmix the lamb mixture as it can make patties dense and tough instead of tender and juicy.  

A collage of images showing the lamb patties before and after they are cooked.

Step 3 Form the patties: Shape into four patties, about 4 inches wide. Press a shallow thumbprint in the center of each, which is key to a perfect lamb hamburger patty recipe.

Step 4 Cook the patties: Whether you’re grilling, baking, or pan-searing, you can cook these patties to your preferred level of doneness (here is a temperature chart). For medium, aim for an internal temperature of 145°F (63°C); for well done, cook to 160°F (71°C). The best way to check is by inserting an instant-read thermometer into the center of the patty.

  • On the Grill: Preheat the grill to medium-high heat (400–425°F / 200–220°C). Clean and oil the grates, then place the lamb patties on the grill. Cook for 3–4 minutes per side for medium, or 5–6 minutes per side for well done.
  • In the Oven: Preheat your oven to 400°F (200°C). Place the patties on a parchment-lined baking sheet and bake for 15–18 minutes, flipping them halfway through.
  • On the Stove: Heat a tablespoon of oil in a cast-iron, grill pan, or non-stick skillet over medium heat. Cook the lamb burgers for 5–6 minutes per side, depending on the size of your patties and doneness preference.
The toppings from the top view.

Step 5 Toast the buns & prep your toppings: While the burgers cook, place the buns on the cooler side of the grill or in the oven to toast them lightly. This is also a great time to slice your tomato, rinse the greens, and get your pickles and tzatziki ready for assembly.

An image showing how to prepare lamb burgers.

Step 6 Assemble: Spread tzatziki on the bottom bun, add a thinly sliced tomato, greens, pickles, and the grilled lamb burger patty. Top with more tzatziki and the top bun. Serve right away.

Expert Tips

Here are a few tips to help you get the best results when making this recipe:

  • Thumbprint trick: Don’t skip the small dent in the center of each lamb patty as it helps the burgers cook evenly and keeps them from puffing up in the middle as they cook.
  • The secret to juicy lamb burgers: Mix the ingredients just until combined to avoid a dense texture, and cook the patties only until they reach your desired doneness (145°F (63°C) for medium or 160°F (71°C) for well done). Overmixing or overcooking are the most common reasons for dry burgers.
  • Prevent falling apart: If your lamb burger patties tend to break apart on the grill, try chilling them in the fridge for 30 minutes before cooking and avoid flipping too early. During testing, I found versions of this recipe that use breadcrumbs or egg as a binder. I didn’t find those additions necessary in my version here, but they can be helpful if your mixture feels too soft or loose.
  • Shape slightly larger than the bun: As the lamb burger patties cook, they shrink slightly. To ensure a perfect fit, shape your patties just a bit wider than the buns. They’ll cook down to the correct size.

Serving Suggestions

These lamb hamburgers are easy to pair with a variety of fresh and satisfying sides. Here are some of my favorite ideas:

  • Coleslaw: If I make these lamb burgers for a cookout, I usually serve them with a bright, crunchy slaw like my Red Cabbage Slaw or Mayo-Free Coleslaw, which pairs beautifully and can be made ahead.
  • Mediterranean-inspired salads: Continuing with the Greek/Mediterranean theme, serve these lamb burgers with a Mediterranean Pasta Salad or a Greek Cucumber Tomato Salad—both are refreshing, easy to prep ahead, and complement the flavors of the burgers beautifully.
  • Bean Salads: Serve alongside my Five Beans Salad or Cowboy Caviar for a colorful, protein-packed addition—great for outdoor cookouts.

More Lamb Recipes You Might Like:

If you enjoy cooking with lamb, be sure to check out some of my other go-to lamb recipes like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Ground lamb burger layered with tzatziki sauce from the front.
Print

Lamb Burgers Recipe

These juicy Greek-style lamb burgers are seasoned with warm Mediterranean spices and topped with tzatziki, fresh tomato, and crisp greens. They are quick to prepare and easy to cook on the grill, stovetop, or in the oven. Perfect for a weeknight dinner or casual cookout.
Course Weeknight Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 546kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 lb ground lamb
  • 2 garlic cloves peeled and minced
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped finely
  • 2 tablespoons fresh mint chopped finely optional
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

For Serving

  • 4 burger buns sliced in half
  • 1 cup Tzatziki Sauce or yogurt dill sauce
  • 1 tomato sliced
  • ½ cup sliced pickles dill or bread-and-butter, depending on your preference
  • 4 leaves curly greens or any other salad greens

Instructions

  • Place 1lb ground lamb, 2 cloves of minced garlic, 2 tablespoons of fresh parsley, 2 tablespoons of fresh mint, 1 teaspoon of ground cumin, 1 teaspoon of ground coriander, ½ teaspoon of paprika, 1 teaspoon of kosher salt, and ½ teaspoon of ground black pepper in a large bowl.
    Lamb mixture before and after it is mixed.
  • Using clean hands, mix until all the ingredients are fully combined, being careful not to overwork the meat.
  • Divide the meat mixture into four equal portions and shape them into 4-inch-wide patties. As you shape them, remember that they shrink slightly during the cooking process so it is best to make them a bit larger than your burger bun.
    Lamb patties being shaped and grilled.
  • Use your thumb to gently press a shallow indent in the center of each patty—this helps them cook evenly and prevents puffing on the grill. Cover and set aside while you preheat the grill.

To Cook On the Grill:

  • Preheat a gas grill to medium-high heat (around 400–425°F). Once hot, scrape the grates clean and brush them with olive oil.
  • Place the lamb patties on the grill and cook for 3–4 minutes per side for medium (145°F) or 5–6 minutes for well done (160°F), depending on your preference. Once cooked, place them on a plate, cover with aluminum foil and let them rest for 2-3 minutes for the juices to redistribute.

To Cook in the Oven:

  • Preheat your oven to 400°F (200°C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Transfer the patties to the baking sheet and bake for 15–18 minutes, flipping them halfway through.

To Cook on the Stove:

  • Heat a tablespoon of oil in a cast-iron, grill pan, or non-stick skillet over medium heat.
  • Place the lamb patties on the hot skillet and cook for 5–6 minutes (or more, depending on your doneness preference) per side.
  • While the patties are cooking, place the buns on the cooler side of the grill (or in the oven or the skillet) to warm them through.

To Assemble

  • To make lamb burgers, spread some tzatziki (or yogurt dill sauce) on the bottom half of each bun. Add a slice of tomato, some salad greens, a few pickle slices, and a grilled lamb patty. Spoon a little more tzatziki over the top of the meat, then place the top bun on and serve.
    Ground lamb burgers on a plate with yogurt sauce.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes four lamb burgers. The nutritional values below are per serving and include the toppings. 
  • Other herbs: While I opted for fresh parsley and mint, you can use other fresh herbs like rosemary and oregano in smaller quantities (about 1 to 2 teaspoons each) as they tend to be more potent.
  • Make ahead: You can mix and shape the lamb burger patties up to a day in advance. Store them covered in the fridge until you’re ready to cook.
  • Leftovers: Cooked lamb burgers can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Reheat gently on the stove or in the oven to avoid drying them out.
  • Freezing: 
    • To freeze raw, place uncooked patties on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper and freeze until solid. Then transfer to a freezer-safe bag or container with parchment between each patty. They’ll keep for up to 2 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight before cooking.
    • To freeze cooked lamb patties, bring them to room temperature, cover tightly with plastic wrap, and freeze for up to a month.

Nutrition

Calories: 546kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 37g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 93mg | Sodium: 1305mg | Potassium: 454mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 892IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 194mg | Iron: 4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/lamb-burgers/feed/ 0
Red Cabbage Slaw https://foolproofliving.com/red-cabbage-slaw/ https://foolproofliving.com/red-cabbage-slaw/#comments Wed, 30 Apr 2025 14:37:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81303 How to Make Red Cabbage Slaw? This recipe comes together in just a few steps with simple ingredients you probably…]]>

What You Need to Know in a Nutshell?

Before you dive in, here are a few quick tips that will help you make the best red cabbage slaw every time:

Slice Thinly for Best Texture: A mandolin is great for getting ultra-thin, even slices, but a sharp knife works just as well. The key is to slice the cabbage as evenly as possible to keep the slaw light, crisp, and not bulky.

Make It Ahead: This simple slaw stores beautifully in the fridge if you prefer to make it ahead. In fact, it gets even better as it sits and the flavors meld together — ideal for meal prep!

No mayo dressing: Made with a light, tangy vinegar dressing instead of mayo, this purple cabbage slaw recipe is naturally vegan. It’s a great option if you’re looking for a coleslaw that’s a little lighter but still delivers on texture and taste.

How to Make Red Cabbage Slaw?

This recipe comes together in just a few steps with simple ingredients you probably already have on hand, and once everything’s sliced and tossed, you’re ready to go. Here’s how to make it:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Step 1 Gather Your Ingredients: For a full list and measurements, check out the recipe card below. Here’s a few ingredient substitution ideas:

  • Make It Creamy: I opted for a vinegar-based dressing to keep it light, but if you prefer your red cabbage coleslaw with mayonnaise, this classic coleslaw dressing will give you that creamy texture and flavor you’re after.
  • Onion: I like the milder bite of green onions here, but thinly sliced red onions work just as well if you want a bit more punch.
  • Fresh Herbs: A handful of parsley brightens up the slaw and adds a pop of green, but feel free to use what you have — fresh cilantro, dill, or even fresh mint would all be delicious.
  • Carrots: I add carrots for extra crunch and a pop of color, but you can definitely leave them out if you prefer a simpler slaw.
    Steps showing how to make coleslaw with red cabbage.

    Step 2 Prepare the vegetables: Using a mandolin (or a sharp chef’s knife if you prefer), shred the red cabbage into thin, even slices. Grate the carrots using the large holes of a box grater, then thinly slice the green onions and chop the parsley. Add all the ingredients to a large mixing bowl and set it aside.

    Step 3 Mix the Dressing: In a small bowl or mason jar, whisk together the extra virgin olive oil, minced garlic, lemon juice, apple cider vinegar (or red wine vinegar or rice vinegar), honey (or maple syrup or sugar), Dijon mustard, kosher salt, and black pepper until smooth.

      Red cabbage slaw being drizzled with dressing.

      Step 4 Toss It All Together: Drizzle the dressing over the cabbage mixture. Use clean hands (or tongs) to toss everything together, making sure the vegetables are evenly coated.

      Step 5 Chill and Serve: If you have the time, cover the bowl and refrigerate for at least 30 minutes to let the flavors come together. Serve your red cabbage carrot slaw chilled and enjoy.

        Coleslaw with red cabbage and carrots in a bowl.

        What to Serve It With?

        This simple red cabbage slaw is one of those side dishes that pairs well with many meals. Whether you’re making tacos, grilling, or just pulling together a quick weeknight dinner, it brings the perfect pop of color and crunch. Here are some of my favorite ways to serve it:

        • Tacos: I love using this red cabbage slaw for tacos! It’s especially good piled onto brisket tacos for a smoky, hearty bite. It’s also fantastic with flank steak tacos, adding just the right amount of freshness, and honestly, it’s a must with fish tacos. The crunch balances out the tender, flaky fish so well.
        • Grilled Meats: This slaw is a total no-brainer for BBQ season. Serve it alongside grilled harissa chicken for a spicy kick or with grilled turkey tenderloin for a light but satisfying meal. And I am pretty sure no one would complain if you served it with grilled lamb burgers either.
        • Grilled Seafood: For seafood nights, I love pairing it with grilled shrimp, grilled salmon, or grilled mahi mahi. It’s the kind of side that keeps everything feeling light, bright, and colorful. Perfect for summer dinners!
        • Pulled Pork: Try tossing this purple cabbage slaw onto your pulled pork sandwiches for a crunchy twist, or serve it next to a big plate of roasted veggies and grains for a fresh meal.

        Similar Salad Recipes You Might Like:

        It is no secret that coleslaw recipes are some of the most popular summer salads. Here are a few other reader favorites in case you need more inspiration:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

        Red cabbage and carrot slow in a bowl.
        Print

        Red Cabbage Slaw Recipe

        A vibrant and easy Red Cabbage Slaw made with a light, zesty dressing — no mayo needed! Great for tacos, pulled pork, grilled meats, and fresh summer meals. Vegan and gluten-free.
        Course Vegan side dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Resting time (otpional) 30 minutes
        Total Time 45 minutes
        Servings 8 servings
        Calories 98kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Coleslaw

        • 1 head of red cabbage about 1 ½ lbs shredded (~7-8 loosely packed cups)
        • 2 medium carrots peeled and shredded, about ½ lbs (~2 cups)
        • 3 green onions chopped thinly (or 1/2 cup sliced red onion)
        • 3 tablespoons fresh parsley roughly chopped

        For The Dressing

        • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
        • 2 cloves fresh garlic finely minced
        • 1 tablespoon lemon juice or lime juice
        • 3 tablespoons apple cider vinegar or red wine or rice vinegar
        • 1 tablespoon honey or maple syrup, or sugar
        • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        Instructions

        • Place shredded red cabbage (about 7-8 cups), 2 shredded carrots, 3 thinly sliced green onions, and 3 tablespoons of chopped fresh parsley in a large bowl. Set it aside.
          Cabbage slaw made with red cabbage preparation photos.
        • In a small bowl (or mason jar), whisk together 3 tablespoons of extra virgin olive oil, 2 cloves of minced garlic, 1 tablespoon honey (or your preferred sweetener), 1 tablespoon of lemon juice, 3 tablespoons apple cider vinegar, 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard, 1 teaspoon kosher salt and ¼ teaspoon of ground black pepper.
          Person drizzling and mixing purple cabbage slaw with dressing and mixing it.
        • If you have the time, cover and refrigerate for 30 minutes before serving. Serve chilled.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: Red cabbage can range in size. I used a small to medium-sized head (about 1 ½ pounds with the core), which gave me roughly 7 to 8 cups of sliced cabbage. Once you mix it with the shredded carrots (about 2 cups), you’ll have around 10 cups of veggies. After tossing it with the dressing and letting it sit, the slaw wilts slightly and loses about 1½ to 2 cups in volume. Even so, this recipe still makes plenty — enough to comfortably serve 6 to 8 people as a side dish.
        • Taste for Seasoning: Always give your slaw a taste before serving. If it seems like it needs more salt right away, give it a little time to sit first. As the slaw rests, the flavors develop and become more pronounced, so it might balance out perfectly without adding anything extra.
        • Make ahead: You can prep it a day in advance — just toss everything together, cover it, and place it in the fridge. Letting it sit for a few hours (or even overnight) helps the flavors come together.
        • Storing leftovers: Leftovers will keep well in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Just give it a quick toss before serving. If any liquid has settled at the bottom, that’s totally normal — a quick stir will bring it right back to life.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 98kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 339mg | Potassium: 337mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 3890IU | Vitamin C: 64mg | Calcium: 60mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/red-cabbage-slaw/feed/ 2
        Schug Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/schug/ https://foolproofliving.com/schug/#comments Fri, 25 Apr 2025 16:41:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81215 How to Make Schug Sauce? This shug sauce recipe comes together quickly in a food processor and keeps well in…]]>

        What You Need to Know in a Nutshell?

        • What is Schug? Also known as skhug, zhug, s’hug, zhoug, zoug, schugg, or by its Arabic name sahawiq, schug is actually its Hebrew name. This vibrant and spicy condiment is made from fresh herbs, chili peppers, garlic, and spices. Originating from Yemen, think of it as the Middle Eastern counterpart to chimichurri or salsa verde. It’s a staple in Israeli shawarma and falafel stands, and for us home cooks, it’s perfect for spooning over grain bowls, grilled meats, roasted vegetables, or swirling into hummus and soups.
        • Spice levels are adjustable: Authentic schug brings the heat, but you can dial it down by removing more of the pepper seeds or reducing the number of chilies used. Want it fiery? Keep the seeds.
        • Stores and freezes well: Green schug keeps fresh in the fridge for up to a week in an airtight container. For extended storage, freeze the cubes in ice cube trays, then transfer them to a freezer-safe container. This makes it super easy to grab just what you need, whether it’s a single spoonful or more.
        • Green, Red, and Brown Varieties: While this recipe is for the most common, green schug, made with green chili peppers like jalapeños and serranos, there are also red schug (made with dried red chilies) and brown schug (made with tomatoes).

        How to Make Schug Sauce?

        This shug sauce recipe comes together quickly in a food processor and keeps well in the fridge or freezer. Let’s walk through it step-by-step.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.
        1. Gather your ingredients: You’ll find the complete list of skhug ingredients in the recipe card below. Below are a few helpful notes:
          • Peppers: I like to use a combination of green peppers like jalapenos and serranos—together they add a layered, more complex heat and flavor to the sauce. However, if you only have one type on hand, either pepper will still give you a delicious result.
          • Fresh Herbs: While schug is often called a spicy cilantro sauce, I find that a mix of fresh parsley and cilantro gives it a more balanced, herbaceous flavor. That said, if cilantro isn’t your thing, feel free to use an equal amount of fresh parsley instead.
          • Optional Add-Ins: Depending on the region, some schug recipes include extra spices for added complexity. You can try adding a pinch of ground cardamom, caraway seeds, or a small amount of red pepper flakes if you want to bump up the heat even more.
        A collage of images showing the peppers in a food processor before and after they are processed.
        1. Pulse the peppers: Add the seeded jalapeno and serrano peppers to your food processor. Pulse about 10 times, scraping the sides halfway through to ensure even chopping.
        Green schug sauce in the food processor.
        1. Add the herbs and spices: Toss in the cilantro, parsley, garlic, ground cumin, ground coriander, lemon juice, lemon zest, salt, and pepper. Blend until you get a coarse, pesto-like texture, stopping to scrape the sides as needed.
        Drizzling the shug with oil and showing the texture.
        1. Drizzle in the olive oil: With the processor running, slowly pour in the olive oil. You want the texture to be saucy but still textured.
        2. Taste and adjust: Give your green schug sauce a taste and tweak the salt, lemon juice, or spice to your liking.
        3. Store or freeze: Transfer to an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 5 days. Or freeze in portions using ice cube trays for later use.

        Expert Tips

        • Keep the stems on: No need to pick off all the leaves—both cilantro and parsley stems are tender and full of flavor. They blend right in and actually add to the sauce’s vibrant, herbaceous taste.
        • Texture: Stop blending once you reach a pesto-like texture—overprocessing it can turn it into an herb puree.
        • Using mortar and pestle: While the food processor is a great time-saver, if you’ve got a little extra time and a mortar and pestle, it’s worth trying the traditional way. Start by grinding whole spices, such as cumin and coriander. For even more flavor, you can toast them in a dry skillet for a minute until fragrant before grinding. Then add the garlic, lemon juice, lemon zest, and salt to create a flavorful paste. Next, add the fresh herbs and green chilies, pounding until you reach a chunky paste. Finally, slowly drizzle in the olive oil while mixing to bring everything together into a smooth, spoonable sauce.
        • Wear gloves: Since this Israeli schug is made with hot peppers like jalapeños and serranos, it’s a good idea to wear gloves while handling them, especially if you’re sensitive to spice or tend to touch your face while cooking.
        • Schug replacement: Wondering what to use instead of schug in a recipe? While the flavor profiles are quite different, you can use chimichurri, salsa verde, or even pesto as a substitute in a pinch.
        Zhug sauce in a jar with a spoon on the side.

        Serving Suggestions

        One of the best things about this spicy schug is its versatility. It can totally transform a simple dish into something exciting and flavorful. If you’re wondering where to start, here are a few of my favorite ways to use it— any place you’d typically use a punchy green sauce, schug fits right in.

        • Grain Bowls: I love spooning this Yemenite hot sauce over my Homemade CAVA Bowl—it adds a zesty flavor that ties everything together. It’s even better when paired with other Middle Eastern condiments like Harissa and Tzatziki.
        • Hummus: Whether you’re making a classic batch or going with something a little different, like Roasted Carrot Hummus, the spicy kick and fresh herbs swirled right in add an extra layer of flavor. Serve it with some warm Pita Bread on the side, and you’ve got a snack that everyone will love.
        • Meat Dishes: Schug pairs beautifully with richly seasoned dishes from the Mediterranean and the Middle East. It’s especially good with Shish Tawook, Beef Shawarma, or Grilled Harissa Chicken—adding a fresh, spicy contrast that lifts all those bold flavors.
        • Eggs: A spoonful stirred into your scrambled eggs in the morning or drizzled over poached eggs is a game changer. If you like savory breakfasts, try it on top of my çilbir, also known as Turkish poached eggs with yogurt. It brings just the right amount of heat to balance out the creaminess.

        Other Green Sauces You Might Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this schug sauce and bring the bold flavors of the Middle East to your home, I’d love to hear how it turned out! Leaving a rating and a comment below is a great way to support the site and helps others who are thinking about making it. And if you snap a photo, be sure to tag it on Instagram with #foolproofeats—I’d love to see and share your creations with the Foolproof Living community.

        Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

        Schug sauce in a jar with a spoon from the top view.
        Print

        Schug Recipe

        This bold and herb-packed green sauce is a staple Middle Eastern condiment with roots in Yemenite cuisine. Made with fresh herbs, chili peppers, and spices, it's perfect for adding a spicy kick to grain bowls, grilled vegetables, and meats, or even hummus.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine Middle Eastern
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 2 cups
        Calories 304kcal

        Ingredients

        • 7 jalapeno peppers stems and seeds removed (98 g.)
        • 2 serrano peppers stems and seeds removed (12 g.)
        • 2 cups fresh cilantro with stems and loosely packed
        • 2 cups fresh flat leaf parsley with stems and loosely packed
        • 4 garlic cloves roughly chopped
        • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
        • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
        • 6 tablespoons lemon juice
        • 1 teaspoon lemon zest from one large lemon
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon fresh ground black pepper
        • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil

        Instructions

        • Place both the jalapeno and serrano peppers in the bowl of the food processor and pulse 10 times, scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through.
          A collage of images showing the processing of the peppers.
        • Add cilantro, parsley, garlic, cumin, coriander, lemon juice, lemon zest, salt and pepper and process until all ingredients resemble a “chunky” blend. Again, stop and scrape down the sides a few times to ensure that everything is processed evenly.
          A collage of photos showing the sauce being made and a person scraping the side of the food processor.
        • While the food processor is still running, slowly drizzle in the olive oil until you reach your desired consistency. It should (almost) resemble a pesto-like texture.
          Person drizzling the sauce with oil and showing texture.
        • Taste for seasoning and adjust the amount of seasoning, lemon juice, and spices as needed.
        • Refrigerate in an airtight container in the fridge for up to a week (be sure to stir before using it) or spoon it into an ice cube tray and freeze for up to 3 months.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about ~ 2 cups of green schug sauce. The nutrition information below is per cup.
        • Size of the peppers: I used seven medium-sized jalapenos, which were about 3.5 ounces (98g). If yours are smaller or larger, adjust the number of peppers accordingly.
        • Remove the seeds (or not): You can adjust the spice levels by removing or keeping the seeds of the peppers.
        • Olive oil solidifies in the fridge: It’s normal for the olive oil in schug to firm up when chilled. Just let it sit at room temperature for a few minutes before serving, and it will return to its smooth, spoonable consistency.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 304kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Sodium: 1209mg | Potassium: 650mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 6731IU | Vitamin C: 166mg | Calcium: 126mg | Iron: 5mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/schug/feed/ 4
        Maple Balsamic Brussels Sprouts https://foolproofliving.com/maple-balsamic-brussels-sprouts/ https://foolproofliving.com/maple-balsamic-brussels-sprouts/#respond Wed, 23 Apr 2025 17:27:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81131 How to Make Brussels Sprouts with Maple Syrup and Balsamic? Making these maple balsamic roasted Brussels sprouts takes just a…]]>

        What You Need to Know in a Nutshell?

        This recipe is pretty straightforward, but here are the most important things to know to make your balsamic and maple-glazed Brussels sprouts a success:

        • Cut side down: Roasting the Brussels sprouts with the cut side down gives you crisp, golden edges and more flavor. Tossing halfway through the roasting process ensures that they are roasted evenly and don’t get too dark on one side.
        • Glaze after roasting: Tossing the vegetables in maple syrup and balsamic vinegar after roasting them helps prevent the sugars from burning during the roasting process.
        • Check doneness: The best way to tell if your Brussels sprouts are fully roasted is by inserting a sharp knife into the center of one—it should slide in easily with little resistance.

        How to Make Brussels Sprouts with Maple Syrup and Balsamic?

        Making these maple balsamic roasted Brussels sprouts takes just a few simple steps. The most time-consuming part is slicing the Brussels sprouts in half—after that, it’s mostly hands-off while the oven does the work. Below are the steps:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.
        1. Gather your ingredients: You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below. Below are a few ingredient substitutions:
          • Oil: I opted for extra virgin olive oil, but any flavorless oil, such as avocado oil, would also work.
          • Honey: While the flavor profile will change slightly, honey can be a good substitute for maple syrup. 
        2. Preheat & Prep: Preheat your oven to 425°F (218°C). Line a sheet pan with parchment paper for easy cleanup, or roast directly on the pan for more caramelization.
        A person is drizzling Brussels sprouts with olive oil and then spreading them on a baking sheet.
        1. Arrange and season: Spread the halved Brussels sprouts directly onto the pan. Drizzle with olive oil, then sprinkle with kosher salt and freshly ground pepper. Toss lightly on the pan, then arrange in a single layer, cut side down. Don’t skip this step as it is crucial for crispy Brussels sprouts.
        Vegetables before and after they are roasted.
        1. Roast: Roast for 20–25 minutes, flipping halfway through. They should be deeply golden and tender.
        Roasted Brussels sprouts being drizzled and mixed with balsamic maple syrup glaze.
        1. Prepare the maple balsamic glaze: Let them rest for 5 minutes, then transfer to a bowl. In a small bowl, mix the balsamic vinegar and maple syrup. Drizzle this maple glaze for Brussels sprouts over the top and toss gently to coat.
        2. Finish & serve: Add optional toppings like chopped toasted pecans and pomegranate seeds for extra flair. Serve your roasted maple Brussels sprouts warm and enjoy!
        Roasted maple balsamic brussel sprouts in a plate with a spoon on the side.

        Expert Tips:

        This balsamic maple Brussels sprouts recipe is pretty straightforward, but there are a couple of things I want to highlight to help you get the best results.

        • Keep an eye during the last 10 minutes: Brussels sprouts can go from perfectly roasted to overdone quickly. Start checking around the 20-minute mark, and give them a toss to promote even browning.
        • Don’t toss the loose leaves: Any leaves that fall off during trimming will crisp up beautifully in the oven. Leave them on the pan—they’ll add great texture and a bit of crunch.
        • Great served warm—or cold: While I prefer serving this dish warm, the flavors hold up well even when served at room temperature or chilled. It’s a versatile side that works beautifully for gatherings or even for meal prep.

        Serving Suggestions:

        While most people think of roasted balsamic Brussels sprouts as more of a holiday side dish (and trust me, it’s one of my favorite Thanksgiving veggie sides), I make it all year round . Below are a few of my favorite pairings:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        You Might Also Like:

        Brussels sprouts can surprise you in the best way. Here are a few more recipes I love making when I have a fresh bag in my fridge.

        Roasted brussel sprouts with maple syrup and balsamic on a plate.
        Print

        Maple Balsamic Brussels Sprouts Recipe

        These Maple Balsamic Brussels Sprouts are golden, crisp, and full of flavor—the perfect easy vegetable side dish for weeknights or holiday gatherings.
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine American Vegan
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 25 minutes
        Total Time 35 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 148kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 lb Brussels sprouts clean and sliced in half lengthwise
        • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon grond black pepper
        • 3 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
        • 2 tablespoons maple syrup

        Optional Toppings *

        • ¼ cup pomegranate arils optional
        • ½ cup pecans chopped, optional

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 425 degrees F/218 C. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
        • Spread the prepared Brussels sprouts in the pan, drizzle with olive oil, and sprinkle with kosher salt and black pepper. Toss to combine. Spread them, cut side down, in a single layer.
          Person drizzling oil and spready brussel sprouts on a sheet pan.
        • Roast for 20-25 minutes until tender, tossing halfway through.
          Brussel sprouts before and after they are roasted.
        • Let it cool for 5 minutes, then transfer it to a large bowl.
          Person drizzling brussel sprouts with maple syrup and balsamic vinegar mixture.
        • Mix the balsamic vinegar and maple syrup in a bowl. Drizzle it over the roasted Brussels sprouts and toss to combine.
        • Taste for seasoning and add more if needed.
        • Transfer to a serving platter or bowl and garnish with pecans and pomegranate seeds, if using. Serve.
          Roasted balsamic maple Brussels sprouts in a plate from the top view.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 3 cups of roasted Brussels sprouts with maple and balsamic, which is ideal for four servings as a side dish. The nutrition information below does not include the optional toppings.
        • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for upto 4 days. Be sure to bring it to room temperature before storing.
        • Reheating: I find that reheating them in the oven is the best way to keep their crispiness. Simply preheat the oven to 350°F (175°C) and warm for about 10 minutes, or until heated through.
        • Air fryer method: If you prefer cooking Brussels sprouts in an air fryer to save on time, simply preheat your air fryer to 375°F, spread the halved sprouts on a single layer, and air fry for 15 minutes, rotating halfway through. 
        • It’s easy to customize this dish with a variety of optional toppings. Below are some ideas:
          • Nuts: The toasted pecans and pomegranate seeds are optional, but they elevate the dish with texture and color. You can easily swap the pecans for other nuts, such as walnuts, hazelnuts, or sliced almonds. 
          • Fruit: For a fruity touch, try using dried cranberries or chopped dried apricots instead of pomegranate seeds. 
          • Cheese: And if you want to add a bit of richness, a sprinkle of crumbled goat cheese or shredded Parmesan cheese works beautifully too.
          • Bacon: For a smoky-salty bite, try crumbling in some cooked bacon. I prefer baked turkey bacon, but regular bacon would also work.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 148kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 614mg | Potassium: 477mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 855IU | Vitamin C: 96mg | Calcium: 62mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/maple-balsamic-brussels-sprouts/feed/ 0
        Roasted Whole Carrots https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-whole-carrots/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-whole-carrots/#comments Fri, 11 Apr 2025 19:33:51 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20085 How to Roast Whole Carrots? Roasting carrots in the oven is just a few easy steps. Whether you’re prepping for…]]>

        What You Need to Know in a Nutshell?

        • Ideal temperature and time: My preferred temperature for roasting is 425°F (218°C), and the roasting time is usually around 20–25 minutes. That said, cooking carrots in the oven depends on their thickness—thinner carrots (like the young ones from the farmers market) tend to roast quickly, while thicker ones may need 10-15 more minutes, depending on their size.
        • Uniform size matters: When shopping for this recipe, try to pick carrots that are similar in size so they roast evenly. If some are much thicker than others, you can cut them lengthwise to even them out.
        • To peel or not to peel? It’s totally up to you! I usually peel mine, but if you’ve got fresh, young carrots from the market, a good scrub under cold water works just as well.
        • Don’t crowd the pan: Spread the carrots in a single layer on the sheet pan. Overcrowding can lead to steaming instead of roasting.

        How to Roast Whole Carrots?

        Roasting carrots in the oven is just a few easy steps. Whether you’re prepping for a weekday dinner or a special gathering, here’s how to make roasted carrots that are tender, flavorful, and beautifully caramelized.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        1. Gather your ingredients: You’ll find the complete list in the recipe card below, but here are a few substitutions and optional add-ins:
          • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil is what I use most often, but melted butter or avocado oil are great options, too.
          • Seasonings: Keep it simple with salt and pepper, or add spices like cumin, smoked paprika, garlic powder, or even a touch of cinnamon for warmth.
          • Fresh herbs: Fresh thyme is a favorite, but rosemary, oregano, or chopped parsley also work beautifully. Feel free to adjust the herbs based on what you’re serving—using the same or complementary herbs can help bring the whole meal together.
          • Sweeteners:  For holiday versions like honey-roasted carrots, try drizzling with a tablespoon of honey or maple syrup or sprinkling with a bit of brown sugar. If you’re after a more glazed finish, check out my Maple Roasted Carrots recipe for a richer, sweeter take.
        2. Preheat & Prep: Preheat your oven to 425°F (218°C). I usually roast vegetables directly on the sheet pan because I find that the hot surface helps them caramelize better—especially when it comes to onions or root veggies. But if you prefer easier cleanup, feel free to line your pan with parchment paper or aluminum foil.
        Steps showing how to season carrots to bake in the oven.
        1. Season the carrots: Place your carrots on the prepared sheet in a single layer. Drizzle with olive oil and season with salt and pepper. Give them a good toss so they’re evenly coated.
        2. Roast the carrots: Pop the tray into the oven and roast carrots in oven for about 25 minutes, or until fork-tender. Test doneness by inserting a fork into the thickest part—if it slides in easily, they’re ready.
        3. Serve and garnish: Transfer the baked whole carrots recipe to a platter and top with fresh parsley or your favorite herb for a little extra color and flavor.

        Expert Tips

        A few final tips to make your easy baked carrots even better:

        • Carrot tops: If your carrots have tops, you can trim them down but leave a little bit for a rustic look. And don’t toss those tops! They’re great for making a vibrant carrot top pesto—fresh, herby, and perfect for using up the whole vegetable.
        • For extra caramelization: Don’t flip the carrots during roasting—just let them roast cut-side down. This allows the natural sugars in the carrots to caramelize where they’re in contact with the hot surface, giving you those golden, slightly crisp edges that are so delicious.
        • Using baby carrots: While this recipe works well with any type of carrot, baby carrots tend to cook faster due to their smaller size. If you’re using this recipe to make roasted baby carrots, start checking for doneness around the 15-minute mark to avoid overcooking.
        • Cutting them in chunks: If you prefer, you can cut the carrots into 1½-inch pieces. Roasting them in chunks should take about the same amount of time, as long as they’re evenly sized.
        Whole roasted carrots garnished with parsley from the top view.

        Serving Suggestions

        This simple carrot side dish pairs beautifully with so many mains. Here are a few of my favorite ways to serve it:

        • Roasted Chicken – You really can’t go wrong pairing these carrots with any kind of roasted chicken, but I especially love serving them alongside a whole roasted chicken or bone-in chicken breast. The flavors and textures just work so well together.
        • Prime Rib – These carrots are a great way to add a pop of color to your prime rib dinner, which I usually serve for Christmas. One of my favorite tricks is to roast the carrots while the meat is resting—everything comes together beautifully without any extra fuss.
        • Leg of Lamb – For a festive Easter meal (or any special occasion), serve these roasted carrots with roasted leg of lamb. The natural sweetness of the carrots is a great complement to the rich, savory lamb.

        My Favorite Way to Serve Whole Roasted Carrots:

        While this easy roasted carrots recipe is a delicious side dish straight from the oven, I love giving it a Mediterranean twist when I have a few extra minutes. The flavor profile in this version is inspired by my roasted carrot hummus recipe.

        A woman is serving oven Baked Carrots Recipe on a sheet pan

        I top the carrots with a cup of canned (and drained) chickpeas, a handful of crumbled feta cheese, fresh dill (or any other fresh herb I have on hand), and pomegranate seeds.

        Then, I finish it off with a generous drizzle of my tahini lemon sauce.

        It takes no more than 10 additional minutes, but it transforms this basic savory roasted carrots dish into a colorful, crowd-pleasing vegetable side dish that’s just a little extra special.

        More Carrot Recipes You Might Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make this roasted whole carrots recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Overn roasted carrots on a plate from the top view.
        Print

        Roasted Whole Carrots Recipe

        This Roasted Whole Carrots recipe is all about simplicity and flavor. With just olive oil, salt, and pepper, the natural sweetness of the carrots shines through. It's a versatile side that fits seamlessly into everyday meals or special holiday spreads.
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 25 minutes
        Total Time 35 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 104kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 lbs whole carrots cleaned, stems cut, and peeled
        • 2 tablespoons olive oil
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh parsley

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 425 °F (218 °C).
        • Place the carrots onto a large baking sheet* in a single layer.
        • Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper.
        • Toss to ensure all carrots are coated evenly with the oil and seasoning.
        • Roast in the preheated oven for 20-25 minutes or until fork tender. You can check doneness by inserting a fork into the thickest part of a carrot; if it comes in and out easily, it should be ready.
        • Transfer onto a serving platter and garnish with parsley before serving.

        Notes

        • Yields: Two pounds of roasted carrots serve 6 as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Carrots: I used whole carrots that are sold with stems. They tend to be thinner than regular carrots sold in plastic bags. This recipe would work with any carrot, but please remember that there is a direct correlation between the thickness of the carrots and cooking time. For best results, I recommend cutting larger carrots vertically to ensure they are equal in size for even roasting.
        • Lining the baking sheet: I usually roast carrots without lining the baking sheet with parchment paper, as roasting them directly on the hot surface caramelizes them better. However, you can line the baking sheet with parchment paper if preferred.
        • To Store: Let the roasted whole carrots cool, then transfer them to an airtight container. They’ll keep well in the refrigerator for 3 to 4 days. You can enjoy them cold, at room temperature, or reheated.
        • To Reheat: I prefer warming them up in a low-heat oven (around 300°F/150°C) for 10–12 minutes. This gentle method helps preserve their texture and prevents them from drying out. You can also reheat them in a covered skillet over low heat if you’re short on time.
          To Freeze: While you can freeze roasted carrots, the texture will be softer once they are thawed. If that’s okay with you (for soups or purees), place the cooled carrots in a freezer-safe bag or container and freeze for up to a month. Thaw it overnight in the fridge and reheat it in the oven for best results.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 104kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 299mg | Potassium: 489mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 25316IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 51mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-whole-carrots/feed/ 24
        Lemon Orzo https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-orzo/ https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-orzo/#comments Mon, 24 Mar 2025 20:05:17 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80826 Cooked in chicken broth, this small pasta may resemble rice but has an incomparably tender consistency. The lemon, garlic and…]]>

        Cooked in chicken broth, this small pasta may resemble rice but has an incomparably tender consistency. The lemon, garlic and Parmesan create a zesty flavor profile that will have you licking the spoon. If you can’t get enough of orzo after this, I know you’ll also appreciate my Lemon Chicken Orzo Soup.

        Lemon orzo garnished with lemon and parsley in a pot from the top view.

        What You Need To Know in A Nutshell:

        Before you dive into the lemon orzo recipe below, here are a few essential notes from my test kitchen to ensure your success:

        • My preferred ratio of orzo to liquid is 1 to 2. Because this recipe for lemon orzo has you cooking the pasta with the pot’s lid off, some of the liquid will evaporate as it simmers. Thus, my recipe calls for a bit more broth than others you may find. 
        • Stay close and stir often. This is a quick-cooking dish that you will want to keep a close eye on to prevent the pasta from scorching at the base of the pot. If you find that it’s cooking too fast, turn down the heat slightly and add a splash more of your stock.
        • 1 cup of dry orzo yields about 2 to 2.5 cups of cooked orzo. If you’re wondering how much dry orzo per person to cook, a good rule of thumb is to use  ⅓ cup (about 2 ounces) of dry orzo per person as a side dish. If you’re serving it as a main dish, you may want to increase the portion to ½ cup (about 3 ounces) per person.

        How To Make Lemon Orzo?

        The simplicity and versatility of this lemon orzo recipe are what you will love most about it. Here’s how I make it:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        1. Gather your ingredients: You can find the complete list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here are some ingredient notes:
          • Oil: I opted for butter, but you can use extra virgin olive oil (or other vegetable oils) if you prefer. 
          • Chicken stock: Need to make this vegetarian? In this recipe, we are cooking orzo with chicken broth (or stock), but it can easily be made with vegetable broth instead. Whichever option you choose, if you use storebought, remember to select the low sodium version.
        Steps showing how to sautee orzo with oil.
        1. Sautee orzo with butter (or oil): Heat your butter in a medium-sized saucepan or Dutch oven over medium heat, then add the minced fresh garlic and lemon zest and saute for 30 seconds. Next, add the orzo and continue to saute, stirring constantly, until the orzo is coated with oil and lightly browned, about 4 minutes. While it may look like an extra step, toasting orzo in oil brings out a nutty, slightly roasted flavor that deepens the dish’s overall taste.
        Lemon orzo with parmesan in a pot from the top view.
        1. Add your stock and boil: Carefully pour in the chicken stock and add the kosher salt and black pepper. Stir to combine. Bring it all to a boil, then lower the heat to medium-low, and let it simmer, uncovered, until the orzo is cooked through (most of the liquid is absorbed) but still al dente, about 10 minutes, stirring occasionally. The whole thing happens quickly, so it is best to keep a close eye on it.
        2. Serve: Remove the pan from the heat, then add lemon juice and parmesan cheese. Taste for seasoning and add more salt and pepper, if necessary, before serving. Garnish with parsley and serve immediately.

        Optional Add-ins and Variations

        This easy lemon orzo is highly modifiable—one of my favorite things about it! Not only does this flavor combo go with just about any main dish, but you can also elevate it with a few different vegetables. Here are some that I think are worth trying in your kitchen:

        • Add in a vegetable. You can easily toss frozen blanched peas or fresh baby spinach into your lemony orzo during the last 3 minutes of cooking. My favorite veggie add-in is asparagus; you will also mix this into your lemon orzo pasta in the last 3 minutes as it cooks. However, I recommend blanching or steaming asparagus first before adding it in. You can do the same with broccoli if you prefer.
        • Select your cheese & fresh herbs according to your menu. While this creamy lemon orzo recipe calls for Parmesan cheese, you can mix things with regional flavors. Serving this as an Italian side dish? Use Parmesan and fresh basil. Using your garlic lemon orzo as a part of a Mediterranean meal? Swap in feta cheese and fresh dill. Want some added heat? Garnish your finished lemon orzo with red pepper flakes. 
        • Want an extra creamy lemon orzo pasta? Add a splash of heavy cream (¼ cup or so) towards the end (in the last 3 minutes or so) of your cooking time.

        What to Serve with Lemon Orzo?

        This lemon parmesan orzo is the ultimate side dish for a reason: it is versatile and can be enjoyed in many ways. Below are a few of my favorite pairings:

        • As a side dish: While I would devour this lemon garlic orzo with just about any main dish, my current go-to pairings are either serving it alongside my Chicken Kabobs or with my Honey Harissa Chicken
        • As the base of a bowl: Orzo with lemon is an excellent (and surprising!) grain option in place of rice for a wide variety of bowls. Top your lemon orzo with your favorite veggies and a protein like Turkey Zucchini Meatballs or Lamb Feta Meatballs.

        FAQs

        What is orzo made of?

        Orzo is a rice-shaped pasta made of semolina durum wheat, and its tiny size is what makes it so easy to use in everything from salads, bowls, soups, and more.

        Can I use rice instead of orzo in this recipe?

        Even though orzo looks like rice, it isn’t a 1-to-1 substitute. Orzo cooks faster than rice and absorbs liquid differently, creating a creamier texture. If you want to use rice, you’ll need to adjust both the cooking time and the liquid ratio—plus, the result will be less creamy and more like a pilaf than a pasta dish.

        You Might Also Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make your own Lemon Orzo recipe following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Photos by Tanya Pilgrim

        Lemony orzo recipe in a pot garnished with parsley.
        Print

        Lemon Orzo Recipe

        This lemony orzo pasta is a one-pot, go-with-anything side dish that’s ready in 20 minutes and perfect for busy weeknights. The lemon, garlic, and Parmesan create a zesty flavor profile that will have you licking the spoon.
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Kosher
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 20 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 356kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter or extra-virgin olive oil
        • 2 cloves garlic minced
        • 2 teaspoons lemon zest approx. zest of 1 large lemon
        • 1 ½ cups orzo 9 oz.
        • 3 cups chicken stock homemade or store bought (low sodium) or vegetable stock for a vegetarian option
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • 2 tablespoons fresh lemon juice
        • ½ cup grated parmesan cheese or crumbled feta cheese
        • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley or fresh basil leaves

        Instructions

        • Heat one tablespoon of butter in a medium-sized saucepan or Dutch oven over medium heat.
          A collage of photos showing how to sautee orzo with butter.
        • Add two cloves of minced garlic and two teaspoons of lemon zest and sautee using a wooden spoon for 30 seconds.
        • Add 1 ½ cups of orzo and cook, stirring constantly, until orzo is coated with oil and lightly browned, about 4 minutes.
        • Carefully pour in the 3 cups of chicken stock and add one teaspoon of kosher salt and ¼ teaspoon of black pepper. Stir to combine.
        • Bring it to a boil, lower the heat to medium-low, and let it simmer, uncovered, until the orzo is cooked through but still al dente, about 10 minutes, stirring occasionally and keeping a close eye on it.
          A collage of images showing how to add chicken broth and parmesan to lemon orzo as it is cooking.
        • Off the heat, add lemon juice and parmesan cheese. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary before serving.
          Cooked lemon parmesan orzo in a pot from the top view.
        • Garnish with fresh chopped parsley and serve immediately.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 3 to 3 1/2 cups of cooked lemon orzo pasta that is ideal for 4 to 6 servings as a side dish.
        • Storage: Allow the leftovers to come to room temperature, then store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
        • Reheating: Place your leftover lemon orzo in a saucepan with a splash of water or stock and warm over low heat. 
        • Freezing: While you can, in theory, freeze orzo cooked in broth, I don’t recommend it. Pasta will always be mushy when thawed; I find it best to make this side dish fresh.
        • Cook only until al dente: While I listed the cooking time as 10 minutes (or so), please be aware that the timing might slightly differ based on the brand you are using. Be sure to check the package instructions and taste for texture (and doneness) towards the end to ensure it is cooked to your liking.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 356kcal | Carbohydrates: 51g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 24mg | Sodium: 1062mg | Potassium: 361mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 287IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 135mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-orzo/feed/ 2
        Air Fryer Asparagus https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-asparagus/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-asparagus/#respond Sat, 08 Mar 2025 16:54:35 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=48753 Why You Need To Know In a Nutshell With the help of air frying technology, getting deliciously crispy asparagus is…]]>

        Why You Need To Know In a Nutshell

        With the help of air frying technology, getting deliciously crispy asparagus is easier than ever now. Here are a few reasons why you should give this recipe a try:

        • The quickest method: Compared to roasting in the ovencooking on the stovetop, or steaming it, roasting asparagus in the air fryer is faster, with only 13 minutes from start to finish. 
        • Perfect texture every time: The light and crispy texture of air fried asparagus can’t be duplicated through any other method. It also has less oil than deep fried asparagus.
        • Easy to jazz up: Easy customizations with different spices, add-ons and toppings make this a new favorite you’ll make again and again.
        • Versatile: It is the perfect side dish, healthy snack, or a great addition to recipes like Asparagus Salad, Asparagus Tart and even Butter Lettuce Salad.
        Air fried asparagus on a plate from the top view

        Ingredients

        This air fryer asparagus recipe has five simple ingredients:

        • Fresh asparagus
        • Olive oil
        • Minced garlic
        • Kosher salt
        • Black pepper

        You probably have most of these at home already.

        Ingredients for cooking asparagus in air fryer

        How to Cook Asparagus in Air Fryer

        1. Preheat the air fryer: Plug in your air fryer and let it preheat to 375 F / 190 C. Rinse and dry asparagus spears. Place the asparagus on a cutting board. While holding the bunch with one hand, cut the woody ends by one inch from the bottom using a sharp knife.
        person showing how to prepare asparagus for cooking with multiple step by step pictures
        1. Season the asparagus: In a large bowl, combine the trimmed asparagus, a little bit of oil, minced garlic, and salt and black pepper. With clean hands or kitchen tongs, give it a toss to make sure that each asparagus spear is thoroughly coated with the mixture.
        asparagus in the air fryer before and after it is cooked
        1. Arrange in the basket: Carefully arrange asparagus spears in the air fryer basket in a single layer. A larger air fryer might fit all the asparagus stalks, but a smaller air fryer may require multiple batches. 
        2. Cook until tender: Cook for only 6-7 minutes until tender, but don’t forget to turn the spears halfway through. If you are using thin asparagus, air fry for 3-4 minutes.
        3. Transfer to serving platter: Carefully transfer to a serving plate, season with salt and pepper, a squeeze of fresh lemon juice (or a sprinkle of parmesan cheese), and serve while it is still warm.

        How to Store & Reheat

        Use this air-fried asparagus recipe to batch-cook asparagus for your weekly meal prep and store it in the refrigerator following my directions below:

        • Storage: Let the leftovers of your cooked asparagus come to room temperature, place in an airtight container and store for up to 3 days in the fridge.
        • How to Reheat Asparagus: To reheat, air fry your asparagus at 375 F / 190 C for about 3 minutes making sure to give it a toss halfway through the cooking process.

        Recipe Variations

        Want to check it up and make it your own? Here are a few ways to take your air fryer roasted asparagus to a whole new level:

        • Freshen with herbs: Fresh herbs give this dish new flavor. Try basil, parsley, mint or chives.
        • Experiment with spices: Make this dish unique each time with new spices. Try paprika, garlic powder or even red pepper flakes to start.
        • Use lemon zest and balsamic: Drizzle it with a mixture of lemon zest, balsamic vinegar (or lemon juice) and a little olive oil to give it a refreshing flavor.
        • Sprinkle with cheese: Shredded mozzarella or parmesan cheese makes the dish more scrumptious.
        • Imitate Asian flavors: Use soy sauce, maple syrup or honey to create an Asian-inspired sauce.

        Expert Tips

        • Take time to trim asparagus, dry it thoroughly and cook in single layers – even if it requires batch cooking. This is crucial for light, crispy asparagus. 
        • Change the cooking time if necessary. As I mentioned earlier, this recipe was tested both with thick asparagus and pencil thin asparagus. If you are using thin asparagus, be sure to reduce the cooking time by half. And don’t forget to turn the asparagus halfway through cooking.
        • Add variety with new flavors. Make this dish new each time by experimenting with spices, herbs and other fresh ingredients.
        • For more of a crispy air fryer asparagus, air fry it for 1-2 more minutes.
        • Keep in mind that the cooking time may differ from one air fryer to another. I tested this recipe in my Instant Vortex 6 Quart Air Fryer (affiliate link). For the best results, it is best to keep a close eye on the asparagus and check doneness after the 5-minute mark.
        Air Fryer Roasted Asparagus in the basket right after it is cooked

        Serving Suggestions

        There isn’t one right answer when it comes to serving this air fried asparagus recipe. It tastes great in so many ways, so consider your options! 

        FAQs

        What temperature do you air fry asparagus?

        The ideal temperature for air frying asparagus is 375 F degrees (190 C).

        How long to cook asparagus in air fryer?

        Cooking asparagus in air fryer takes about 6-7 minutes at 375 F degrees. 

        How to cook frozen asparagus in air fryer?

        Frozen asparagus takes 9-10 minutes to cook in the air fryer, but there’s no need to thaw beforehand.

        How long do you reheat asparagus in air fryer?

        Air frying leftover asparagus only takes 3 minutes to reheat, so it couldn’t be easier. 

        Do I need to adjust the cooking time when using thin asparagus?

        Yes, you do. This recipe was tested both with thick asparagus and thin asparagus. By thick asparagus, I mean the regular asparagus you would find in most grocery stores. Thin asparagus is usually available for a short time at the beginning of spring. You can cook both types of asparagus in an air fryer. However, the thinner should be cooked for a shorter amount of time. While the exact time depends on how thin the asparagus stalks are, shortening the air frying time by 2-3 minutes (and keeping a close eye on it) is a good place to start.

        Why did my asparagus come out stringy and tough?

        If you do not take the time and cut the woodsy ends, you will end up with stringy and tough asparagus.

        Do I need to soak my asparagus before air frying?

        No, you do not need to soak asparagus before air frying. Instead, we recommend giving it a quick rinse and drying it as much as possible.

        Other Air Fryer Vegetable Recipes You Might Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this air fryer asparagus recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        asparagus in air fryer basket from the top view
        Print

        Air Fryer Asparagus Recipe

        Learn how to cook asparagus in air fryer for perfectly crispy and tender asparagus cooked in less than 10 minutes by using only a teaspoon of oil. Easy, quick, and convenient.
        Course Vegetarian Side Dish
        Cuisine American Vegan
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 3 minutes
        Cook Time 7 minutes
        Preheating Air Fryer 3 minutes
        Total Time 13 minutes
        Servings 4 people
        Calories 33kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 pound asparagus* woody ends trimmed
        • 1 teaspoon olive oil
        • 1 garlic clove minced (optional)
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        Instructions

        • Preheat air fryer to 375 F degrees.
        • Place asparagus, olive oil, minced garlic, and salt and black pepper in a bowl. Using your clean hands or kitchen tongs, toss to make sure that each asparagus spear is coated with oil, garlic and seasonings.
        • Arrange them in your air fryer basket making sure that they are on a single layer. If you have a smaller air fryer, you may have to air fry your asparagus in batches.
        • Cook until tender for 6-7 minutes making sure to toss halfway through the cooking process.
        • Carefully transfer the now air fried asparagus to a platter and serve right away.

        Notes

        • Thick Asparagus vs Thin Asparagus: This recipe was tested both with thick asparagus and pencil-thin asparagus. If you are using thin asparagus, be sure to reduce the cooking time by half. And don’t forget to turn the asparagus halfway through cooking.
        • To Store: Let your cooked asparagus come to room temperature, place in an airtight container and store for up to 3 days in the fridge.
        • How to Reheat Asparagus: To reheat, air fry your asparagus at 375 F / 190 C for about 3 minutes making sure to give it a toss halfway through the cooking process.
        • For more of a crispy air fryer asparagus, air fry it for 1-2 more minutes.
        • I listed fresh garlic as an optional ingredient as this recipe would work perfectly without it. You can also substitute fresh garlic with 1 teaspoon garlic powder if you wish.
        • Optional toppings: Depending on what I am serving it, I usually finish it off with a squeeze of fresh lemon juice (ideal if I am serving it seafood) or a sprinkle of parmesan cheese (ideal if I am serving it with chicken or meat dishes).

        Nutrition

        Calories: 33kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 234mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 858IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 29mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-asparagus/feed/ 0
        Mint Chimichurri https://foolproofliving.com/mint-chimichurri/ https://foolproofliving.com/mint-chimichurri/#respond Fri, 07 Mar 2025 16:28:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80649 My chimichurri with mint is also a playful alternative to my other mint sauces—Lamb Mint Sauce and Yogurt Mint Sauce.…]]>

        My chimichurri with mint is also a playful alternative to my other mint sauces—Lamb Mint Sauce and Yogurt Mint Sauce. Serve them with lamb, seafood, steak, and more!

        Mint chimichurri in a jar with a spoonful of it.

        Ingredients and Substitutions

        The fresh, crisp flavor of my mint chimichurri recipe is all thanks to these fresh ingredients that you can find at your local grocer, farmer’s market, or in your garden. 

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Fresh mint leaves: We will be using only the leaves for my mint chimichurri sauce, as I find the stems to be too “woodsy” in flavor to include. 
        • Fresh parsley leaves: While I prefer to use only the leaves of the parsley, if you can chop it all very finely, feel free to include the stems as well. 
        • Red chili pepper: Traditional chimichurri sauce uses red chili peppers, but you’re welcome to swap them out with ¼ teaspoon of red pepper flakes, if that’s what you have available. Or, if you’d like to up the heat, you can also try using serrano or jalapeno peppers instead. 
        • Fresh garlic cloves: Garlic is a big part of the classic recipe, and the fresh cloves add a bold spiciness that you won’t want to skimp on. 
        • Vinegar: In Argentina, chimichurri sauce is always made using red wine vinegar. If you don’t have any on hand, you are welcome to swap in white wine vinegar. Another non-traditional option for the acid in this chimichurri sauce with mint that works, too, is lime juice.
        • Seasonings: With so many fresh herbs, the only additional seasonings needed are Kosher salt and black pepper. 
        • Extra virgin olive oil: I recommend a good extra-virgin olive oil since this isn’t being cooked (unless you end up using it as a marinade), and the flavor will really shine through. 
        • Shallot (optional): The traditional chimichurri sauce does not use shallots, but you can add a finely chopped shallot, especially if you plan on using this as a salad dressing. 

        How to make Mint Chimichurri?

        You can chop the ingredients of this simple sauce by hand, or use a food processor. I personally prefer the rough traditional hand-chop method, but a few quick pulses of the processor do the trick, too. Here are the simple steps to throw it all together:

        Steps showing how to make the recipe.
        1. In a medium-sized bowl, combine your finely chopped fresh mint and parsley leaves, chopped small red chili pepper, minced garlic cloves, red wine vinegar, Kosher salt, ground black pepper, and extra virgin olive oil. 
        2. Mix to combine, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary before serving.

        How To Store and Freeze?

        This is an excellent make-ahead condiment that stores well. Here’s how I do it:

        • Storage: You can store your mint chimichurri in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
        • Freezer: Freezing is a fantastic way to enjoy recipes with mint sauce for months to come. Simply pour your chimichurri sauce into an ice cube tray and freeze it. Once frozen, place the chimichurri cubes in a freezer bag and take out a cube to enjoy whenever needed. 

        Serving Suggestions

        This multi-purpose sauce can be used to add a cool burst of flavor to an array of dishes. Whether it’s enjoyed as a sauce, marinade, condiment, or dressing, these are some of my top choices to pair it with:

        • With Lamb: Mint and lamb are such a classic flavor combination. This mint chimichurri sauce is excellent with any of my lamb recipes but I particularly like serving it as a sauce for my Leg of Lamb and Rack of Lamb.
        • Seafood: Mint sauces like this pair beautifully with seafood dishes. Drizzle a generous spoon over  Grilled Shrimp or Grilled Salmon for a refreshing and bright finish.
        • Roasted Veggies: Savory veggies fresh out of the oven shine with a splash of chimichurri sauce with mint. I love pairing it with my Baked Eggplant and Roasted Asparagus, especially when I serve them with meat dishes.
        • Salad Dressing: Mint chimichurri can perk up your homemade salad dressing for an unexpected taste that perks up any boring salad. Try adding a few tablespoons to either my Lemon Vinaigrette or my Yogurt Salad Dressing.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Other Recipes with Fresh Mint

        If you make your own Mint Chimichurri recipe following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Photography by Tanya Pilgrim.

        Mint chimichurri sauce in a bowl with a spoon.
        Print

        Mint Chimichurri Recipe

        A classic chimichurri with a mint twist, this play on the traditional Argentinean herb sauce comes together in about 5 minutes with everyday ingredients. It complements beautifully with any lamb, seafood, and veggie dishes.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine Argentina
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 177kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 cup fresh mint leaves finely chopped
        • 1 cup fresh parsley leaves finely chopped
        • 1 small red chili pepper deseeded and chopped, or ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes
        • 3 garlic cloves minced
        • 2 tablespoons red wine vinegar
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • cup extra virgin olive oil

        Instructions

        • Place 1 cup of finely chopped fresh mint leaves, 1 cup of finely chopped fresh parsley leaves, 1 chopped small red chili pepper, 3 minced garlic cloves, 2 tablespoons red wine vinegar, ½ teaspoon kosher salt, ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper, and ⅓ cup extra virgin olive oil in a medium-sized bowl.
        • Mix to combine, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary before serving.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes ~ 2/3 cups of mint chimichurri sauce that is ideal for 4-6 servings.
        • Using a food processor: While I chopped the herbs by hand, you can certainly use a food processor if you want to make it quicker.
          • Storage: You can store it in an airtight container for up to 4 days. The green color of the chimichurri gets darker as it sits, which is normal.
        • Freezing: Place it in ice cubes and freeze overnight. Store the frozen cubes in an airtight container in individual portions.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 177kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Sodium: 304mg | Potassium: 161mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 1742IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 53mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/mint-chimichurri/feed/ 0
        Roasted Boneless Leg of Lamb https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-boneless-leg-of-lamb/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-boneless-leg-of-lamb/#comments Fri, 07 Mar 2025 16:28:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80631 Served with a bright and herby mint chimichurri, this leg of lamb roast recipe is a showstopper whether you serve…]]>

        Served with a bright and herby mint chimichurri, this leg of lamb roast recipe is a showstopper whether you serve it for Easter dinner, Christmas, or a special Sunday dinner. 

        If you’re looking for more roasted lamb recipes, we also have a roasted rack of lamb that is incredibly tender and has a well-rounded flavor profile through plenty of fresh garlic and rosemary.

        Sliced roasted boneless leg of lamb served with mint chimichurri.

        Ingredients and Substitutions for Leg of Lamb Roast

        With a few simple ingredients—all of which you can find on a single supermarket run!—you can make this boneless leg of lamb roast recipe and wow everyone at your table. Here’s what you will need:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Boneless (or deboned) leg of lamb: Here in the U.S., you’ll typically find lamb from New Zealand, Australia, or the U.S. I usually buy mine from Costco, which carries Australian lamb leg. It is sold in different weights, so choose one based on how many people you plan on serving. The leg of lamb without bone I’m using here is just over 5 pounds, which is perfect for 6 to 8 adults, but you can go smaller or larger depending on your needs.
        • Dijon mustard: Dijon adds a nice tangy flavor and helps tame the gameness of lamb. I do not recommend swapping it out for yellow or brown mustard, which can be too harsh for this simple leg of lamb recipe.
        • Extra Virgin Olive oil
        • Fresh garlic cloves: We use a lot of fresh garlic in this recipe to balance out the gamey flavor of the boneless lamb roast—8 whole garlic cloves! You will use 4 of them, finely minced, for the inside of the lamb (mixed into the marinade), and the remaining four cloves will be stuffed into slits on the outside once it’s rolled.
        • Fresh herbs: We used a combination of fresh rosemary and parsley, though you’re welcome to substitute in thyme, as well. However, it’s important to finely mince the rosemary, if that’s what you plan on using, so the pine-like needles blend in well. 
        • Spices and seasonings: This rosemary and garlic lamb roast is quite adaptable to a range of seasoning blends, depending on the flavor profile you’re aiming for. As a nod to my own Mediterranean roots, I opted for ground cumin and coriander. 
        • Lemon zest: The brightness of lemon mellows out the gamey flavor in our seasoned leg of lamb. 

        How to Cook Boneless Leg of Lamb in the Oven

        If you’ve been feeling a little intimidated when you see photos of perfectly roasted lamb, don’t worry—if you follow these simple steps that I’ve outlined for you, accompanied by the step-by-step photos, you can easily achieve a stunning roast boneless leg of lamb of your own. Here, my friends, is the best way to cook a boneless leg of lamb:

        1. Prep your oven: Adjust your oven rack to the lower-middle position and heat the oven to 425 degrees F. (218 C). Place a wire rack on a baking sheet and set it aside to warm with the oven.
        Steps showing how to make the seasoning and prep the lamb for the recipe.
        1. Make the seasoning: Into a medium-sized bowl, combine your Dijon mustard, olive oil, 4 cloves of minced garlic, finely chopped fresh rosemary, finely chopped fresh parsley, ground cumin, ground coriander, Kosher salt, black pepper, and zest of a lemon. Stir mixture evenly. 
        2. Prepare the lamb: Remove the lamb from its packaging. It will likely look like an uneven bundle of meat. Lay it flat on a cutting board with the inside facing up. Do your best to spread it out into as even of a shape as possible. Pat it dry with paper towels on both sides to remove excess moisture. Using a sharp chef’s knife, trim off any excess fat, focusing on removing any greyish or tough fat. *Note: the grey fat is what brings out the gamey flavor, which is why we focus on removing that type in this step.
        3. Remove the excess fat (optional): Turn it over and trim away any thick or uneven patches of fat, leaving a thin layer for flavor and moisture retention. 
        Steps showing how to prepare the boneless leg of lamb for roasting.
        1. Even out the thickness: Flip the meat back to the inside facing up position. Cover the meat with plastic wrap. Using a meat mallet, gently pound the meat to create an even thickness of about 1-inch, focusing on the thicker areas. Remove the stretch film. 
        2. Spread it with the seasoning rub: Spread ⅔ of the Dijon-herb mixture evenly over the inside layer of the meat.
        3. Roll into a cylinder: To roll the leg of lamb, begin with the right bottom part of the meat and roll it towards the center (away from your body), pulling it snug as you go. Then, take the left top side and roll it towards you, meeting the first roll in the middle. It should have a uniform cylinder shape. Tuck the ends of the meat inside the roll as much as you can.
        4. Tie the lamb: Using butcher’s twine, secure the roast by tying loops around it at roughly  1 ½ inch intervals, ideally starting from the center and working towards both ends. You’ll likely need about 8-9 loops to keep everything in place. It doesn’t have to be perfect!
        Person inserting sliced garlic in the lamb and seasoning the outside.
        1. Cut small slits for more garlic: Using a pairing knife cut 14-16  1-inch slits evenly around the exterior of the lamb and insert the leftover four sliced garlic cloves into each cut as evenly as you can.
        2. Season the outside: Spread the rest of the dijon-herb mixture over the outside of the deboned lamb roast, ensuring that all sides are evenly coated.
        3. Roast: Transfer the meat onto the prepared baking sheet from the oven. Bake for 15 minutes in the preheated 425 degrees F oven for a nice sear and then turn the heat down to 350 degrees F and bake until the internal temperature reaches 125-130 degrees F (for medium-rare) when a thermometer is inserted in the middle of the roast. This takes about 40-45 minutes* (a total of 1 hour in the oven). 
        4. Let lamb rest: When the leg of lamb is finished roasting, remove it from the oven, tent it with foil, and let it rest for 10-15 minutes. As the lamb rests, the internal temperature will increase by 5 to 10 degrees, thanks to the residual heat.
        5. Slice and serve: Transfer the roast onto a cutting board, remove the twine, and slice it into about 1-inch thick slices, depending on your preference. Transfer your boneless leg of lamb roast onto a plate and serve it with your favorite sauce (I served mine with my mint chimichurri sauce).
        Boneless leg of lamb roast sliced and served with mint sauce on the side.

        Ideal Temperature and Cooking Time (Based on Doneness Level)

        Some of the top questions I receive are: How long to cook boneless leg of lamb? and What is the optimum cooking temperature? I promised you an easy boneless leg of lamb recipe, so here are a few notes to keep it easy & foolproof:

        • How long to roast a boneless leg of lamb depends on the weight and your preferred doneness level. While most boneless leg of lamb recipes say the cooking time per pound is about 15-20 minutes, I think it is more like 10-15 minutes.
        • 3 things affect the boneless leg of lamb roasting time:
          •  The boneless leg of lamb temperature (I usually take the meat out of the fridge to come to room temperature for at least 30 minutes to an hour before working with it); 
          • The weight of your boneless lamb leg roast
          • Your preferred doneness (rare, medium-rare, or medium). 
        • The two-step process – My approach to roasting lamb starts with a high-heat sear to lock in flavor, followed by a slow, gentle cook. I begin at 425°F for the first 15 minutes, then lower the temperature to 350°F to ensure a tender, evenly cooked roast. The final touch happens as the lamb rests, allowing residual heat to finish the cooking process while keeping it juicy and flavorful.
        • Looking for a boneless leg of lamb roasting chart based on doneness? The below chart from America’s Test Kitchen cookbook, Meat Illustrated (affiliate link), is the one I use.
        Desired DonenessCooking Stop TemperatureFinal Temperature After Resting
        Rare115 to 120 °F (46 – 49 °C) 120 to 125 °F (49 – 52 °C)
        Medium-Rare120 to 125 °F (49 – 52 °C)125 to 130 °F (52 – 54 °C)
        Medium130 to 135 °F (52 – 57 °C)135 to 140 °F (57 – 60 °C)
        Medium-Well140 to 145 °F (60 – 63 °C)145 to 150 °F (63 – 66 °C)
        Well-Done150 to 155 °F (66 – 68 °C)155 to 160 °F (68 – 71 °C)
        • Residual heat will likely raise the temperature of your leg of lamb with garlic and rosemary by 5–10 degrees during the 10–15 minutes of resting. That means if I pull my lamb out when the internal temperature is at 120°F, it should ultimately reach around 130°F, which is exactly how I like it—perfectly tender and juicy.

        Expert Tips

        Here are a few tips from my foolproof test kitchen to help you get the best results on your first try:

        • Before cooking it in the oven, be sure to take it out of the refrigerator for at least 30 minutes to an hour prior. You do not want to put it directly in the oven while it’s still cold.
        • A wire rack is essential. A wire rack allows the air to circulate, producing an evenly cooked roasted leg of lamb. If you do not have a wire rack, you can use a roasting pan with a V-rack.
        • Chop your herbs finely.  Rosemary is a pine-y shaped herb, and can add unpleasant bits to chew on if you don’t chop it finely enough. Feel free to experiment with the amount of herbs you use based on your preferences.
        • Remove the fat from the inside and outside of your leg of lamb in the prep stage. My boneless lamb roast recipe is perfectly flavored in large part due to this step, so don’t skip it. The grey fat on the inside is what contributes most to the gamey flavor of the lamb, so if that’s not something you enjoy (I do not), removing a large part of the grey fat will solve this issue. While the outer layer of fat does help retain moisture as it roasts, you want to remove some of it so the end slices are not excessively fatty. 
        • Evening out the meat makes rolling your roast easier. This is a great tip that I picked up in my research from America’s Test Kitchen. Using a meat mallet (or you can also use a can or mason jar in a pinch) helps create an even layer, which then makes it easier to achieve the cylinder shape you see in my photos.
        • Do not skip resting your meat. Resting allows the juices to redistribute, making the meat extra tender.
        • Slice your baked boneless leg of lamb evenly. Using your chef’s knife to slice your roast into 1-1.5” slices will give you a beautiful presentation and equal serving sizes. 

        How To Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Reheat

        Looking to save some time on the roasting day? Here are some quick tips:

        • Make Ahead: This entire recipe can be prepared ahead of the roasting day. Simply follow all of the steps before putting it in the oven, then wrap it in stretch film. This is a great way to bring out more flavor by allowing it to marinate overnight. Just remember to take it out of the fridge an hour or two before cooking to allow it to come to room temperature. 
        • Storage: Store any leftover lamb as a cylinder or as slices. First, allow the meat to come to room temperature—you don’t want to store it while it’s still hot. Then, wrap it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 4 days.
        • Freezing and Thawing: You can freeze any leftovers as a cylinder or as slices as well. Bring it to room temperature and then store it in a freezer-safe container for up to a month in the freezer. Thaw it overnight in the fridge.
        • Reheat: Warm slices of the lamb in a low heat (275 F to 300 F oven) for 10 minutes or until heated thoroughly.

        FAQs

        Do I cook lamb with netting on?

        No. For even cooking, you must first remove the net and follow my instructions to flatten the meat, then roll it into a cylinder to get the best results.

        How much boneless leg of lamb per person?

        I usually serve ¾ lbs per person, about 2 slices each.

        Should you cover lamb with foil when roasting?

        No, there is no need. You want the oven air to circulate evenly around the meat for a nice sear on the outside.

        What To Serve with It?

        This leg of lamb recipe is a versatile main dish that pairs well with many sides, making it perfect for any special meal. Here are some great serving ideas:

        Other Lamb Recipes You Might Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make your own Roasted Boneless Leg of Lamb recipe following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Photography by Tanya Pilgrim.

        Roasted boneless leg of lamb sliced on a plate.
        Print

        Roasted Boneless Leg of Lamb Recipe

        Looking for a foolproof way to make a juicy, flavorful, roasted boneless leg of lamb? This easy recipe walks you through every step—from seasoning to roasting—so you get a perfectly tender, golden-crusted lamb every time.
        Course Dinner
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 30 minutes
        Cook Time 1 hour
        Resting time 15 minutes
        Total Time 1 hour 45 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 363kcal

        Ingredients

        • ¼ cup Dijon mustard
        • 2 tablespoons olive oil
        • 8 cloves garlic divided – 4 cloves for rub minced, 4 cloves for inserting into slits sliced
        • 2 tablespoons fresh rosemary leaves removed from stems and chopped finely
        • ¼ cup fresh parsley finely chopped
        • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
        • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
        • 3 teaspoons kosher salt
        • 1 teaspoon black pepper
        • Zest of 1 lemon about 1 ½ teaspoon
        • 5 lbs Boneless leg of lamb

        Instructions

        • Adjust oven rack to lower-middle position and heat oven to 425 degrees F. (218 C). Place a wire rack on a baking sheet and set it aside.
        • Into a medium-sized bowl, place ¼ cup of Dijon mustard, 2 tablespoons of olive oil, 4 cloves of sliced garlic, 2 tablespoons of finely chopped fresh rosemary, ¼ cup finely fresh parsley, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon ground coriander, 3 teaspoons kosher salt, 1 teaspoon black pepper, and zest of a lemon. Stir to combine.
          A collage of images showing the garlic mustard seasoning.
        • Remove the leg of lamb from its packaging. It will likely look like an uneven bundle of meat. Lay it flat on a cutting board with the inside facing up. Do your best to spread it out into as even a shape as possible. Pat it dry with paper towels on both sides.
        • Using a sharp chef’s knife, trim off any excess fat, focusing on removing any greyish or tough fat.
        • Turn it over and trim away any thick or uneven patches of fat, leaving a thin layer for flavor and for keeping the moisture in.
          Person removing fat from lamb.
        • Flip the meat back to the inside facing up position. Cover the meat with plastic wrap.
          Person evening out the meat and spreading it with the seasoning.
        • Using a meat mallet, gently pound the meat to create an even thickness of about 1-inch, focusing on the thicker areas. Remove the stretch film.
        • Spread ⅔ of the dijon-herb mixture evenly over the meat.
        • To roll the leg of lamb, begin with the right bottom part of the meat and roll it towards the center away from you, pulling it snug as you go. Then, take the left top side and roll it towards you, meeting the first roll in the middle. It should have a uniform cylinder shape. Tuck the ends inside the roll as much as you can.
          Person rolling the lamb and then it is tied.
        • Using kitchen twine, secure the roast by tying loops around it at roughly 1 ½ inch intervals, ideally starting from the center and working towards both ends. You’ll likely need about 8-9 loops to keep everything in place.
        • Using a pairing knife, cut 14-16 1-inch slits evenly around the exterior of the lamb and insert the leftover four sliced garlic into each cut as evenly as you can.
          Person inserting garlic into the meat and spreading it with the rest of the seasoning.
        • Spread the rest of the dijon-herb mixture over the meat, ensuring that all sides are evenly coated.
        • Transfer the meat onto the prepared baking sheet.
        • Bake for 15 minutes in the preheated 425 degrees F oven and then turn the heat down to 350 degrees and bake until the internal temperature of the meat reaches 125-130 degrees F for medium-rare when a thermometer is inserted in the middle of the roast. This takes about 40-45 minutes* (a total of 1 hour in the oven).
        • When the leg of lamb is finished roasting, remove it from the oven, tent it with foil, and let it rest for 10-15 minutes. As the lamb rests, the internal temperature will increase by 5 to 10 degrees, thanks to the residual heat.
        • Transfer the roast onto a cutting board, remove the twine, and slice it into about 1-inch thick slices, depending on your preference.
          Finished dish from the top view.
        • Transfer onto a plate and serve it with your favorite sauce.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 10-12 slices (as shown in pictures), which is ideal for serving 6 adults (~2 slices per person and about ¾ lb per serving).
        • *Use a thermometer: As it is with any large cut of meat like this, the best way to check doneness is by using a probe thermometer or an instant-read thermometer. If you have a probe thermometer, you can insert it into the meat before placing it in the oven and set it to your desired temperature. Alternatively, you can use a meat thermometer to check doneness.
        • Make ahead: You can season, roll, and tie the lamb a day in advance and store it in the fridge in an airtight container. Be sure to remove it from the refrigerator a couple of hours before roasting.
        • Storage and reheating: Bring leftover lamb to room temperature, transfer to an airtight container, and store in the fridge for up to 4 days. Warm them up in a low heat (300 F) oven for 10 minutes or until warmed.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 363kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 50g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.002g | Cholesterol: 152mg | Sodium: 1428mg | Potassium: 753mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 244IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 41mg | Iron: 5mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-boneless-leg-of-lamb/feed/ 2
        Asparagus Salad Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/asparagus-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/asparagus-salad/#comments Tue, 04 Mar 2025 23:34:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=36068 For many of us home cooks, spotting fresh asparagus at the store is the first sign that spring has finally…]]>

        For many of us home cooks, spotting fresh asparagus at the store is the first sign that spring has finally arrived. After months of cold and hearty winter meals, those vibrant green spears feel like a promise of warmer days ahead.

        And with asparagus in season, I’m always looking for new ways to enjoy it. This simple asparagus salad is one of my go-to recipes—it’s fresh, easy to make, and perfect for meal prep. And if you’re looking for more salad recipes with asparagus, my Butter Lettuce Salad is another great option to try.

        Asparagus Salad with Feta, Tomatoes and fresh basil in a large salad bowl from the top view.

        Key Ingredients and Substitutions:

        This simple asparagus salad is packed with everyday ingredients that come together to create a refreshing and satisfying dish. The good news, you ask? You can easily customize it to your taste or use what you have on hand. Below is what you’ll need, along with ingredient substitutions, so you can make it your own with what you have on hand.

        Ingredients for the recipe are laid out
        • Fresh asparagus: During asparagus season, you’ll often find different varieties at the store—thin or thick, and sometimes even in shades of green, purple, or white, depending on where you live. Any of these will work beautifully in this recipe! Just be sure to trim off the tough woody ends for the best texture. And if you’re not using them the same day you buy them, don’t worry—I’ve written a whole guide on how to store asparagus to keep it fresh for longer.
        • Tomatoes: I opted for cherry tomatoes that I sliced in half but you can use any tomatoes you have on hand. Just slice them in bite sized pieces.
        • Radishes: I love adding thinly sliced radishes for a pop of color and crunch.
        • Olives: Use any olive you have on hand. Kalamata olives, Castelvestrano olives, or green olives would all work. Not a fan of olives? Omit them. It will still be delicious.
        • Onions: I prefer the mild flavor of scallions but a thinly sliced red onion would also work.
        • Cheese: Adding cheese is optional. I opted for feta cheese for a Mediterranean flair, but parmesan cheese, goat cheese, and shredded mozzarella would also work. And if you need a dairy-free salad, omit cheese altogether.
        • Fresh herbs: The combination of fresh basil and asparagus is terrific, but fresh mint, dill, and parsley would also work beautifully in this fresh asparagus salad recipe.
        • The dressing: My go-to asparagus salad dressing is my homemade lemon vinaigrette. However, you can also use my avocado salad dressing, lemon balsamic vinaigrette in this asparagus salad recipe. Or you can also try my Maple Dijon Vinaigrette for more of a sweet and tangy salad.

        Optional Add-ins:

        What I love most about this spring asparagus salad is that you can keep it simple or jazz it up with these optional add-ins to make it your own. Here are a few ideas:

        • Add nuts: You can easily add in some crunch and extra protein by adding a handful of pecans, walnuts, or pine nuts.
        • Spring mix or Butter Lettuce: If you’d like to turn this into more of a green asparagus salad, toss in a handful of spring mix or butter lettuce leaves for extra freshness and texture.
        • Peas: A handful of blanched peas make a great addition to this salad. They add a subtle sweetness and a pop of color, making the dish even more vibrant and seasonal.

        How To Cook Asparagus for A Salad?

        Asparagus is one of those wonderfully versatile vegetables that can be enjoyed in so many ways, no matter the season.

        However, if you’re making this salad during peak asparagus season and have access to freshly picked spears, you can even serve them raw following this recipe.

        Raw asparagus salad offers a satisfying, crisp, and refreshing bite that is truly a treat.

        However, I also encourage you to try other methods of cooking asparagus for this salad recipe. Whether you prefer oven baked asparagus, air fryer asparagus, steamed asparagus, or pan sautéed asparagus, this vibrant spring vegetable always makes for a quick and delicious addition to any salad recipe, and this one is no exception.

        How To Make Asparagus Salad?

        There’s something so satisfying about creating a beautiful salad with fresh, seasonal ingredients. And this asparagus salad is just that—a simple yet flavorful dish that highlights the best of spring. Here are the easy steps to follow:

        Person cooking asparagus for salad in a baking sheet
        1. Cook the asparagus: As mentioned earlier, if you’re making this salad during the asparagus season, you can serve it raw for a crisp, fresh bite. However, I personally love roasting it—drizzling the spears with olive oil, seasoning with salt and pepper, and letting the heat bring out their natural sweetness. The slightly smoky, caramelized flavors are just so delicious and addictive.
          Alternatively, you can blanch the asparagus for a few seconds to keep it tender-crisp while maintaining its vibrant green color. The instructions below are for medium size asparagus. For thick asparagus, I recommend increasing the cooking time by 1-2 minutes.
        Person making lemon vinaigrette from the top view
        1. Make the lemon vinaigrette: I make a batch of this dressing during the weekend and keep it in a jar in the fridge. To make it, whisk together extra-virgin olive oil, fresh lemon juice, garlic, dijon mustard, salt, and pepper in a small mixing bowl until emulsified.
        Cold asparagus salad with all ingredients placed in a salad bowl top view
        1. Assemble the salad: Once you have your asparagus ready, all you have to do is to chop the rest of the ingredients. Then, go ahead and place chopped asparagus, cherry tomatoes, sliced radishes, chopped green onion, and kalamata olives in a large bowl and drizzle it with the lemon vinaigrette. Grab two large spoons or tongs and give it a gentle toss, making sure that all the veggies are coated with the dressing.
        2. Garnish and Serve: If preferred, top your asparagus salad with feta cheese and a handful of freshly torn basil leaves. Serve immediately or cover with stretch film and refrigerate.
        Cold asparagus salad recipe placed in a bowl with lemon dressing on the side

        How To Store Leftovers & Make Ahead Instructions

        One of the great things about using asparagus in salad is that it holds up well, even after a day or two in the fridge. Whether you’re making it ahead for meal prep or saving leftovers, here’s how to keep it fresh and delicious.

        • To Store Leftovers: The best part about this spring asparagus salad is that it holds up well. Store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
        • To make it ahead of time: If you want to make this salad in advance, I recommend preparing and storing all the vegetables in a bowl and then adding the lemon vinaigrette, feta cheese, and basil leaves at the very end, right before serving.

        Serving Suggestions:

        While this asparagus salad with lemon vinaigrette is perfect when served by itself, you can turn it into a whole meal with other recipes like:

        Expert Tips

        • Trim the woody ends: Asparagus spears have tough, fibrous ends that aren’t pleasant to eat. Be sure to snap or trim them off using a sharp knife before cooking.
        • Skip the frozen asparagus: While you can use thawed asparagus, it won’t have the same crisp, fresh bite that makes this salad so delicious. Fresh asparagus is best for both texture and flavor.
        • Serve it warm or cold – This salad is delicious both ways! Serve it warm right after roasting the asparagus for a cozy side dish, or let it chill in the fridge for a refreshing, make-ahead option.
        • Use good quality ingredients: Since this salad is made with just a few simple ingredients, each one really shines. Opt for fresh, in-season asparagus, juicy cherry tomatoes, and good-quality olive oil for the best flavor.

        You Might Also Like:

        If fresh veggie-packed salads are your jam, here are a few more you might like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this Asparagus Salad recipe, please take a minute to give it a star rating and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Asparagus salad in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Asparagus Salad Recipe

        A simple Asparagus Salad drizzled with homemade lemon vinaigrette and topped with feta, tomatoes, and olives. Light, crunchy, and perfect as a side dish, light lunch, or meal prep option. Gluten-free and vegetarian.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 12 minutes
        Total Time 17 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 229kcal

        Ingredients

        To roast the asparagus:

        • 1 bunch asparagus spears rinsed and the woody ends cut
        • 2 teaspoons vegetable oil
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        For the lemon vinaigrette:

        • ¼ cup olive oil
        • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
        • 1 clove garlic minced
        • 1/2 teaspoon dijon mustard
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon black pepper

        For the salad:

        • 1 cup cherry tomatoes sliced
        • ½ cup radishes thinly sliced
        • 3 scallions stalks – chopped
        • ½ cup kalamata olives optional
        • ½ cup feta cheese cut into cubes or crumbled or grated parmesan cheese (optional)
        • ½ cup basil leaves loosely packed and torn (optional)

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 425 degrees F. Place asparagus on a sheet pan in one layer. Drizzle with oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Give it a toss, making sure that all the spears are coated with the oil and seasoning.
        • Roast for 12 minutes or until the asparagus is cooked*. Transfer onto a plate and let asparagus cool. When cooled, cut the asparagus into 2-inch pieces. Place into a salad bowl.
        • While the asparagus is roasting make the lemon vinaigrette by mixing together 1/4 cup olive oil, 3 tablespoons of lemon juice, 1 clove of minced garlic, 1/2 teaspoon of dijon mustard, 1 teaspoon of kosher salt, and 1/2 teaspoon of black pepper.
        • To assemble the asparagus salad: Place tomatoes, radishes, scallions, olive into the bowl with the asparagus. Drizzle with the dressing.
        • Stir in the feta cheese (if using) and basil leaves. Give it a gentle toss. Serve.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 4 cups (loosely packed) salads that serves four adults as a side dish. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply the recipe. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Raw asparagus: During the spring, when asparagus is in season, you can use raw asparagus to make this salad, especially if you can get your hands on freshly picked asparagus. Some people like to shave it (using a vegetable peeler), which will work, but I also like to cut it into bite-size pieces for a fresh and crispy spring salad.
        • Blanched Asparagus: Alternatively, you can blanch asparagus to make this recipe. To do so, bring a pot of salted water to a boil. Add the asparagus spears and cook them for 4-5 minutes or until fork tender. Meanwhile, prepare the ice bath by placing some ice cubes and cold tap water in a bowl. Remove the asparagus using a slotted spoon and place it in the bowl of ice water (to stop the cooking process). Drain and cut it into smaller pieces.
        • How To Store Leftovers? The best part about this spring asparagus salad that it holds up well. Store it in an airing container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
        • Instructions to Make It Ahead: If you want to make this salad in advance, I recommend preparing and storing all the vegetables in a bowl and then adding the lemon vinaigrette, feta cheese, and basil leaves at the very end right before serving.
         

        Nutrition

        Calories: 229kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 1363mg | Potassium: 172mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 606IU | Vitamin C: 18mg | Calcium: 121mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/asparagus-salad/feed/ 13
        Quinoa Tabbouleh https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/ https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/#comments Sat, 01 Mar 2025 12:47:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20389 Growing up in a Mediterranean country, tabbouleh, or kisir, was a staple in our house. It was my mom’s go-to spring…]]>

        Growing up in a Mediterranean country, tabbouleh, or kisir, was a staple in our house. It was my mom’s go-to spring and summer salad, which she paired with pretty much everything. 

        This version, made with protein-rich quinoa (a fantastic substitute for bulgur), is the latest addition to my Quinoa Salad recipes collection, and it’s just as delicious as the traditional recipe. If you love quinoa as much as I do, be sure to check out my Mediterranean Quinoa Salad for another fresh and vibrant option. 

        Quinoa tabouli being drizzled with the dressing.

        And if you’ve ever wondered about the different names and spellings—tabbouleh, tabouli—they’re simply variations of the same name, reflecting different versions of the Arabic word.

        Recipe Ingredients:

        This tabouli quinoa recipe is made with simple ingredients that make a bright and refreshing salad. The fresh herbs and crisp vegetables provide a delicious contrast to the fluffy quinoa, while the tangy lemon dressing ties everything together beautifully. You will need:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Quinoa: This quinoa tabbouleh salad will work with any type of quinoa. Red, black, tricolor and white quinoa would all work. It is imperative to rinse quinoa before cooking if you want it to taste good. 
        • Cooking liquid: While water works just fine, I highly recommend cooking your quinoa in vegetable stock. It adds depth of flavor, ensuring that the base of your quinoa tabouli salad is tasty right from the start.
        • Fresh lemon juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice is my favorite acid for the dressing used in this recipe, but in a pinch, white wine vinegar can be used. The flavors would be slightly different but still be great.
        • Extra Virgin Olive Oil
        • Fresh herbs: A mix of fresh herbs is key to classic tabouli, and this quinoa version is no exception. I like to use a cup of fresh flat-leaf parsley, a cup of fresh dill, and half a cup of fresh mint leaves, but there’s no strict rule—adjust to your taste! You can stick to just parsley and dill or skip the dill altogether if it’s not your favorite.
        • Fresh tomatoes: I prefer using colorful cherry tomatoes for their sweetness and vibrant look, but any variety will work—just be sure to chop them into small pieces for even distribution.
        • Cucumber: I prefer Persian cucumbers as they are crunchy, but English cucumbers would also work.
        • Scallions: Green onions provide a mild onion flavor that ties everything together. While it is not traditional, finely chopped red onion could be a good substitute in a pinch. 
        • Seasonings: I kept it simple with just kosher salt and pepper in this tabbouleh quinoa salad recipe, but you can add a touch of ground cumin, ground coriander, or a pinch of red pepper flakes to the dressing for extra depth of flavor.

        Optional Add-Ins

        While the recipe for quinoa tabouli I’m sharing stays close to the traditional version, you can easily customize it with a few extra ingredients. These aren’t traditional, but they add delicious new flavors:

        • Feta Cheese: A handful of crumbled feta adds a creamy, salty contrast that pairs perfectly with the Mediterranean flavors.
        • Kalamata Olives: Their briny, tangy taste enhances the salad and adds an extra punch of flavor.
        • Garlic: The traditional tabbouleh salad recipe does not use garlic in the lemon dressing, but you can always add a minced garlic clove if you are a fan.
        • Chickpeas: Again, the classic tabbouleh recipe does not use chickpeas, but sometimes I add a can of (drained and rinsed) chickpeas to make it even more satisfying.

        How To Make Quinoa Tabbouleh?

        Making this quinoa tabouli recipe is easy, and it comes together in just a few steps in under 20 minutes. Yes, there is a bit of chopping involved, but the result is a refreshing and wholesome dish that you’ll want to make on repeat.

        A collage of images showing how to cook quinoa and make the dressing.
        1. Cook the Quinoa: Place the rinsed quinoa in a medium saucepan along with your cooking liquid and salt. Bring to a boil, reduce to a simmer, cover, and cook for about 10-12 minutes until the liquid is absorbed. Let it rest for 10 minutes, then fluff with a fork and transfer it to a large bowl to cool.
        2. Make the Dressing: While the quinoa is cooking, prepare the dressing. In a small bowl, whisk lemon juice, olive oil, salt, and black pepper until fully combined. 
        3. Chop the fresh herbs and veggies – Finely chop the fresh parsley, dill, and mint. Quarter the cherry tomatoes, dice the cucumbers and thinly slice the scallions. Add the chopped herbs, tomatoes, cucumbers, and scallions to the cooled quinoa.
        Tabbouleh with quinoa in a salad bowl.
        1. Assemble your tabouli quinoa salad – Drizzle the cooked quinoa and the veggies with the dressing and gently toss to combine.
        2. Serve – Taste for seasoning and add more salt, pepper, or lemon juice as needed. Serve immediately or refrigerate for later.

        How To Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

        My favorite thing about this quinoa tabbouleh salad recipe is that it stores well. As a matter of fact, since the flavors meld together over time, it actually tastes even better the next day. Here is how I make-ahead and store leftovers:

        • Make Ahead: If preparing in advance, cook and cool the quinoa, chop the veggies, and make the dressing a day or two in advance. Store them separately in airtight containers in the fridge. Toss everything together about an hour before serving for the best texture and flavor.
        • Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Before serving, give it a quick stir, taste for seasoning, and refresh it with a squeeze of lemon and more seasoning if needed.
        • Freezing: You can technically freeze this dish, but I do not recommend it as it will lose most of its fresh flavors when thawed.

        Expert Tips:

        This recipe is simple and easy to make, but to ensure the best quinoa tabbouleh, here are a few key tips to help you get it right on your first try:

        • Chopping by hand vs. using a food processor: I like to chop the herbs by hand using a sharp chef’s knife as it gives me more control over the texture, ensuring evenly chopped herbs. Plus, there is no risk of over-processing, which can turn herbs into a paste. However, if you prefer a food processor, pulse in short bursts instead of running it continuously to prevent the herbs from turning into a paste.
        • Herb stems: When it comes to herbs, you can chop the parsley and dill stems, as they are tender and flavorful. However, with mint, I prefer using only the leaves unless you’re growing your own and it’s super fresh.
        • Are you short on time? You can prep the herbs and veggies a day in advance and store them in the fridge until you’re ready to put it all together.
        • Let the quinoa cool a bit: You can mix everything together while the quinoa is still warm for a slightly different texture and flavor, but letting it cool first helps keep the herbs fresh and vibrant. I usually cook the quinoa a day in advance—not only does this save time, but it also ensures it’s perfectly cooled and ready to use.
        • Cooking quinoa: While I opted to cook quinoa on the stovetop, you can cook quinoa in the microwave, in an instant pot, and a rice cooker. Feel free to pick the method that works best for you. Also, I usually cook a big batch and freeze some for later. If you have some cooked quinoa on hand, this quinoa tabbouleh comes together in minutes.
        • Serve at room temperature: This tabouli recipe with quinoa tastes best when served at room temperature, allowing the flavors to fully develop. If you made it in advance, take it out of the fridge 15 minutes before serving for the best taste and texture.

        Serving Suggestions:

        You can serve this gluten-free tabbouleh salad with any protein or vegetarian main or just by itself for a light meal. Below are a few of my favorite pairings:

        Other Quinoa Salads You Might Also Like

        If you make this recipe for tabbouleh salad with quinoa, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to leave a star rating and a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        This recipe was originally published in September 2018 and updated in March 2025 with new step-by-step photos and more helpful tips. The recipe itself remains the same, with only minor edits for clarification.

        Quinoa tabbouleh in a salad bowl with a spoon on the side.
        Print

        Quinoa Tabbouleh Recipe

        Traditional Mediterranean Tabbouleh Salad made with a twist. Made with protein-rich quinoa, this vegan and gluten-free Quinoa Tabbouleh Salad Recipe is the perfect year-round salad for all your indoor and outdoor parties.
        Course Side Dish – Salad
        Cuisine Mediterranean, Turkish
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 27 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 205kcal

        Ingredients

        For the Quinoa:

        • 1 cup uncooked quinoa rinsed
        • 1 ¾ cups water or vegetable stock
        • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

        For The Dressing:

        • 4 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed – plus more to taste
        • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt more to taste as needed
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        For the Tabbouleh:

        • 1 cup fresh parsley chopped
        • 1 cup fresh dill chopped (optional)
        • ½ cup fresh mint leaves chopped
        • 1 cup cherry tomatoes quartered
        • 2 Persian cucumbers peeled and chopped or 1 English cucumber
        • 3-4 scallions sliced thinly both white and green parts

        Instructions

        • Place 1 cup quinoa in a saucepan along with 1 ¾ cups of vegetable stock (or water) and a half teaspoon of kosher salt. Stir to combine, put the lid on, and bring it to a boil over medium-high heat.
          Person showing how to cook quinoa.
        • Once it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to low and cook for 10-12 minutes or until water is fully absorbed. Turn the heat off and let it rest for 10 minutes. Fluff it with a fork, transfer it to a large salad bowl, and let it cool while working on the rest of the ingredients.
        • Meanwhile, prepare the dressing by whisking together 4 tablespoons of freshly squeezed lemon juice, ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil, ½ teaspoon kosher salt, and ¼ teaspoon black pepper in a bowl. Set it aside.
          A collage of images showing how to make the dressing and prep the ingredients.
        • To assemble the quinoa tabbouleh, add 1 cup of chopped parsley, 1 cup of fresh dill, ½ cup fresh mint, 1 cup of quartered cherry tomatoes, 2 chopped Persian cucumbers, 3 thinly sliced green onions into the bowl with the quinoa.
        • Drizzle it with the dressing. Give it a gentle toss.
          A bowl of tabouli with quinoa is being drizzled with the dressing.
        • Taste for seasoning and serve immediately.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 5 to 6 cups of tabbouleh, ideal for serving six adults as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Using dill: Most tabouli recipes are made with fresh parsley and mint, but my mom always added fresh dill, so I followed in her footsteps. If you are not a fan, you can omit using dill (and use more parsley or mint instead.)
        • A quick note on chopping herbs: Traditional tabbouleh is made with finely chopped herbs for a light, delicate texture, but if you prefer a rougher chop, that works too! It all comes down to personal preference.
        • Make Ahead: If preparing in advance, cook and cool the quinoa, chop the veggies, and make the dressing a day or two in advance. Store them separately in airtight containers in the fridge. Toss everything together about an hour before serving for the best texture and flavor.
        • Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Before serving, taste for seasoning and add more lemon juice and salt and pepper if needed. 

        Nutrition

        Calories: 205kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Sodium: 408mg | Potassium: 404mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 1812IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 66mg | Iron: 3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/feed/ 22
        Chicken Shawarma Bowl https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-shawarma-bowl/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-shawarma-bowl/#comments Tue, 25 Feb 2025 22:15:45 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80344 During the week, all-in-one dinner bowls like this and my  DIY CAVA bowl are a satisfying, time-saving option. With a…]]>

        During the week, all-in-one dinner bowls like this and my  DIY CAVA bowl are a satisfying, time-saving option. With a little bit of advanced preparation, you can turn this popular street food (typically served with pita bread) into a hearty shawarma rice bowl perfect for a quick weeknight dinner. If chicken isn’t your preference, you can also make this shawarma bowl recipe with my classic Beef Shawarma.

        Chicken shawarma bowl served with rice and toppings from the top view.

        Ingredients You’ll Need

        This is a wonderful recipe to make with leftover chicken shawarma, and it comes together very quickly if you have leftovers. Otherwise, you can make your chicken shawarma meal from scratch. You can find all of the ingredients at your everyday grocery store—no specialty shopping is required.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.
        • For The Marinade
          • Chicken: I used boneless skinless chicken thighs in this deconstructed chicken shawarma, which gives the best flavor and texture. But if you’d prefer to swap in chicken breasts, they will also work well. 
          • Kosher salt
          • Shawarma seasoning: My homemade spice blend, made with flavorful spices like ground cumin, paprika, turmeric, coriander, cardamom, and cinnamon, is easy to make and great to have on hand. But if you’d prefer to buy a ready-made jar, here’s my favorite one (affiliate link). 
          • Lemon juice
          • Extra Virgin Olive oil 
          • Garlic: I prefer fresh garlic cloves for the most impact but garlic powder could be used for a milder garlic flavor.
        • For The Rice
          • Water or Stock: While water is sufficient, using either vegetable stock or chicken broth when cooking your rice will give it more flavor.
          • Unsalted butter: I prefer unsalted butter so that I can adjust the salt but if all you have is salted butter, omit the additional Kosher salt. Alternatively, you can also use olive oil to cook your rice,
          • Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper
          • Rice: For my chicken shawarma rice bowl recipe, I used long-grain white rice. While I know it is controversial, I prefer to rinse my rice before cooking it.
        • Toppings For The Bowls
          • Cherry tomatoes: Look for fresh, crisp cherry tomatoes and cut them into quarters. Regular or grape tomatoes will also work if that’s what you have available.
          • English cucumber: Persian cucumbers are also an option. 
          • Curly salad greens: These can be one type of lettuce or a blend of various kinds. The key here is that you want a more delicate, curly leaf to slice thinly for texture in your shawarma chicken bowl.
          • Dill pickles: You can purchase these at the store, or pickle your own in advance. The zesty crunch these pickles provide makes them one of the chicken shawarma toppings you don’t want to skip!
          • Pickled red onions: If you’d like to make your own, here’s my pickled red onions recipe. Storebought is also ok to use. 
          • Tzatziki: While you can find many tzatziki options at the grocery store, making your own tzatziki using plain Greek yogurt, cucumbers, and fresh lemon juice is easy and extra tasty. 
          • Hummus: This is an optional ingredient that adds some creaminess to your chicken shawarma bowls. Again, you can select any version at the store, or you can make my Mediterranean Hummus in advance. 
          • Lemon: A couple of lemon wedges, served on the side, are optional for a touch of brightness as a finisher. 

        Ingredient Substitutions

        One of the best parts about this chicken shawarma rice bowl recipe is that it is endlessly customizable. There are so many different varieties that you can make, depending on which ingredients you have on hand or simply prefer. Here are some common substitutions you can use:

        How to Make Chicken Shawarma Bowls?

        Chicken shawarma over rice is a straightforward recipe that anyone can make. With a little advanced prep, you can even throw your shawarma bowls together quickly on a busy weeknight for a quick and easy dinner. 

        A collage of image showing how to prepare chicken shawarma with rice.
        1. Prepare your chicken. Pat 1 ½ pounds of chicken thighs dry with paper towels and season them with 1 ½ teaspoon of kosher salt on both sides. Transfer them to a large bowl.
        2. Season your chicken and allow time to marinate. Add 2 tablespoons of shawarma seasoning, ¼ cup of lemon juice, ¼ cup of olive oil, and 2 cloves of fresh minced garlic to the bowl with your chicken in it. Mix it all together using kitchen tongs to coat the chicken with the marinade. Cover the chicken with stretch film and marinate it in the refrigerator for an hour or overnight.
        3. Cook your marinated chicken shawarma. Preheat the oven to 425 degrees F. Arrange the marinated chicken on the sheet pan and place it on the middle rack. Bake for 18-20 minutes or until the internal temperature of a chicken thigh registers 165 degrees F. If you prefer your chicken shawarma to be on the browned side, move the sheet pan to the top rack and broil for 2-3 minutes more, while watching it closely to prevent burning.
        4. Prepare your chicken shawarma for your bowls. Let the chicken rest for 5 minutes, then slice it into ½ inch strips (or you can cut it into cubes as well.)
        A collage of photos showing how to make rice and assemble the bowl.
        1. Cook the rice. While the chicken is cooking, cook the rice. In a medium saucepan, add 2 cups of water (or stock), 1 tablespoon of unsalted butter, and 1 teaspoon of kosher salt. Bring to a boil over medium-high heat, then add the rinsed rice, reduce the heat down to low, cover, and cook until rice is tender, about 15-17 minutes. Remove from the heat and let it rest for 10 minutes (do not remove the lid); right before serving, fluff it with a fork.
        2. Assemble your chicken shawarma bowls. To assemble the shawarma chicken and rice, divide the rice among four bowls. Top it off with sliced shawarma chicken, a handful of cherry tomatoes, sliced cucumbers, salad greens, pickled cucumbers, pickled red onions, and a generous dollop of hummus and tzatziki.

        How to Meal Prep & Store Leftovers?

        My chicken shawarma bowls recipe can be adapted for your weekly meal prep routine. Here are a few simple instructions to ensure the optimal result: 

        • Meal Prep: How you prepare your shawarma meal in advance depends on how you prefer to eat it. Do you plan to enjoy it hot, or do you not mind eating it cold/at room temperature? 
          If you’d like to eat your chicken rice shawarma hot, then I recommend you store your rice and chicken together, keeping the rest of the toppings separate. This way, when you go to reheat your bowls, you can heat only the shawarma chicken and rice, then add the toppings afterward. If you don’t mind eating your chicken shawarma bowls cold or at room temperature, feel free to store everything together when you meal prep your bowls. 
        • Storing Leftovers: The same instructions as above apply here with any leftovers you have. Store the rice and chicken together separately from the toppings if you plan to eat it again hot. As long as they are kept in an airtight container in the fridge, they should be fresh for up to 3 days.
        • Reheating: You can reheat rice and chicken in a low-heat oven (around 300 degrees F) and then add the toppings right before serving.
        Chicken Shawarma Rice Bowls with fresh lemon slices on the side.

        Expert Tips

        When it comes to all of the chicken shawarma bowl recipes you’ll find, this one is achievable and foolproof. Here are a couple extra tips that I have for you to ensure a seamless preparation experience in your own kitchen:

        • Feel free to cook your chicken in the manner you prefer. While the recipe below instructs you to cook your chicken thighs on a sheet pan in the oven, they will also come out just as delicious if you choose to grill them on a barbeque, or if you choose to use a cast iron skillet on the stovetop. You can find the details of each method in our chicken shawarma recipe.
        • Marinating your chicken will result in the best flavor. My mom always marinated our chicken shawarma overnight, allowing the spices to fully infuse the meat. This extra time helps the flavors develop and makes the chicken even more tender. However, if you’re short on time, you can cook it right away—shawarma seasoning is already packed with bold, aromatic flavors that will still shine through.
        • Short on time? Take the Trader Joe’s shortcut. If you live in the US and have access to Trader Joe’s, here’s a hot tip: The packaged chicken shawarma they sell at Trader Joe’s is fantastic and takes about 20 minutes to cook in the oven. It is a fantastic shortcut to make this shawarma chicken bowl in less than 30 minutes for a quick weeknight dinner. 
        • Make it lighter. If you want to cut down on calories, you can skip the rice and assemble your shawarma bowls over a bed of lettuce or cauliflower rice (for a low-carb and keto friendly option) instead. Additionally, you can add other veggies like thinly sliced red bell peppers, cucumbers, and radishes. 
        • Serve it as a part of a larger meal. While this recipe is a complete meal on its own, you can easily turn it into a feast by pairing it with chicken shawarma sides like warm pita bread, baba ganoush, muhammara, or a fresh cucumber and tomato salad.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make this Healthy Chicken Shawarma Bowls recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Chicken shawarma bowl garnished with pickled red onions from the top view.
        Print

        Chicken Shawarma Bowl Recipe

        If you’re wondering how to eat chicken shawarma beyond the usual pita, this versatile grain bowl is the answer. Meal prep-friendly and easy to customize, this chicken shawarma and rice recipe transforms a classic shawarma plate into a hearty rice bowl with all the authentic Middle Eastern toppings like tzatziki sauce, hummus, and pickled red onions.
        Course Lunch, Dinner
        Cuisine Mediterranean, Middle Eastern
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 20 minutes
        Cook Time 20 minutes
        Marinading Time 1 hour
        Total Time 1 hour 40 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 747kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Marinade:

        • 1 ½ lbs. Boneless skinless chicken thighs or chicken breasts
        • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt
        • 2 tablespoons shawarma seasoning
        • ¼ cup lemon juice
        • ¼ cup olive oil
        • 2 cloves garlic minced

        For The Rice:

        • 2 cups vegetable stock or water or chicken stock
        • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter or olive oil
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • 1 cup long-grain white rice rinsed and drained

        For The Bowls:

        • 1 ½ cups cherry tomatoes quartered
        • 1 English cucumber cut into small pieces, or 3 Persian cucumbers
        • 1 ½ cup curly salad greens rinsed and sliced thinly (or any other salad greens)
        • ½ cup pickled cucumber sliced (aka dill pickles)
        • ½ cup pickled red onions
        • 1 cup tzatziki sauce or yogurt tahini sauce
        • 1 cup hummus optional
        • 4 wedges of a lemon

        Instructions

        • Pat dry 1 ½ pounds of chicken thighs with paper towels and season with 1 ½ teaspoon of kosher salt on both sides. Transfer them to a large bowl.
          Person preparing chicken for the chicken shawarma rice bowl recipe.
        • Add 2 tablespoons of shawarma seasoning, ¼ cup of lemon juice, ¼ cup of olive oil, and 2 cloves of fresh minced garlic. Mix well using kitchen tongs to coat the chicken with the marinade. Cover the chicken with stretch film and marinate it in the refrigerator for an hour or overnight.
        • Preheat the oven to 425 degrees F. (218 degrees F.).
        • Arrange the marinated chicken on the baking sheet on a single layer and place it on the middle rack. Bake for 18-20 minutes or until a meat thermometer inserted into the thickest part of a chicken registers 165 degrees F. If you prefer your chicken shawarma to be on the browned side, move the sheet pan to the top rack and broil for 2-3 minutes (while watching it closely).
          Chicken shawarma before and after it is cooked.
        • Let the chicken rest for 5 minutes, then slice it into ½ inch strips (or you can cut it into cubes as well).
        • While the chicken is cooking, cook the rice. Into a medium saucepan, add 2 cups of water (or stock), 1 tablespoon of unsalted butter, and 1 teaspoon of kosher salt. Bring to a boil over medium-high heat. Add the rinsed rice, reduce the heat down to low, cover, and cook until rice is tender, about 15-17 minutes. Remove from the heat and let it rest for 10 minutes (do not remove the lid); right before serving, fluff it with a fork and season with black pepper.
          A collage of images showing cooking the rice and the assembled chicken shawarma bowl.
        • To assemble the chicken shawarma bowls, divide the rice among four bowls. Top it off with sliced shawarma chicken, a handful of cherry tomatoes, sliced cucumbers, salad greens, pickled cucumbers, pickled red onions, and a generous dollop of hummus and tzatziki.
        • Serve right away.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes four adult servings of chicken shawarma bowls. The nutrition values below include optional toppings like hummus and tzatziki.
        • Meal prep: If preferred, you can assemble it in airtight meal prep containers. If you go in that direction, I recommend storing cooked chicken and rice together and adding the toppings right before serving the most fresh shawarma rice bowls. 
        • Storing: Bring leftovers to room temperature, place in an airtight container and keep in the fridge for upto 3 days.
        • Marinading: The one-hour (or overnight) marinading is optional. If you are short on time, you can cook chicken right away.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 747kcal | Carbohydrates: 60g | Protein: 44g | Fat: 38g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 179mg | Sodium: 2615mg | Potassium: 896mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 948IU | Vitamin C: 23mg | Calcium: 159mg | Iron: 4mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-shawarma-bowl/feed/ 2
        Chicken Orzo Soup https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-orzo-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-orzo-soup/#respond Mon, 17 Feb 2025 14:54:50 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80259 Ingredients for Lemony Chicken Orzo Soup This easy soup recipe comes together with a few basic ingredients you probably already…]]>

        How This Recipe Fixes the 2 Most Common Orzo Soup Mistakes

        Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

        Growing up in the Mediterranean, “Chicken Noodle Soup” wasn’t really a dish I knew much about. Instead, my mother made this Chicken Orzo Soup every time I felt under the weather.

        The good news? It isn’t much different from a classic American chicken noodle soup in method or taste. However, it features a much brighter, lemony broth, a hallmark of Mediterranean cooking. But because the ingredients are similar, the issues you run into are also the same:

        • The “Mushy Pasta” Issue: If you’ve ever ended up with a pot of bloated pasta (orzo in this case) that “drank” all your broth, you know the frustration.
        • Dry, Rubbery Chicken: This happens when the meat is boiled for far too long.

        After years of watching my mom and refining this recipe in my own kitchen, I’ve learned two non-negotiables for success:

        1. The Timing: Add the orzo towards the end of the cooking process. This prevents the pasta from overcooking and becoming giant and mushy. And no, you do not need to cook the orzo separately before adding it to the soup.
        2. A gentle simmer: Maintain a gentle simmer and cook the chicken only until it registers 165°F on a meat thermometer.

        One final note: While many consider this a “Greek” soup, do not confuse it with Avgolemono. Traditional Avgolemono soup is thickened with an egg-lemon sauce. My version here is lighter, finished with plenty of fresh lemon juice and a handful of fresh herbs.

        Ingredients for Lemony Chicken Orzo Soup

        This easy soup recipe comes together with a few basic ingredients you probably already have on hand.

        While the complete list of ingredients is in the recipe card below, here are a few notes from making this recipe over the years:

        Ingredients for chicken orzo recipe soup, including chicken, orzo, carrots, celery, onion, garlic, lemon, olive oil, chicken broth, and herbs.

        Chicken: I used boneless, skinless chicken thighs in this soup because I find dark meat more flavorful than white meat. Plus, I find that it stays moist even after it is poached in hot broth. That said, boneless and skinless chicken breasts are also a great option if you prefer a leaner cut. 

        Orzo pasta: Any brand of dried orzo pasta will work for this recipe. There is no need to cook it ahead of time, as the orzo cooks directly in the broth.

        If you are not familiar with it, orzo is a small, rice-shaped pasta that looks similar to rice but cooks much more quickly, making it ideal for soups like this one.

        Chicken stock: It is no secret that Homemade chicken stock elevates any soup, and using a high-quality bone broth makes the texture slightly creamier thanks to its natural collagen.

        With that being said, if you’re short on time, store-bought chicken broth works just as well. I recommend buying a low-sodium one so you can adjust the seasoning yourself.

        Mirepoix: Yellow onion, carrots, and celery make the aromatic vegetable base of any great soup, including this chicken orzo lemon soup. 

        Fresh garlic: I used 3 cloves in this recipe, but feel free to adjust if you prefer a stronger garlic flavor. While I prefer fresh garlic, in a pinch, you can use garlic powder. It is not traditional, but it would work.

        Lemon juice: I used 4 tablespoons in this lemon chicken orzo soup, but I highly recommend keeping some extra on hand, as you may want to add more at the end after tasting.

        Fresh herbs: I used fresh parsley at the end, but if you’d like a little extra burst of Mediterranean flavor, a handful of chopped fresh dill or fresh thyme works beautifully as well.

        Seasonings: Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper are all you really need, but I like adding a teaspoon of Italian seasoning, although it’s completely optional.

        Lemon zest: This is optional, but if you enjoy a brighter lemon flavor, stir in about 1 teaspoon of freshly grated lemon zest right before serving.

        How to Make Chicken Orzo Soup? (Step-By-Step)

        With one pot and 45 minutes, anyone can make this easy soup recipe. Here is how I make it:

        Chopped carrots, celery, and onion cooking in olive oil in a large pot, followed by seasoning added to the softened vegetables.

        Step 1 – Cook your veggies: Heat the olive oil in a Dutch oven or a large soup pot (with a lid) over medium-high heat. Next, add your chopped onion, chopped carrots, and chopped celery. Cook, stirring occasionally, until the vegetables are softened but not browned, which takes about 7 to 8 minutes.

        Step 2 – Add your seasonings: Toss the minced garlic, Italian seasoning, kosher salt, and ground black pepper with the veggies. Sauté the mixture, stirring constantly, for 30 seconds, just until the garlic is fragrant.

        Cooked chicken thighs shredded with forks on a cutting board for lemon chicken orzo soup.

        Step 3 – Add in the broth: Pour in the chicken stock and lemon juice, then add the boneless, skinless chicken thighs (or breasts). Bring the soup to a boil, then reduce the heat to medium and let it simmer gently for about 15 minutes, or until the chicken is fully cooked. The chicken should register 165°F (74°C) when checked with a meat thermometer.

        Once cooked, remove the chicken from the pot and transfer it to a cutting board to rest for a couple of minutes before shredding. 

        Step 4 – Cook your orzo directly in the broth: Add the orzo into the simmering broth and cook for about 10 minutes, stirring occasionally to prevent it from sticking to the bottom of the pot.

        Step 5 – Shred the chicken: While the orzo cooks, shred the chicken with two forks, or cut it into small pieces if you prefer. Then, add it back into the pot and stir to combine.

        Pro Tip – Shred or cut? My mother would always shred the chicken, which is what I usually do. However, if it is easier to cut it into smaller cubes, that is perfectly fine. Remember, the goal here is to have some chicken with every spoonful, so cut them into bite size pieces.

        Two images side by side showing 
shredded chicken added back into simmering lemon chicken orzo soup in a large pot and served in a bowl.

        Step 6 – Season and garnish: When the orzo is fully cooked, give the soup a quick taste, and adjust the seasoning with more salt and lemon juice as needed. Add the chopped parsley, ladle into bowls, and serve right away.

        Two bowls of lemon chicken orzo soup served with crusty bread, fresh dill, sliced carrots, shredded chicken, and lemon wedges.

        Expert Tips for the Best Chicken Orzo Soup

        This chicken lemon orzo soup recipe is simple, but a few small tricks can make a big difference in the final dish. 

        Here are some tips to help you get the best results on your first try:

        Cut your veggies evenly: For the best texture and even cooking, try to chop the onion, carrots, and celery into similar-sized pieces. This way, they’ll soften at the same rate, which will give you the best base without any pieces turning mushy while others stay firm.

        Do not overcook the orzo: It cooks quickly because it is a small pasta, so timing is critical. Adding it toward the end of cooking helps keep the texture tender rather than mushy.
        However, keep in mind that cooking times may vary slightly depending on the brand you use, so following the packaging instructions is the best way to achieve al dente orzo. 

        Adjust your lemon and seasonings to taste: Lemon is a personal preference, as some people (like me!) like this homemade chicken orzo soup even more lemony. Therefore, I highly recommend tasting it before serving and adding a little more lemon juice, salt, or fresh herbs as you see fit.

        This soup will thicken as it sits: As the soup rests, the orzo continues to absorb liquid, which naturally thickens the broth. This is especially helpful to keep in mind if you are not serving it right away. When reheating, simply add a splash of water or chicken stock to loosen it back to your desired consistency.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Lemon chicken orzo soup in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Chicken Orzo Soup Recipe

        This Lemon Chicken Orzo Soup is a cozy, one-pot meal with tender chicken, orzo pasta, and a bright, lemony broth. Easy to make in under 45 minutes, it’s the ultimate Mediterranean chicken soup recipe, perfect for busy weeknights or cold winter days!
        Course Soup
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Kosher
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 30 minutes
        Total Time 45 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 338kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 tablespoons olive oil
        • 1 medium onion chopped about 2 cups (265g.)
        • 3 medium carrots peeled and cut into small pieces about 1 cup (135 g.)
        • 2 stalks celery sliced thinly, about 1 cup (125 g.)
        • 3 cloves fresh garlic minced
        • 1 teaspoon Italian seasoning
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt more to taste
        • ½ teaspoon black pepper
        • 6 cups homemade chicken stock
        • 4 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed plus more to taste
        • 1 lb boneless skinless chicken thighs or breasts*
        • 1 cup uncooked orzo 155 g.
        • ½ cup fresh parsley and or dill, roughly chopped

        Instructions

        • Heat olive oil in a Dutch oven or a large pot with a lid over medium-high heat. Add 2 cups of chopped onion, 1 cup of chopped carrots, and 1 cup of chopped celery. Cook, stirring occasionally, until vegetables are softened, 7-8 minutes.
        • Add 3 cloves of minced garlic,1 teaspoon Italian seasoning, 1 teaspoon kosher salt and ½ teaspoon of ground black pepper. Saute, stirring constantly, for 30 seconds.
        • Add 6 cups of chicken stock, 4 tablespoons of lemon juice and 1 pound (about 4) boneless skinless chicken thighs (or 2 medium-sized chicken breasts).
        • Bring it to a boil. Once it comes to a boil, bring the heat down to medium and let it simmer for 15 minutes or until the chicken is fully cooked. Chicken should register 165 degrees F when inserted with a meat thermometer.
        • Remove the chicken and transfer to a cutting board.
        • Stir in the orzo and let it cook for 10 minutes, stirring occasionally.
        • While the orzo is cooking, shred the chicken using two forks (or you can also cut it into small bite-sized pieces.)
        • Add the now-shredded chicken back into the pot and stir to combine.
        • When the orzo is fully cooked, give it a quick taste and add more seasoning and lemon juice as needed.
        • Add ¼ cup chopped parsley, ladle into bowls, and serve.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 7-8 cups of soup ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Cooked chicken: While I used raw chicken, if you have leftover or rotisserie chicken on hand you can make this soup even faster. Simply shred it (or cut it into cubes) and then add it to the soup right before adding the orzo. 
        • Storage: Bring the leftover soup to room temperature, place it in an airtight container, and keep it in the fridge for up to 3-4 days. Reheat in a saucepan with a splash of water or broth.
        • Freezing: While you can technically freeze this soup as it is, I am not a fan of freezing pasta. If you are planning to freeze it, reserve the portion that you are planning to freeze before adding the orzo in the soup.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 338kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 79mg | Sodium: 438mg | Potassium: 671mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 5556IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 50mg | Iron: 2mg

        How to Store, Freeze, and Reheat Chicken Orzo Soup

        Preparing a large pot of soup, especially one as satisfying as this chicken and orzo soup, often means you will have leftovers to enjoy for a second or even third meal. 

        Here is how I like to store it to keep it tasting fresh.

        Storage: For any leftovers, allow your soup to cool to room temperature first. Then, store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

        Pro tip: If you know you’ll have leftovers, instead of cooking the orzo in the broth, cook it separately. This way, you won’t run into the issue of it “bloating”.

        Freezing: I honestly do not recommend freezing this soup once the orzo has been added, as pasta generally does not freeze well and tends to become soft and mushy once thawed. 

        However, if you are planning to make a large batch for meal prep, a better option is to prepare the chicken soup without the orzo, freeze the broth and chicken, and then add freshly cooked orzo when reheating.

        Reheating: Transfer the soup to a saucepan and warm it over medium heat, stirring occasionally.

        As the soup sits, the orzo will continue to absorb liquid, so it is normal for it to thicken. If needed, add a splash of water or chicken stock while reheating to thin the sauce and restore its original texture.

        Variations & Substitutions 

        There are a few simple swaps and additions you can make to adapt this easy chicken orzo soup based on what you have on hand.

        Here are a couple of ideas:

        Use leftover or rotisserie chicken: If you already have cooked chicken, such as leftover roasted chicken or rotisserie chicken, you can use it here. Simply skip cooking the raw chicken in the soup and stir the cooked, shredded chicken in toward the end, just long enough to warm it through.

        Regional Adaptations: Most people think of this soup as a Greek dish, but many countries across the Mediterranean region serve it with minor variations.

        For example, Italians add a Parmesan rind to the broth as it simmers, finish the soup with a sprinkle of grated Parmesan, and swap parsley or dill for fresh basil. 

        In Turkiye, we use a generous amount of fresh chopped dill instead of any other herb or spice.

        Add extra greens: If you like adding more vegetables to your meals, you can stir in a few handfuls of spinach or kale toward the end of cooking. The greens will wilt quickly in the soup without overpowering it.

        What to Serve with Chicken Orzo Soup

        While this easy lemon chicken orzo soup is satisfying enough to enjoy on its own, it also pairs well with:

        • A meal-worthy salad: A crisp salad is always a great contrast to a warm bowl of soup. I especially enjoy serving it with my Greek Cucumber Salad for a refreshing Mediterranean touch or my Kale Brussels Sprout Salad when I want something with a bit more substance.
        • Crusty bread: There’s nothing better than soaking up that flavorful broth with a good piece of bread. My go-to options are No Knead Artisan Bread for the classic crusty bread-and-soup pairing, or my Air Fryer Garlic Bread for an extra punch of flavor. 

        Other Mediterranean Brothy Soups

        A Turkish classic: Turkish Red Lentil Soup is another classic soup recipe from the region. Naturally vegan, this is the kind of soup you’d be served in a local restaurant in Istanbul.

        A vegan weeknight dinner: This French Lentil Soup is my go-to when I want something simple and dependable that holds up well for leftovers.

        All the Comfort, Less Work: If you love the idea of stuffed cabbage rolls but not the time commitment, this Stuffed Cabbage Soup delivers the same familiar taste in soup form.

        Chicken orzo lemon soup in a Dutch oven with a ladle, showing orzo pasta, carrots, shredded chicken, and fresh herbs in the broth.

        Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-orzo-soup/feed/ 0
        Overnight Steel Cut Oats https://foolproofliving.com/overnight-steel-cut-oats/ https://foolproofliving.com/overnight-steel-cut-oats/#comments Sun, 26 Jan 2025 18:16:27 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=21973 If you love the traditional overnight oats (made with rolled oats) but want to try making them with steel-cut oats,…]]>

        If you love the traditional overnight oats (made with rolled oats) but want to try making them with steel-cut oats, you’re in the right place! The difference between old-fashioned oats and steel cut oats lies in how they’re processed—steel-cut oats are less processed, resulting in a hearty, chewy texture. Plus, among the different types of oats, they take the longest to cook, but the payoff is a more substantial and satisfying bowl of oatmeal.

        The beauty of this steel-cut overnight oats recipe is that soaking steel cut oats overnight lets time do all the hard work for you. And once you’ve mastered this simple method, you can explore other options like our Overnight Slow Cooker Steel Cut Oats or Instant Pot Steel Cut Oats for even more convenient ways to enjoy this easy, satisfying, and healthy breakfast.

        Overnight steel cut oatmeal in a sauce pan from the top view.

        This recipe was originally published in Jan 2019. It has been updated with new information but with no changes to the original recipe in January 2025.

        Ingredients You’ll Need:

        Making overnight oats with steel cut oats requires just three basic ingredients, plus optional add-ins and toppings. Each ingredient helps create a creamy texture and flavorful base, while still leaving room for substitutions or additions. Below is what will need:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Steel Cut Oats: When shopping, be sure to choose regular steel-cut oats rather than quick-cooking varieties. Keep in mind that they’re sometimes labeled as Irish oats as well.
        • Soaking Liquid: I like to use hot boiling water to soak steel cut oats overnight, but any regular or plant-based milk (such as almond milk) would also work. 
        • Kosher salt: A touch of salt help balance the natural earthiness of the oats.

        How To Make Overnight Steel Cut Oats?

        Making this steel cut overnight oatmeal recipe is straightforward and requires minimal effort. The time spent soaking overnight softens the oats, cutting down cooking time in the morning. I usually do this right before bed so that I can wake up to steel-cut oatmeal ready to eat:

        Steps showing how to cook steel cut oatmeal overnight.
        1. Boil the water: Bring 2 cups of water (or milk) to a boil in a medium saucepan with a lid. 
        2. Add oats and salt: Turn the heat off and stir in the steel-cut oats and kosher salt. Cover the saucepan with the lid and let it sit on the counter overnight.
        3. Reheat in the morning: While you can enjoy your overnight steel oats as is, warming them up makes for a more comforting breakfast. Next morning, place the saucepan back on the stove over medium heat. Cook, stirring constantly, to prevent sticking. It should thicken in 3-5 minutes. 
        4. Add almond milk: For a creamy steel-cut oatmeal, stir half a cup of almond milk if you use water as the base. Cook, stirring constantly, until it reaches your desired consistency. Adjust the amount of milk for a thinner or thicker oatmeal to suit your taste.
        5. Serve with toppings: Divide the oats into bowls and top with your favorite fruits, nuts, or seeds. Be sure to scroll down to see my favorite topping suggestions. Alternatively, you can place them in mason jars, bring them to room temperature, and then store them in the fridge for up to 5 days for a grab-and-go breakfast.

        Serving Suggestions with Optional Add-In and Toppings Ideas

        This easy overnight Irish oats recipe is endlessly customizable, offering endless possibilities for mix-ins and toppings to keep things exciting. Here are a few ideas to make it your own:

        • Sweetener: You can use any sweetener you like. Maple syrup, honey, coconut sugar, and brown sugar would all work. A splash of vanilla extract can also enhance the natural sweetness and add a hint of warmth. You can add it when adding the liquid (and let it soak overnight) or use it as a drizzle on top right before serving.
        • Superfoods: I almost always make my overnight steel cut oats with chia seeds but you can also add ground flax seeds,  hemp seeds, pumpkin seeds, or sunflower seeds. Add any of these superfoods with the liquid or use them as a topping.
        • Nuts and nut butters: Adding a handful of nuts (like almonds, walnuts, or pecans) or a dollop of nut butter (such as peanut butter or almond butter) not only makes your overnight steel cut oatmeal more delicious but also adds a boost of protein. You can also add a handful of chunky granola
        • Fresh fruit: Any fruit—like bananas, berries, apples, or pomegranate seeds—makes a great topping. Alternatively, mix in a few tablespoons of blueberry puree to naturally sweeten your overnight steel oats recipe.
        • Yogurt: A dollap of Greek yogurt or even vanilla yogurt is a great way to add a tanginess while boosting the protein content of this overnight Irish oatmeal recipe. And if you are a fan of yogurt for breakfast, be sure to check out our Yogurt and Oats and Chia Yoghurt Pudding recipes.
        • Spices: A sprinkle of ground cinnamon, nutmeg, or cardamom adds warmth and depth of flavor to your oatmeal.
        • Savory toppings: While most people associate this recipe with sweet flavors, I like to switch things up by adding savory toppings like sautéed mushrooms, spinach, and a fried (or poached) egg. My savory steel cut oatmeal is a hearty and delicious breakfast option, using this exact recipe as the perfect base.
        • Protein powders: Add a scoop or two of protein powder to create high protein steel cut overnight oats that are perfect for a satisfying and nutritious start to your day.
        Overnight steel cut oats in a bowl topped off with fruit.

        How to Meal Prep, Store, and Reheat?

        Once you learn how to prepare steel-cut oats overnight, you’ll never run out of ideas for a satisfying breakfast. This recipe is perfect for meal prep and makes busy mornings so much easier. I usually make a big batch over the weekend and have it ready as a grab and go breakfast in the morning. Here is how I do it:

        • To Meal Prep: Bring the oatmeal to room temperature, divide it amongst mason jars, add the toppings, and seal them with the lid. Store them in the fridge for up to 5 days.
        • To Store: Place the leftovers in an airtight container (or a mason jar) and keep in the fridge. 
        • Reheat: If you prefer your steel cut oatmeal warm, warm it up in a small saucepan with a splash of water or milk over medium-low heat, stirring regularly. Alternatively, reheat it in the microwave, stopping and stirring every 15 seconds to ensure even heating. Add more water or milk as needed to adjust the consistency to your liking.

        Frequently Asked Questions

        Can I freeze overnight steel cut oats?

        You technically can, but I do not recommend it as it will be mushy when thawed. Still, if you want to freeze it, store it in a freezer safe airtight container in the freezer for up to a month. Thaw in the fridge overnight.

        How long to soak steel cut oats before cooking?

        Steel cut oats should soak for at least 6 hours, but 8–9 hours (or overnight) is ideal for the best texture.

        What is the ideal ratio of steel cut oats to water for overnight Irish oats?

        The ideal ratio for this recipe is 1 cup of steel cut oats to 2 cups of water (or milk).

        How long do overnight steel cut oats last in the fridge?

        When stored in an airtight container or tightly sealed jar, your oatmeal will stay fresh for up to 5 days.

        More Make-Ahead Breakfast Recipes

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make this Overnight Steel Cut Oatmeal recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Steel cut overnight oats in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Overnight Steel Cut Oats Recipe

        Learn how to make Overnight Steel Cut Oats. With only 10 minutes hands on time, it is so easy to enjoy a bowl of warm and creamy steel cut oatmeal without having to wait and stir in front of the stove top.
        Course Breakfast
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 5 minutes
        Resting time 8 hours
        Total Time 8 hours 10 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 221kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Steel Cut Oats

        For The Toppings (Optional)

        • 1/4 cup fresh fruit or more
        • 1/4 cup nuts
        • 1 teaspoon chia seeds*

        Instructions

        • Bring water to a boil in a medium saucepan (with a lid).
        • Turn the heat off and add the steel cut oats and salt. Stir to combine. Put the lid on.
        • Let it sit on the kitchen counter overnight, at least 6 to 8 hours.
        • Next morning, put it back on the stove and heat over medium heat. Stir with a wooden spoon to prevent it from sticking. It will thicken as it cooks.
        • For a creamy texture pour in the almond milk, while stirring constantly.
        • Cook until its consistency and texture reaches to your liking. Feel free to add in more milk if you like it to be thinner. 
        • Ladle into bowls, top them off with your favorite toppings, and serve while still warm. Alternatively, you can bring it to room temperature, divide it amongst 4 mason jars, add the toppings and store in the fridge for upt o 5 days for an easy grab and go breakfast.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 3 to 3 1/2 cups of steel cut oatmeal, ideal for four servings. The nutrition facts below are per serving and do not include the toppings.
        • Soaking liquid: I prefer to use water for soaking as I think it is lighter. However, you can use an equal amount of regular or dairy-free milk if you prefer. 
        • Optional add ins and toppings: If you prefer your oatmeal sweeter, you can drizzle it with honey (or maple syrup) right before serving. Additionally, you can get creative with toppings and add ins. Anything you have on hand from fresh fruit to nuts to nut butters to chocolate chips would all be great additions.
        • No cook method: I found that a quick reheating in the morning produces the creamiest steel cut oatmeal. However, if you prefer a quicker option, you can enjoy these as no cook overnight steel cut oats. Give them a stir and serve right away with your favorite toppings.
        • Storage: Leftovers can be placed in an airtight container (or mason jars sealed tightly) and kept in the fridge for up to 5 days.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 221kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 194mg | Potassium: 67mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 45IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 67mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/overnight-steel-cut-oats/feed/ 45
        Pickled Turnips Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-turnips/ https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-turnips/#comments Fri, 24 Jan 2025 17:23:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79897 If you’re a fan of classic Middle Eastern dishes like chicken shawarma, pita wraps, or chicken kabobs, you’ve likely seen…]]>

        If you’re a fan of classic Middle Eastern dishes like chicken shawarma, pita wraps, or chicken kabobs, you’ve likely seen them served with these pink turnip pickles. Their bold and zesty bite makes them the ideal accompaniment to the region’s spicy, rich, and savory dishes, adding texture, color, and a distinctive flavor.

        While they’re a staple in Lebanese cuisine (and therefore mostly referred to as Lebanese Turnip Pickles), they’ve also become widely enjoyed in neighboring countries, finding a place in their cuisines much like other popular Mediterranean condiments like hummus and tzatziki sauce.

        Pink pickled turnips in a glass jar.

        Ingredients and Substitutions

        This Mediterranean pickled turnips recipe uses just a few basic pantry-friendly ingredients you already have. But if you are missing one or two, below is everything you need to know about the ingredients:

        • Hot water: We need hot water to dissolve the salt and sugar. There is no need to boil water; hot tap water works just fine.
        • White distilled vinegar: Use distilled white vinegar for the most natural and authentic taste. However, while it is not traditional, you can use apple cider vinegar for a more fruity and sweet taste or white wine vinegar for a milder, slightly more delicate flavor. 
        • Sugar: A small amount of sugar balances the tanginess of the vinegar with a touch of sweetness. You can use both granulated and cane sugar when making these Arabic pickled turnips.
        • Kosher salt: We used kosher salt since home cooks widely use it daily. However, pickling salt and sea salt can also be used. We do not recommend table salt as it contains iodine, which can produce bitter-tasting pickled pink pickles.
        • Turnips: We used the purple skin white turnips, which are widely available in grocery stores. Peeling is optional, but we recommend cutting them into uniform batons to ensure even pickling. While it is not traditional, Japanese hakurei turnips (aka Tokyo turnips) can also be used in this recipe. They are smaller and have a milder (less bitter) flavor than white radishes.
        • Beet: Any color of beet can be used, but red beets are used for the signature pink color. 
        • Fresh Garlic: While optional, a clove of fresh garlic infuses the brine with a savory flavor. Use a large clove of garlic or two small ones.
        • Bay leaves: A small bay leaf gives the pickling brine an herbal note that enhances the flavor of the turnip pickles, but it is optional.
        • Whole black peppercorns: We added a small amount of black peppercorns to provide a hint of spice and complexity to the overall flavor.
        • Optional add-ins: If preferred, other flavorings, such as a few leaves of fresh herbs (such as dill, parsley, and thyme) and a pinch of red pepper flakes, can be added.

        How to Make Pickled Turnips?

        Pickling turnips at home requires only 10 minutes of hands-on time. The method we are using is usually referred to as “refrigerator pickles,” as we use a quick vinegar-based brine instead of canning using a heat-processing method used in other pickle recipes for a longer shelf life.

        Once it is assembled and the jar is sealed, all that’s left to do is to wait a few days for the most vibrant and flavorful Lebanese pickled turnips. Here are the steps:

        A collage of images showing how to pickle turnips.
        1. Prepare the quick brine: In a large measuring cup, combine the hot water, vinegar, sugar, and kosher salt. Add sugar and salt and whisk until they are completely dissolved.
        2. Layer the vegetables: In a clean 32-ounce glass jar with a wide mouth, start layering the turnips, beets, and garlic. Add a handful of turnips first, followed by a few beet pieces and a garlic clove. Repeat this process until the jar is nearly full.
        3. Add the spices: Add the bay leaf and sprinkle the peppercorns over the top.
        4. Pour the brine: Carefully pour the prepared vinegar mixture over the vegetables, making sure that everything is completely submerged,  but there is still an inch of space left on top.
        Two photos side by side showing Lebanese turnip pickles before and after they are pickled.
        1. Seal and cool: Seal it with the lid and let it cool to room temperature. At this point, you can let it sit on the counter or transfer it to the refrigerator.
        2. Let time do its magic: For the best flavor, let the pickles sit in the fridge for at least three days. However, keep in mind that the magic really happens after five to seven days when the flavors fully develop.

        FAQs

        How to cut turnips for pickling?

        To cut turnips for pickling, start by slicing the top and the bottom. Use a vegetable peeler to peel the turnip. Cut the now-peeled turnip in half and then cut it into ½-inch slices. Stack the slices and cut them into ½-inch wide strips, creating baton-like pieces.

        How long are pickled turnips good for?

        As long as they are kept in the fridge in a tightly sealed jar, they will last for upto 1 month.

        How To Store Pickled Turnips?

        The best way to store pickled turnips is in a tightly sealed jar kept in the refrigerator. They will stay fresh and flavorful for up to a month, making them a convenient condiment you can use any time.

        How To Serve Them?

        These Middle Eastern pickled turnips are a wonderfully versatile condiment that can add a flavorful kick to many dishes. Below are a few serving suggestions:

        • Shawarma: Whether you’re serving a chicken shawarma platter, beef shawarma wrap in pita bread, or falafel wrap, these pickled pink turnips are the ultimate condiment to complement the bold spices and rich flavors of this classic Middle Eastern dish.
        • Rice Bowls: Use these Lebanese pickles as a topping for rice bowls, like my Homemade Cava Bowl or Shawarma Chicken Bowl, for a tangy crunch that pairs beautifully with roasted vegetables, seasoned rice, and your favorite protein.
        • Mezze Platter: Serve them along with other classic Mediterranean condiments like Baba Ganoush, Muhammara, and Hummus.
        • Salads: Top off any of your favorite Mediterranean salads to add a touch of tangy flavor and a satisfying crunch.

        Expert Tips

        While the process of pickling turnips is a relatively straightforward one, we wanted to include a few helpful tips to make sure you’ll succeed on your first try:

        • Wash the root vegetables well: Rinse turnips and beets under cold water to ensure they are dirt-free. While you can pickle them with the skin on, I prefer to peel them before pickling to ensure that the brine penetrates easily and the pickles have a cleaner taste.
        • Slice the vegetables evenly: Make sure the turnips and beets are cut into uniform pieces (about ½-inch batons) so they pickle evenly. Uneven cuts may result in some pieces being softer or crunchier than others.
        • Start with a clean jar: There is no need to sterilize the jar, but we recommend that your jar is thoroughly cleaned and dried before use. If you don’t have a 32-ounce jar, two 16-ounce glass jars also work.
        • Don’t overfill the jar: It is okay to pack the root vegetables tightly, but it is best to leave about an inch of room at the top of the jar. We do want the turnips and the beets to be fully submerged in the liquid, but leaving a small room at the top will allow the brine to circulate properly.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make this pink pickled turnips recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Pickled turnips in a jar with some placed on a fork.
        Print

        Pickled Turnips Recipe

        A Middle Eastern staple, pink pickled turnips are a tangy and crunchy condiment served with wraps, sandwiches, grilled meats, and as a part of mezze spreads.
        Course Condiment
        Cuisine Middle Eastern
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Resting time 5 days
        Total Time 5 days 10 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 44kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 cup hot water (tab water would work)
        • 1 cup white distilled vinegar
        • 1 tablespoon granulated sugar or cane sugar
        • 2 tablespoons kosher salt
        • 1 lb turnips peeled and cut into ½-inch batons
        • 1 red beet small one, peeled and cut into ½-inch batons
        • 1 garlic clove cut in half
        • 1 bay leaf
        • ¼ teaspoon black peppercorns

        Instructions

        • Add 1 cup of hot water, 1 cup of white distilled vinegar, 1 tablespoon sugar, and 2 tablespoons of kosher salt in a large measuring cup. Stir until the sugar is fully dissolved.*
        • In the mason jar, layer the turnips, beets, and garlic evenly: start with a handful of turnips, then a few pieces of beet, followed by a piece of garlic.
        • Repeat the same pattern until the jar is filled, ensuring the ingredients are distributed evenly throughout the jar. Gently push down to ensure they fit into the jar.
        • Add the bay leaf and peppercorns.
        • Pour the prepared vinegar mixture over the vegetables, ensuring everything is submerged but there is still an inch of space left on top.
        • Seal the jar tightly and let it cool to room temperature before storing it in the refrigerator.
        • Refrigerate for at least 3 days before serving to allow the flavors to meld. For best results, wait 5-7 days.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 2 to 2 1/2 cups of turnip pickles that is ideal for 6 servings as a condiment. The nutrition information below is per serving.
        • * Alternatively, you can place cold water in a small saucepan, add the vinegar, sugar, and salt, and cook, stirring occasionally, until the sugar and salt are fully dissolved.
        • Storage: While the color of the brine turns fully pink after 3 days, we highly recommend waiting at least 5 days for the flavors to develop. Be sure to store it in the fridge once the jar is opened. As long as it is tightly sealed and kept in the refrigerator, these Mediterranean pickled turnips will stay fresh for up to a month.
        • In the fridge or on the counter? We’ve seen versions of this pickled turnip recipe where some home cooks leave the jar on the kitchen counter (or a dark place like the pantry) for a few days before transferring it to the refrigerator, while others keep it in the fridge the entire time. We tried both ways and found that there were no differences in taste.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 44kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.1g | Saturated Fat: 0.02g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 2390mg | Potassium: 195mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 7IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 32mg | Iron: 0.4mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-turnips/feed/ 2
        Beef Barley Soup Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/beef-barley-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/beef-barley-soup/#comments Wed, 15 Jan 2025 18:42:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79780 Ingredients for Beef Barley Soup While you can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, here…]]>

        Why This Version Succeeds Where Other Recipes Fall Short

        Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

        A big pot of beef soup on the stove is one of the coziest things during the colder months, and beef and barley soup is a true classic.

        The problem is that many versions end up with mushy barley, dry beef, or a soup that’s either too thick or a little bland.

        Over the last few years, I’ve made it my mission to develop a recipe that avoids those exact issues. After many tests, I am here with my version of the best beef and barley soup. Here are the reasons why:

        • Chuck roast stays tender during a long simmer. I cut a whole chuck roast myself (instead of buying precut stew meat made up of odds and ends of leftover cuts), so the pieces cook evenly, stay juicy, and taste consistent throughout the soup.
        • Barley is added later (after the meat is browned and veggies cooked) to prevent it from turning mushy. It gets just enough time to cook through while keeping a nice texture.
        • A splash of apple cider vinegar keeps the soup from tasting bland. It balances the richness of the beef and the earthiness of the barley.
        • Simmering with the lid slightly ajar helps control thickness. Keeping the lid ajar lets excess moisture escape slowly so the soup thickens naturally without becoming gluey or overly dense.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Ingredients for Beef Barley Soup

        While you can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, here are a few helpful notes to guide you as you prepare the soup and make it your own.

        Top-down view of Beef Barley Soup ingredients in small bowls, including cubed chuck roast, pearl barley, diced carrots, celery, onion, and fresh thyme on a blue tiled surface.

        Choosing The Right Meat

        Chuck roast: Chuck roast is my go-to cut for beef barley soup because it is well-suited for longer cooking times. Cut from the shoulder, it contains plenty of connective tissue that slowly breaks down as the soup simmers, resulting in fall-apart tender, rich bites of beef. 

        Wouldn’t it be better (and more time-saving) to buy already-cut stew meat instead? It might seem easier to buy pre-cut stew meat, and yes, it does save you a few minutes.

        But I still like to cut my own because most store-bought stew meat is usually a mix of different cuts that cook at different times. Some pieces turn tender while others stay tough.

        Starting with one cut, like chuck roast, and cutting it into ½-inch cubes yourself helps everything cook evenly and stay tender.

        Vegetable oil: You can use olive oil or any neutral oil, such as avocado oil, to sear the meat. The goal is to use an oil with a higher smoke point so the beef browns properly without burning.

        For the Soup + Tips on Buying Barley

        Pearl barley: When shopping for barley, be sure to choose pearl barley rather than hulled barley. Pearl barley differs in that its outer bran layer is removed, allowing it to cook more quickly and develop a tender, slightly chewy texture that works especially well in soups and stews. 

        Hulled barley can be used, but it takes much longer to cook.

        Vegetables: We are using chopped onion, carrots, and celery, the classic combination of veggies that pretty much any meat soup recipe like this uses. As you are chopping them, take your time to cut them into even pieces so they cook evenly.

        Beef broth: You can use homemade beef stock or buy it from the store. If you choose to use store-bought, get low-sodium beef broth so you can easily control the salt level in your soup.

        Selecting Your Broth: For the richest flavor, I recommend choosing a beef broth that lists real beef bones or beef stock as the first ingredient rather than “beef base” or artificial flavorings.

        I tested this recipe with Kettle & Fire, and it worked beautifully.

        Alternatively, you can use chicken stock. I have also tested this recipe with my homemade chicken stock, and while the color was slightly lighter, the soup was still delicious and satisfying.

        Red wine: A medium-bodied red wine, such as Pinot Noir or Merlot, enhances the soup’s subtle, earthy flavor.

        Can I make this soup without alcohol? Yes, for an alcohol-free barley beef soup recipe, you can substitute an equal amount of beef broth for wine.

        Diced tomatoes: I use one 14-ounce can of diced tomatoes (unsalted) to add just a hint of acidity and subtle sweetness to the soup without overpowering it.

        Worcestershire sauce: This classic seasoning adds a subtle umami depth to the soup. Its savory, slightly tangy notes help balance the richness of the beef.

        Fresh herbs: I use a few sprigs of fresh thyme, tied together with kitchen twine so they are easy to remove before serving. I also add a handful of fresh chopped parsley at the end for a vibrant finish. You can use dried herbs in a pinch, but I would use no more than a teaspoon of dried thyme as a substitute.

        Apple cider vinegar (optional): While optional, a splash of an acidic ingredient, such as vinegar or lemon juice, is my secret move to take this beef and barley soup from good to great. It adds a nice tang that helps balance the rich flavors of the beef and earthy flavors of all the veggies in the soup.

        How to Make Beef Barley Soup (Step-by-Step)

        This homemade beef barley soup comes together in one pot, making it both simple to prepare and easy to clean up. I highly recommend having all your ingredients ready before you start. Here is how I make it:

        A collage showing aromatics being sautéed with tomato paste, deglazing the pot with red wine, and adding diced tomatoes and beef back into the broth.

        Step 1 – Prepare the beef: Using a sharp knife, cut the meat into ½-inch cubes. You can cut them larger (about 1-inch cubes) if you prefer more stew-sized meat in your soup. It is a personal preference. 

        Then, pat the beef really well with paper towels on all sides so it browns instead of steaming, which is what gives you that deep, rich base in the soup.  Once it’s dry, season all sides with salt and pepper so every piece is properly seasoned from the start.

        Step 2 – Sear the meat: Heat the oil in a large Dutch oven (at least 5.5 quarts) over medium-high heat until it shimmers. Add the beef in an even layer. Since we’re using a large Dutch oven with a rather large surface area and the beef is cut into small pieces, we can add all the meat at once. 

        Spread it out in an even layer as much as possible. Let it cook undisturbed for a minute or two before stirring, which gives it a chance to brown, which is imperative for building that rich meat flavor that this soup is known for.

        But wait, there is so much liquid in the pan? During my recipe testing, I quickly found out that at this stage, the meat releases some of its juices as it cooks, and that’s okay.

        As you let it cook and stir, some of it cooks off, and the meat starts to brown. The key is to continue stirring every few minutes so all sides get a chance to brown. It takes about 6-10 minutes (depending on your meat), so be patient.

        Also, keep in mind that they will shrink as they cook.

        Once done, transfer the now-seared beef to a plate and cover it with foil to keep it warm. Do not wash the pot!

        Step 3 – Cook the vegetables: Using the same large pot, add the diced onion, sliced carrots, and sliced celery. Cook them over medium-high heat, stirring frequently, for about 10 minutes, or until they soften and start to release their natural sweetness.

        Pro Tip: I usually don’t add extra oil at this stage since chuck roast is well-marbled and leaves enough fat in the pot to cook the vegetables. That said, if the pot looks dry, feel free to add a tablespoon of olive oil to help them sauté evenly.

        A collage of images showing how to cook the vegetables and make the broth for this Dutch oven beef barley soup recipe.

        Step 4 – Add the aromatics: Add the minced garlic and sauté for about 30 seconds, just until fragrant. Keep an eye on it, as garlic can burn quickly. Stir in the tomato paste, salt, and black pepper and cook, stirring constantly, for about 1 minute.

        Step 5 – Deglaze the pot: Pour in the red wine, then use a wooden spoon to gently scrape up the browned bits from the bottom of the pot. Those bits hold a lot of flavor, and the wine helps lift them while adding depth to the soup. 

        Let it simmer for a minute or two, so some of the alcohol cooks off and further concentrates before we move on to the next part.

        Step 6 – Add the broth: Return the seared beef to the pot along with any juices collected on the plate (those juices are pure flavor, so don’t skip them). Add the beef broth, diced tomatoes, and the thyme sprigs tied together with kitchen twine.

        Give everything a good stir, then reduce the heat to medium-low. Let the soup simmer, partially covered, for 30–45 minutes, allowing the beef to slowly tenderize while the flavors come together.

        Step 7 – Add barley and finish cooking: Stir in the pearl barley and Worcestershire sauce, and let it simmer until the barley is tender, about 45-55 minutes. 

        You’ll notice the barley absorbs liquid as it goes, so check on the soup and give it a stir about every 15 minutes to prevent it from sticking to the bottom. The barley is ready when it’s tender but still has a slight bite.

        Step 8 – Season and serve: Remove the thyme bundle and stir in a splash of apple cider vinegar. Give it a taste and adjust the seasoning as needed, then finish with a sprinkle of fresh parsley and serve while hot.

        A cozy close-up of a bowl of Beef Barley Soup garnished with parsley, served with crusty sourdough bread and a glass of red wine.

        Expert Tips for the Best Beef Barley Soup Recipe

        Making beef barley soup doesn’t have to be complicated, but a few small details can make a big difference in the final result. These are the tips I rely on every time to make sure the soup turns out just right:

        Keep an eye on the consistency: As the soup simmers and the barley cooks, you might notice the liquid reducing quite a bit. This is completely normal. I usually keep the lid slightly ajar to minimize evaporation. You can also move the pot to the simmer burner (or to the smallest heat source on your stove top) and/or add more water or broth as needed. 

        Add warm broth, not cold: If you need to thin the soup while it’s cooking or reheating, use warm water or warm beef broth. Adding cold liquid can slow down the cooking process and affect the overall texture.

        Check the barley packaging: While pearl barley typically takes about 45-55 minutes to cook, different brands can vary slightly. It’s always a good idea to check the package and use the texture as your guide; the barley should be tender but still have a bit of bite.

        Taste at the end: The flavors concentrate as the soup cooks, so it’s best to do your final seasoning right before serving. A quick taste at the end lets you adjust salt or add a splash of acid if needed.

        Beef barley vegetable soup in a Dutch oven with a ladle full of soup.
        Print

        Beef Barley Soup Recipe

        Warm yourself from the inside out with this foolproof, one-pot Beef Barley Soup recipe! Meticulously tested to ensure tender beef and perfectly cooked barley, it's a rich, satisfying comfort meal you can count on. Never mushy or bland.
        Course Soup
        Cuisine American
        Diet Kosher
        Prep Time 30 minutes
        Cook Time 1 hour 50 minutes
        Total Time 2 hours 20 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 462kcal

        Equipment

        Ingredients

        For The Meat:

        • 2 lbs chuck roast
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • 2 tablespoons vegetable oil such as olive oil or avocado oil

        For The Soup:

        • 1 onion 340g/3 cups, roughly chopped
        • 3 carrots 180g/1 ½ cups, peeled and sliced thinly
        • 2 stalks celery about 1 cup, sliced thinly
        • 4 garlic cloves finely minced
        • 3 tablespoons tomato paste
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • ½ cup red wine
        • 7 cups beef broth plus more as needed
        • 1 14- ounce can diced tomatoes
        • 3-4 sprigs fresh thyme tied with kitchen twine
        • 1 cup pearl barley
        • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
        • 2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar optional
        • ½ cup fresh parsley roughly chopped plus more for garnish

        Instructions

        • Using a sharp chef’s knife, cut 2 lbs of chuck roast into ½-inch cubes. Pat them dry using a sheet of paper towel.
        • Season the cubed beef with 1 teaspoon kosher salt and ½ teaspoon of black pepper on all sides. Set aside.
        • Heat two tablespoons of olive oil in the Dutch oven over medium-high heat until it shimmers.
        • Add the beef cubes and brown them on all sides for about 6-7 minutes, about a minute or two per side. Transfer them onto a plate, cover it with aluminum foil, and set it aside. Do not wash the pot.
        • Add 3 cups chopped onion, 1 ½ cups of carrots, and 1 cup celery to the pot and cook on medium-high heat, until softened, stirring frequently, for about 10 minutes.
        • Add the 4 minced cloves of garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
        • Add 3 tablespoons of tomato paste and cook, stirring constantly for about a minute or so. Season with 1 teaspoon of kosher salt and ½ teaspoon of black pepper.
        • Stir in ½ cup of red wine and scrape any brown “bits” at the bottom of the pot using a wooden spoon.
        • Add the browned beef (with all the juices), 7 cups of beef broth, one 14-ounce can of diced tomatoes, and 3-4 sprigs of fresh thyme. Give it a stir, place the lid ajar, and bring it to a boil. Then, turn the heat down to medium-low and let it simmer for 30-45 minutes or until your meat is fully cooked and tender.
        • Next, stir in 1 cup pearl barley and 1 tablespoon of Worcestershire sauce.
        • Let it simmer, with the lid ajar, for 45-55 minutes, keeping a close eye on it and stirring occasionally, until the pearl barley is tender but has a slight “bite”.
        • Turn the heat off, remove the thyme bundle, and stir in 2 tablespoons of apple cider vinegar if using. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
        • Add ½ cup of chopped fresh parsley and serve right away.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 11-12 cups of soup, enough to serve 6 adults. The nutritional information below is per serving.
        • Consistency of the soup: As the soup simmers, you’ll see some of the liquid evaporate, resulting in a thicker soup. I recommend keeping the lid slightly ajar while simmering to prevent too much liquid from evaporating. This helps maintain the soup’s rich flavor without diluting it. Still, you can add more broth or water for a thinner consistency. However, be sure to add warm liquid to keep the soup’s temperature consistent.
        • Storage and freezing: You can store the leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4-5 days and in the freezer for up to 3 months. Just be sure to bring it to room temperature before storing it. Thaw it overnight in the fridge.
        • Reheating: Transfer the leftovers to a saucepan, add a cup (more or less) of water or broth, and warm on medium heat, stirring regularly.
        • Slow cooker beef and barley soup: If you’re looking for a more hands-off approach, or want to make it ahead, you can cook this soup in your crockpot. The process is similar but with a few key differences. Simply:
          • Sear the meat, set it aside, sauté the vegetables, and cook the wine while scraping up those browned bits. 
          • Store the meat and veggies separately in airtight containers in the fridge overnight. 
          • In the morning, transfer everything to a slow cooker, along with the rest of the ingredients. Cook it on low for 7-9 hours or high for 4-5 hours until the meat is tender. If you can, stir it a few times during the process. 
          • When done, stir in the apple cider vinegar and parsley right before serving.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 462kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 37g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 104mg | Sodium: 2069mg | Potassium: 1051mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 5700IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 89mg | Iron: 6mg

        Storage, Freezing, and Reheating

        One of the great things about this vegetable beef barley soup is that it tastes even better the next day as the flavors develop and meld, so you can make a big pot as a part of your meal plan and enjoy it throughout the week. 

        Here is how I do it:

        Storing leftovers: Let the soup cool to room temperature, then transfer it to an airtight container. It will keep well in the refrigerator for 4-5 days. As it sits, the soup will thicken since the barley continues to absorb liquid. When reheating, add a splash of broth (or water) to thin it out.

        Freezing: Once it comes to room temperature, transfer it to freezer-safe containers and freeze for up to 3 months. When you’re ready to enjoy it, thaw it overnight in the fridge for the best texture and flavor.

        Reheating: To reheat, transfer the soup to a saucepan and warm it over medium heat, stirring occasionally. Since it thickens as it sits, add a small amount (no more than ¼ cup) of water or beef broth as needed to loosen it.

        Pro-Tip for Meal Prepping: If you are making this as a part of your meal prep, I recommend slightly undercooking the barley (about 5 minutes). This way, it will reach perfect tenderness during reheating.

        Variations & Substitutions

        What I love most about this recipe for beef barley soup is that it is easily adaptable with whatever you have on hand. Here are some substitution and variation ideas to make this soup your own:

        Other types of beef: When it comes to meat choice, you have options:

        • Other cuts: Instead of chuck roast, you can also use boneless short ribs, beef shank, or brisket, all of which work for slow cooking.
        • Beef stew meat: You can use pre-cut packaged beef stew meat from most grocery stores, but be sure to check that it’s sourced from the same cut, such as chuck roast, rather than a mix of random trimmings from different leftover cuts. Doing so ensures that you end up with evenly cooked meat with a similar texture and taste.
        • Ground beef: You can use ground beef for a quick and easy beef barley soup. This version, often called hamburger barley soup, allows you to skip the longer cooking time required for tougher cuts. Simply sauté the ground beef (hamburger meat), then cook the vegetables in the same pot.
        • Already cooked (leftover) beef: If you have some leftover roast, prime rib, or beef tenderloin, you can cut them into bite-sized chunks and use them in this veggie beef barley soup. Since the leftover meat is already cooked, you can skip sautéing it at the beginning and add it when you add the broth.

        Additional vegetables: Parsnips, turnips, mushrooms, peas, green beans, or leeks would all be delicious additions. And if you want to sneak in some greens, you can stir in a handful of baby spinach or even kale at the very end. 

        Spices: While I kept the recipe simple with salt and pepper, you can enhance the flavors and bring warmth to your soup by adding a small amount of ground cumin, ground coriander, sweet paprika, and a few bay leaves. These additions add depth to the broth without overpowering the overall flavor.

        FAQs

        Why did my barley turn mushy?

        Barley usually turns mushy if it’s added too early or cooked for too long. Pearl barley needs time to soften, but it should still have a slight bite. To avoid this, add it after the beef has had time to tenderize and keep an eye on the simmer so it doesn’t overcook.

        What is the best cut of beef for beef barley soup?

        The best cuts of beef for beef barley soup are those that can handle longer cooking times, such as chuck roast, short ribs, beef shank, or brisket. These cuts contain connective tissue that breaks down as the soup simmers.

        How long does it take to cook barley in soup?

        If you are using pearl barley, it typically takes about 45-55 minutes to cook in soup. The exact timing can vary slightly by brand, so it’s best to check the packaging for exact timing and use its texture as your guide.

        Do you cook barley before adding it to soup?

        No, there’s no need to cook the barley beforehand. Pearl barley is added uncooked and cooks directly in the soup, absorbing flavor from the broth as it softens.

        Can I use quick-cooking barley?

        Yes, but keep in mind that quick-cooking barley has a much shorter cooking time, usually 10-15 minutes, since it’s partially pre-steamed. If using it, add it toward the end of cooking to prevent it from becoming overly soft or mushy.

        What to Serve With Beef Barley Soup

        While this barley vegetable beef soup is excellent on its own, here are my favorite pairings:

        Other Beef Soup Recipes You Might Like

        It is no secret that beef soups and stews are the classic winter comfort food. If you are in need of more inspiration, here are a few more recipes:

        • Freezer favorite: If you love slow cooker meals, try my Crockpot Vegetable Beef Soup. It’s a set-it-and-forget-it version of classic vegetable beef soup, made with similar ingredients. It’s great for meal prep and freezes well.
        • An Old-Fashion Classic: For a quicker but similar soup, try my Vegetable Beef Soup is an old-fashioned favorite that comes together in under an hour. 
        • Weekend Meal Prep Favorite: If you’re in the mood for a cozy weekend supper, my Eggplant Beef Stew is a slow-simmered stew with pull-apart beef and a rich sauce.

        This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/beef-barley-soup/feed/ 4
        Marry Me Chicken Pasta https://foolproofliving.com/marry-me-chicken-pasta/ https://foolproofliving.com/marry-me-chicken-pasta/#respond Tue, 14 Jan 2025 15:17:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79710 Our top chicken pasta recipes include classics such as Chicken Stroganoff and Chicken Bolognese, and this recipe for Marry Me…]]>

        Our top chicken pasta recipes include classics such as Chicken Stroganoff and Chicken Bolognese, and this recipe for Marry Me Chicken Pasta is so simple, yet hearty, that it’s sure to become a timeless favorite among their ranks. 

        The elevated finished dish, as you’ll see in the photos below, is also a worthy chicken pasta recipe for your next date night. With Valentine’s Day around the corner, be sure to bookmark this for your romantic menu.

        One pan marry me chicken recipe with pasta garnished with basil leaves in a pan.

        Ingredients and Substitutions

        In this Marry Me Chicken Pasta recipe, you’ll be combining the ingredients from the main Marry Me Chicken recipe with your choice of pasta, and a luscious Marry Me pasta sauce. These basic ingredients can be easily sourced ahead of time from any mainstream grocer, allowing you to throw this impressive meal together in around 30 minutes on any busy weeknight. 

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Pasta: We found that the best pasta for Marry Me Chicken is penne pasta, as we feel it holds the sauce well. However, any short pasta, such as Fusilli or Cavatappi, would also work. For those looking for a gluten free version of this recipe, feel free to substitute in the GF pasta of your choice. 
        • Chicken: While boneless skinless chicken breasts are ideal for this Marry Me Chicken with pasta, you can also use boneless skinless chicken thighs if that’s your preference. Whichever one you choose, cut them into bite-sized pieces to make the cooking process faster.
        • All purpose flour: In this recipe, the flour is used as a thickening agent. If you are following a gluten free diet, any 1 to 1 gluten free flour will be an acceptable substitution.
        • Oil: Our Marry Me Chicken recipe with pasta uses olive oil and feels like a pleasantly decadent dish. If you’d like to swap in avocado oil, it will feel a little lighter and change the flavor slightly. And if you’d like to up the creaminess factor, swapping the olive oil out with ghee or unsalted butter will do the trick.
        • Garlic: In our recipe testing, we found that fresh garlic was best for the deep flavor we were seeking, but in a pinch, garlic powder can be used. 
        • Chicken Stock: In general, in our chicken and pasta recipes, we prefer to use homemade chicken stock, as the savory notes can’t be beat. However, you’re also welcome to use storebought chicken broth—just be sure you grab the low-sodium version. 
        • Heavy cream: Heavy cream makes the pasta sauce gorgeously creamy, however, if you’re looking for a lighter version of this dish, you may swap in half and half. Keep in mind, though, that the sauce made with half and half won’t be as thick as the heavy cream version.
        • Sundried tomatoes: This is the essential ingredient to bring out that irresistible umami flavor of this chicken and pasta recipe. You will get the most flavorful punch by using sundried tomatoes in oil (sold in jars)—just be sure to drain the oil before you use them in the recipe. While you can find sundried tomatoes in stores that are not in oil (usually sold in bags), we do not recommend you use them for this dish.
        • Parmesan cheese: I prefer to buy a block of Parmesan cheese and grate it myself to ensure maximum freshness and nutty, buttery flavors. However, you can also purchase pre-grated versions to cut down on prep time.
        • Herbs: We use a combination of both dried and fresh herbs for this recipe. Dried oregano and dried thyme are used in our Marry Me pasta sauce, and fresh basil is used to finish off the end dish at serving time. If you’d prefer to not use the individual dried herbs, you’re welcome to substitute in an Italian seasoning blend. 
        • Lemon juice: You may be tempted to skip the final step of squeezing in a little fresh lemon juice (watch those seeds!), but it’s actually a key ingredient. Fresh lemon juice really brightens up the flavors in our Marry Me pasta—you may even want to add a little more, depending on your taste.
        • Seasonings: Beyond the fresh and dried herbs, this recipe calls for a simple combo of Kosher salt and finely ground black pepper. Don’t mind a little heat? Then sprinkle in some red pepper flakes for an added pop.

        How to Make Marry Me Chicken Pasta?

        Weeknight dinners don’t have to be boring thanks to this easy pasta recipe. If you’re organized, this meal comes together in 30 minutes, so you can enjoy a plated dish that didn’t come from the freezer! Here are a few simple steps to accomplish this meal:

        A collage of images showing how to cook pasta and prepare chicken for this recipe.
        1. Cook your pasta of choice. In a large pot, bring your salted water to a boil, add the pasta of your choosing, and cook it al dente, according to the package directions. Don’t forget to reserve ½ cup of pasta water for the pasta sauce. Then, drain the noodles and set them aside.  
        2. Prepare your chicken breasts. While the pasta is cooking, take out your uncooked chicken breasts and pat them dry. Cut each breast into 1-inch cubes, then place them in a bowl with Kosher salt, black pepper, and all-purpose flour. Toss the chicken cubes thoroughly to ensure they are well-coated in the mixture. 
        A group of images showing how to cook chicken and make the sauce for marry me pasta.
        1. Saute the chicken. In a large skillet over medium-high heat, warm up 2 tablespoons of olive oil until it shimmers. Then, shaking off any excess flour, drop your chicken cubes into the skillet, being careful not to crowd them together. Depending on the size of your skillet, you may need to saute your chicken in two separate batches. Cook the chicken until the pieces are all lightly browned—about 2-3 minutes per side. Once they are cooked through, transfer them onto a plate, cover with foil, and set them aside.
        2. Prepare your Marry Me pasta sauce. In the same skillet, turn the heat down to medium-low, allowing it to cool off slightly. Then, add the remaining one tablespoon of olive oil and minced garlic. Saute, stirring constantly, for 30 seconds, or until fragrant. Slowly pour in the chicken stock and heavy cream, mix together evenly, then add in the sundried tomatoes. Allow the liquid to come to a low boil and simmer it for 2-3 minutes.
        Person showing how to make the marry me chicken with pasta in a collage of photos.
        1. Add in the chicken. Take the still-warm chicken and add it to the sauce. You will want to simmer it for 3-4 minutes, stirring frequently, or until slightly thickened. At this point, it should still be quite thin, but if yours gets too thick, add in some reserved pasta water, one tablespoon at a time, until it reaches your desired consistency. Next, stir in the Parmesan cheese, oregano, thyme, lemon juice, and red pepper flakes, if using. Take a taste, and adjust the seasoning to your liking.
        2. Add the cooked pasta to the sauce. Once combined, allow the full dish to simmer for 3-4 minutes to ensure it is thoroughly warmed.
        3. Serve: Distribute the pasta evenly into bowls, topping with some additional Parmesan and torn fresh basil leaves.

        Leftovers, Storage, and Reheating

        While this easy Marry Me Chicken Pasta recipe doesn’t tend to have leftovers (in our experience, it was a second-helping kind of dish!), it’s simple enough to store any leftover pasta to enjoy again later. 

        • Storage: Before storing your Marry Me Chicken and Pasta, allow it to cool down and come to room temperature. You can then store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.
        • Reheating: You can reheat the leftovers on the stovetop in a saucepan. You may need to add in a little water to loosen up the pasta sauce as it heats. 
        • Freezing: Sorry—this isn’t a dish that freezes well. We do not recommend that you freeze it.

        Variations

        This recipe, due to being composed of simple ingredients and instructions, lends itself easily to some alterations, depending on your dietary needs and/or preferences. Here are the most common ingredient swaps and additions that we came across as we were working on this recipe:

        • A Dairy-Free Marry Me Chicken and Pasta: If you’d like to remove the dairy in this recipe, you can use cashew cream in place of the heavy cream, vegan butter in place of the unsalted butter/ghee, and nutritional yeast in place of the Parmesan cheese. Please just note that in making these changes, while it will be dairy-free, you will ultimately be changing the flavor profile of the finished dish. 
        • Marry Me Chicken with Rotisserie Chicken: If you’re looking to streamline your cooking time, rotisserie chicken pasta definitely saves you some stovetop minutes. While the consistency of the dish will be altered, you can swap in the same quantity of rotisserie chicken in place of the chicken breast cubes. 
        • A High Protein Chicken Pasta: Looking to up the overall protein content of your dinner? You can easily make a high protein pasta sauce by using cottage cheese in a similar fashion to how we did in our Cottage Cheese Mac and Cheese. Note: just be careful not to overcook your pasta sauce if you’re adding cottage cheese. 
        • Add a handful of Spinach: Adding more greens is one way to make a bit healthier. You can do this by tossing a handful of spinach leaves into the finished pasta. The spinach also adds a pleasing pop of color alongside the fresh basil leaves. 
        Marry me chicken pasta in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

        What to Serve it With?

        Beyond a crisp glass of white wine (because that’s our top pairing!), you can also pair this chicken and penne pasta recipe with a couple of side dish options to round out your dinner table. Here are our top suggestions:

        • A green salad: For a salad to complement the big flavors of this pasta dinner, we recommend keeping it simple with either our Spring Mix Salad or our Classic Caesar Salad
        • A vegetable side dish: The veggie we love most to savor alongside this iconic pasta is definitely asparagus. Try either our Sauteed Asparagus and Mushrooms or our Oven Baked Asparagus
        • Garlic bread: What is Marry Me Pasta without garlic bread? Truly, we think they shouldn’t be allowed to exist without one another! Our go-to is our Air Fryer Garlic Bread, which you can make while the pasta is cooking in 15 minutes!

        FAQs

        What is Marry Me Pasta Chicken?

        Marry Me Chicken a viral recipe that gained massive popularity on social media, especially on TikTok. It features tender chicken simmered in a rich and creamy sun-dried tomato sauce. The name comes from the sauce’s indulgent flavor, said to be so irresistible it could inspire a marriage proposal. As Marry Me Chicken became a sensation, creative variations emerged, including this version with pasta. Over time, it has become so popular that many now refer to it as “Engagement Chicken Pasta.”

        What type of pasta should I use?

        We found that the best pasta for Marry Me Chicken is penne pasta, as we feel it holds the creamy sauce well. However, any short pasta such as Fusilli, rigatoni or Cavatappi would also work. For those looking for a gluten free version of this recipe, feel free to substitute in the GF pasta of your choice.

        Other Pasta Recipes You Might Like

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make your own Marry Me Chicken Pasta following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Marry me chicken pasta in a bowl garnished with basil leaves.
        Print

        Marry Me Chicken Pasta Recipe

        This Marry Me Chicken Pasta is not only the latest viral sensation on social media but also a modern-day comfort food classic—a 30-minute weeknight chicken and pasta dinner so irresistible it might just get you a proposal.
        Course Weeknight Dinner
        Cuisine American
        Diet Halal
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 20 minutes
        Total Time 30 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 581kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Pasta:

        • 8 ounces pasta a short pasta like penne, fusilli or Cavatappi would all work
        • Water & salt

        For The Chicken:

        • 1 ½ lbs chicken breasts boneless and skinless
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon black pepper
        • 4 tablespoons all-purpose flour
        • 3 tablespoons olive oil divided
        • 3 cloves garlic minced finely or pressed
        • 2 cups chicken stock or storebought low sodium chicken broth
        • 1 cup heavy cream or half and half*
        • ½ cup sun-dried tomatoes packed in oil, drained, and finely chopped
        • cup Parmesan cheese plus more for topping
        • ¼ teaspoon dried oregano
        • ¼ teaspoon dried thyme
        • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
        • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
        • 1 tablespoon fresh basil torn

        Instructions

        • Bring a large pot of salted water to a boil, add 8 ounces of dried pasta, and cook al dente according to the package directions. Reserve ½ cup of pasta water and drain. Set it aside.
        • While the pasta is cooking, pat dry and cut 1 ½ pounds chicken breasts into 1-inch cubes. Place it in a bowl with 1 teaspoon kosher salt, ½ teaspoon of black pepper, and 4 tablespoons of all-purpose flour. Toss to coat thoroughly.
        • Heat 2 tablespoons of olive oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat until it shimmers.
        • Place the prepared chicken, shaking off any excess flour, in the skillet, making sure not to overcrowd. You may need to saute in two batches. Cook until lightly golden browned, for 2-3 minutes per side, adjusting the heat as necessary to ensure they are evenly browned and register 165 degrees F when inserted with a meat thermometer. Transfer them onto a plate, cover with foil, and set aside.
        • Add the remaining one tablespoon of olive oil and 3 cloves of minced garlic in the now-empty skillet over medium heat. Saute, stirring constantly, for 30 seconds until fragrant.
        • Slowly pour 2 cups of chicken stock and 1 cup of heavy cream, then add ½ cup of sun-dried tomatoes. Stir, scraping the brown bits at the bottom of the skillet with a wooden spoon. Bring it to a boil and let it simmer for 2-3 minutes.
        • Add the reserved chicken and simmer for 3-4 minutes, stirring frequently until slightly thickened. At this point, it should still be quite thin, but if yours gets too thick, add a splash of the reserved pasta water (or one tablespoon at a time) until it reaches your desired consistency.
        • Stir in ⅔ cup Parmesan cheese, ¼ teaspoon of oregano, ¼ teaspoon of thyme, 2 tablespoons of lemon juice, and ½ teaspoon of red pepper flakes, if using. Taste and adjust seasoning.
        • Add the cooked pasta to the sauce and toss well to combine. Let it simmer for 3-4 minutes to warm thoroughly.
        • When serving, sprinkle with additional Parmesan and torn basil.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 7 cups of chicken and pasta, ideal for 6 normal servings or 4 generous servings. Below nutritional values are per serving of 6 servings.
        • Do not skip browning the chicken: This step of the recipe is imperative when it comes to depth of flavor. If you don’t brown your chicken as you saute it (which can happen from either crowding the chicken pieces in the skillet or not cooking them long enough), then you will miss out on the rich, caramelized crust that adds both flavor to the chicken and a savory base for the sauce.
        • The chicken must be cooked thoroughly in the sauteeing stage: When it comes time to add the chicken to the sauce, it must be cooked all the way through, as it will only be simmering in the pasta sauce for a short time before serving.
        • Don’t forget to reserve some pasta water before draining your noodles: We use the reserved pasta water to even out the consistency of the sauce as needed. You may not need all of it but it is good to have it as a backup. And I love this tip on an easy way to reserve pasta water.
        • Give the final dish a taste before serving: You may find yourself wanting to add a little bit more lemon juice than this recipe calls for, which adds a zesty brightness most people love.
        • Storing and reheating leftovers: Bring the pasta to room temperature and then store it in an airtight container for up to 3 days. To reheat, place the pasta and chicken in a large skillet and add a splash of chicken stock or water if the sauce is too thick.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 581kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 37g | Fat: 30g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 127mg | Sodium: 852mg | Potassium: 804mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 896IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 186mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/marry-me-chicken-pasta/feed/ 0